HAY  UNLOADING  TOOLS 
DAIRY  BARN  EQUIPMENT 
HORSE  STABLE  EQUIPMENT 
LITTER  AND  FEED  CARRIERS 
BARN  DOOR  HANGERS 
SPECIALTIES 


■  ■ 
■ 

■  • 


^"H^TABLISHEO 


rAIRFICLD 
IOWA 

1 


3   9090   013   407   230 


GENERAL  INDEX 

Complete  Index,  Pages  222-224 

Hay  Tools 

Hay  Carriers  and  Fittines 

Power  Hoists 

Hay  Forks,  Slings,  and  iiitings 

Pulleys  and  Other  Sfsecialties . 

Barn  and  Garage  Door  Hangers  and  Specialties 

Dairy  Bam  Equipment 

Cow  Stalls  and  Fittings 

Mangers  and  Manger  Divisions 

Stanchions  .  . 

Water  Bowls 

Steel  Pens,  Gates,  Hinges,  Etc. 

Miscellaneous  Supplies  and  Information.  ...... 

Cupolas,  Ventilators,  and  Window  Ventilators. 

Manger  and  Gutter  Drains 

Paint 


PAGES 

8-32 
33-35 
38-48 
49-56 
59-67 


76-97 

98-106 

109-114 

115-119 

120-133 

134-139 

141-146 

147.  148,  and  212 

149 


Litter,  Feed,  and  Other  Carriers 

General    Information  

Litter  Carriers 

Feed  Carriers  and  Trucks  

Harness  Carriers 

Merchandise  Carrlcr^ 

Milk  Can  Carriers.  . 

Track  and  Fittings,  Swinging  Cranes,  Switches,  Etc. 

Arrangements  for  Barns 

Horse  Stable  Equipment 

Hay  Rack 

Feed  Boxes 

Watering  Troughs    

Horse  Stalls,  Partitions,  and  Supplies 

Harness  Hooks  and  Salt  Roll  Holders 

Cess  Pools 

Higbie  Oats  Cleaner  


Barn  Plans 

General  Information. 
Specimen  Plans.  ... 


152-155 
157-166 
167-171 
171 
172 
173-174 
175-190 
191-193 


198-203 

204-206 

207-208 

208-211 

210 

212 

213 


217-220 
220-221 


Vine 


\hu:. 


1^  y-i  '^^st^ru^  •?""" 


t  t 
t  \ 


LOUDEN 

HAY  UNLOADING  TOOLS 

BARN   AND  GARAGE  DOOR  HANGERS 

DAIRY  BARN   EQUIPMENT 

LITTER,  FEED,  MERCHANDISE.  AND  MILK  CAN 

CARRIERS 
HORSE  STABLE  EQUIPMENT 
CUPOLAS,   VENTILATORS,   DRAINS,   ETC. 
HARDWARE  SPECIALTIES 


GENERAL  CATALOG  No.   46 

Issued  November,  1916 

The  largest  factory  in  the  world  devoted  exclusively  to  the 
manufacture  of  Barn  and  Stable  Equipment. 


MAIN    FACTORY,   FAIRFIELD.    IOWA 


BRANCH  HOUSES 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company,  St.  Paul.  Minnesota 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company.  Albany.   New  York 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company.   Chicago,    Illinois 

The  Harbison  Manufacturing  Company.   Kansas  City,  Missouri 


CANADIAN    FACTORY 
HK  The  Louden  M 


achinerv  Cornpany.  Guelph,  Ontario 

BSfeTdlM  OFFICE  ffi 

32  SO.  MAnKET  FT.  § 

H.E  WRIGHT  £i  SONS  " 


THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 

PAID   UP  CAPITAL,  $750,000  ESTABLISHED  1867 

FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 


/  k 


COPYRIGHT  1916  BY  THE   LOUDEN    MACHINERY   COMPANY 


INTRODUCTORY 


The  num- 
ber of  barns 
equipped  with 
Louden  prod- 
ucts runs  into 
the  millions 
and  these 
goods  have 
been  sold  — 
not  as  a  result 
of  advertising, 
not  as  a  result 
of  a  superior 
selling  organi- 
zation, but  as 
a  result  of  the 
sterling  worth 
of  Louden 
quality. 


We  are 
/  determined  that 

every  Louden  product 

will    go    out    in    working 

order;  that  it  will  work  easily; 

that   it    will    work    safely; 

that  it  will  fulfill  every 

claim  made  for  it 

and  more. 


During  its  entire   history 
—  nearly     fifty     years  — 
this    compeiny   has    held    to 
■'this   determination,   and  this 
determination   Is  the  founda- 
tion of  its  success. 


LOUDEN   HAY   TOOLS 

PAGE 

Hay  Carriers   (Fork) 8-13 

Hay  Carriers   (Sling) 14-24 

Round  Barn  Equipment 25-27 

Cable  Ricker 28-29 

Track  and  Track   Fittings 30-32 

Power  Hoist : 33-35 

Balance  Grapple  Forks 38-39 

Harpoon  Forks  .  .       40 

Slings  and  Sling  Fittings 41  -48 

Pulleys 49-51 

Specialties 52-56 


frnTTTTTl  nTtnTTnTrmTTTflTl 


I — t  EH  irr> 


)^!T3  gii  n  0  ?^.^i:  ^Ti>  { i  i.^i  =>>  r^y  <>in^m( 


CHOOSING  HAY  UNLOADING  TOOLS 

While  a  majority  of  our  friends  who  receive  this  catalog  are 
posted  on  the  subject  of  Hay  Unloading  Tools,  we  believe  that 
a  few  words,  outlining  in  a  general  way  the  different  points  to 
be  considered  in  choosing  an  outfit,  will  be  of  interest  to  many. 

Kinds  of  Barns 

Barns  may  be  divided  into  four  classes: 

1.  The  Single  End  Hoist  Barn.  In  this  type  of  barn  the 
hay  is  taken  into  the  mow  at  one  end  of  the  barn. 

2.  The  Double  End  Hoist  Barn.  Hay  may  be  taken  into 
this  type  of  barn  from  either  end  of  the  building. 

3.  The  Center  Drive  Barn.  This  type  has  a  driveway  run- 
ning through  the  center;  hay  is  lifted  up  to  the  necessary  height 
and  carried  into  the  left  or  right  mow  as  desired. 

4.  The  Round  Barn.  This  type  of  barn  requires  special 
equipment.     (See  pages  25  to  27.) 

Forks  or  Slings? 

After  classifying  your  barn,  the  next  point  to  consider  is  whether  you 
want  to  use  a  Fork  or  Slings  to  remove  the  hay  from  the  wagon.  This 
must  be  very  largely  a  matter  of  individual  choice,  and  a  careful  reading 
of  the  descriptions  of  Forks,  pages  38  to  40  and  of  Slings,  pages  41 
to  44,  will  help  in  the  solution.  Either  Forks  or  Slings  can  be  used  in 
any  type  of  barn. 

The  Carrier  For  You 

A  Hay  Carrier  is  classified  either  as  a  Fork  Carrier  or  Sling  Carrier. 
A  Fork  Carrier  can.  by  using  our  Self-Locking  Sling  Pulleys  (see  page 
46)  be  used  with  Slings  and  a  Sling  Carrier  can  handle  Forks,  if  a  Fork 
Clevis  (see  page  45)  is  attached. 

We  recommend,  that,  insofar  as  possible,  a  choice  be  made  between 
Forks  and  Slings  before  choosing  a  Carrier. 

The  following  short  descriptions  give  an  idea  of  the  different  carriers: 
Junior  Fork  Carrier 

There  are  more  Louden  Junior  Fork  Carriers  in  use  than  any  other 
carrier  made.  They  meet  all  conditions  and  requirements 
for  a  fork  carrier.  They  can  be  used  in  either  center- 
drive  or  end-hoist  barn.  They  can  be  depended  upon 
to  do   their  work  at  all  times  and  under  all  reasonable 

conditions.     (See  page  8.) 
Senior  Fork  Carrier 

This  is  the  strongest  Fork 
Carrier  made  and  is  easy  to 
operate.  It  can  be  used  in 
Center  Drive  or  End  Hoist 
barns  and  is  specially  recom- 
mended where  heavy  loads 
are  to  be  handled.  (See 
page   10.) 


Page  Six 


Carry-All  Sling  Carrier 

This  Carrier  is  the  heaviest,  strongest  and  easiest  working 
SHng  Carrier  manufactured.  It  is  adapted  for  use  in  any 
style  barn.  For  a  large  barn  where  there  are  large  loads  of 
hay  to  be  mowed  the  Carry-All  will  handle  half-ton  loads 
safely,  and  will  not  cut  or  break  the  fibre  of  the  rope,  and  will 
give  satisfaction  under  all  reasonable  conditions.  (See  page!  4.) 
Iowa  Sling  Carrier 

The   Iowa  Sling  carrier   is  adapted  for  use  in   any  style 
barn.      It  is  not  so  heavily  built  as  the  Carry -All,  but  for  all 
general  work  it  gives  entire  satisfaction.     (See  page  18.) 
Cross  Draft  Carrier 

This  carrier  can  be  used  in  any  type  of  barn  but  is  recom- 
mended for  barns  where  hay  is  taken  up  in  the  center.  The 
carrier  works  on  a  new  principle — the  horse  walks  away  from  the 
barn  to  elevate  the  load  and  turns  back  toward  the  barn  to  pull 
the  load  back  into  the  mow.  This  saves  one  half  the  travel  of 
the  horse.  (See  page  22.) 
Round  Barn  Outfit 

The  special   Round    Barn   Carrier  operated  with    a   Louden 
Triple  Drum  Power  Hoist  makes  the  most  satisfactory  outfit  for 
unloading  and  mowing  hay  in  a  round  barn.     (See  page  25.) 
Carriers  for  Wood  Track 

Louden  Junior  Fork  Carrier  is  recommended  for  use  with  forks. 
(See  page  13.)  Reversible  Sling  Carrier  is  recommended  for  use 
with  slings.     (See  page  21.) 


Louden  Specialties 


^i 


mi 


Louden  Barn  Door  Hangers.  Our  line  of  barn  door  hangers  is  well 
known,  and  our  leading  hanger,  the  Bird-Proof,  is  the  most  popular  made. 
(Page  60.) 

Louden 's  Cable  Ricker  (pages  28-29)  is  an  eco- 
nomical and  satisfactory  method  of  stacking  hay  in 
the  field. 

A  Louden  Power  Hoist  (pages  33-35)  will  save 
money  during  the  haying  season  if  there  is  a  gasoline 
engine  or  other  power  on  the  farm,  and  will  be  of  great 
service  whenever  a  "powerful  lift"  is  needed. 

Louden's   Hoisting   Singletree   is  a  great    con- 
venience wherever  a  horse  is  used  for 
hoisting.     (See  page  53.) 

Louden  Hay  Rack  Clamps  enable 
any  farmer  to  build  a  strong,  service- 
able hay  rack  with  little  expense.  (See 
page  54.) 

Louden  Combination  Rack  Irons  lu  ^r  /      "^ 

are  useful  when  an  all-purpose  rack  is  \     jW\\4ii'yA 

desired,   as  it  is  easily  changed  for  hay, 
wood,  or  hogs.      (See  page  55.) 

Louden  Offset  Hinge  is  the  best 
solution  for  the  gable-end  mow  door. 
(See  page  53.) 


^ 


%i 


M 


I'/' 


'M 


'W.  vi 


Page  Seven 


Louden  Junior  Hay  Fork  Carrier  —  Fig.  430 


Illustration  shows  our 
patent  End  Stop  for  Lou- 
den Double  Bead  Steel 
Track.  Two  are  furnished 
with  the  Junior  Carrier. 


Fig.  7  is  an  end  view  of  the  upper 
frame  of  all  the  Louden  Swivel  Carriers, 
showing  the  great  strength.  The  sides 
carrying  the  wheels  are  joined  together 
by  two  end  pieces.  These  end  pieces 
have  upwardly  extending  arms  (as  seen 
in  cut),  which  are  secured  to  the  sides 
above  while  a  bolt  holds  them  together 
at  the  bottom,  thus  making  the  strong- 
est possible  frame,  and  at  the  same 
time  saving  space,  as  all  the  space  taken 
up  below  the  track  is  the  thickness 
of  the  end  pieces.  This  is  a  distinc- 
tive Louden  feature. 

The  wheel  arms  are  thoroughly 
braced  and  will  never  spread  with  a 
heavy  load  and  let  the  carrier  off  the 
track. 


Trip  Block  Furnished 
Part  of  Carrier 


Specifications 


For   use    in    any   style   of    barn.      Especially 
desirable  in  barns  where   hay   is  unloaded 
from   a   center   driveway  or  at  both  ends. 
Built  to  operate  on  Louden  Double  Bead 
steel  track. 
Diameter   of  rope  wheels,  4  inches. 
Diameter  of  track  wheels  on  tread.  2 '4  inches. 
Bearing  surface   on   track  (distance  between   front  and   rear 

axles),   1032  inches.     Total  length  of  carrier,  13  inches. 
Carries  fork  within  12  inches  of  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  track  wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity,  1 ,000  pounds. 
Three-quarter     inch     best    manilla     rope    is    recommended. 

Thirteen-sixteenths  or  Jg  inch  rope  can  be  used. 
One  fork  pulley,  I  trip  block,  2  end  stop  blocks,  I   rope  swivel 
furnished  with  carrier.     Weight,  25  pounds. 


The  Louden  Junior  is  the  most  popular  and  the  biggest  selling 
hay  fork  carrier.  Its  construction  is  simple  and  compact.  More  of 
these  carriers  are  in  use  in  the  barns  of  the  country  than  any  other 
hay  carrier  made.  For  twenty  years  it  has  been  standard  and  doing 
its  work  safely  and  surely  on  thousands  of  farms. 

This  carrier  is  suitable  for  use  in  any  style  of  barn.  Where  hay 
is  taken  up  at  the  end  of  building  it  works  easily  and  smoothly  as  a 
one-way  carrier.  It  is  a  "Louden  swivel"  carrier  and  where  hay  is 
unloaded  from  a  center  driveway  it  is  quickly  reversed.  The  pulley 
through  which  draft  rope  works  in  the  end  of  the  barn  is  changed 
from  one  end  to  the  other.  The  carrier  can  then  be  swiveled  around 
by  giving  a  swinging  pull  on  the  draft  rope.  No  climbing  up  to  the 
carrier  necessary.  In  long  barns  where  hay  is  unloaded  at  both  ends 
the  carrier  can  be  changed  from  one  end  to  the  other  without  changing 
a  rope  or  pulley. 

The  carrier  has  the  wide  flaring  mouth  and  the  round  topped  fork 
pulley  that  have  made  all  Louden  Carriers  popular  with  hay  growers. 
The  fork  pulley  never  fails  to  enter  the  carrier  at  the  proper  time. 
It  is  not  necessary  that  the  wagon  should  be  directly  under  the  carrier. 
The  wide  flaring  mouth  receives  the  round  fork  pulley  no  matter  from 
what  angle  the  fork  is  drawn  and  regardless  of  swinging  load  or 
twisting  ropes.  No  failure,  no  backing  up  of  the  team  to  make  the 
second  trial. 


Page  Eight 


'-^      7     ^  ss  "T*  -^^^  ^a.  1 .  I  ^  i — t  e:  r^ 


Louden  Junior  Hay  Fork  Carrier — Continued 

The  end  of  the  rope  is  fastened  in  the  carrier  with  our  patent  swivel 
iron  knot.  (See  S  in  Fig.  C  430.)  The  rope  is  placed  through  the  tilting 
eye  S  and  the  iron  knot,  resting  loosely  on  the  eye,  makes  a  complete, 
durable  and  simple  swivel.  This  swivel  allows  all  twists  and  kinks 
of  the  rope  to  escape.  Many  times  when  a  new  rope  is  first  put  in  a 
carrier  it  will  twist  and  kink  so  badly  as  to  cause  delays  and 
annoyance.  Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  take  the  rope  out  and  turn 
it  end  for  end.  The  swivel  iron  knot  with  the  Louden  Junior  Carrier 
does  away  with  all  that  trouble. 

The  rope  wheels  in  the  carrier  and  in  the  fork  pulley  are  4  inches  in 
diameter  and  are  heavy  and  strong.  The  wheels  revolve  on  heavy 
malleable  iron  bushings  recessed  into  the  main  frame.  The  short, 
heavy  bushings  sustain  the  weight  of  the  load  while  the  bolt  passing 
through  holds  the  frame  of  the  carrier  together.  The  wheels  are 
perfectly  formed  and  so  smooth  that  the  wear  on  the  rope  is  reduced 
to  a  minimum. 

The  hook  in  the  fork  pulley  which  carries  the  fork  is  attached  to  the 
pulley  by  a  strong  swivel  connection.  Even  should  the  load  of  hay 
turn  around  while  being  raised  the  ropes  will  not  twist.  This  swivel 
hook  in  the  fork  pulley  makes  it  practical  to  set  the  fork  in  the  hay 
at  any  angle  desired. 

The  grappling  hooks  in  the  carrier  take  a  deep  grip  in  the  frame  of 
the  fork  pulley.     They  grip  the  pulley  securely,  at  the  same  time  per- 
mitting the  pulley  to  swing  freely.     This  is  of  immense  advantage  as  it  permits  filling  the  mow  up  to  the 
track  with  no  risk  of  breaking  the  carrier  or  the  pulley.     This  also  makes  it  practical  to  take  a  large  fork- 
ful through  a  small  door  or  over  high  beams. 

The  wheel  arms  are  short  and  thick,  reinforced  by  wide  ribs.  The  wheels  are  equally  strong;  they  are 
2^  inches  in  diameter  on  tread.  The  web  is  directly  under  the  tread  where  the  support  is  most  needed. 
The  track  wheels  operate  on  large,  heavy  axles,  three-fourths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  flared  at  the  shoulders 
to  give  additional  strength  and  prevent  the  wheels  from  binding  on  the  frame.  The  track  wheels  and 
axles  are  milled  true,  insuring  little  wear.  On  special  orders  this  carrier  can  be  equipped  with  eight  wheels 
and  oscillating  engine  trucks,  same  as  shown  with  Iowa  Sling  Carrier,  Fig.  821,  page  18.  A  small  charge 
will  be  made  for  this  change. 


Cut  A  Fig.  C,  430 

The  end  of  the     Showing  the  wide 
rope  is  fastened  in        flaring  mouth, 
the    Carrier    with 

our  patent  swivel  iron  knot,  as  shown 
in  A.  The  rope  is  placed  through  the 
tilting  eye,  S  (Fig.  C  430),  and  the 
iron  knot  resting  loosely  thereon  makes 
a  complete,  durable  and  simple  swivel, 
which  lets  all  kink  and  twist  out  of 
the  rope. 


shown  on  opposite  page. 


would  be  when  pulling  hay  into  a.  well  filled  mow. 


Fig.  830 

Illustration   Fig.  830 

shows   the   Junior    Fork 

Carrier  with    oscillating 

\\^   ^  J         engine  trucks  to  give  a  wider  bearing 

^~^  J  on  the  surface  of  the  track.    Otherwise 

this   carrier    is    the   same   as   Fig.    430 

In  illustration  the  fork  pulley  is  swung  back  as  it 


CutW 


Cut  B 


Cut  W  represents  Louden's  improved 
Track  Wheel,  having  the  web  of  the  wheel 
directly  under  the  tread  T,  which  makes 
it  strong  and  durable.  It  also  shows  the 
wheel  axles,  which  are  of  solid  malleable 
iron  (more  durable  than  steel)  rounded  out 
where  it  joins  the  carrier  frame,  so  as  to 
give  it  the  greatest  possible  strength. 

Cut  B  shows  how  the  large  rope  wheels 
are  protected  by  shields  which  makes  it 
easy  on  the  rope.  The  bearings  are  chilled 
and  run  on  large  malleable  bushings  recessed 
into  the  sides  and  bolted  through.  This 
feature  is  patented. 


Page  Nine 


^■^Yl "  '^^^*-  ^-^^  ■  *  *- *  ^  '^I^ 


Specifications 

For  use  in  any- 
type  or  size  of 
barn. 

Built  regularly 
to  operate  on 
Louden  Dou- 
ble Bead  Steel 
Track.  (See 
pages  30  and 
31  for  Track 
and  Track 
Fittings.) 

Furnished    regular 
manilla  rope. 


Louden  Senior  Hay  Fork  Carrier — Fig.  1100 


with     Rope     Wheel 


Furnished  on  special  order  with  Rope  Wheel 

for  wire  draft  rope. 
Diameter  of  Rope  Wheel  in  carrier  and  Fork 

pulley,  7  inches. 
Rope  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels  on  treads  3  inches. 
Track  wheels  are  not  roller  bearing. 
Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between 

front  and  rear  axles),  15  inches. 
Total  length  of  carrier,  2 1  inches. 
Carries  fork  within  20  inches  of  the  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  Track  Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron 
Safe  working  capacity,   1,500  pounds. 
5^-inch  best  manilla  rope  is  recommended. 
Any  size  rope  from  i*4-inch  to  I  inch  may  be  used. 
One  fork  Pulley,  I   Trip  Block,  and  two  End  Stop 

Blocks  are  furnished  with  the  carrier. 
Weight,  34  pounds. 


Fig.  523 
Illustration  shows  our  patent 
End    Stop   for    Louden    Double 
Bead  Steel  Track.     Two  are  fur- 
nished with  the  Senior  Carrier. 


1100 


Fig.  1123 

Trip  Block  Furnished  as 

Part  of  Carrier 


Each  year  there  are  more  and  more  large 
barns  built,  and  each  year  there  is  an 
increasing  demand  and  necessity  for  extra 
heavy  hay-unloading  outfits.  Hay  growers 
have  been  asking  for  a  heavy  fork  carrier, 
a  carrier  that  could  be  used  for  handling  a 
hay  fork  in  the  usual  way,  and  that  could 
also  be  depended  upon  to  handle  extremely 
heavy  loads  when  necessary.  The  needs 
and  call  for  such  a  hay  carrier  led  us  to 
design  and  put  on  market  the  Senior  Hay 
Fork  Carrier. 

This  Carrier  throughout  is  built  strong 
and  sturdy  and  in  addition,  its  mechanism  is  simple  and  sure.      It  has  the  wide  flaring  mouth  and  the 
round-topped  fork  pulley  that  has  been  a  distinctive  feature  of  Louden   Carriers  for  years.     The  fork 
pulley  will  never  fail  to  register  from  whatever  angle  it  may  be  drawn,  and  the  grappling  hooks  take  a 
deep,  sure  grip  on  the  pulley. 

The  Louden  Senior  is  a  "Louden  swivel"  frame  carrier  and  is  equally  efficient  whether  hay  is  taken 
up  from  the  end  of  the  barn  or  from  a  center  driveway.  When  used  in  a  barn  having  a  center  drive, 
when  one  end  of  the  barn  is  filled  the  pulley  at  the  end  of  the  barn,  through  which  the  draft  rope  passes, 
is  carried  over  and  hung  in  place  at  the  other  end.  When  this  is  done  a  swinging  jerk  on  the  draft 
rope  from  the  wagon  or  ground  will  reverse  the  carrier  and  it  will  be  ready  to  work  in  the  other  end. 

The  Louden  Senior  has  been  tested  in  our  factory  under  loads  weighing  2,300  pounds.  Operated 
vigorously  under  this  load,  the  carrier  showed  no  signs  of  weakness.  We  guarantee  that  it  will  handle 
a  load  weighing  1 ,500  lbs.  continuously  and  with  safety. 

The  bearing  surface  on  the  track — the  distance  from  center  to  center  between  front  and  rear  track 
wheels — is  I  5  inches.  This  wide  bearing  distributes  the  load  along  a  greater  surface,  making  it  possible 
for  the  track  to  carry  large  loads  without  strain. 

The  Rope  Wheels  of  the  Senior  carrier  are  roller  bearing.  This  large  wheel  (7  inches  in  diameter), 
together  with  the  roller  bearing,  7-inch  fork  pulley,  reduces  friction  to  a  minimum,  and  makes  the  hoisting 
of  the  load  from  wagon  much  easier  than  with  an  ordinary  carrier. 


Page  Ten 


^^iT?1*J"'^'^-*>^^^*>'**-*^'^*^ 


Louden  Senior   Hay  Fork   Carrier — Continued 


Showing  Swinging  Fork  Pulley 

Loads  can  be  dragged  over  beams  or  other  obstructions 

without  endangering  carrier. 


The  Track  Wheels  are  3  inches  in  diameter 
on  tread,  are  heavy  and  of  great  strength.  They 
are  not  roller  bearing,  as  it  takes  very  little  power 
to  pull  the  carrier  along  the  track  compared  with 
the  power  necessary  to  hoist  the  load.  Too  great 
an  ease  of  propelment  would  be  a  disadvantage 
through  the  tendency  of  the  carrier  to  "run  away" 
when  leaving  the  trip  block. 

With  the  Louden  Senior  Track  Carrier  the 
barn  can  be  filled  clear  to  the  track.  There  is 
no  danger  of  breaking  any  part  of  the  carrier,  as 
the  load  can  swing  back  directly  behind  carrier 
when  necessary.  This  feature  of  the  Swinging 
Fork  Pulley  also  makes  it  easy  to  pull  large  fork- 
fuls through  small  doors  and  over  high  beams 
without  danger  of  breakage. 

The  round  top  of  the  Fork  Pulley  and  the 
wide  flaring  mouth  of  the  carrier  is  a  big  advan- 
tage in  busy  hay  time.    The  wagon  can  be  unloaded 


from  any  angle,  not  having  to  stand  directly  under  the  carrier,  and  the  Fork  Pulley  will  always  register 
true.  This  feature,  together  with  our  patented  rope  swivel,  which  lets  the  kinks  and  twists  run  out  of 
the  rope  while  forkful  is  being  hoisted,  saves  a  world  of  time  that  is  worth  many  dollars  in  haytime. 

The  rope  swivel  on  this  carrier  is  built  into  the  carrier  and  is  a  big  improvement  over  any  rope  swivel 
before  offered.     You  simply  pass  the  end  of  the  rope  through  the  swivel  and  tie  a  knot  in  the  rope. 

With  a  good,  solid  knot  in  the  end  of  the  rope,  everything  is  sure  to  hold,  and  the  swivel  works  free, 
permitting  the  twist  to  run  out  of  the  rope. 

The  Locking  Dog  has  a  new,  distinctive  feature,  in  that  it  is  pivoted  by  means  of  a  bolt.  The  Locking 
Dog  may  be  easily  taken  out  of  the  carrier  without  disturbing  any  of  the  other  parts. 

The  Rope  Wheel  in  the  Fork  pulley  is  7  inches  in  diameter.  The  outer  pulley  casing  is  extra  strong  as 
it  has  four  ribbed  spokes  and  the  outer  circumference  has  two  heavy  ribs  running  parallel  with  each  other. 
These,  together  with  the  cross  ribs,  make  an  exceedingly  strong  frame. 

The  carrier  is  built  for  use  with  any 
size  of  rope  5:j-inch  to  1  inch.  We  rec- 
ommend a  3^ -inch  manilla  rope  as  it  is 
easier  to  handle,  and  costs  less  than  a 
larger  rope.  Some  users  prefer.  ^|,  }&,  |f , 
or  I  inch  rope,  and  where  a  large  rope 
is  preferred  the  new  carrier  handles  it 
perfectly. 


Fig.  7  is  an  end  view  of  the  upper  frame  of 
all  the  Louden  Swivel  Carriers,  showing  the 
great  strength.  The  sides  carrying  the  wheels 
are  joined  together  by  two  end  pieces  A.  These 
end  pieces  have  upwardly  extending  arms  (as 
seen  in  cut) ,  which  are  secured  to  the  sides  above 
while  a  bolt  holds  them  together  at  the  bottom, 
thus  making  the  strongest  possible  frame,  and 
at  the  same  time  saving  space,  as  all  the  space 
taken  up  below  the  track  is  the  thickness  of  the 
end  pieces  A. 


The  wheel  arms  are  thoroughly  braced  and 
will  never  spread  with  a  heavy  load  and  let 
the  carrier  off  the  track. 


Fie.  7 


Page  Eleven 


_LL 


A  big  sling  load  goinc  Into  a  barn 
in  Germany.  I.oud>Mi  Hay  T00I3 
'are  used  all  over  the  world. 


Waukesha,  Wisconsin. 
Aug.  11.  1914. 
Louden  Machinery  Company, 
Gentlemen: 

We  harvested  150  acres  of  alfalfa  in  1913 
and  I9I4,  and  are  the  largest  alfalfa  growers 
in  Wisconsin.  Our  engine  hoist,  slings, 
horse  forks,  tracks,  cars,  and  pulleys  are 
all  Louden  hay  tools.  Goods  of  other 
makes  were  replaced  by  Louden  make, 
because  we  found  Louden  goods  to  be 
more  durable  and  convenient. 

Durability  of  haying  machinery  means 
so  much  to  us  as  we  have  so  much  hay  to 
handle.  Good  reliable  machinery  is  very 
important  because  one  has  extra  help 
around,  the  weather  is  warm,  and  hay 
should  be  handled  quickly  and  easily,  and 
tools  should  be  made  to  be  handled  by 
men  conveniently,  thus  saving  time,  labor, 
expense,  and  worry  in  taking  care  of  the 
hay  crop  when  it  is  ready  for  mowing  or 
stacking.  No  one  can  afford  to  spend  the 
time  for  repairs  or  repairing  poorly  con- 
structed or  faulty  in  operation  hay  tools. 
Yours  very  truly, 

SWARTZ  BROS.. 

Per  P.  C.  S. 


1  louden  Grapple  Fork  llftlns  a  ble7 
1(  ad  of    bj\        I .  ii,J.  n  iorks  meet 


TheLOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden  Junior  Hay  Fork  Carrier  for  Wood  Track 

Fig.  441 


Fig.  1127 
Trip  Block 

One  furnished  with 
each  Louden  Junior 
Wood    Track     " 
her. 


Fig.  441      (Capital) 
Specifications 

Operates  on  4x4  wood  track. 

For  use  in  any  style  of  barn. 

Diameter  of  Rope  Wheels  4  inches. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels  3}_l  inches. 

Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between  front  and  rear  axles) 

1251  inches. 
Total  length  of  carrier  16  inches. 
Carries  fork  within  1332  inches  of  the  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  Track  Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity,  1 .000  pounds. 
Three-fourths  inch  rope,  best  manilla  is  recommended, 
ti  or  Jg  inch  rope  can  be  used. 

One  Fork  Pulley.  1   Trip  Block,  1  Rope  Swivel  furnished  with  Carrie 
Weight,  28  pounds. 


In  the  past  4x4  Wood  Tracks  for  hay 
carriers  were  installed  in  a  considerable 
number  of  barns.  This  was  when  wood 
was  cheap  and  steel  high  in  price.  At  the 
present  time  a  wood  hay  track  is  rarely 
placed  in  a  building.  The  steel  tracks  are 
as  cheap  as  wood,  they  occupy  less  room 
and  hay  carriers  work  so  much  easier  and 
smoother  on  the  steel  that  it  is  a  mistake 
to  put  wood  track  in  a  building. 

Where  track  is  already  in  the  building 
or  where  for  some  special  reason  it  is  de- 
sired to  use  a  Wood  Track,  no  better  carrier 
can  be  put  into  service  than  the  Louden 
Junior  Wood  Track  Carrier. 

This  carrier  is  built  exactly  like  the 
Louden  Junior  Fork  Carrier  for  steel  track 
(Fig.  430,  page  8).  except  it  is  built  to 
operate  on  a  4x4  wood  track  instead  of 
on  steel  track. 

The  carrier  is  suitable  for  use  in  any 
style  of  barn.  Where  hay  is  taken  up  at 
the  end  of  building  it  works  easily  and 
smoothly  as  a  One- Way  Carrier.  It  is  a 
Swivel  Frame  Carrier  and  in  barns  having  a 
center  driveway  it  is  easily  and  quickly  re- 
versed to  work  on  either  side. 

The  carrier  has  the  wide  flaring  mouth 
and  the  round  top  fork  pulley  of  all  Louden 
carriers.  The  fork  pulley  never  fails  to 
enter  the  carrier  at  the  proper  time.  The 
wide  flaring  inouth  of  the  carrier  receives 
the  pulley  no  matter  from  what  angle  the 
fork  is  drawn  and  regardless  of  swinging 
load  or  twisting  ropes. 


The  grappling  hooks  in  the  carrier  take  a  deep  grip  in  the  frame  of  the  fork  pulley.  They  grip  the 
pulley  securely,  at  the  same  time  permitting  the  pulley  to  swing  freely.  This  permits  the  mow  to  be  filled 
clear  up  to  the  track  without  danger  of  breaking  the  pulley. 

The  frame  of  the  carrier  is  of  refined  malleable  iron  built  sturdy  and  strong  to  handle  heavy  loads. 
The  members  are  clamped  securely  together  with  bolts;  there  is  no  possibility  of  the  frame  spreading  or 
breaking  under  the  strain  of  heavy  loads. 


Page  Thirteen 


mTnTDmrmrmTmrTTTnii 


Louden  Carry- All  Sling  Carrier     Fig.   1103 


Specifications 

The   heaviest  and 

s  t  ron  gest    Hay 

SHng  Carrier  made 

For  use  in  any  type 

or  size  of  barn. 
Built    to   operate   on 

Louden      Double 

Bead  Steel  Track. 
Diameter  of  Rope  Wheel  in  carrier,  10  inches. 
Diameter  of  Rope  Wheel  in  sling  pulleys,  4  inches 
Rope  Wheel  in  carrier  is  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels  on  tread.  3  inches. 
Track  wheels  are  not  roller  bearing. 
Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between  front  and 

rear  axles),  191  2  inches. 
Total  length  of  carrier,  22 'i  inches. 
Carries  slings  within  26  inches  of  the  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  track  wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity.  2,500  pounds. 
Seven-eighths  inch  best  manilla  rope  is  recommended 
Three-quarter  inch  rope  may  be  used. 
Two  Sling  Pulleys.  1  Trip  Block,  2  End  Stop  Blocks  furn 

with  each  earner. 
Weight.  77  pounds. 

(See  pages  30  and  31  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 


The  Carry-All  Hay  Sling  Carrier,  as  its  name 
implies,  was  built  to  carry  big  loads  of  all  kinds  of 
hay.  The  importance  of  the  hay  crop  and  its 
increasing  value  from  year  to  year  is  resulting  in  a 
larger  acreage  and  more  tons  of  hay  in  all  the  hay- 
growing  regions.  The  necessity  of  being  prepared 
to  handle  the  hay  with  speed  and  safety  when  the 
weather  is  right  and  the  hay  is  right  has  developed 
the  need  for  heavier  equipment. 

In  many  of  the  heavy  hay-growing  sections 
farmers  are  building  larger  barns  and  with  roof 
construction  strong  enough  to  permit  an  entire 
wagon  load  of  hay  to  be  handled  at  a  single  lift. 
With  a  desire  to  furnish  a  carrier  that  would  do 
this  work  in  the  big  hay  barns  and  at  the  same 
time  be  suitable  for  use  in  the  ordinary  farm  barn 
we  designed  the  Carry-All  Sling  Carrier. 

This  carrier  has  been  tested  under  loads  weighing 
3,200  pounds.      It  has  been  tried  with  horse  power, 
engine  power,  and  electric  power.     It  has  been  tried 
out  in  barns  of  all  sizes  and  under  all  kinds  of  conditions.      It  is  already 
barns  and  in  every  test  the  carrier  proved  its  efficiency,  its  strength,  and  its 


Fig.  523 

Illustration  shows  our 
patent  End  Stop  for  Double 
Bead  Steel  Track.  Two  are 
furnished  with  the  Carry-All 
Sling  Carrier. 


Fig.  1103  (Heavy) 

Patent   ^ending 


Fig.  1123 
Trip  Block   for    Carry-All 
Sling    Carrier.      One    is    fur- 
nished   as   a    part    of    each 
carrier. 


making  good  in  hundreds  of 
perfect  working  mechanism. 


Non-Wear  Rope  Lock 


The  Rope  Lock  in  this  carrier  is  positive  and  sure.  There  is  no  chance  for  the  rope  to  slip.  The  lock 
will  not  wear  the  rope  as  it  grips  it  evenly.  The  Rope  Lock  castings  have  a  bearing  of  9  inches  on  the 
rope.  They  conform  to  the  diameter  of  the  Rope  Wheel  and  when  the  Rope  Lock  goes  into  action  engaging 
the  rope  for  a  distance  of  9  inches  and  bending  it  around  the  outside  of  the  Rope  Wheel  the  rope  cannot 
slip.     Handling  a  dead  weight  (steel  pipe)  of  3,200  pounds  the  rope  did  not  slip  the  fraction  of  an  inch. 

The  end  of  the  draft  rope  is  knotted  into  the  cup-shaped  rope  swivel  which  rests  in  the  fulcrum  lever. 
The  fulcrum  le^er  exerts  a  direct  pressure  on  the  rope  lock.  When  carrying  a  load  the  weight  of  the  load 
is  held  on  top  of  the  rope  lock.     The  heavier  the  load  the  more  securely  does  the  lock  hold. 


Page  Fourteen 


William  Louden,  Pioneer  Hay 
Tool  Inventor  and  Manufacturer. 
Is  Popularly  Known  as  ""  The 
Man  Who  Made  High  Barns 
Possible."  Imagine,  if  You 
Can,  Filling  These  Mows  with 
Pitchforks. 


':^ 


^^^^Effi 


Ctoss  Section  View  and  Description  of  Locking 
Mechanism  in  Carry-All  Hay  Sling  Carrier. 

A  portion  of  tlie  frame  is  broken  away  to  show 
the  arrangement  of  the  grip  to  hold  the  hoisting 
rope  and  prevent  the  sling  load  from  dropping  down 
while  the  carrier  is  running  along  the  track. 


Carry-All  Sling  Carrier — Continued 

The  work  of  the  Rope  Lock  is  supplemented  by  a  ratchet  lock  on  the  Rope  Wheel.  When  the  Rope 
Lock  goes  into  action  the  ratchet  lever  drops  into  place  and  prevents  the  Rope  Wheel  from  turnmg 
backward.     This  aids  the  Rope  Lock  and  prevents  wear  on  the  rope. 

Ten-Inch  Roller-Bearing  Rope  Wheel 

The  Rope  Wheel  in  the  Carry-All  Carrier  is  10  inches  in 
diameter  and  is  roller  bearing.  This  is  the  largest  Rope 
Wheel  used  in  any  hay  carrier  and  is  an  important  improve- 
ment. The  large  roller-bearing  wheel  reduces  friction  and 
makes  it  possible  to  lift  heavier  loads  with  less  power. 
Also  the  empty  sling  can  be  brought  back  to  the  wagon 
with  less  effort  and  pulling  on  the  ropes  than  any  other 
sling  carrier. 

The  frame  of  the  carrier  is  of  the  Louden  Swivel  Type. 
The  same  principle  is  used  in  the  swivel  as  in  use  on  all 
our  swivel  carriers.  (See  Fig.  7,  page  II.)  It  will  work 
with  equal  satisfaction  and  efficiency  in  barns  having  a 
center  driveway  or  where  hay  is  taken  up  at  one  end.  In 
center-drive  barns  the  change  from  one  end  to  the  other  is 
easily  and  quickly  made.  The  pulley  in  one  end  of  the 
barn  is  changed  over  to  the  other  end;  the  carrier  can  then 
be  swiveled  around  from  the  barn  floor.  No  climbing  up 
to  the  carrier  necessary. 

The  track  wheels  are  3  inches  in  diameter  on  tread  and 
are  heavy  and  of  great  strength.  There  are  eight  track 
wheels  on  each  carrier  working  on  oscillating  "engine 
trucks".  This  distributes  the  load  evenly  on  the  track 
and  insures  that  every  wheel  is  going  to  run  true  and  carry 
its  share  of  the  load. 

The  sling  pulleys  carry  the  load  at  right  angles  to  the 
track.  This  is  important  as  the  hay  is  delivered  into  the 
mow  just  as  it  comes  from  the  wagon.  When  the  hay  is 
dropped  it  spreads  out  broadly  at  right  angles  to  the  track, 
requiring  less  labor  and  time  to  mow  it  back. 

The  locking  dog  in  the  carrier  has  a  square  catch  which 
engages  the  trip  block  bolted  to  the  track.  The  carrier  is 
held  positively  on  the  trip  while  the  load  is  being  elevated. 
When  the  load  is  pulled  up  and  the  sling  pulleys  strike  the 
trip  stirrup  the  carrier  automatically  releases  from  the  trip, 
the  rope  lock  is  thrown  into  action  holding  the  load  so  it 
cannot  slip  back.  When  the  carrier  leaves  the  trip  it  runs 
easily  and  steadily  and  after  the  hay  is  dropped  in  the  mow 
the  carrier  is  returned  to  the  trip  block  with  scarcely  an 
effort.  (We  recommend  using  a  weight  return  for  returning 
the  empty  carrier.       See  Fig.  529,  page  1 9.) 

The  Louden  Carry-All  Hay  Sling  Carrier,  the  Louden 
Carry-All  Hay  Sling  (see  Fig.  984,  page  42),  and  a  Louden 
Power  Hoist  (page  34),  make  the  best  hay-unloading  outfit 
ever  offered  for  handling  big  loads  of  hay. 


Closing  The 

Hay  Door  With  A 

Sling  Carrier 

When  it  is  desired  to  close  the  hay  mow  door 
with  the  Carry-All.  or  any  similar  sling  carrier,  the 
sling  pulleys  should  be  attached  to  the  door  in  the 
manner  shown  by  Fig.   1302. 

The  door  should  be  lifted  from  about  the  middle 
instead  of  from  a  point  near  the  top;  otherwise  the 
pulleys  will  be  drawn  so  far  to  one  side  that  they 
will  not  release  the  carrier  properly. 

A  short  piece  of  rope,  with  a  loop  at  the  free  end 
to  hook  the  pulleys  into,  should  be  attached  to  the 
doors  by  means  of  an  eye-bolt  or  U-bolt.  1 1  should 
be  long  enough  to  permit  the  sling  pulleys  to  trip 
the  carrier  when  the  door  's  at  an  angle  of  about  45 
degrees.  For  the  Carry-All  Sling  Carrier  about  4 
feet  of  rore  is  required  for  a  10-foot  door,  and  5 
feet  for  a    12-foot  door. 

When  the  carrier  leaves  the  trip  it  is  drawn 
along  the  track  far  enough   to  close  the  door. 


Page  Seventeen 


Louden  Iowa  Sling  Carrier— Fig.  821 


^ 


Fig.  523 

Illustration  shows  our  patent  Ejid 
Stop  for  Double  Bead  Steel  Track. 
Two  are  furnished  with  each  Iowa  Sling 
Carrier. 


Adjustable  Trip.     Fig.  1128 
Illustration  shows  our  patent  Adjust- 
able Trip.     One  is  furnished  with  each 
Iowa  Sling  Carrier. 


Fig.  1123 
Illustration     shows    Trip    Block    for 
Iowa  Sling  Carrier.     One  is  furnished  as 
a  part  of  each  Carrier. 


Fig.  821     (Chariot) 
Specifications 


For  use  in  einy  style  of  bam. 

Built  to  operate  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track. 

Diameter  of  Rope  Wheels  in  carrier  and  sling  pulleys,  4  inches. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels  on  tread,  2 '4  inches. 

Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between  front  and  rear 

axles),  \A14  inches. 
Total  length  of  carrier.  \9}4  inches. 
Carries  slings  within  26  inches  of  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  Track  Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity.  2.000  pounds. 


Rope  Lock  is  adjustable  to  different  size  ropes. 

Three-quarter  inch  best  manilla  rope  is  recommended 

Illustration  shows  carrier  with  Right-angle  Sling  Pulleys 
which  we  recommend. 

Parallel  Sling  Pulleys  (Fig.  649.  page  48)  may  be  used  if  pre- 
ferred. 

Two  Sling  Pulleys,  I  Trip  Block,  1  Trip  Adjuster,  and  2  End 
Stop  Blocks  are  furnished  with  each  carrier. 

Weight,  47  pounds. 

(See  pages  30  and  31  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 


Page  Eighteen 


■■.U.'lJ».i{h.'t 


ELD.  IOWA 


Louden  Iowa  Sling  Carrier — Continued 


For  simplicity  of  design  and  mechanism  and  for  positive,  dependable  action  the  Iowa  SHng  Carrier 
ranks  with  the  foremost.  It  was  designed  for  heavy,  everyday  work  in  the  hay  barn.  It  has  gone  through 
a  dozen  or  more  hay  harvests;  is  doing  satisfactory  service  in  thousands  of  barns,  and  is  pleasing  its  users. 

The  carrier  is  of  the  Louden  swivel  frame  type.  It  can  be 
used  with  perfect  success  in  any  type  of  barn  and  is  particularly 
well  adapted  for  use  in  barns  having  a  center  driveway.  In  center 
drive  barns  the  carrier  can  be  changed  from  one  side  to  the  other 
in  a  minute's  time  and  without  climbing  up  to  the  carrier  or 
pulling  the  ropes  through.  The  pulley  in  the  end  of  the  barn  is 
changed  from  one  end  to  the  other  and  the  carrier  frame  swiveled 
around  on  the  stop  from  the  barn  floor  by  a  swinging  pull  on  the 
ropes. 

The  frame  of  the  carrier  is  of  refined  malleable  iron.  Heavy 
strengthening  webs  are  used  where  strength  is  necessary.  At  all 
points  where  heaviest  strain  is  exerted  castings  are  reinforced  to 
give  needed  strength.  The  mechanism  of  the  carrier  (the  rope 
lock  and  the  latching  dogs  and  parts)  is  extremely  simple.  There 
is  nothing  to  get  out  of  order  and  the  parts  are  all  easily  accessible. 

There  are  eight  track  wheels  on  each  carrier  operating  on 
oscillating  "engine  trucks."  This  distributes  the  weight  of  the 
load  evenly  on  the  track  and  insures  that  every  wheel  will  do  its 
full  share  of  the  work.  The  wheels  are  bored  smooth  and  true 
and  turn  on  ^-inch  milled  axles  and  will  not  bind  or  run  hard. 

The  rope  lock  has  a  long  bearing  surface  on  the  rope.  When 
the  carrier  is  tripped  the  rope  lock  instantly  grips  the  rope  and 
holds  it  firmly.  There  is  no  slipping,  nor  wear  on  the  rope.  The 
rope  lock  is  adjustable  to  different  size  ropes. 

Each  carrier  is  provided  with  an  adjustable  trip.  This  trip  is  placed  on  the  draft  rope  (see  illustration) 
and  is  adjustable  to  different  heights.  By  this  means  the  carrier  may  be  released  and  the  load  carried  into 
the  mow  at  any  height.  Unless,  on  account  of  beams  or  hay  already  in  the  mow,  it  is  not  necessary  to  lift 
the  load  clear  up  to  the  track. 

In  opt  ration,  when  the  sling  pulleys  or  the  adjustable  trip  strikes  the  release  lever,  the  locking  device 
drops  down  and  the  carrier  moves  away  from  the  stop  smoothly  and  steadily.  In  the  same  operation  the 
rope  lock  is  thrown  on  and  holds  the  load  until  the  sling  is  tripped.  When  the  carrier  is  brought  back  to 
the  stop  the  rope  lock  is  released  and  the  weight  of  the  pulleys  and  sling  brings  them  down  to  the  wagon. 

Hay  forks  may  be  used  with  this  carrier  by  using  the  fork  clevis  described  on  page  45,  Fig.  633. 


Fig.  528 

Fig.  528  is  a  sectional  view  showing  the 
locking  mechanism  in  the  Iowa  Shng 
Carrier  and  also  how  the  carrier  is 
threaded.  Pulleys  G  and  J  are  mounted 
on  Tilting  Frame  E  pivoted  at  P.  The 
Brake  F  is  pivotly  connected  with  the 
tilting  frame,  forming  a  knee  joint,  which 
grips  the  rope  between  the  Brake  F  and 
Pulley  J  when  the  carrier  is  tripped.  Brake 
F  is  held  free  from  the  rope  while  the  load 
is  being  elevated  by  Bolt  B  attached  to 
Locking  Dog  A,  which  operates  with  the 
track  stop. 


Louden  Weight  Return 


r^s^uas 


Fig.  5Z9>    Weight  3  pounds. 


Specifications 

Weight,  3  pounds. 

A  Weight  Return  for  returning  the  carrier  to  the  trip 
block  after  the  load  has  been  deposited  in  the  mow  is 
desirable  with  all  hay  carriers,  especially  so  in  long  or  high 
barns. 

The  Weight  Return  brings  the  carrier  back  to  the  trip 
block  promptly,  and  always  with  enough  force  to  securely 
latch  the  carrier. 

Fig.  529  shows  End  Weight  Return  attached  to  carrier 
and  arranged  for  End  Hoist  barn.  It  shows  our  improved 
Return  Pulley  R  on  wire  guy.  Clamp  Hook  H  and  Pulley  P. 
A  wire  guy  is  preferable  to  a  rope  guy. 

In  ordering,  state  kind  of  track  used  to  get  Hook  H  to 
fit  it.     A  bag  of  sand  is  the  best  weight  to  use. 


Page  Nineteen 


Louden  Reversible  Sling  Carrier — Fig.  315 

(For  Wood  Track) 


Fig.  315 
Specifications 

Operates  on  4x4  wood  track. 

For  use  in  any  style  of  barn. 

Diameter  of  Rope  Wheels.  4'^  inches. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  3  inches. 

Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between  front  and  rear  axles),    1 5 

inches. 
Total  length  of  Carrier,  18  inches. 
Carries  slings  within  19  inches  of  the  track. 
Frame  of  Carrier  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  Track  Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity.  2.000  pounds. 
Three-fourths  inch  best  Manilla  Rope  is  recommended. 
One  pair  Sling    Pulleys.    1    Trip  Block,    I    Rope  Hook.   I  Comb  Pulley, 

I   Lift  Link  furnished  with  Carrier. 
Weight,  52  pounds. 


The  Reversible  Sling  Carrier  is  a 
strong,  dependable  carrier  built  to 
operate  on  4x4  wood  track.  In  the 
illustration  the  carrier  is  shown  with 
parallel  sling  pulleys  rigged  triple 
draft. 

The  mechanism  of  the  carrier  is 
very  simple  and  compact.  There  is 
a  double  rope  lock,  each  lock  having 
a  long  bearing  surface  on  the  rope. 
When  the  load  is  elevated,  and  the 
sling  pulleys  strike  the  trip  stirrup,  the 
rope  locks  go  into  action  holding  the 
load  secure.  There  is  no  chance  for 
the  load  to  slip  back  and  wear  on  the 
rope  is  reduced  to  a  minimum. 

The  Carrier  is  fitted  with  eight 
track  wheels.  The  wheel  arms  are 
heavy  and  strong  and  will  not  spread 
under  the  weight  of  heavy  loads. 

The  Trip  Blocks  are  adjustable. 
Two  or  more  trips  can  be  used  on  the 
same  track  and  as  many  of  them  as 
desired  can  be  lifted  up  to  allow  the 
carrier  to  pass  through.  The  frame 
of  the  carrier  is  of  the  straight  reversi- 
ble (not  swivel)  type.  To  reverse  the 
carrier  for  work  in  the  opposite  mow, 
the  draft  rope  is  pulled  through  the 
carrier.  The  end  of  the  rope  at  D  is 
carried  through  pulley  at  end  of  barn 
and  from  there,  on  down  to  the  horse 
or  team.  The  other  end  of  the  rope 
is  fastened  in  the  eye,  A,  in  the  sling 
pulley. 


Fig.  435     (Perch) 


One  Comb  Pulley  Furnished  with   Each    Revers- 
ible Wood  Track  Carrier. 


Fig.  383     (Excelsior) 

One  Rope  Hook  Furnished 

with        Each        Reversible 

Wood  Track  Carrier. 


One  Trip  Block  Furnished 
with  Each    Reversible 
Wood  Track  Carrier. 


Page  Twenty 


LOUDEN  HAY   TOOLS 

Have    Proved   Their   Wortli   In 

Field    and    Barn.      They    Have 

Been      the      World's     Standard 

for  Fifty   Years. 


Louden  Cross  Draft  Hay  Carrier—Fig.  817 

(For  Sling  or  Fork) 


The  Louden  Cross 
Draft  Hay  Carrier  is  built 
compact  and  strong 
enough  to  carry  the 
heaviest  sHng  load,  and 
at  the  same  time  is  en- 
tirely practical  for  fork  use. 

This  carrier  works  on  a  differ- 
ent principle  from  that  of  ordin- 
ary hay  carriers.    The  draft  rope, 
instead  of  running  parallel  with 
the  track,  runs  at  right  angles  to 
it,  passing  down  to  the  team  or  hoist  in  the  most 
direct  manner.     The  draft  rope  is  used  for  one 
purpose  only — to  elevate  the  load.     After  the 
sling  or  fork  is  elevated  to  the  desired  height, 
the  carrier  is  pulled  along  the  track  by  means 
of  a  shift  rope,  which  runs  along  the  track  to   ,_    , 
the  end  of  the  barn  and  over  pulleys  down  to  t^"^  ^,*°P  ^1°''^' 

...U^         4.L       J.  L     •    L  1  Two  are  furnished  with 

where  the  team  or  hoist  works.  ^^,h  Cross  Draft 

With  this  plan  the  team  travels  only  half  Carrier 

as  far  as  with  the  ordinary  carrier.  When  the  team  is  walking 
out  from  the  barn,  it  is  hoisting  the  load;  when  the  load 
reaches  the  proper  height,  the  shift  rope  is  hooked  to  the  team 
and  as  the  return  to  the  barn  is  made  the  carrier  is  pulled 
along  the  track  into  the  mow.  As  there  is  a  shift  rope  on 
each  side  of  the  carrier,  one  is  always  ready  to  use  to  return 
the  empty  carrier,  no  matter  into  which  mow  the  hay  has 
been  carried. 

For  handling  slings  the  carrier  should  be  rigged  with  sling 
pulleys,  as  shown  in  the  illustration.  For  fork  use  the  sling 
pulleys  would  be  replaced  with  the  Louden  Fork  Pulley.  (See 
Fig.  366,  page  51.)  If  a  Louden  Fork  Pulley  is  not  at  hand, 
any  common  pulley  can  be  used. 

The  carrier  is  provided  with  an  automatic  lock.  This  lock 
will  hold'  the  hay  suspended  at  any  height.  When  the  load  is 
elevated  high  enough  to  pass  into  the  mow,  the  team  is  stopped 
and  turned  back  toward  the  barn.  The  end  of  the  idle  shift 
rope  is  attached  to  the  singletree  and  as  the  team  returns 
to  the  starting  place,  the  carrier  is  drawn  along  the  track  to 
the  end  of  the  barn. 

The  Cross  Draft  Carrier  has  many  advantages  over  ordinary 
carriers.  The  draft  is  more  direct,  it  requires  about  one-half 
less  draft  rope  and  as  it  passes  over  only  one  large  sheave  in 
the  Carrier  there  is  less  friction,  thus  requiring  less  power  to 
elevate  the  load.  The  horse  has  to  walk  only  about  half  as 
far  and  gets  back  quicker,  thus  saving  time  and  also  space  in 


Fig.  817     (Chaste! 

Patented  July  25,  191  1 

Specifications 

Recommended   for    use    in    barns  where  hay  is 

elevated  from  a  center  driveway. 
Built  to  handle  hay  slings,   but  will  handle  hay 

fork  with  equal  satisfaction. 
Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track. 
Diameter  of  the  Rope  Wheel  in  carrier,  6  inches. 
Diameter  of  the  Rope  Wheels  in  sling  pulley  or 

fork  pulley,  4  inches. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels  on  tread,  3  inches. 
Bearing   surface    on    track     (distance    between 

front  and  rear  eixles),  16  inches. 
Total  length  of  Carrier,  21  inches. 
Carries  slings  or  fork  within  2 1  inches  of  the  track 
Frame  of  the  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  track  wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Safe  working  capacity,  2.000  pounds. 
Seven-eighths-inch   best   manilla   rope  is  recom- 
mended, and  urged  for  use  with  this  carrier. 
Thirteen-sixteenths-inch  rope  can   be  used,   but 

'g-inch  is  better. 
Two-Sling    Pulleys.    I    Release   block,    1     3-Part 

Rope   Hitch.    2   Swivel    Rope   Hooks,    2    End 

Stop     Blocks,     furnished     with    each    carrier. 

Unless  otherwise  specified  sling  pulleys  will  be 

furnished  with  the  carrier. 
If  Hay  Fork  is  to  be  used,  fork  pulley  (Fig.  366, 

page    51)    will   be  furnished    instead    of    sling 

pulleys. 

Weight  for  sling  use,  49  pounds. 

Weight  for  fork  use.  42  pounds. 


Page  Twenty-two 


Louden   Cross   Draft   Hay   Carrier — Continued 


Fig.  822 

the  barnyard.  The  lock  is  entirely  automatic  and  will  hold  at  any 
height,  so  the  load  does  not  have  to  be  elevated  any  higher  than  is 
necessary  to  let  it  pass  into  the  mow.  The  empty  Sling  comes  down 
easier  and  quicker  than  with  ordinary  sling  carriers.  It  does  not 
start  into  the  mow  with  a  jerk  and  cause  loose  hay  to  shake  off, 
but  goes  in  smoothly  and  steadily. 

Cross  Draft  Carrier  in  Center  Hoist  Barn 

Fig.  822  shows  our  Cross  Draft  Carrier  at  work  in  a  center  hoist 
barn.  The  sling  load  has  been  elevated  by  the  Draft  Rope  D  until  it  is  high  enough  to  pass  into  the 
mow,  the  automatic  lock  in  the  carrier  holding  it  at  any  desired  height.  The  Shift  Rope  C  has 
been  connected  to  the  trip  of  the  Rope  Hook,  the  horses  have  been  turned  back  toward  the  barn  and 
the  Sling  load  is  being  drawn  into  the  right-hand  end  of  the  barn  and  the  operator  is  ready  to  trip  it 
when  it  reaches  the  proper  place.  The  draft  rope  is  first  secured  to  the  Spring  Clevis  E  of  the  Carrier 
B  by  means  of  our  patent  swivel,  then  passed  down  through  the  Sling  Pulleys  P,  then  up  through  the 
carrier  and  on  through  the  Draft  Pulleys  F  and  G  and  is  connected  to  the  Rope  Hook.  The  Shift  Rope 
C  is  fastened  to  one  of  the  swivel  eyes  on  the  carrier,  and  is  then  passed  through  the  Shift  Pulleys  I, 
J,  K,  and  L. 

In  elevating  the  hay  the  team  is  driven  from  the  Pulley  G  to  or  past  the  Pulley  L,  as  may  be  required 
by  the  distance  the  hay  is  to  be  elevated,  and  in  turning  back,  the  shift  rope  is  connected  to  the  trip  of 
the  Rope  Hook,  which  draws  the  carrier  with  its  load  into  the  mow  as  the  team  is  driven  to 
the  barn.  The  shift  rope  is  then  tripped  from  the  rope  hook,  the  carrier  is  drawn  back  to  the  Release 
Block  A,  by  the  Weight  W,  when  the  empty  sling  will  descend  of  its  own  weight,  and  when 
unhooked  from  the  Pulleys  P  everything  will  be  ready  for  another  load. 

The  instant  the  horses  stop,  or  if  a  singletree  or  anything  else  should  break,  the  lock  takes  the  weight 
of  the  load  and  holds  it  securely  without  a  particle  of  slipping.  While  loaded,  the  lock  is  always  in 
position  to  hold  the  load  at  any  point  of  elevation. 

The  carrier  will  work  without  the  Release  Block  A  by  removing  the  lock-latch,  but  it  works  much  better 
with  it,  as  by  this  means  the  empty  sling  or  fork  can  not  drop  down  in  the  mow.     This  is  a  fault 


Page  Twenty-three 


Cross  Draft  Carrier  in  Center  Hoist — Continued 

that  all  other  cross  draft  carriers  have  and  we  have  entirely  overcome  it  by  the  use  of  this  lock-latch  in 
the  carrier  and  the  Release  Block  A  on  the  track.  The  carrier  does  not  have  to  stand  over  the  release 
block  in  elevating  the  load,  notwithstanding  this  is  its  usual  position.  It  may  stand  on  either  side  or  be 
drawn  across  it,  without  any  effect  when  loaded,  but  it  will  always  release  the  lock  when  the  carrier 
is  empty.  In  this  way  the  empty  fork  or  sHng  is  prevented  from  dropping  down  in  the  mow,  while  the 
lock  will  always  be  released   to  permit  them  to  descend  at  the  proper  place. 

The  stake  to  which  Pulley  L  is  fastened  should  be  set  far  enough  out  in  the  yard  to  permit  the  team, 
after  turning  back,  to  draw  the  carrier  to  the  end  of  the  mow  before  getting  too  close  to  the  Pulley  G, 
and  there  should  be  10  feet  extra  to  connect  the  shift  rope  easily  and  quickly  to  the  trip  of  the  Hook 
H.     The  longer  the  barn,  the  farther  away  the  Pulley  L  must  be  set. 

To  take  the  hay  into  the  other  end  of  the  barn,  remove  the  Weight  W  from  the  Shift  Rope  O  which  is 
connected  to  the  swivel  eye  on  the  other  side  of  the  carrier  and  is  passed  through  the  Shift  Pulleys  M 
and  N.     Withdraw  the  Shift  Rope  C  from  the  Pulleys  K  and  L  and  attach  to  it  the 
Weight  W.     Now  run  the  Shift  Rope  O  through  the  Pulley  K  (as  shown  by  dotted 
line)  and  then  through  the  Pulley  L,  and  you  are  ready  for  business  in  the  other  end 
\H  of  the  barn.      It  may  be  better  to  use  a  separate  rope  out  in  the  barn  yard,  which 

may  be  done  by  using  a  hitch  similar  to  A,   Fig.  819.     When  this  is  done  the  Shift 
Ropes  C  and  O  will  only  have  to  be  long  enough  to  pass  through  the  Pulley  K. 

Louden's  Cross  Draft  Rope  Hook 

Fig.  819  represents  our  Cross  Draft  Rope  Hook,  which  is  an  important  part  of  the 
outfit,  for  upon  its  convenience  and  quickness  of  operation  considerable  depends. 
^     The  Draft  Rope  D  is  secured,  as  shown,  to  the  main  part  of  the  Hook  H,  while  the 
BWyj^  /^  "^     Shift  Rope  C  is  fastened  to  the  Hitch  F,  which  in  turn  is  hooked  in  the  Trip  Hook  A. 
y  This  is  held  in  place  and  tripped  by  the  Latch  E,  having  an  Eye  B  to  which  the  Trip 

"^  Cord  T  is  connected.     The  shift  rope  is  much  more  easily  and  quickly  connected  to 

^^  and  tripped  from  our  rope  hook  than  the  devices  used  with  other  cross  draft  carriers. 

When  the  hay  reaches  the  proper  height  to  pass  into  the  mow,  the  team  is  turned 
back  toward  the  barn  and  the  Hitch  F  is  readily  and  quickly  slipped  over  the  Trip 
Hook  A;  and  when  the  hay  has  reached  the  point  of  deposit  in  the  mow,  a  slight 
D  iSS!  JBQi  pull  on  the  trip  cord  will  disengage  the  Latch  E,  and  release  the  Shift  Rope  C.      In  this 

Tc  way  the  hay  will  not  be  drawn  beyond  the  proper  place  and  frequently  the  hay 

will  be  discharged,  the  carrier  returned  and  the  empty  sling  or  fork  brought  down  to 
'^'  the  load  by  the  time  the  team  gets  back  to  the  barn. 

Louden's  Cross  Draft  Hay   Carrier 

Outfit  for  60-foot  barn,  40-foot  peak 

Fig.  Page 

1  Cross  Draft  Carrier 817  22 

54  feet  of  Double  Bead  Steel  Track 571  30 

7  High-Grade  Draft  Pulleys 468  49 

1  Upriglit  Floor  Pulley 364  50 

30  Steel  Track  Hangers 498  30 

30  Rafter  Brackets 424  31 

5  Rafter  Pulley  Hooks 390  52 

1  Floor  Pulley  Hook 389  52 

2  Hoisting  Singletrees 344  53 

I  Rope  Spreader  Attacliment 345  53 

Three  slings  are  generally  used,  but  in  place  of  these,  one  sling  and  two  harpoon  forks  or  one  grapple 
fork  may  be  used. 

To  get  correct  length  of  draft  rope,  multiply  distance  from  floor  to  peak  of  barn  by  3  and  add  20 
feet.  To  get  right  amount  of  shift  rope  multiply  length  of  barn  by  2;  also  distance  from  floor  to  peak 
by  2  and  add  20  feet.  If  extra  rope  is  used  out  in  yard  make  this  the  length  of  longest  mow,  with  half 
the  width  of  driveway  added.     If  not,  add  this  length  to  total  length  of  shift  rope. 

Five-eighths  is  best  for  the  shift  rope.  Three-quarters  will  answer,  but  is  more  expensive  and  being 
heavier  makes  the  carrier  harder  to  draw  back.  To  get  correct  length  of  trip  cord,  take  length  of  longest 
mow  and  add  25  feet.     Set  post  for  Pulley  L  out  10  feet  further  than  half  length  of  barn. 


Page  Twenty-four 


Thf  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden  Round  Barn  Hay  Unloading  Outfits 

Within  recent  years  there  has  been  much  discussion  regarding  the  advantages  and 
disadvantages  of  round  barns.  It  is  not  our  purpose  in  this  catalog  to  enter  into  a  dis- 
cussion of  the  merits  of  such  buildings.  We  know  that  in  certain  localities  round  barns 
have  come  into  favor  and  one  of  the  problems  in  connection  with  these  buildings  has 
been  the  hay  unloading  outfit.  Operating  a  hay  carrier  on  a  straight-away  track  and 
operating  a  hay  carrier  on  a  circle  track  are  two  entirely  different  propositions.  It  was 
our  business  to  provide  successful  tools  for  unloading  hay  on  the  circle  track.  We  have 
perfected  hay  unloading  equipment  to  meet  every  condition  in  the  round  barn  and  with 
which  hay  may  be  handled  and  stored  as  quickly,  as  cheaply,  as  easily,  and  as  safely  as 
in  rectangular  barns. 

Louden  Round  Barn  Hay  Carrier — Fig.   1104 

(For  Fork  or  Slings) 
Specifications 

The  only  suc- 
cessful hay  fork 
and  hay  shng 
carrier  made  for 
circle  track. 

For  use  in 
round  barns  of 
all  sizes. 

Built  to  oper- 
ate on  Louden 
Double  Bead 
steel  track  only. 

Diameter  of 
rope  wheel  in 
carrier,  6  inches. 

Diameter  of 
rope  wheels  in 
sling  pulley  and 
fork  pulley,  4 
inches. 

Diameter  of  track  wheels  on  tread,  3  inches. 

Track  wheels  are  supported  on  heavy  truck  castings 
attached  to  main  frame  of  carrier  by  means  of  strong  swivel 
connection. 

Bearing  surface  on  track  (distance  between  front  and 
rear  axles),  16  inches. 

Total  length  of  carrier,  21  inches. 

Carries  slings  or  fork  within  21  inches  of  the  track. 

Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

Rope  and  track  wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 

Safe  working  capacity,  2,000  pounds. 

Note:  Five-inch  link  track  hangers  (Fig.  832,  page  30) 
should  always  be  ordered  for  circle  track  for  round   barns. 

Seven-eighths  inch  best  manila  rope  is  recommended 
and  urged  for  use  with  this  carrier. 

Thirteen-sixteenths  inch  rofje  may  be  used  but  J  g  inch 
is  better. 

Two  sling  pulleys,  I  release  block,  2  end  stop  blocks,  2 
swivel  rope  hooks  furnished  with  this  carrier. 

Unless  otherwise  specified,  parallel  sling  pulleys  will 
always  be  furnished  with  this  carrier. 

If  hay  fork  is  to  be  used  fork  pulley  (Fig.  366,  page  51  ) 
will  be  furnished  instead  of  sling  pulleys. 

Weight  for  sling  use,  57  pounds. 

Weight  for  fork  use,  50  pounds. 


Fig.  1131      (Release  Block) 
One  is  furnished  with  each  Round  Barn  Carrier. 


Fig.  523     End  Stop  Block 

Two  are  furnished  as  a  part  of 
each  Round  Barn  Carrier. 


Fig.  1104 
(Round) 

Patented  July  25.  1911. 


Fig.  383     (Excelsior) 


Two  Rope  Hooks 
furnished  with  each 
Round  Barn  Car- 
rier. 


Page  Twenty-five 


^^^^^o 


Louden  Round  Barn  Hay  Carrier — Continued 


Fig.  1135-A 
Patent  Pending 
Illustration,  Fig.  1135-A,  shows  a  short  section  of  track,  a  hay  carrier,  and  a  guide  pulley 
for  round  barn.  The  guide  pulleys  are  placed  just  far  enough  away  from  the  track  so  the  hay 
carrier  will  pass  by.  When  the  front  shift  rope  pulls  the  carrier  past  the  guide  pulley,  the  follow- 
ing shift  rope  (the  tail  rope)  is  brought  into  position  in  the  pulley  ready  to  pull  the  carrier  in 
the  opposite  direction. 

The  Round  Barn  Hay  Carrier  works  on  the  same  principle  as  the  Cross  Draft 
Hay  Carrier  described  on  page  22.  The  main  draft  rope,  instead  of  running 
parallel  with  and  along  the  track,  runs  at  right  angles  to  the  track  and  passes 
down  to  the  team  or  hoist  in  the  most  direct  manner.  The  draft  rope  is  used  solely 
to  elevate  the  hay  and  not  to  pull  the  carrier  along  the  track.  With  the  draft  rope  passing  directly  from  the 
carrier  to  the  team  or  hoist,  only  about  half  as  much  draft  rope  is  required  as  with  an  ordinary  hay  carrier. 
This  also  greatly  reduces  friction,  as  the  rope  does  not  have  to  pass  over  so  many  pulleys,  making  it 
possible  to  lift  heavier  loads  with  less  power. 

Independent  shift  ropes  are  used  for  pulling  the  carrier  along  the  track.  Good  quality  5  8-inch  rope  is 
suitable  for  shift  ropes.  Two  of  these  ropes  are  necessary,  one  end  of  each  rope  being  attached  to  opposite 
sides  of  the  carrier,  the  other  end  passing  around  the  guide  pulleys  and  continuing  to  the  hoist  or  to  the 
team  and  weight  return  as  the  case  may  be. 

Where  engine  or  electric  power  is  at  hand,  this  outfit  used  in  connection  with  a  Louden  Triple  Drum 
Power  Hoist  (see  Fig.  I  1 32,  page  35)  makes  the  most  complete  and  perfect  hay  unloading  outfit  ever  installed 
in  any  barn.  The  lower  end  of  the  main  draft  rope  is  connected  to  the  main  drum  of  the  hoist.  The  lower 
end  of  each  of  the  shift  ropes  is  attached  to  the  respective  two  smaller  drums  of  the  hoist. 

The  main  drum  of  the  hoist  is  used  to  elevate  the  load.  It  is  not  necessary  to  raise  the  load  up  to  the 
track  unless  beams  or  hay  already  in  the  mow  interfere.  The  load  can  be  stopped  at  any  height  and  can  be 
carried  in  either  direction  from  the  driveway  at  will.  The  instant  the  tension  is  released  on  the  draft  rope 
the  rope  lock  goes  into  action  and  will  catch  and  hold  the  load.  If  it  is  desired  to  carry  the  hay  to  the 
right,  the  right  hand  drum,  and  if  to  the  left,  the  left  hand  drum,  is  brought  into  action.  This  pulls  the 
carrier  along  the  track  and  when  the  load  is  dropped  the  opposite  drum  is  brought  into  play  and  the  empty 
carrier  is  returned  to  the  release  block.  The  entire  operation  is  extremely  simple  and  the  hoist  can  be 
handled  by  anyone. 


Page  Twenty-six 


'^^iT^^')"'^^-*-^^^*^'**-*'*'^;^ 


Louden  Round  Barn  Hay  Carrier — Continued 


We  furnish  the  track  bent  to  form  a  circle  track  of  any  diameter. 
Each  section  of  the  track  is  put  through  a  bending  machine,  and  is 
bent  uniform  and  true,  and  without  kinking  the  flange  or  injury  to  the 
track.  We  furnish  suitable  hangers  for  supporting  the  track  from 
rafters  or  from  purlin  plate  as  desired.  It  should  be  remembered  that 
the  higher  up  in  the  building  the  track  is  placed  the  easier  it  will  be 
to  fill  the  mow  full. 

Special  guide  pulleys  are  used  for  holding  the  shift  ropes  in  parallel 
position  with  the  track.  These  pulleys  are  furnished  mounted  on  a 
board  (see  Fig  1  1 35A,  page  26),  and  are  easy  to  put  in  place.  The  pulley 
sheave  or  rope  wheel  is  mounted  in  a  malleable  iron  casing  and  sup- 
ported by  steel  braces.  The  pulley  is  mounted  in  a  slightly  tilted 
position ;  also,  the  lower  pulley  casing  extends  beyond  and  slightly  upward 
in  front  of  the  rope  wheel,  thus  holding  the  shift  ropes  in  position.  Even 
should  the  ropes  become  very  slack  they  will  not  fall  out  of  the  pulley. 

Where  a  complete  circle  track  is  installed,  seven  or  eight  or  more  guide  pulleys  should  be  used.  The 
purpose  of  the  guide  pulleys  is  to  carry  the  shift  rope  as  nearly  parallel  with  the  track  as  possible.  The 
number  of  pulleys  necessary  is  determined  by  the  diameter  of  the  track.  Always  enough  pulleys  should  be 
used  so  the  carrier  will  be  pulled  straight  ahead,  not  sideways. 

Where  there  is  a  silo  in  the  center  of  the  building,  it  would  be  necessary  to  detach  one  shift  rope  from 
the  hoist  and  carry  it  around  the  silo  when  changing  to  work  the  carrier  in  the  opposite  mow.  This  change 
is  easily  made,  requiring  only  two  or  three  minutes'  time. 

This  rig  can  be  used  with  horse  power  instead  of  the  hoist  and  when  so  used  the  arrangement  of  ropes 
would  be  only  slightly  changed.  Instead  of  one  shift  rope  passing  around  the  complete  circle,  as  shown 
with  hoist,  both  shift  ropes  would  pass  over  pulleys  and  be  arranged  to  correspond  with  the  arrangement 
in  rectangular  barns.     (See  Fig.  822,  page  23.) 

This  special  unloading  outfit  for  round  barns  will  do  satisfactory  work  in  barns  of  all  sizes.  Hay  forks 
or  hay  slings  can  be  used  and  the  rig  will  handle  heavy  loads  of  all  kinds  of  hay. 


Fig.  1135 
Guide  Pulley 

Specifications 

Length  of  mounting  block.  36  inches. 
Width  of  mounting  block.  12  inches. 
Depth  of  mounting  block,  12' 2  inches. 
Diameter  of  pulley.  6'  2  inches. 
Weight,  complete.  26}  2  pounds. 


Garden  City,  Minn.,  June  6,   1916. 
Louden  Machinery  Co.,  St.  Paul,  Minn. 
Gentlemen:  -ri      u 

We  are  well   pleased  with  the  entire  outfit  that  we  have  of  yours  in  our  round  barn.      The  Hay 
Carrier  outfit  works  to  a  "  T."      In  fact  the  intire  equipment  is  O.  K. 

Yours  truly,   Lester  Fleming. 


Fig.  430H 


Junior  Round  Barn  Fork 
Carrier — Fig.  430t 

Where  it  is  desired  to  use  an  ordinary  type  of 
fork  hay  carrier  in  a  round  barn,  we  recommend  the 
Junior  Fork  carrier,  same  as  described  on  page  8, 
except  that  it  is  fitted  with  special  extra  heavy 
swivel  trucks.  The  swivel  trucks  permit  the  track 
wheels  to  adjust  themselves  to  the  bend  of  the 
track  so  there  is  no  excessive  wear  and  no  binding 
on  the  track.  Aside  from  the  swivel  trucks,  this 
carrier  is  exactly  the  same  as  the  Junior  Carrier, 
Fig  430,  described  on  page  8,  and  will  give  com- 
plete satisfaction  wherever  used. 


Pago  Twenty-seven 


FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 
=SS^ 


Louden  Junior  Hay  Fork  Carrier  For  Cable  Track — Fig.  621 

Specifications 

For  stacking  hay  in  the  field. 

Built  to  operate  on  ^  g  inch  or 

Diameter  of  rope  wheels  4  inches. 

Diameter  of  track  wheels  on  tread.  3I4  inches. 

Bearing  surface   on    track    (distance    between 

front  and  rear  axles).  10  inches. 
Total  length  of  carrier,  14  inches. 
Carries  fork  within  13  inches  of  the  track. 
Frame  of  carrier  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  and  Track  Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
J4  inch  best  manilla  rope  is  recommended. 
!l  or  J^  inch  rope  may  be  used. 
Safe  working  capacity  1 .000  pounds. 
One  Fork  Pulley,  I  Trip  Block,  I  Rope  Swivel, 

furnished  with  carrier. 
Weight,  24  pounds. 

This  Carrier  was  designed  for  use  in 
connection  with  the  Louden  CableRicker 
for  staciiing  hay.  It  operates  on  a  wire 
cable  track  ( ^  j  inch  or  3  2  inch  diameter) 
and  does  its  work  as  nearly  perfect  as 
can  be.  It  is  built  along  the  same  gen- 
eral lines  as  the  Louden  Junior  Carrier 

for  steel  track.  _  It  is  compactly  and  stoutly  built,  its  working  parts 
are  extremely  simple  and  it  never  fails  to  work  right. 

The  poles  at  the  end  and  the  cable  track  above  also  act  as 
guides  for  building  the  stack.  Stacks  of  any  size  up  to  60  feet  in 
length  can  be  built  with  the  cable  ricker.  We  furnish  the  cable  in  any 
lengths  desired.  The  cable  should  be  allowed  to  extend  to  the  ground,  on  the  outside  of  the  poles,  at  each  end, 
thus  forming  guys.  Forty  feet  of  cable  should  be  allowed  outside  of  the  poles  at  each  end.  Where  30- 
foot  poles  are  used  and  a  50-foot  stack  is  to  be  built,  140  feet  of  cable  would  be  required.  This  allows 
room  to  drive  the  load  of  hay  inside  the  poles  and  thus  secure  a  straight  lift  up  to  the  carrier.  Where 
poles  longer  than  30  feet  are  used  add  2  feet  of  cable  for  each  added  foot  of  pole  length. 

We  do  not  furiiish  poles  as  they  cannot  conveniently  be  shipped  by  local  freight.     Poles  should  be 
5  to  6  inches  in  diameter  at  the  top  and  30  feet  or  more  in  length. 

This  cable  ricker  is  easy  to  set  up,  easy  to  move  from  place  to  place,  and  when  not  in  use  the  metal 
parts  can  be  stored  in  small  space.     With  ordinary  care  the  outfit  will  'ast  many  years. 


(Combine 


Fig.  C430-A 

Patent  Rope  Swivel. 
One  is  furnished  as  a 
part  of  each  Junioi 
Carrier. 


Trip  Block.      Fig.   801        (March) 

One  is  furnished  as  a  part  of  each  Cable  Carrier. 


Louden  Cable  Ricker  Outfit 

For  Stack  50  Feet  Long 

1  Louden  Junior  Cable  Carrier Fig.  62 1 

1  Louden  6-Tine  Balance  Grapple  Fork  (page  38) Fig.  35 1 

140  feet  5'S-'nch  Galvanized  Steel  Wire  Rope Fig.  417 

2  High-Grade  Draft  Pulleys  (page  49  J Fig.  468 

2  Cable  Loop  Clamps Pig    337 

4  Cable  Stop  Clamps Fig.  3371/^ 

The   H-inch   size  Galvanized  Steel  Wire  Rope.  Fig.  417.  or  the  'finch  size  Galvanized  Wire  Strand  may  be  substituted 
for  the  ^g-inch  size  Wire  Rope  specified  above  if  desired. 

170   ft.    5;4-inch    Manilla  Draft  Rope  and  90  feet  Jg-inch  Trip  Rope  would  be  required  with  this  outfit. 

We  do  not  furnish  poles. 


Page  Twenty-eight 


Louden  Cable  Ricker — Continued 


Galvanized  Steel  Wire  Rope 


Fig.  417     (May) 


Fig.  418     (June) 


Size,  as  may  be  desired.  We  recommend  the  heavier  size. 
Either  Fig.  417  or  Fig.  418  may  be  used  as  the  track  for  the 
Carrier.  Fig.  417  maltes  the  best  track,  but  is  more  expensive. 
Five-eighth  inch  size:  Weight  per  100  ft..  76  pounds.  One- 
half  inch  size:  Weight  per  hundred  feet,  61  pounds. 


Galvanized  Steel  Strand,  >^-in.  Diameter 

Fig.  418  is  composed  of  seven  No.  8  Wires.  Estimated 
breaking  strain  about  four  tons.  This  makes  a  cheaper  track 
than  the  Galvanized  Steel  Wire  Rope  and  is  used  quite  often. 
Weight  per  1 00  feet,  50  pounds. 


Cable  Clamps 

Fig.  337  is  our  Wire  Cable  Loop  Clamp  and  is  used  to  make  a  loop  at 
the  end  of  the  cable.  Two  of  these  should  be  used  with  each  stacker. 
Weight  each,   \'l   pounds. 

The  Wire  Cable  Stop  Clamp,  Fig.  337^,  is  placed  on  the  wire  cable 
track  at  either  side  of  the  poles  at  the  end  of  the  stack  to  hold  the  upper 
ends  of  the  poles  securely  in  position.  Four  of  these  Clamps  are  used  for 
each  stacker.     Weight  each,   I   pound. 

These  clamps  are  made  of  malleable  iron  and  are  held  together  with  two 
good,  strong  bolts,  which  grip  the  cable  firmly  so  that  they  will  not  slip. 


Fig.  337     (Porto) 


^^S 


Fig.  337}^     (Rico) 


Page  Twenty-nine 


.  I— t  e:  C3 


^^Sffly*^  rAlRFIELD.   IOWA  ^JVJI^Z: 


Louden  Steel  Track  and  Track  Fixtures 

For  Hay  Carriers 


Fig.  571     (Clara)  Fig.  550     (Mohler) 

Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track — Fig.  571 

Fig.  571  shows  a  section  of  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track.  This  track  is  a  special  quality  high 
carbon  steel.  It  is  2  inches  wide,  i  y\  inches  high  and,  properly  supported  every  24  inches,  it  will  safely 
carry  a  load  of  3000  pounds.       Weight,  per  foot,  2  pounds. 

Splice  Clamp  for  Double  Bead  Steel  —  Fig.  550 

Fig.  550  is  the  Splice  Clamp  for  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track.  It  is  of  malleable  iron  and  is 
held  firmly  in  place  on  the  under  side  of  the  track  by  four  bolts.  It  is  easily  attached,  holds  the  flanges 
of  the  track  level  and  makes  it  just  as  strong  at  the  joint  as  at  any  other  point.  Care  should  be  used  to 
see  that  the  nuts  on  the  four  bolts  are  drawn  tight.  After  the  nuts  have  apparently  been  made  tight, 
the  bolts  should  be  set  by  striking  them  a  heavy  blow  on  the  head  with  a  hammer.  After  this  is  done 
it  will  be  found  the  nuts  can  be  drawn  still  tighter  and  the  clamps  will  hold  securely. 

Enough  clamps  for  the  track  are  furnished  with  every  shipment. 

Weight,  each,  I  'a  pounds. 

Louden  Track  Hangers 

Fig.  498.  I^ouden  Standard  Track 
Bead  Steel  Track.  Made  of  malleable 
securely  clamped  together  by  short,  heavy  bolt 

Weight,   per  dozen,  6  pounds. 

Fig.  500.  Louden  Light  Track  Hanger  for  Double  Bead 
Steel  Track.  Made  of  malleable  iron,  in  two  parts,  securely 
clamped  together  by  short,  heavy  bolt.  The  same  style  as 
the  Louden  Standard  Hanger  except  not  so  heavy. 

Weight,  per  dozen,  43^2  pounds. 

Fig.  832.  Link  Track  Hanger  (5-inch)  for  Double  Bead 
Steel  Track.  The  clamp  is  of  malleable  iron,  the  link  of  steel. 
This  hanger  is  for  use  any  place  but  is  particularly  adapted 
to  uneven  ceilings.  Standard  length  of  link,  5  inches.  Can 
be   furnished  any  length   desired. 


Hanger    for    Double 
iron,    in    two  parts. 


Fig.  498 
(Carson) 


Fig.  500 
(Camp) 


Fig.     832 
Pat.  Sept.  1 .  1 


908 


Weight,    5-inch   link,    per   dozen,    6   pounds. 


South  Haven.  Minn..   July  2,    1916 
The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

Fairfield,  Iowa 
Gentlemen : 

I  would  be  pleased  to  get  your  new  General  Catalog. 

I  have   replaced   a   .    .    .    .   Hay  Carrier  and   track  with    the  Louden   Junior  on  account  of  jumping  track  and  bad 
registering  when  rope  was  twisty. 

The  Louden  hugs  the  rail  under  all  conditions.     The  swivel  takes  the  kink  out  of  the  rope.      It  is  hard  to  beat. 

Yours  truly, 

Ph.  Block. 


Ruthton.  Minn.,  June  28.  1916. 
The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

Fairfield.  Iowa. 
Gentlemen :  ui       t       i         J 

I  am  pleased  to  say  that  1  am  well  satisfied  with  your  barn  equipment.  I  bought  from  you  Hay  Track  and 
Carrier.  Litter  Carrier,  Steel  Stanchions,  Cupolas,  etc.  Everything  is  handy  and  works  fine.  Will  be  pleased  to 
recommend  it  to  everybody  who  wants  to  improve  their  barn  with  this  modern  equipment. 

Yours  truly. 

Andrew  Madsen. 


Page  Thirty 


Track  and  Track  Fixtures — Continued 


Fig.   780.     Straight  Hang  Hook  for 
wood  track.      Made  of  5-inch  steel  rod' 
and  furnished  in  two  lengths. 

Weight,  1 4-inch  size,  per  dozen,  iOJ^ 


« 


Fig.  372     (Cairo) 

Jointed  Hang  Hook  for 
Wood  Track 


Fig.  780     14-inch  (Canna) 

Fig.  781     16-inch  (Chestnut)        pounds 

Weight,  16-inch  size,  per  dozen,  12  pounds. 

Fig.  372.     Jointed  Hang  Hook  for  wood  track.     Made  of  J^-inch  steel  rod.     Total  length,  14  inches. 

Weight,  per  dozen,  13)4  pounds. 

Rafter  and  Ridgepole  Brackets 

Fig.   424.      Improved  Malleable  Rafter 
Bracket,  our  strongest  and  best. 
Weight,  per  dozen,  43^  pounds. 

Fig.    425.      Malleable  Rafter  Bracket, 
common  pattern. 

Weight,  per  dozen,   3  pounds.  Fig.  425     (Caesar) 


Malleable  Ridgepole  Bracket 

Fig.   465.     Malleable  Ridgepole  Bracket,  used  when  the  track  is 
hung  parallel  to  a  joist  or  2-inch  timber. 
Weight,  per  dozen,  3  pounds. 

Fig.  675.     Side  Rafter  Bracket,  used  for  hanging  track  to  rafters 
on  one  side  of  the  roof. 

Weight,  per  dozen,  5J4'  pounds. 


Fig.  675     (Cute) 


Fig.  465     (Cubeb) 


Side  Beam  Bracket 

Fig.  725.     Side  Beam  Bracket  for  hanging  track  parallel      '^ 
to  the  side  of  a  timber. 

Weight,  per  dozen,  6  pounds. 

Barbed  Chisel-Point  Steel  Nail 

Fig.  373.     Barbed  Chisel-Point  Steel  Nail  for  putting  <ip 
rafter  or  ridgepole  brackets.     Cut  shows  actual  size. 


Fig.  373     (Cement) 


Fig.  725     (Beam) 


Other  Hay  Carrier  Tracks 


No.  3 


No.  4 


No.  5 


No.  6 


No.  7 


We  do  not  furnish  these  tracks,  but  we  fit  our  Junior  Carrier  to  run  on  them.     In  ordering  Carrier 
state  the  number  and  size  of  your  track. 

No.  3  is  2  inches  wide;  Nos.  4  and  5,  2J/^;  No.  6,  2|8,  and  No.  7,  2%  inches  wide. 


Page  Thirty-one 


Putting  Up  Hay  Carrier  Tracks 


While  a  barn  is  being  built  and  while  the  shingles  or  sheeting  are  within  a  couple  of  feet  of  the  comb  of 
the  roof,  is  the  best  time  to  install  a  Hay  Carrier  Track.  At  this  time  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  do  the  work, 
as  the  sheeting  forms  all  the  scaffold  necessary.  To  install  a  Hay  Carrier  Track  after  a  barn  is  finished 
means  doing  the  work  from  below  by  scaffold  or  ladder,  depending  on  the  height  of  the  barn. 

The  track  may  be  hung  perfectly  level  or  it  may  be  given  a  slight  incline,  making  it  lower  at  the  point 
where  the  track  stop  is  attached  and  the  hay  is  elevated.  The  track  should  always  be  hung  straight  and  true, 
and  close  up  to  the  peak  of  the  barn,  but  allowing  room  enough  below  rafters  for  the  Carrier  to  run  freely. 
To  do  this  stretch  a  line  from  one  end  of  the  barn  to  the  other  immediately  below  the  peak  of  the  rafters, 
and  nail  the  Rafter  Brackets  to  the  rafters  in  a  straight  line. 

A  collar  beam  should  be  spiked  to  the  second  pair  of  rafters  from 
each  end,  in  which  hooks  are  to  be  screwed  for  Pulleys,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  617.  This  will  bring  the  ends  of  the  track  within  about 
a  foot  of  the  pulleys  as  shown  in  the  cut.  The  collar  beams  may 
be  2x6,  or  4x4 — chamfered  off  thin  at  the  ends  so  they  can  be 
properly  spiked  to  the  rafters.  When  a  piece  2  inches  thick  is 
used,  an  inch  piece  should  be  nailed  on  the  back  of  the  center  where 
the  screw  of  the  hook  goes  through,  so  as  to  make  it  3  inches  thick 
at  this  place.  The  collar  beams  should  be  about  4  feet  long  with 
the  ends  cut  the  slant  of  the  rafters,  or  long  enough  so  the  pulley 
attached  to  it  will  let  the  rope  run  close  to,  but  not  rub  on  the 
under  side  of  the  track. 

(tslote — It  is  a  poor  plan  to  screw  the  hook  into  one  of  the  rafters,  as  shown  in  some  hay  tool  catalogs, 
because  in  heavy  work  it  is  liable  to  pull  out  a  single  rafter.) 

The  track  should  be  taken  up  in  sections  and  hung  to  the  brackets  and  then  spliced  together.  The 
Brackets  and  Track  Hangers  which  support  the  track  may  be  placed  4  feet  apart  for  light  work,  but  it 
is  better  to  have  a  support  from  every  rafter,  and  for  heavy  work  a  hanger  and  bracket  should  be  put  on 
each  side  of  the  rafters  where  the  hay  is  taken  up. 

The  bolts  in  the  Hangers  and  Splice  Clamps  should  be  drawn  up  as  tight  as  possible  with  a  wrench, 
then  strike  the  head  of  the  bolt  with  a  hammer  so  as  to  set  it,  and  tighten  up  the  nuts  again.  When  this 
is  done  they  will  not  get  loose. 

If  the  hay  is  to  be  taken  in  at  end  of  barn,  the  track  should  be  extended  out  2'  2  to  3  feet  when  Fork 
is  used  and  4  feet  when  Slings  are  used.  In  case  the  track  is  installed  before  the  roof  is  finished,  the  best 
plan  is  to  use  a  good  2x6  or  4x6  long  enough  to  extend  out  as  far  as  necessary  and  back  in  the  barn  to  the 
third  or  fourth  rafter.  Let  this  extend  between  the  rafters  the  same  as  a  ridge  pole.  On  this  extension 
support  or  ridge  pole,   use  our  Ridge  Pole  Brackets. 

The  extension  may  be  covered  if  desired.  Cut  a  brace  to  reach  from  the  outer  end  of  the  extension 
to  a  point  on  the  rafters  even  with  the  side  of  the  door  and  sheet  and  shingle  over  to  this  brace.  This 
not  only  serves  as  a  roof,  but  also  as  a  brace  for  the  extension. 


Fig.  617 


About  Rope 

Many  persons  think  they  should  use  not  less  than  1-inch  rope  on  a  Hay  Carrier.  This  is  a  rrustake. 
Use  the  best  grade  of  manilla  rope  and  never  use  it  heavier  than  |-inch  in  diameter  and  ^^-inch  diameter 
rope  is  better.  Do  not  be  persuaded  to  use  either  a  large  or  cheap  grade  of  rope.  Cheap  rope  is  usually 
hard  twisted  and  kinks  badly.  In  our  fifty  years'  experience  with  Hay  Carriers  we  have  learned  that 
the  ?^-inch  manilla  rope  is  the  best  size  to  use  and  in  no  case  should  larger  diameter  than  |-inch  be  used. 
The  Pulleys  used  with  Hay  Carriers  are  intended  for  these  sizes  of  rope  and  larger  will  not  work  so  well. 

An  inch  rope  should  have  not  less  than  a  10-inch  pulley,  and  when  used  on  a  smaller  pulley  the  bend 
will  be  so  short  that  the  strands  will  wear  themselves  out  rubbing  on  each  other,  besides  it  will  cost  nearly, 
if  not  fully,  twice  as  much  as  three-quarter  rope.  According  to  government  tests  the  following  are  the 
approximate  weights  and  strength  of  new  manilla  rope:  Pounds 

Three-eighths  inch  trip  rope j  •^jj' 

Half-inch  rope,  i2}2  feet  weigh  1  pound:  strength i'lAo 

Five-eighths  rope,  7} 2  feet  weigh  1  pound;  strength ^  070 

Three-quarter  rope,  6  feet  weigh  I  pound;  strength lonn 

Seven-eighths  rope,  41^2  feet  weigh  I  pound;  strength 7nqn 

One-inch  rope,  33^^  feet  weigh  1  pound;  strength 7,050 


Page  Thirty-two 


Trrnfflin 


Ofj^t,U,,}*ikit^'iMi*-.i^iU 


FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 


Louden  Power  Hoist 


Above  illustrahon  shows  Louden  Single  Drum  Power  Hoist  and  four  horse 
power  gasoline  engine  lifting  1,000  pounds  of  hay.     The  top  of  the  load  has  been 
removed  with  hay  fork;  a  sling  is  being  used  for  the  last  load, 
pletely  it  cleans  up  the  rack. 


Note  how  corn- 


There  is  a  great  need  for  time  and 
labor  saving  equipment  in  hay  har- 
vest, as  the  season  is  short  and  the 
crop  is  valuable.  A  delay  of  a  few 
hours  may  mean  a  serious  loss. 

Louden  Power  Hoists  are  de- 
signed for  quick,  efficient  work. 
They  are  so  simple  that  anyone 
may  quickly  understand  and  oper- 
ate them,  and  the  great  numbers  in 
which  they  are  manufactured  en- 
able us  to  put  them  on  the  market 
at  a  price  within  reach  of  every 
farmer. 

The  hoist  may  be  used  with  any 
kind  of  power — steam,  gasoline  or 
electric.  Under  ordinary  condi- 
tions three  or  four  H.  P.  is  sufficient, 
though  five  or  six  H.  P.  is  better. 
Engine  and  hoist  may  be  located  in 
any  convenient  place. 

The  whole  operation  is  extremely 
simple.  Five  minutes' practice  will 
put  the  operator  in  perfect  control 
of  the  hoist  and  its  load.  1  ts  action 
is  positive  and  it  always  responds 
to  the  levers. 

The  clutch  on  Louden  Power  Hoists  is  simple,  powerful,  and  dependable.  The  contact  blocks  are  of 
hard  maple  and  in  operation  are  forced  into  the  cone-shaped  metal  drive.  They  are  accessible  by  removing 
a  single  pin,  and  are  mounted  on  eccentric  benches,  making  them  adjustable  to  take  up  the  wear.  One 
set  of  blocks  will  last  several  seasons  and  they  can  be  replaced  for  a  few  cents  and  in  ten  minutes'  time. 

When  help  is  scarce  and  high  priced,  and  all  the  horses  are  needed  in  the  field,  the  Power  Hoist  comes  to 
the  rescue  and  does  the  work  of  both  a  team  and  man.  Not  only  that,  but  it  does  the  same  work  in  about 
one-fourth  the  time. 

Reduce  these  facts  to  figures  and  you  will  have  the  proof  of  our  claim  that  a  Power  Hoist  will  easily 
pay  for  itself  in  a  single  season. 

There  is  nothing  complicated  about  it — no  delicate  mechanism.  It  is  just  a  plain,  common  sense, 
sturdy  machine  built  to  handle  big  loads  easily  and  to  save  time  and  labor  in  hay  harvest. 

There  is  as  much  difference  between  unloading  hay  with  a  hoist  and  with  horse  power  as  there  is 
between  handling  it  with  horse  power  and  with  a  pitchfork.     Try  one  out  this  season. 

How  long  a  Power  Hoist  will  last  is  still  to  be  proved,  for  the  first  hoists  placed  on  the  market  by  the 
Louden  Machinery  Company,  over  ten  years  ago,  though  much  inferior  to  the  later  models,  are  still  giving 
efficient,  and  satisfactory  service. 

The  convenience  of  the  hoist  is  increased  for  general  farm  purposes  by  mountirig  it  on  the  same  truck 
with  a  portable  engine.  In  this  manner  it  is  easily  moved  from  place  to  place  and  will  be  handy  for  practi- 
cally all  of  the  heavy  lifting  about  the  farm  and  elsewhere,  such  as  removing  wagon  boxes  and  hay  racks 
from  wagons,  cleaning  and  digging  wells,  elevating  roots  from  root  cellars,  and  silage  from  underground 
silos.     It  can  also  be  used  successfully  for  storing  ice  and  for  elevating  grain  with  a  dump  box. 

While  the  Louden  Power  Hoist  is  designed  primarily  for  unloading  hay,  it  has  been  found  exceedingly 
valuable  for  many  other  uses.  Here  is  what  a  builder  writes:  "We  used  the  Louden  Power  Hoist  in  build- 
ing a  concrete  stack  at  the  plant  of  the  Iowa  Malleable  Iron  Company.  It  was  most  satisfactory  and 
proved  a  great  saving  in  time  and  effort.  It  handled  the  cement  in  800-pound  lots  as  fast  as  the  power 
mixers  were  able  to  deliver  it.  I  am  confident  from  the  design  and  behavior  of  the  hoist  that  it  will  handle 
a  ton.' 


Page  Thirty-three 


Louden  Single  Drum  Power  Hoist — Fig.  965 


Fig.  965 
Specifications 

Operation:  Load  carried  in  one  direction  by  use  of  large  drum.      Empty  carrier  returned 

by  use  of  small  drum. 
Main  Drum:  Length,    20    inches;    diameter,    6    inches;    diameter    of    drum     flanges, 

13  inches.     Capacity;  300  feet  of  J^-inch  rope  or  400  feet  of  j2-i"eh  rope. 
Return  Drum:  Length,   II   inches;   capacity,  300  feet  of   32-'nch  rope. 
Delt  Wheel,  pressed  steel;  diameter,  20  inches;  width  of  face,  6  inches. 
Total  width,  25  inches. 
Total  length,  43  inches. 
Floor   space   necessary,    25x36    inches.      (Note:    Where    hoist    is    mounted    on    truck, 

sufficient  room  for  operator  to  stand  should  be  allowed.) 
Weight  complete,  308    pounds  (ready    to  ship). 


Where  the  load  is  to  be 
carried  in  one  direction 
only,  as  in  an  end  hoist 
barn,  the  Single  Drum 
Power  Hoist  is  used.  This 
hoist  has  one  large  drum 
for  elevating  the  load  and 
carrying  it  into  the  mow, 
and  a  smaller  drum  for  re- 
turning the  empty  carrier. 
It  is  equipped  with  adjust- 
able friction  clutch  and 
band    brake. 

One  of  the  most  valuable 
features  of  the  Single  Drum 
Hoist  is  the  fact  that  it  may 
be  controlled  from  the  load 
by  means  of  ropes.  There 
are  only  two  ropes  to  handle 
— one  to  elevate  the  load 
and  run  it  back  into  the 
mow,  and  one  to  operate 
the  return  drum  and  bring 
the  empty  carrier  back  to 
the  wagon. 

There  is  iiO  time  lost,  no 
waiting,  no  changing  of 
team  from  wagon  to  draft 
rope.  All  that  is  necessary 
is  to  set  the  fork  in  the 
load,  or  if  slings  are  used, 
to  attach  the  sling  pulleys, 
then  pull  slightly  on  the 
main  friction  rope  and  the 
load  goes  up  and  into  the 
mow.  When  the  load  is 
tripped,  a  slight  pull  on  the 
return  rope  will  bring  the 
carrier  back. 


Page  Thirty-four 


IOWA 


Louden  Triple  Drum  Power  Hoist — Fig.  1132 


Specifications 

Operation:  Load  hoisted  to  desired  height 
by  use  of  large  drum.  Load  carried 
along  track  to  the  right  by  right  hand 
small  drum,  or  to  the  left  by  left  hand 
small  drum. 

Main  Drum:  Lengtn,  20  inches;  diam- 
eter, 6  inches:  diameter  of  drum 
flanges,  15  inches;  capacity,  300  feet 
of  j4-inch  rope  or  400  feet  of  j2-inch 
rope. 

Small  Drums  (Each):  Length.  8  inches; 
capacity.  1  75  feet  of  }  j-inch  rope. 

Belt  Wheel,  pressed  steel;  diameter,  20 
inches:    width  of  face.  6  inches. 

Total  width,  48  inches. 

Total  length,  65  inches. 

Floor  space  necessary  for  base,  38  x  65 
inches.  (Note:  This  is  actual  base. 
Where  hoist  is  mounted  on  truck, 
sufficient  room  for  operator  to  stand 
should  be  allowed.) 

Weight  complete,  636  pounds. 


Fig.    1132 


In  a  center  drive  barn,  where  the  hay  is  to  be  stored  in  mows  on  both  sides  of  the  driveway,  or  in  a 
Round  barn,  the  Triple  Drum  Power  Hoist  should  be  used.  With  this  hoist  and  a  Cross  Draft  Sling  Carrier, 
hay  can  be  picked  up  and  carried  into  either  mow  at  the  will  of  the  operator.  One  load  can  be  put  in  the 
right  hand  mow  and  the  next  in  the  left  hand  mow,  if  desired,  without  the  changing  of  ropes  or  pulleys. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  carry  the  load  clear  up  to  the  track.  Unless  cross  timbers  interfere,  the  hay 
may  be  run  back  into  the  mow  at  any  height. 

The  Louden  Triple  Drum  Power  Hoist  has  three  complete  hoisting  drums  mounted  in  the  same  frame. 
They  operate  by  friction  clutch.  Pull  the  levers  to  you  and  they  force  the  clutch  into  contact;  release 
them  and  the  power  is  released  automatically;  push  them  from  you  and  the  brakes  are  applied. 


Complete   Power   Rigs    for    Barns 

The  Power  Hoist  can  be  used  successfully  with  any  kind  of  a  Hay  Carrier.  We  shall  be  glad  to  send 
you  specifications  and  prices  for  a  complete  power  outfit  for  your  barn,  for  either  fork  or  sling  use.  Tell 
us  whether  you  take  up  hay  from  the  end  of  the  barn,  or  from  a  center  driveway,  and  mention  the  carrier 
and  sling  (or  fork)  you  prefer.  You'll  be  surprised  to  learn  how  little  a  Power  Hoist  will  add  to  the  cost 
of  your  hay  unloading  outfit,  as  compared  with  the  saving  it  effects. 


T       j'     ««     1-  1^  ir  •  c  u   T  Redstone,  Mont.,  May  23,  1913. 

Louden  Machmery  Company,  t-airheld.  Iowa.  .xv.   .=>.        ,  j        . 

Gentlemen; 

My  barn  is  equipped  with  a  Louden  Hay  Carrier  and  Slings  which  I  bought  of  you  the  fall  of  1910.  The 
slings  are  the  largest  you  sold.  I  can  unload  1.000  lbs.  at  each  pull,  easy.  I  have  a  very  large  door.  9x12. 
I   consider  the  outfit  good  in  every  way.  Yours  truly. 

John  H.   Schlag. 


Page  Thirty-five 


rrmrnnn 


TheLOUPEN  MACHINERY  COMPAB^ 


Louden  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Forks 


Louden  Standard   6-Tine  Balance  Grapple  Fork.      Fig.  351.      (Planet) 

Specifications 

Spreads  when  open,  58  inches. 
Width  between  outside  tines,  19  inches. 
Tines  go  into  hay  24  inches. 
Weight,  45  pounds. 

Louden  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Forks  are  in  use  in  all  parts  of  the  United  States  and  Canada  and  in  all 
kinds  of  hay.  Wherever  the  fork  is  known  customers  are  enthusiastic  in  saying  it  cannot  be  beaten  in  any 
respect  by  any  hay  fork  that  has  ever  been  made. 

The  arched  support  is  covered  by  patents  and  is  the  greatest  improvement  ever  made  in  grapple  forks. 
It  secures  a  perfect  balance,  by  means  of  which  the  fork  can  be  either  opened  or  closed  with  the  slightest 
touch.  The  fork  is  neat  in  dt.sign  and  perfectly  balanced  in  all  of  its  parts  and  adequately  strong  for  any 
work  it  will  ever  be  called  upon  to  do. 

The  material  used  in  the  construction  of  the  fork  is  a  special  high-grade  steel.  The  steel  is  very  stiff 
with  just  enough  spring  to  it  so  it  will  not  bend  or  break  under  the  heaviest  work.  The  tines  of  the  cheaper 
constructed  forks  soon  become  bent  and  twisted  out  of  shape  and  the  fork  is  made  useless.  Be  sure  to  get 
a  Louden  Fork.     They  are  built  of  special  steel  that  will  hold  its  shape  under  the  heaviest  work. 

For  Timothy  Hay 

In  long  timothy  hay,  any  kind  of  hay  fork  can  be  used  with 
fairly  good  satisfaction.  Much  of  the  success  in  using  a  harpoon 
fork  depends  on  the  manner  in  which  the  hay  is  loaded  on  the 
wagon.  If  the  man  on  the  wagon  knows  how  and  has  the  time 
to  load  carefully,  fairly  good  results  are  secured  with  a  harpoon 
fork.  The  best  results,  however,  are  always  secured  with  the 
Louden  Grapple  Fork.  No  difference  how  the  hay  is  loaded  on 
the  wagon,  the  Louden  Balance  Grapple  Fork  handles  it  right. 
When  using  a  harpoon  fork,  there  is  always  a  lot  of  hay  that 
will  shake  loose  and  fall  back  to  the  wagon  or  on  the  barn  floor. 
All  of  this  litter  and  extra  work  is  saved  by  using  a  Louden 
Balance  Grapple   Fork. 

For  Clover  Hay 

It  is  annoying  and  expensive  to  try  to  use  a  harpoon  fork 

for  unloading  clover  hay,   and  especially  so  if   the  hay  has 

become  a  little  dry.     As  a  rule,  the  fork  will  pull  up  through 

Fig.  A-351 — G-Tine  Fork  Closed  the  hay  and  lift  only  a  very  small  load.      It  takes  about  three 


Page  Thirtv-eight 


Mmi*\ii 


Louden  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Forks— Continued 

times  as  long  and  requires  about  three  times  as  much  hard  work  to  unload  a  load  of  clover  hay  with  a  har- 
poon fork  as  it  does  with  a  Louden  Balance  Grapple  Fork.  The  fork  puts  Us  arms,  so  to  speak,  around 
a  great  bunch  of  hay  and  binds  it  in  — »  ^»=»^ 

Nature's  own  way,  just  as  you  would 
pick  it  up  and  hold  it  in  your  arms. 
Working  in  clover  hay,  the  grapple 
fork  will  pay  for  itself  in  two  days' 
use  and  will  save  a  lot  of  hard  work. 


Alfalfa  Hay 

The  Louden  Grapple  Fork  will 
make  equally  as  good  a  showing  m 
one  kind  of  hay  as  it  does  in  another. 
It  handles  them  all  as  nearly  the  right 
way  as  any  fork  could  possibly  do. 
The  Louden  Grapple  Fork,  however. 
is  exceptionally  strong  in  alfalfa.  It 
has  an  affinity  for  alfalfa  hay.  It  will 
take  alfalfa  hay  from  the  wagon  and 
carry  it  into  the  hay  mow  or  up  on  to 
the  stack  in  such  big  bunches  that 
users  are  astonished  and  delighted  with 
its  efficiency.  Another  thing,  when  the 
fork  lets  go  of  the  hay  it  spreads  it 
out  and  makes  it  easy  to  mow  away. 


Fig.  686    (Farmer) 

Extra  large  6-Tine 
Fork  Closed 


Louden  Extra  Large  G-Tine  Balance 
Grapple  Fork 
Specifications 

Spreads  when  open,  6  feet  7  inches. 
Width  between  outside  tines,  25  inches. 
Tines  go  into  hay  24  inches. 
Weight.  50  pounds. 


Fig.  648     (Prophet) 
4-Tine  Fork  Open 

Louden  Standard  4-Tine   Balance 
Grapple  Fork 

Specifications 

Spreads  when  open.  58  inches. 
Width  between  outside  tines,  19  inches. 
Tines  go  into  hay  24  inches. 
Weight,  40  pounds. 

It  drops  every  straw  and  no  hay  is  left  clinging   to 
the  tines  and  bothering  in  that  respect. 

Other  Hay 

The  Louden  Balance  Grapple  Fork  will  handle  any 
kind  of  hay.  In  the  Far  North  where  the  Canada  field 
pea  flourishes  and  in  the  Far  South  where  the  cow  pea 
blooms,  the  fork  is  handling  the  work  successfully  and 
growing  in  popularity  each  year.  The  grapple  fork 
will  successfully  handle  threshed  straw.  Many 
Michigan  customers  are  using  the  fork  for  putting  their 
bean  crops  into  sheds  preparatory  to  threshing.  Where 
there  is  hay  or  forage  of  any  kind  to  handle,  the 
Louden  Balance  Grapple  Fork  will  do  it  successfully. 

At  first  thought  it  might  seem  a  fork  of  this  size 
would  be  hard  to  handle.  On  the  contrary,  it  is  easy 
to  handle.  When  the  hay  carrier  is  returned  to  the 
trip  block  and  the  fork  pulley  is  released,  the  fork  will 
settle  down  to  the  wagon  without  any  pulling  or  hauling. 
The  fork  goes  down  open  all  ready  to  set  into  the  hay. 
The  man  on  the  load  can  grasp  the  fork  as  it  comes 
down  and  swing  it  into  position  and  set  it  into  the  hay 
just  as  easy  and  just  as  quickly  as  a  harpoon  fork. 

The  fork  is  furnished  in  three  sizes.  The  Standard 
6-tine  size  is  the  one  most  largely  used.  The  4-tine 
fork  is  exactly  the  same  as  the  6-tine  fork  except  the 
center  tine  is  left  out  on  each  side.  The  extra  large  6- 
tine  fork  is  built  heavier  throughout  than  the  other 
forks.  The  Standard  size  6-tine  and  4-tine  forks  are 
large  enough  for  practical  use  under  average  conditions. 
The  extra  large  fork  is  desirable  for  clover  and  alfalfa 
where  extremely  heavy  loads  are  to  be  handled. 


Page  Thirty-nine 


Louden  Rocker-Bar  Hay  Fork— Fig.  1137 


The  Louden  Rocker-Bar  Hay  Fork  is  an  extra  strong  fork 
constructed  out  of  the  best  quahty  high  carbon  fork  steel. 
The  fork  will  enter  the  hay  easily.  The  tines  lock  in  position 
either  open  or  closed  and  the  toes  cannot  double  back  when 
entering  green  or  tough  hay. 

The  cross  bar  on  the  fork  is  placed  near  the  top  and  it 
gathers  the  hay  or  grain  from  the  end  of  the  point  instead  of 
from  two  inches  above  the  bottom.  This  fork,  therefore,  has 
a  larger  capacity  and  will  carry  bigger  loads  than  the  ordinary 
double  harpoon  fork.  When  the  load  is  carried  into  the  mow 
the  fork   trips  easy  and  will  drop  its  load  clean. 

Louden  Triple 

Harpoon  Fork 

Fig.  350 

The  Louden  Triple 
Harpoon  Fork  is  the 
lightest  weight  and  at 
the  same  time  the 
strongest  harpoon  fork 
made.  The  fork  is  all 
fork.  It  will  go  down 
into  the  hay  clear  out 
of  sight,  will  lift  a  big- 
ger load  and  carry  the 
load  closer  to  the  track 
than  any  other  har- 
poon fork  made. 


View  B  View  A 

Fig.  350     (Peerless) 
Specifications 

For  use  in  any  type  of  barn. 

Can  be  used  with  any  hay  carrier. 

For  use  in  all  kinds  of  hay. 

Body  and  tines  of  special  quality  fork  steel. 

Lock  lever  of  malleable  iron. 

Length  of  tines,  24  inches. 

Weight.  12  pounds. 

Nellis  Single 

Harpoon  Fork 

Fig. 356 

Specifications 

For    use    in    any   type  of 

barn. 
Can  be  used  with  any  hay 

carrier. 
Length  of  tine,   26  inches. 
Weight,  13  pounds. 


This  is  the  old  orig- 
inal type  of  hay  fork. 
It  will  do  good  service 
in  long,  heavy  timothy 
hay.  I  s  not  so  success- 
full  in  clover  or  alfalfa, 
especially  if  the  hay 
is  somewhat  dry. 


Fig.  356  (Poker) 


Fig.  1137     (Tuttle) 
Specifications 

For  use  in  any  style  of  barn. 

Can  be  used  with  any  kind  of  hay  carrier. 

Will  handle  any  kind  of  hay. 

Length  of  tines  under  head  (distance  tines  go  in 

hay),  31   inches. 
The  tines  and  main  frame  of  the  fork   are    of 

special  high  carbon  fork  steel. 
The  rocker  bar.  toes  and  lock  are  malleable  iron. 
Weight,  20  pounds. 
In  Fig.  330,  View  A  shows  the  fork  open,  ready  to  enter  the 
hay.  The  small  tapering  tines  will  enter  the  hay  easily.  The  lever 
is  then  pushed  downward,  forcing  the  tines  into  the  position  as 
shown  in  View  B.  In  addition  to  lifting  big  loads,  the  triple 
harpoon  fork  will  bind  its  load  from  top  to  bottom  and  prevent 
the  hay  from  shaking  loose  and  falling  back. 

This  fork  can  be  used  with  any  make  of  hay  carrier  and  is  so 
strong  and  compactly  built  that  it  will  give  years  of  service. 

Harris  Double  Harpoon  Fork — Fig.  353 
Specifications 

For  use  in  any  type  of  barn. 
Can  be  used  on  any  kind  of  hay  carrier. 
Made  in  three  sizes: 
Standard  size. 

Length  of  tines  under  cross  bar.  243-2  inches. 

Width  between  tines,  15 J2  inches. 

Weight,  19  pounds. 
Intermediate  size. 

Length  of  tines  under  cross  bar,  31    inches. 

Width  between  tines,  15}^  inches. 

Weight,  20  pounds. 

Large  size  (Alfalfa). 

Length  of  tines  under  cross  bar,  32  inches. 

Width  between  tines,  2 1  inches. 

Weight,  32  pounds. 

The  Harris  Double  Harpoon  is  the 
original  harpoon  fork.  It  has  been  on 
the  market  for  years  and  will  do  good 
work  under  all  ordinary  conditions. 

It  is  built  of  genuine  fork  steel,  for  use  in  any  barn, 
type  of  hay  carrier  and  in  any  kind  of  hay. 


Fig.  353 

with  any 


Page  Forty 


,)iu\;k.'^^LUMHih:i*Aii\M.\ 


Louden  Hay  Slings  and  Fittings 


The  Use  of  Slings 

Like  everything  else,  some  judg- 
ment is  required  in  using  slings  to 
obtain  the  best  results.  The  power 
available,  the  length  of  rack,  the 
size  of  wagon-loads,  and  the  space 
above  beams  in  the  barn  should  all 
be  considered  and  the  number  of 
slings  estimated  and  their  length 
adjusted  accordingly. 

Slings  require  more  room  over 
beams  than  forks,  therefore  it  is 
unwise  to  purchase  a  sling  outfit 
that  hangs  away  down  below  the 
track.  We  have  always  watched 
this  point  carefully  and  our  carriers 
and  sling  attachments  have  been 
made  compactly  so  as  to  occupy 
the  least  possible  space. 

Our    experience  has  been   that 

the  rack  should  not  be  over  sixteen 

feet    long    (and    fourteen    feet     is 

better)    unless    the   barn,    elevator 

Fig.  319  and  everything  else  are  on  a  very 

large  scale.     Slings  spread  the  full  length  of  a  fourteen  to  sixteen  foot  rack  require  about  ten  feet  of 

space  between  the  track  and  beams  for  the  load  to  pass  through. 

Where  a  large  amount  of  hay  is  to  be  handled,  and  there  is  sufficient  clearance  room  through  the  hay 

door  and  in  the  mow  for  the  large  loads,  there  is  no  plan  that  equals  the  use  of  slings.     Generally  three 

slings  are  used  to  a  wagon,  taking  the  load  into  the  mow  at  three  drafts,  and  cleaning  the  rack  perfectly 

with  no  shatterings  to  pick  up. 

The  first  sling  is  placed  on  the  rack,  using  care  to  draw  the  ends  out  where  they  can  be  reached  when 

the  hay  is  piled  on.     One-third  of  the  load 

is    placed,    another    sling    laid    on,    again 

using  care  to  lay  out  the  ends  where  they 

will   be   in    reach.     Another    third   of  the 

hay   is   then   loaded    and    the   third   sling 

laid  on,  when  the  loading  is  completed. 
In  unloading  the  hay,  the  sling  pulleys 

are  spread  apart  and  one  hooked  into  each 

end  of  the  top  sling.     The   power  on  the 

draft  rope  gradually  brings  them  together 

and  rolls  the  hay  up  as  shown  in  Fig.  319. 

When    the  sling  is  tripped   the  spring  of 

the  hay  causes  it  to  unroll  and  spread  in 

the  mow  evenly  (See   Fig.    320),   and  in 

practically  the  same  shape  it  occupied  on 

the  wagon. 

We  were  the  originators  of  successful 

slings   and  sling  carriers,  and  we  warrant 

ours  to  be  superior  to  any  on  the  market. 


Fig.  320 
See  How  it  Spreads  the  Hay 

._ , ..   „._^    ___   It  is  tripped  in  the  center  below  the  hay  and  separates  into  two  parts. 

We  have  made  a  special  study  of  slings  and    letting  hay  drop  out  between  them   perfectly  dear,  and  without  tilting  it 


','.""  '"*'"  •■— >-  —  "f^      ^-  ---—.7         --  --o       ■  edffe    as  side  trio  shnes  invariably  do.     The  hay  being  first  rolled  up. 

sling  earners,  and  during  the  past  twenty-  °^  :^^:;„"lCe.  UNROLLS  when'^discharged  and  spreads  out  in  the 

five  years  we  have  thoroughly  tested  and  „„„  „,  o„  th^  gtack  as  wide  as  the  length  of  the  Sling,  and  in  EXACTLY 

greatly  improved  them.  THE  SAME  SHAPE  it  lay  on  the  load. 


Page  Forty-one 


irnTTnTirnniTiTmTnTTTnnii 


Louden  Carry-All  Hay  Sling — Fig.  984 


=    ■M=S=jB« 


Fig.  984  (Entire) 
Specifications 


For  use  in  any  type  of  barn. 

Can  be  handled  with  any  Sling  Hay  Carrier. 

Standard  width  of  shng.  6  feet. 

Cross  bars  are  of  hard  wood.  2"x2"x6'. 

Length  of  shng  is  adjustable  from  15  to  2!  feet. 

Main  ropes.  }  2  inch. 

Center  cross  rope,  Jg  inch. 


Outside  rope,  ys  inch. 

Trip  rope.   3%  inch. 

Ropes  clamped  to  cross  bars  with  steel  hook  bolts 

Sling  coupling  of  malleable  iron. 

Safe  working  capacity,  2.000  pounds. 

Weight,  36  pounds. 


The  Carry-All  is  the  popular  leader  of  the  widely  known  and  widely  used  Louden  line  of  Hay  Slings. 
It  is  designed  for  hard,  heavy  work  and  yet  it  works  so  perfectly  and  so  easily  that  it  is  adapted  for  use 
anywhere  that  a  hay  sling  can  be  used. 

This  sling  is  strong  enough  to  permit  unloading  an  ordinary  load  of  hay  at  a  single  lift,  and  can  safely 
be  used  to  handle  ton  loads.  The  design  of  the  sling  is  new.  The  two  cross  bars  in  the  center  are  held 
close  together  and  are  connected  by  a  strong  double  lock  instead  of  one  lock  only,  as  generally  used. 

This  is  the  ideal  sling  for  handling  short  growths,  such  as  threshed  straw,  headed  grain,  bound  grain, 
dry  or  short  clover  and  alfalfa.  On  account  of  its  close  construction  and  the  fact  that  it  is  connected  at 
two  points  in  the  middle,  there  is  no  chance  for  short  hay  or  straw  to  shatter  through  or  fall  out.  The 
sling  is  equally  adapted  for  handling  the  long  and  heavy  growths. 

The  double  lock  works  easily  and  perfectly.  The  trip  rope  attaches  to  one  lock  only,  the  other  lock 
being  merely  a  hook  and  an  eye.  A  slight  pull  on  the  single  trip  rope  releases  both  locks  simultaneously. 
The  lock  releases  as  easy  under  a  heavy  load  as  a  light  one.  In  coupling  the  sling  together  the  hook  is 
inserted  in  the  eye  and  at  the  other  end  the  catch  is  snapped  into  place.  The  connection  is  quickly  made 
and  will  hold  securely. 


Page  Forty-two 


...\^.'i.!feNi  I  >.'!»>  iS^ 


Fig.  666     (4-ft.,  Moon;  5-ft.,  Mars) 
Specifications 

For  use  wherever  a  sling  can  be  used. 

Can  be  handled  on  any  Shng  Hay  Carrier. 

Furnished  in  4-ft.  width  and  5-ft.  width. 

Cross  bars  are  of  2-inch  by  2-inch  hard  wood. 

Length  of  shng  is  adjustable  from  1  5  feet  to  21  feet 

Main  ropes,  J  2  inch. 

Trip  rope,  Yi  inch.  ,    d   1 

Ropes  clamped  to  cross  bars  with  Steel  Hook  Bolts, 

Sling  coupling  of  malleable  iron. 

Safe  working  capacity,  1 ,000  pounds. 

Weight,  4-ft.  size,  I6J^  pounds. 

Weight.  5-ft.  size.  27  pounds. 


Louden  Three-Rope  Sling 

The  Louden  Three-Rope  Sling  is 
very  strong  and  dependable.  There 
are  three  main  ropes  on  each  side. 
This  offers  a  close,  compact  construc- 
tion and  makes  this  a  desirable  sling 
for  handling  the  shorter  growths  of 
hay  or  threshed  straw. 

The  coupling  in  the  center  is  made 
strong  for  heavy  work.  The  latch 
holds  securely  until  the  proper  time 
when  an  easy  pull  on  the  trip  rope 
will  cause  the  coupling  to  separate 
and  sling  to  drop  its  load. 

This  sling  is  adapted  for  use  any- 
where that  a  sling  can  be  used. 


Louden  Standard 
Hay  Sling 

The  Standard  Sling  is  the  first  suc- 
cessful type  of  hay  sling  placed  on  the 
market.  It  is  a  serviceable  sling  for 
general  use  and  will  give  good  wear  and 
service.  For  extreme  short  stuff  we  rec- 
commend  one  of  the  more  closely  con- 
structed slings  described  in  these  pages. 

The  Standard  Hay  Sling  has  the 
strength  and  wearing  qualities  necessary 
for  satisfactory  work,  and  the  moderate 
price  at  which  the  sling  is  sold  has  made 
it  very  popular  among  hay  growers.  The 
sling  is  adjustable  in  length  from  1 5  feet 
to  21   feet. 


Fig.  324     (Moxie) 
Specifications 

For  use  in  any  type  of  barn.     Can  be  handled  with  any  Sling  Hay  Carrier 

Will  handle  any  kind  of  hay.     Width  of  sling.  6  feet. 

Cross  bars  are  of  hard  wood,  2  inches  by  2  mches  by  6  feet. 

Length  of  shng  is  adjustable  from  1  3  feet  to  21  feet 

Main  ropes,  K  inch.     Center  cross  ropes,  and  outside  ropes,  f  g  mch. 

Trip  rope,  ye  inch. 

Ropes  clamped  to  cross  bars  with  steel  hook  bolts. 

Sling  coupling  of  malleable  iron.     Safe  working  capacity,  1 .600  pounds. 

Weight,  28  pounds. 


Fig.  600     (Modern) 
Specifications 

For  use  in  any  type  of  barn. 

Can  be  handled  with  any  Sling  Hay  Carrier. 

Standard  width  of  sling.  5  feet.  ,       r  , 

Cross  bars  are  of  hard  wood.  2  mches  by  2  mches  by  5  teot. 

Length  of  sling  is  adjustable  from  15  to  21  feet. 

Outside  ropes,  ^2  inch. 

Center  ropes,  5  s  inch. 

Trip  rope,  y&  inch. 

Ropes  clamped  to  cross  bars  with  Steel  Hook  Bolts. 

Sling  coupling  of  malleable  iron. 

Safe  working  capacity,  1 .400  pounds. 

Weight,  20  pounds. 

Louden  California 
Hay  Sling 

The  California  Hay  Sling  is  de- 
signed for  handling  any  kind  of  hay. 
It  is  especially  recommended  for  very 
short  hay  or  bound  or  headed  grain. 
It  is  called  the  California  Sling  be- 
cause of  the  great  demand  for  it  in 
the  Golden  State. 

With  the  exception  of  the  Carry- 
All  it  is  the  heaviest  and  most  compact 
sling  we  make.  The  coupling  in  the 
center  is  extra  heavy  and  has  a  strong 
catch  that  will  hold  securely  until  the 
proper  time  when  it  trips  easily. 

The  sling  is  adjustable  in  length 
from  1  5  feet  to  2 1  feet  and  by  loosen- 
ing the  hook  bolts  the  cross  bars  may 
be  adjusted  to  fit  any  rack. 


Page  Forty-three 


imnrmrmimTTTTinTTTrTn 


vHm  ^tiii  0  a^.^i  J  m  i  i  i^i  a>  :v«n:f^f^( 


Fig.    516     (Mate; 


Fig.  1106-i 

Weight 

2  pounds 


Sling  Coupling— Fig.  516 

The  coupling  used  with  all  Louden  Slings  except  the  Carry-All. 

The  coupling  is  made  of  malleable  iron.  The  working  parts  are  completely  pro- 
tected and  the  trip  cord  can  be  easily  and  quickly  attached.  While  the  catch  is  posi- 
tive and  secure,  a  slight  pull  on  the  trip  rope  will  cause  the  coupling  to  unlatch. 
Weight,  2}/2  pounds. 

Louden  Handy  Hay  Sling  and  Holder 
Fig.  1106 

(For  Use  With  Shng  Carrier  Only) 
Weight,  Three-Rope  Sling,  4 J  pounds 
Weight,  Two-Rope  Sling,    3i  pounds 

The  ease  and  convenience  with  which  this  all-rope  sling  can 
be  handled  has  gained  for  it  the  appropriate  name  "Handy". 
As  the  sling  has  no  spreaders  it  can  more  easily  be  carried  and 
spread  on  the  rack  than  slings  having  cross  bars. 

The  sling  trips  at  the  end  (or  side)  instead  of  in  the  center  as  do 
other  slings.  The  sling  can  be  made  up  of  two  ropes  or  three  ropes 
as  desired.  The  sling  holder  is  provided  with  three  latch  hooks  to 
carry  either  style  sling. 

The  Louden  Handy  Hay  Sling  is  the  only  sling  of  its  kind  that 
is  made  adjustable  so  it  can  be  lengthened  or  shortened  to  fit  any 
length  rack.  It  will  handle  any  kind  of  hay  or  forage.  The  sling 
is  easily  drawn  out  from  under  hay  in  the  mow  and  can  be  used 
in  filling  the  barn  full  up  to  the  comb.  Three  slings  are  generally 
required  for  each  wagon. 

Only    one    holder    (Fig.    !I06-A) 


Fig.  1106     (Handy) 
The    holder    is    made 


is    required    for    each    carrie 

of  malleable  iron.  The  holder  is  intended  for  use  with 
right  angle  or  parallel  sling  pulleys.  The  latch  or  trip 
in  the  holder  is  quickly  set  and  is  secure  and  will  trip 
easily  at  the  proper  time. 


Side  Trip  Sling  Holder 

(For  Use  With  Fork  Carrier  Only) 

Fig.  328  represents  our  Side  Trip  Sling  Holder,  and 
Fig.  329  is  the  same  with  ropes  attached.  The  ropes 
are  laid  crosswise  on  the  rack  under  hay  to  be  elevated 
and  the  ends  are  drawn  up  by  hand.  The  looped  ends 
are  slipped  over  the  trip  Y,  which  is  then  locked.  The 
other  ends  are  usually  drawn  through  the  hook  H  and 
tied  in  a  bow  knot.  Four  sets  of  ropes  to  a  wagon  are 
generally  used. 

Weight,  2}4  pounds. 


Fig.  328     (Martyr) 


Fig.  329 


How  To  Securely  Clamp  Metal  Parts  Together 

1st.     Put  all  the  clamps  on  loosely  so  the  parts  can  be  easily  racked  to  line  them  up  properly. 

2d.       After  they  are  all  in  proper  position  draw  the  nuts  up  tight  with  a  wrench. 

3d.      When  tightly  drawn,  hit  the  heads  of  the  bolts  heavily  with  a  hammer  to  set  them. 

4th.     Tighten  up  the  nuts  again  with  a  wrench  as  much  as  can  be  safely  done. 

When  treated  this  way  the  bolts  will  not  be  liable  to  get  loose  but  without  hammering  their  heads  so  as 
to  solidly  set  them  they  will  be  liable  to  work  loose  under  a  strain  and  especially  so  under  a  jar.  This 
is  important  in  attaching  clamps  of  any  kind,  especially  splice  clamps  for  overhead  track,  couplings  and 
clamps  for  connecting  the  tubing  of  animal  stalls  and  pens  together,  especially  pens  to  hold  vicious  bulls 
and  for  other  purposes  requiring  solidity  and  durability  of  structure. 


Page  Forty-four 


^^ZLUiikH;h:i\ 


FAIRriELP.   IOWA 


Louden  Fork  Clevis — Fig.  652 


Specifications 

Can  be  used  with  Parallel  or  Right-angle  Sling 

Pulleys. 
Can  be  used  with  any  style  of  fork. 
Made  of  malleable  iron. 
Weight,  2J4  pounds. 


Figs.  652  and  653  represent  our  Fork 
Clevis  attached  to  sling  pulleys  and  by 
means  of  which  a  hay  fork  can  be  used 
with  Louden  Hay  SUng  Carriers.  The 
Fork  Clevis  is  attached  to  the  top  of  the 
fork  by  means  of  a  heavy  bushing  placed 
between  the  two  sides  of  the  clevis  and 
held  in  place  by  a  bolt.  The  clevis  with 
the  fork  attached  can  be  hooked  on  to 
the  sling  pulleys  in  a  moment.  There  is 
no  loss  of  time  making  the  change  from 
Fig.  652    (Maroon)  sling  to  fork.  Fig.  653    (M 

This  clevis  is  largely  used  where  a  sling  carrier  is  in  the  barn  and  the  practice  is  followed  o 
the  top  of  the  load  with  a  fork  and  cleaning  up  the  rack  with  a  sling.     The  fork  can  be  hung  in 
or  one-third  way  from  one  end  as  may  be  necessary  to  balance  it  with  double  or  triple  draft, 
shows  the  clevis  in  use  with  our  Parallel  pulleys  and  Fig.  653  with  our  Self-Locking  Pulleys, 
end  of  Louden  Balance  Grapple  Fork  is  shown  in  the  illustrations. 


aroon) 

f  removing 

the  middle 

Fig.  632 

The  upper 


Louden   Sling  Binding  Pulley — Fig.  332 


Many  farmers  and  hay  growers  follow  the  practice  of  removing 
the  top  of  the  load  with  a  fork  and  cleaning  up  the  rack  with  a 
sling.  Or,  sometimes,  it  is  necessary  to  haul  a  load  of  dry,  fine 
straw  that  cannot  well  be  handled  with  a  fork,  and  it  is  desired  to 
use  a  sling. 

The  Louden  Sling  Binding  Pulley  is  the  tool  to  use  for  this 
work. 

It  can  be  used  with  any  Fork  Carrier  hav- 
ing not  larger  than  4-inch  fork  pulley  and 
without  any  change  of  rope  or  re-threading  of 
carrier.  In  the  illustration  the  Pulley  A 
represents  the  regular  fork  pulley  used  with 
the  carrier.  The  Pulley  B  is  the  Sling  Binding 
Pulley.  The  Fork  Pulley  A  is  slipped  thiough 
the  Sling  Pulley  B,  the  two  pulleys  are  then 
spread  apart  and  hooked  into  the  two  ends  of 
the  s'ing.  When  the  load  starts  to  lift,  the 
Fork  PuUeyA  slips  back  through  the  Sling  Pul- 
ley B  and  registers  in  the  carrier.  This  binds 
the  load  securely  and  the  carrier  supports  the 
load  as  it  is  being  carried  back  into  the  mow 
the  same  as  in  ordinary  work.  The  Pulley  B 
is  the  only  extra  part  necessary  to  handle. 
This  can  be  kept  hanging  within  easy  reach  of 
the  man  on  the  load,  so  no  time  is  lost  in 
changing  from  fork  to  sling. 


Fig.  332     (Mentor) 
Specifications 

Frame  made  of  malleable  iron. 
Wheels  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Weight  (part  B  cnly),  5  pounds. 


Page  Forty-five 


4 
i'^<i. 


% 
'^' 


a* 


Louden  Self -Locking  Sling 
Pulleys— Fig.  330 

(Right  Angle  Sling  Pulleys) 
Specifications 

Furnished  with  registering  head  to  fit  any  Hay  Carrier. 
Used  with  Louden  Carriers,  slings  are  carried  within  20 

inches  of  the  track. 
Pulleys  are  of  malleable  iron  except  the  wheels. 
Wheels  are  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Weight,  10  pounds. 

It  is  sometimes  desired  to  use  Hay  Slings  in 

barns  already  equipped  with  Fork   Carriers       If 

the  track  is  good  and  the  carrier  is 

strong  and  sturdy,  this  can  be  done. 

Figs.    330-331    illustrate   the   Louden 

Self-Locking      Sling       Pulleys.     With 

these   pulleys   slings   can    be  handled 

with  any  hay  carrier,  using  a  register- 
ing head.     We  can  furnish  the  pulleys 

fitted  with  any  of  the  registering  heads 

illustrated  on  opposite  page  and  new 

heads  are  made   to  fit  other  carriers 

when  there  is  sufficient  call  for  them. 
Our  advice  to  customers  who  wish 

to   use  Hay  Slings   and   who  have  a 

considerable  amount  of  hay  to  handle, 

is  to  buy  a  regular  sling  carrier  built 

for  heavy  work. 

However,  we  sell  thousands  of  these  sling  pulleys  for  use  with  fork  carriers  of  all  kinds  and  they  always 

give  good  satisfaction  so  long  as  care  is  used  not  to  overload  the  carriers. 

Fig.  422  represents  a  set  of  Louden  Self-Locking  Sling  Pulleys  in  use  with  our  Louden  Junior  Fork 

Carrier.  The  pulleys  are  shown  locked  together  but  not  yet  registered 
in  the  carrier.  Fig.  330  is  a  front  view  of  the  pulleys  locked  together 
and  Fig.  331  is  a  side  view  of  the  pulleys  spread  apart  to  connect  to 
the  sling.  As  the  load  is  elevated,  the  two  parts  of  the  sling  pulley  come 
together  and  lock  as  shown  in  Fig.  330.  The 
registering  head  then  enters  the  carrier  and  is 
engaged  by  the  grappling  hooks  the  same  as  the 
fork  pulley  when  a  fork  is  being  used. 


Fig    422 


July  30,  1914. 
Gentlemen:  —  We  find  your  goods  unexpect- 
edly satisfactory.  The  hay  track  and  carrier 
works  like  a  charm,  and  the  hanger  and  barn 
door  tracks  are  past  reproach.  Thanking  you 
for  all  past  favors.  I  remain. 

Yours  respectfully, 
H.  1.  Armour, 

Rising  Sun,  Md. 


Fig.  330 


Page  Forty-six 


Registering  Heads  for  Louden  Self-Locking  Sling  Pulleys 


RHI 


RH2         RH3         RH4         RH5        RH6 


RH7 


RK6        RH9 


Louden  Hall 


Star  Leader  Church        Porler 


Milwaukee 
Reversible 


Milwaukee      Burbanks 
Swivel  Eclipse 


RHIO      RHIi        RHI2        RHI3         RHI4    __    RHI5 RHI6  ^RHI7 


Ney  and      Osborn        Jordan  C.,B.  &Q.  Myers 

Superior  O.  K. 


Ashland  Myers         Ideal  and       Janesville        Haymaker 

Combination    Jumbo  Deadlock       or  Imperial 


Porter*8        Boyd        Diamond  New 

Swivel  Diamond 


Boyd 
Reversible 


Unloader 
Clover  Leaf 


W.  B.  Acme 
Ist  Pattern 


W.  B.  Acme 
Improved 


Louden 
Senior 


Meadow 
King 


Meyers  Unloader 
7-in.  Sheave 


The  illustrations  above  show  the  Registering  Heads 
which  we  make  for  our  Self -Locking  Sling  Pulleys. 
These  heads  will  fit  the  different  carriers  named. 

When  in  doubt  as  to  the  head  required,  send  the 
fork  pulley  of  your  carrier  by  express,  prepaid,  and  we 
will  fit  the  pulley  with  the  proper  head  and  return  fork 
pulley  with  order. 


Page  Forty-seven 


^^^^^^ 


Fig.  649     (Mastiff) 


Louden  Parallel  Sling  Pulleys 
Fig.  649 


Specifications 

Can  'o*-  used  with  any  Louden  Hay  Sling  Carrier. 
Can  be  used  with  any  center-trip  Hay  Sling. 
Frame  of  pulley  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  wheels  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Diameter  of  Rope  Wheels,  4  inches. 
Weight   per  pair  (2  pulleys).  10)2  pounds. 


The  Louden  Parallel  Sling  Pulleys  are  built  for  service  and  wear  and  for  use  wherever  there  is  need 
for  a  sling  pulley.  The  frame  of  the  pulley  is  of  malleable  ir  m  with  heavy  reinforcing  ribs  at  points  where 
strength  is  needed. 

The  meeting  edges  of  the  pulleys  are  provided  with  wide  flanges  end  the  upper  ends  are  closed  so  they 
cannot  run  into  each  other.  The  rope  wheels  and  the  pulley  frames  are  made  smooth  and  free  from  sharp 
corners  so  they  will  not  wear  the  rope.  The  hooks  are  fitted  with  self-acting  safety  stops  to  prevent  the 
slings  from  becoming  detached.  Eyes  are  provided  in  the  lower  end  of  the  pulleys  into  which  the  end 
of  draft  rope  can  be  fastened  when  it  is  desired  to  rig  the  pulleys  triple  draft. 


Louden  Senior  Parallel  Pulleys 
Fig.  650 


Specifications 

For  use  with  cable  draft  rope. 
Can  be  used  with  any  center-trip  Hay  Sling. 
Frame  of  pulley  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Rope  wheels  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Diameter  of  Rope  Wheels,  5  inches. 
Weight,  per  pair  (2  pulleys),  1 5^2  pounds. 


Fig.  650     (Miller) 


The  Louden  Senior  Parallel  Sling  Pulleys  are  of  the  same  design  as  the  regular  parallel  sling  pulleys 
except  they  are  larger  and  heavier  and  are  fitted  with  sheaves  or  rope  wheels  for  's-inch  cable  draft  rope 
instead  of  manila  rope.     The  Senior  pulleys  are  desirable  where  the  work  is  extremely  heavy. 


Right  Angle  and  Parallel  Pulleys 

Fig.  412  shows  how  the  hay  is  deposited  in  the  mow 
with  respect  to  the  Track  A  when  Right  Angle  or  Parallel 
Sling  Pulleys  are  used.  The  Right  Angle  Pulleys  spread 
the  hay  wider  in  the  mow  than  the  Parallel  Pulleys,  unless 
the  latter  are  twisted  quarter  round  before  tripping  the 
sling. 


Fig.  412 


Page  Forty-eight 


Fig.  467     (Paragon) 
Fig.  467.     Knot  Passing 

Pulley.    MjJleable  frame. 

swivel    eye,    6-inch    hard 

maple  sheave  seasoned  in 

oil. 

Weight,  3J4  pounds. 


Fig.  468    (Prelude) 
Fig.  468.    Draft  Pulley. 
Malleable    frame,    6v«vel 
eye,    6-inch    hard    maple 
sheave  seasoned  in  oil. 

Weight,  3  pounds. 


Louden  High-Grade  Pulleys 

Patented  May  20,   1902. 

Use  of  Pulleys 

Every  article  about  a  haying  outfit  should  be  first- 
class,  strong  and  durable.  When  hay  tools  break  in  the 
haying  season  it  means  delay,  loss  of  time,  frequently 
loss  and  injury  of  hay.  and  occasionally  serious  accidents. 
Such  breakages  occur  chiefly  from  the  use  of  poor  pulleys. 
It  is  therefore  important  that  every  user  of  Hay  Tools 
should  buy  first-class  pulleys. 

We  make  a  specialty  of  High-Grade  Pulleys  which  we 
illustrate  on  the  following  pages.  We  have  given  special 
care  and  attention  to  the  designing  of  our  pulleys,  taking 
into  consideration  every  detail  which  would  add  to  their 
merits.  In  making  the  eye  and  the  frame  we  have  placed 
the  metal  where  the  strength  is  needed,  and  cut  it  out 
where  it  is  not  needed,  so  that  the  pulley  may  have  all 
the  strength  necessary,  and  at  the  same  time  be  light  and 
neat  and  not  cumbersome  to  handle.  The  frame  is  made 
in  two  parts,  held  together  by  rivets  and  bolts.  The  wheel 
or  sheave  turns  on  a  large  malleable  bushing,  recessed  into 
the  frame  of  the  pulley  and  held  in  position  by  a  bolt. 
This  gives  the  pulley  great  strength. 

We  handle  the  cheaper  grade  pulleys,  but  we  cannot 
too  strongly  recommend  the  use  of  the  best  pulleys 
that  can  be  purchased.  Do  not  be  persuaded  to  use 
cheap  pulleys.  The  saving  is  only  a  trifle  in  the  first  cost, 
and  the  use  of  cheap  pulleys  may  mean  much  damage 
and  loss  in  harvest.     The  best  is  the  cheapest  in  the  end. 

Louden  High-Grade  Pulleys  have,  through  many  years 
of  continuous,  satisfactory  service,  proved  themselves 
superior  in  design,  construction  and  durability.  They 
have  no  sharp  corners  to  wear  the  rope.  The  eyes  are 
heavily  ribbed  and  have  tubular  swivels,  which  add 
materially  to  their  strength  and  efficiency. 


Fig.  494    (Passport) 

Fig.  494.  Knot  Passing 
Pulley.  Malleable  frame, 
swivel  eye,  6-inch  diameter 
sheave.  Sheave  made  of 
special  quality  gray  inn. 

Weight,  'JY2  pounds. 


Fig.  495    (Password) 

Fig.  495.  Draft  Pulley. 
Malleable  frame,  swivel 
eye,  6-inch  diameter 
sheave.  Sheave  made  of 
special  quality  gray  iron 

Weight,  5}^  pounds. 


Fig.  553 

Sectional  View 
of  Louden  High 
Grade  Pulleys. 


The  wood  sheaves  turn  on  large  metallic  bushings,  recessed  into  the  sides  of  the 
pulley  frames,  held  in  place  by  heavy  bolts.  The  bearings  in  the  iron  sheaves  also 
turn  on  large  bushings  which  support  the  weight  of  the  load  and  protect  the  connecting 
bolts  from  wear. 

The  sheaves  in  the  four  pulleys  shown  on  this  page  are  interchangeable.  Fig.  553  is 
a  sectional  view  of  the  Iron  Sheave  Pulley,  showing  the  tubular  eye,  the  projection  in 
the  frame  which  protects  the  rope  from  the  edge  of  the  sheave,  the  malleable  bushings 
on  which  the  sheave  turns,  the  recess  in  the  frame  in  which  the  bushing  rests,  and  the 
bolt  that  holds  it  in  place.  This  shows  the  sturdy  construction  which  characterizes  all 
Louden  High-Grade  Pulleys  and  gives  them  marked  superiority  over  all  others. 


Page  Forty-nine 


mm^i\Hiwk:LUiii^i;l^:Vi 


LOU  den's 
^ammotL 


mm 


^S^I^^^^rAlRFlELp.   IOWA  ^'^/^ 


Louden  Mammoth  Pulley — Fig.  519 

The  Mammoth  Pulley  is  made  for  heavy  work. 
It  has  a  select  7-inch  hard  maple  sheave,  seasoned  in 
oil.  It  has  the  tubular  swivel  eye,  large  malleable 
bushings  on  which  the  sheave  turns,  the  guard  over 
the  edge  of  the  sheave  to  prevent  the  rope  from 
cutting, — in  fact  all  of  the  good  features  of  the  pulleys 
previously  described,  and  in  addition  is  larger  and 
stronger.  The  large  sheave  makes  this  pulley  easy 
on  the  rope. 


Fig.  519     (Pencil) 
Specifications 

Weight,  SJX  pounds. 


Fig,  651     (Kuroki) 
Specifications 

Fig.  651.  Cable  Pulley. 
Malleable  iron  frame.  Swivel 
eye.  7-inch  diameter  sheave. 
Sheave  made  of  special  qual- 
ity gray  iron.  Weight,  9 
pounds. 


Cable  Pulleys— Figs.  579-651 

Our  Cable  Pulleys  are  made  with  malleable  iron 
frames  and  have  all  the  good  features  of  our  Rope 
Pulleys — the  tubular  swivel  eye,  frame  made  in  two 
parts,  held  together  with  bolts  and  rivets,  large  malle- 
able bushing,  held  in  recess  in  the  pulley  frame  by  a 
bolt,  and  projections  or  guards  in  the  opening  of  the 
frame  to  protect  the  cable  from  the  edge  of  the 
sheaves  (see  page  49,  Fig.  553).  We  make  them  with 
iron  wheels  only,  and  the  pulley  throughout  is  made 
extra  strong.  The  hole  in  the  sheave  is  chilled  and 
turns  on  a  malleable  bushing.  The  groove  in  the 
sheave  is  made  suitable  for  Ss-inch  diameter  wire  cable. 


Louden  Upright  Floor  Pulley 
Fig.  364 

This  pulley  is  designed  for  use  on  the  floor 
and  in  other  places  where  common  pulleys  lop 
over  when  the  rope  is  loosened,  thus  causing  the 
rope  to  rub  and  bind  in  the  pulleys.  Every  user 
of  Hay  Tools  knows  this  is  annoying  and 
expensive. 

Our  upright  Floor  Pulley  does  not  lop  over 
or  unhook,  nor  bind  and  hold  the  rope  while  the 
carrier  is  being  drawn  back.  A  slot  in  the  bot- 
tom of  the  pulley  slips  over  the  head  of  the  skein 
bolt,  which  is  screwed  into  the  floor  and  while 
holding  the  pulley  upright,  lets  it  turn  freely  in 
any  direction.  They  may  be  used  with  as  good 
results  on  a  wall  or  a  post  in  a  vertical  or  inclined 
position,  as  in  a  horizontal  position. 


Fig.  579     (Perfect) 
Specifications 

Fig.  579.  Cable  Pulley. 
Malleable  iron  frame. 
Swivel  eye.  8-inch  diam- 
eter sheave.  Sheave  is 
made  of  special  quality 
gray  iron.  Weight,  9^4 
pounds. 


Fig.  364     (Palace) 
Specifications 

Fig.  364.     Floor  Pulley. 


Mal- 
nch 


leable  iron  frame.  4' 
diameter  sheave.  Sheave  made  of 
hard  maple  seasoned  in  oil. 
Attaches  to  floor  with  lag  screw. 
Weight,  5}  2  pounds. 


Louden  Machinery  Co.,  Fairfield,  Iowa.                                                                                           Ridgway,  III.   Feb.  9.  1914. 

Gentlemen: 

I  received  the  large  Grapple  Fork  you    shipped   January    10th,    which    was    in    good    condition.      1    am 

well 

satisfied  with  the  fork,      I   have  been  handling  short  wheat  straw,      I    was    surprised    to    see    tlie    fork    handle 

the 

loose  straw  so  well,  which  means  that  I  am  more  than  satisfied  with  it. 

Yours  very  truly. 

Kelly  E.   Moye. 

Page  Fifty 


Some  Special  Pulleys 


Fig.  359  Fig.  435  Fig.  360 

(Pointer)  (Perch)  (Parasite) 

Fig.    366    is    our    Fork    Pulley    used    with   all   of    our  Fork 
Fig.  366  Carriers  except  our  Senior  Carrier,   Fig.    1100. 

(Togard;  J  J.  pj^g  g  4-inch  sheave  and  a  strong  malleable  frame  with 

safety  hook  that  has  the  tubular  swivel.     Weight,  3^4  pounds. 

Fig.  359  is  our  Return  Pulley  with  3-in.  wood  sheave  for  l^-'m.  rope  and  smaller. 
Made   the    same   as    our    High-grade  pulleys    on    page    49.      Weight,     1     pound. 


Fig.  1139 


Fig.   435   is  our  Comb  Pulley,  for  lifting  cord  to  pass  over,  in  the  peak  of  barn 
sheave.     Weight,    Js  pound. 

Fig.  360  is  our  Malleable  Case  Check  Pulley  with  IJ^  in.  iron  sheave, 
rope  and  smaller.     Weight,  6  ounces. 

Fig.  1139  is  our  Fork  Pulley  used  with  our  Senior  Fork  Carrier  only, 
of   special    gray   iron.      Both   Fork   Pulleys   are    built    on    the   same   line 

Weight,    6    pounds. 


1 1  has  IJ^-in.  iron 

Built  extra  strong  for  ^a-in. 

It  has  a   7-in.  sheave  made 
as    our    high   grade    pulleys. 


Fig.  623     (Pawn) 
Specifications 

Frame  made  of  malleable  iron. 
Rope  wheel  special  quality  gray  iron. 
Rope  wheel  4  inches  diameter. 
Weight,  4^4  pounds. 


Louden  Snatch  Pulley  Block — Fig.  623 

The  Snatch  Pulley  Block  shortens  the  distance  the  horse 
travels.  After  passing  through  the  lower  draft  pulley,  the 
end  of  the  rope  is  made  fast  to  the  barn  wall  or  a  stake  driven 
in  the  ground.  Before  making  the  end  of  the  rope  fast  a 
washer  should  be  slipped  on  and  a  knot  tied  in  the  rope,  as 
shown  in  the  illustration.  The  Snatch  Pulley  can  then  be  put 
in  place  on  the  rope.  One  side  of  the  pulley  is  open  so  the 
rope  can  be  thrown  off  and  on.  When  the  load  is  pulled  into 
the  mow,  the  rope  can  be  thrown  off  the 
pulley  and  the  fork  returned  to  the  wagon  j»»       «vi  ^_ 

without  waiting  for  the  —  '^        '111  V^ 

return    of    the    horse. 


Cast  Frame  Pulleys 

Fig.  522.     Cast  Frame  Draft  Pulley,  6-inch  wood  sheave,  has 
large,  loose  pin,  self-oiling  axle.     Weight,  3)4  pounds. 

Fig.    729.     Cast    Frame   Knot   Passing    Pulley,    6-inch   wood, 
sheave  has  large,  loose  pin,  self-oiling  axle.     Weight,  4  pounds. 


Fig.  641     (Ray) 


Fig.  642     (Frank) 


Fig.  522     (Presto)         Fig.  729     (Peter) 

Wood  Frame  Pulley — Reed  Pattern 

The  frame  is  made  of  hard  wood  held  together 
by  rivets  at  the  top.  It  is  provided  with  wrought 
steel  yoke  to  support  the  large,  hollow,  self-lubri- 
cating axle  on  which  the  sheave  turns.  Sheaves 
made  of  hard  maple.  A  good  strong  pulley.  Fig. 
641  shows  the  pulley  with  steel  hook.  Fig.  642 
shows  pulley  with  malleable  eye.  Weight,  2^ 
pounds. 


Page  Fifty-one 


Fig.  389 
(Ensing) 


Louden  Pulley  Hooks,  Etc. 


Fig.  389.     Steel  Floor  Pulley  Hook, 
Weight,  per  dozen,    1 5  pounds 


X  7  inches. 


.. _, ,    J rii,     I  J    puuiiua. 

Fig.  390.     Steel  Rafter  Pulley  Hook, 
Weight,  per  dozen,  IOJ2  pounds. 


5  8x6  inches. 

WCIgllL,     pel     KA\J£,Cll,      IVy^    pv^UllVJO. 

Fig.  391.     Steel  Return  Pulley  Hook,  3^x3J/^  inches. 
Weight,  per  dozen,  3  pounds. 


Pulley  Holders  for  Steel  Track 


Fig.  470  (Provost) 


The  Pulley  Holder,  Fig.  470,  is  designed  for  use  with  the  Louden  Weight  Return, 
Fig.  529,  page  19,  and  also  at  any  other  place  where  it  is  necessary  to  hang  a  pulley 
immediately  underneath  a  Steel   Hay  Carrier  Track. 

pounds.      It  is  made  of  refined 


Fig.  470  shows  PuUy  Holder  for  Double-Bead  Steel  Track.     Weight,  - 
malleable  iron  and  is  clamped  to  the  steel  track  by  means  of  heavy  bolts. 


How  to  Set  Pulley  Hooks 

Pulley  Hooks  should  always  be  set 
so    they   will  stand   straight  with  the 
line  of  draft,  as  shown  by  the  dotted 
lines.     When  the  pull  is  crossways  it 
/    I  /      ^  '1  /      I        will  bend  the  hook.     Of  the  illustra- 

I  '  y         i        tion  at  left,  the  first,  third  and  fifth  are 

right;  while  second,  fourth  and  sixth  are  wrong.     It  is  the  Cross  Pull  that  bends  or  breaks  the  hook. 
A  yz  or  ^4  hook  put  in  right  will  stand  more  than  a  ^-inch  hook  put  in  wrong. 


Louden  Bracket  Pulley  Holder — Fig.  348 

Specifications 

For  supporting  pulley  (or  draft  rope.     Made  o(  malleable  iron. 
Will  carry  any  common  pulley.     Weight,  3  pounds. 

Louden  Bracket  Pulley  Holder  is  used  to  carry  the  draft  rope  out  through 
the  barn  siding  close  to  the  eaves  and  carries  the  rope  close  to  the  mow  so 
that  the  hay  does  not  interfere  with  the  rope  or  pulleys  when  the  mow  is  full. 
The  hole  in  the  side  of  the  barn  is  small  and  the  pulley  is  up  close  to  the  eave 
and  is  always  in  the  dry.  Pulley  can  be  put  in  or  removed  easily  from  inside 
of  the  barn.  In  barns  where  hay  is  taken  in  at  one  end  or  both  ends,  if  the 
rope  is  run  the  nearest  way  to  the  ground  from  the  end  of  the  track,  it  reduces 
friction  and  requires  less  rope. 

The  holder  supports  the  pulley  and  at  the  same  time  allows  it  to  adjust 

itself  in  line  with  the  draft.      It  also  holds  the  rope  free  so  it  does  not  rub 

and  wear  on  the    timbers.     To  attach    the    holder,  cut    a    hole   in    the  barn 

Fig.  348      Pyramid'  siding  4  inches  wide  and  8  or   10  inches  high.     Bolt  the  holder    in  place  so 

the  hook  will  be  even  with  the  top  of  the  hole.     Bolts  are  furnished  with  the 

holder.     This  is  an    inexpensive  article    that    should  be   included  with    every  hay-unloading    outfit   for 

barns  as  described.     The  saving  in  the  amount    of    draft    rope    required,   the    less    amount   of  wear  on 

the  rope,  and  the  reduced  friction,  make  the  Bracket  Pulley  Holder  a  profitable  investment  immediately. 


Louden  Lightning  Rope  Hitch — Fig.  367 

Made  of  Malleable  Iron 

For  quickly  connecting  Singletrees  or  Doubletrees  to      Fig.  383     (Excelsior) 

draft  rope.     No  time  lost  tying  or  untying  knots  in   the   Louden      Swivel      Rope 

rope.     The  rope  is  slipped    through   the  hitch  and   the   Hook  with  safety  latch. 
11.  1  11-  1  1        ..      ir        I.  1  Weight    J4    pound. 


Fig.  367     (Emery)  end   bent   around   and    slipped    under   itself.      It   can  be         «"g"t-4 

instantly  attached  or  detached  and  will  hold  securely;  also  can  be  adjusted  to  lengthen  or  shorten  the 
rope.     It   is  provided   with   a  safety    hook    which    will    not    become    unlatched.     Weight,    l/s    pounds. 


Page  Fifty-tvkTo 


f^ 


TUTTrmn 


ThpLOUBEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Fig.  344 


Fig.  344A     (Princej 


Louden   Hoisting  Singletree  —  Fig.  344 

Specifications 

For  use  wherever  hoisting  is  to  be  done 

with  a  horse. 
Body  of  hard  wood. 
Trimminge  of  malleable  iron. 
Weight.  6  pounds. 

The  Louden  Hoisting  Singletree  was  designed  for  use 
anywhere  that  hoisting  is  to  be  done  with  a  horse  or 

team  when  the  Singletree  has  no  support.  It  is  especially  popular  and  desirable 
for  use  with  the  hay  unloading  rig  at  hay  time.  It  is  equally  valuable  for  any 
kind  of  hoisting  with  horse  power,  plowing  or  cutting  ice,  plowing  in  orchards, 
vineyards  or  other  places  when  the  ends  of  the  singletree  is  liable  to  injure  the 
trees  or  vines. 

The  Singletree  does  not  drag  against  the  horse's  legs,  and  the  traces  do  not  unhook  or  get  under 
the  horse's  feet  in  backing  or  turning.  The  traces  pass  through  keepers  (K)  and  along  back  of  smgletree 
to  hook  in  center.  The  Singletree  being  bent,  this  brings  it  close  to  the  horse,  like  a  breeching,  without 
having  to  shorten  the  traces  and  it  is  held  up  by  a  cord  (C).  having  a  snap  (S),  which  hooks  into  the  trace 
carrier  iron.     The  eye  to  which  the  draft  rope  is  fastened  is  swiveled.  which  keeps  it  from  kmking. 

The  Singletree  saves  much  time.  The  horse  can  be  turned  short  around  and  there  is  no  chance  for 
the  horse  to  get  over  the  traces.     Also  the  rope  is  held  up  off  the  ground  so  the  horse  cannot  step  on  it. 

Louden's  Spreader  Attachment— Fig.  345 

Fig.  345  shows  our  Spreader  Attachment  by  which  two 
Singletrees  can  be  hitched  together  for  use  with  a  team.  For 
ordinary  hoisting  purposes,  we  use  a  rope  with  a  spreader  and 
attach  the  hoisting  rope  to  it,  as  shown  by  enlarged  figure  in 
center.  For  other  work  a  chain  may  be  used.  There  is  no  other 
rig  equal  to  this  for  four  or  six  horse  teaming,  as  it  does  not 
strike  the  horses'  legs  and  causes  no  weight  whatever  on  the 
necks  of  the  team  behind.  To  attach  Singletrees  remove  the 
hooks  from  ends  of  Spreader,  hook  on  Singletree  and  replace 
hooks  and  bolts.     Weight,  5  pounds. 


Fig.  345     (Pension) 


Louden  Offset  Hinges— Fig.  349 


Specifications 

For  gable  hay  doors  on  barns. 
Made  of  malleable  iron. 
Hinged  together  with  heavy  bolt. 
Weight  (one  hinge  only).  2  pounds. 

Weight  full  set  fittings  for  gable  door 
(2  hinges.  2  hooks  and  staples,  2  small 
hooks),  4>i  pounds. 


The  Louden  Offset  Hinge  was 
designed  for  use  on  the  gable  hay 
doors  on  barns.  The  hinge  is 
made  with  an  offset  to  allow  the 
door  to  lap  on  the  siding  to  shut 
out  wind  and  rain.  It  is  made  of  malleable  iron  and  is 
very  strong.  Two  hinges  are  sufficient  for  all  ordinary  doors. 
For  extremely  large,  heavy  doors  three  hinges  should  be  used. 
The  hinge  is  made  wide  to  insure  a  solid  bearing  on  the  door 
and  to  give  plenty  of  room  for  bolts  and  screws. 

The  gable  hay  door  hung  with  our  Offset  Hinges,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  347  is  practical,  cheap  and  easy  to  make.  The  door 
can  be  opened  and  closed  with  the  hay  carrier.  This  can  be 
done  from  the  ground  either  by  hand  or  with  a  horse. 


Fig.  349iPu88) 


Fig.  347 
Louden  Hay  Door  with  Offset  Hinges 


Page   Fifty-three 


Louden  Improved  Hay  Rack  Clamps — Fig.  555 

Specifications        Patented  Oct.  20,  1903 

For  building  Hay  Racks  of  all  sizes. 

U-shaped  bolts  are  steel,   Jg   inch  diameter,    12,14,16, 

and   18  inches  long. 
Top  washer  and  intermediate  plate  malleable  iron. 
Clip  washer  of  steel. 
A  set  of  clamps  consists  of  the  following: 

8  top  washers  "W".      8  intermediate  plates.  "P". 

8  lowsr  clip  plates  "C".     8  U-shaped  clamp  bolts 

■•B". 
Weight,  per  set  1 2-inch  bolts,   1 1 1-2  pounds. 

Weight,  per  set  14-inch  bolts,   11?^  pounds. 

Weight,  per  set  16-inch  bolts,   12^^  pounds. 

Weight,  per  set  18-inch  bolts,   IS'o  pounds. 

CUP 


By    means    of    the    Louden    Hay     Rack 
Fig.  645  Clamps  and   Plates  the   timbers   of   the   rack  Fig.  646 

can  be  put  together  and  securely  held  in  position  without  having  to  bore  holes  in  the  sills  or  upper 
cross  pieces.  The  rack  can  be  built  in  one-half  the  time  where  the  clamps  are  used  and  timbers  are  not 
weakened  by  having  holes  bored  in  them. 

In  illustration.  Fig.  647,  is  shown  a  hay  rack  under  course  of  construction,  the  main  and  cross  sills 
having  been  clamped  together.  The  washers  are  placed  at  the  points  "W",  the  intermediate  plates  at 
"P",  and  the  clip  plates  at  "C".  There  is  no  easier  way  or  better  place  to  build  a  hay  rack  than  on  the 
running  gears  of  a  wagon.     No  measuring  will  be  necessary  and  the  rack  will  always  fit  the  bolsters. 

Lengthen  out  reach  until  weight  of  the  load  will  be  evenly  divided  between  front  and  rear  axles;  stand 
main  sills  on  edge  close  up  to  standards;  place  cross  sills  in  position  and  clamp  the  two  together  as  shown 
in  Figs.  646  and  647.  The  upper  cross  pieces  should  be  set  about  two  inches  back  from  the  ends  of  main 
sills  in  order  that  the  intermediate  plates  may  get  a  good,  firm  hold  on  the  timbers.  In  this  way  any  one 
can  build  a  good  rack  in  a  short  time,  the  only  tools  necessary  being  wrench  and  hammer.  The  rack  will 
be  about  one-third  stronger  than  if  built  in  the  old  way,  as  the  sills  will  not  be  weakened  by  holes,  and 
the  time  saved  will  more  than  pay  for  the  clamps. 

The  Intermediate  Plates 
are  of  malleable  iron  and 
have  heavy  flanged  edges 
or  shoulders  to  fit  over  the 
edges  of  the  main  sills  "S", 
and  cross  pieces  "  D  ",  hold- 
ng  them  firmly  in  position. 
These  plates  also  have  lugs 
or  projections  (two  above 
and  two  below),  that  are 
driven  into  the  timbers 
when  the  clamps  are  drawn 
down  tight,  thus  prevent- 
ing all  rubbing  or  chafing 
and  making  it  impossible  for 
the  sills  or  cross  pieces  to 
warp  and  get  out  of  line. 

The  Top  Washers  are 
also  of  malleable  iron  and 
have  a  good,  wide  bearing 
surface  to  prevent  them 
from  cutting  into  the  wood. 
The  steel  bottom  plates  are 
extra  heavy  and  not  only 
act  as  washers  but  prevent 
the  bottom  cross  pieces  from 
being  split  by  a  severe 
strain. 


Material  Necessary  for  Sixteen-Foot  Rack 

Two  pieces  2x8.  16  ft.  long  for  main  sills. 

One  piece  2x4.  16  ft  long  to  be  cut  up  for  bottom  pieces 

Four  pieces  2x4,  7  ft.  long  for  cross  bars. 

Two  pieces  2x4.  6  ft.  long  for  front  ladder. 

Four  pieces  2x6.  6  ft.  long  for  sides  of  rear  wheel  covering. 

Four  boards  1x8,  16  ft.  long  for  lengthwise  pieces  on  sides. 

One  board  I  x6,  1 2  ft.  long  for  tops  of  wheel  coverings. 

Two  boards  1x12,  16  ft.  long  for  bottom  of  rack. 

The  above  specifications  cover  material  necessary  for  rack    7x16    feet    to    be   used    with 

our  14-inch  clamps:  but  if  it  is  desired  to  make  a  rack  of  different  length  or  width  the 

dimensions  of  the  lumber  must  be  changed  accordingly.     To  build  a  rack  with^  larger 

main  or  cross  sills  use  the  1 6  or  18  inch  clamps. 


Page  Fifty-four 


Louden  Combination  Rack  Irons — Fig.  593 

For  Making  Hay  Racks,  Hog  Racks,  and  Wood  Racks 

Patented  May  12.  1908  Specifications 

The  castings  D  and  H  are  of  the  best  malleable  iion. 
A  set  securely  packed  in  a  box  consists  of  8  holders  D, 
8  inside  irons  H,  and  40  bolts;  all  5  8  diameter.  They  are 
packed  with  bolts  for  8-inch  side  rails.  The  lower  out- 
side bolts  are  5  '  2  and  the  lower  inside  bolts  are  7  inches 
long.  For  6-inch  side  rails  change  these  bolts  for  bolts 
2  inches  shorter;  and  for  10-inch  side  rails.  2  inches 
longer.     Weight,    per    set.    23     pounds. 

They    are,    most    practical    and    serviceable 
rack  irons.     The  iron  D  is  a  regular  stake  holder. 
Fig.  593     (Fox)  ^lg.  594  Fig.  595  provided   with   lugs   or    bars   at    the    upper  end 

between  which  the  cross  timber  E  of  the  rack  is  held  by  a  bolt  pasing  through   the  lugs   and  timber,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  593.     The  castings  are  of  the  best  malleable  iron.  1      /-  •  j  •       u 

In  changing  to  a  hog  or  wood  rack  the  cross  timber  E  is  removed  and  the  stake  C  mserted  m  the 
holder.  It  may  be  bolted  there  if  desired,  as  shown  by  Fig.  594.  The  stake  is  set  edgewise,  which  makes 
it  much  stronger  than  when  set  sidewise.  •    1.       a       c-        coa       J 

The  bottom  timber  B,  is  held  in  place  by  two  bolts,  one  on  each  side  of  the  timber  A.  Hgs.  iVjS  and 
594  show  the  outside  bolt  passed  through  the  bottom  of  the  holder  D,  and  the  timber  B.  Fig.  595  shows 
the  inside  bolt,  supported  by  iron  H.  Castings  D  and  H  are  clamped  to  opposite  sides  of  the  timber  A 
by  two  common  bolts.     There  is  no  chance  for  the  timbers  to  spread  apart. 

Louden  Stake  Holders 

Fig.   398.     Malleable  iron.     Rounded  at  the  edges  to 
prevent  wear  on  the  stake.     Is  held  in  place  by  a  }-2-inch 
clip  bolt,  furnished  with  each  holder.     Will  receive  stake 
]^-g  X  3J  8  inches.     A  very  strong  holder. 
Weight,  I  yi  pounds. 

Fig.   39832-     Malleable  iron.     Tapering  and  rounded 
at  edges  to  prevent  wear  on   the  stake.     Held   in    place 
by  ordinary  bolts  (bolts  not  furnished  with  holder). 
Weight,  134  pounds. 

Fig.  624.  Steel  stake  holder.  2)2  inches  wide.  Jj- 
inch  thick.  Will  hold  2x3  or  2x4  inch  stake,  tapering  at 
lower  end.  This  holder  is  designed  to  bolt  to  the  ends  of 
the  cross  timbers  on  a  hay  rack,  so  the  basket  of  the  hay 
rack  may  be  removed  from  the  floor  or  attached  to  it  at 
will.     Weight,  I J  2  pounds. 

Fig.  627.  Pressed  steel  stake  holder.  Is  made  from 
stpel  3  inches  wide  and  %  '"ch  thick  and  holds  stake 
1  J  2x3  inches.  The  top  is  flaring  and  bent  over  to  prevent 
wearing  a  notch  into  the  stake.  This  is  an  inexpensive 
and  durable  stake  holder. 
Weight,  1  pound. 

Louden  Self-Opening  Ice  Tongs 

Specifications 

Main  body  and  tines  are  best  crucible  steel. 

Handle  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

Riveted  together  with  heavy  non-rust  rivets. 

Points  of  tines  tempered  for  sharpening. 

Made  in  three  sizes: 

Fig.  426.   1 3-inch  size.  Weight,  23-2  pounds. 

Fig.  693.    1 7-inch  size.  Weight,  2^4  pounds. 

Fig.  696.  2 1  -inch  size.  Weight,  3      pounds. 

The  Louden  Self  Opening  Tongs  can  be  operated 

perfectly  with  one  hand.     When  the  hand  is  closed 

down  on  the  handle  the  tongs  open  to   their  widest 

extent.     When  picking  up  a  block  of  ice  or  other 
Fig.  426  article,  the  weight  of  the  article,  when  Hfted,  causes 

13-inch.  (  Cardenas)    the  tongs  to  hold  fast  and  firm. 

The  13-inch  tong  is  the  popular  size  for  household  use,  while  the  two  larger  sizes  are  used  for  heavier 
work.     These  tongs  are  excellent  for  moving  small  boxes,  nail  kegs,  etc.,  in  stores  and  warehouses. 


Fig.  398}i     (Tampa) 


Pressed  Steel  Stake 
Holdei 


Fig.  627     (Beach) 


Fig.  695     17-inch     (Mantanza) 
Fig.  696     21-inch     (Sharp) 


Page  Fifty-five 


frrrinrni 


Louden  Wire  Stretcher  and  Hoist 


Patented  July  7.  1908. 


Specifications 
Wire  Stretcher— Fig.  1268 

Fitted  with  16  feet  of  Jg-'nch  sisal  rope. 
Weight.  5}^  pounds. 


The  Louden  Wire  Stretcher  is  the  strongest  tackle  stretcher  made.  In  stretching 
the  wire  the  operator  stands  away  from  the  wire,  out  of  danger,  while  tightening  the 
tension,  instead  of  close  up  to  it  as  with  other  stretchers. 

The  wire  grips  are  fitted  with  raised  flanges  or  guards  which  absolutely  prevent 
wires  from  slipping  under  the  eccentric  grips.  These  grips  are  fitted  with  handle 
one-third  longer  than  other  stretchers,  and  have  an  offset  curve,  giving  more  con- 
venience and  greater  power  for  setting  the  grip  with  the  hand. 

The  rope  grip  is  positive  and  will  never  slip,  but  will  hold  the  wire  at  any  tension, 
or  a  load  at  any  height. 

The  wire  grips  never  fail  to  hold.  It  is  equally  satisfactory  for  stretching  barbed 
wire  or  woven  wire.  The  frames  of  the  pulley  blocks  are  made  of  high-grade  steel, 
and  the  fittings  are  the  best  malleable  iron. 

The  iron  rope  sheaves  are  very  smooth  to  prevent  wear  on  the  rope.  They  turn 
on  special  steel  thimbles,  insuring  ease  of  operation  and  great  strength.  The 
stretcher  is  reeved  with  a  full    ;-inch  rope,  which  is  included  with  it. 

A  swivel  at  the  end  next  the  wire  and  away  from  the  post  lets  the  twist  out  of  the 
wire  but  does  not  let  the  stretcher 
itself  turn  and  tangle  the  ropes,  as 
do  stretchers  having  a  swivel  next 
to  the  post,  or  at  both  ends.  This 
hoist  has  a  400-pound  capacity. 
When  in  use  the  operator  is  away 
from  the  load  instead  of  under  it. 


Fig.  12C8  (Key  West)  r:-      ors-,    ,  I       A      '     V     f     . 

rig.  o07  shows  Louden  s  rerlect 

Stretcher  Hoist  stretching  and  splicing  barbed  wire;  while 

Fig.  808  shows  same  stretching  woven  wire  fence,  using 

two  stretchers,  one  at  the  top  and  the  other  at  the  bottom 

of  the  fence. 


■ — 

X 

y 

-  1  — 

iiil; 

^ 

^ 

<«* 

^ 

»>^ 

J 

"*■    ' 

'^1— 

_ 

_J - 

!'■  .fl 

^ 

■ MBfcsi 

SaB^SfrSRwr™! 

■^^^-^P«-M^ 

Fig. 

808 

-4 

Pag 

e  Fif 

ty-six 

^ 

Apison,  Tenn.,  Aug.  1,  1914. 
I^ounden  Machinery  Company,  Fairfield,  Iowa. 
Gentlemen: 

I  beg  leave  to  say  that  the  outfit  has  given  entire  satis- 
faction and  that  I  am  much  pleased  with  it.  I  have  used  other 
makes  of  hay  forks  but  this  is  the  best  that  I  have  ever  seen. 

It  is  the  only  fork  in  the  community  and  has  caused  a 
lot  of  comment.  The  gentleman  from  whom  I  bought  the 
farm  came  around  to  see  it  work.  He  had  been  handling 
over  a  hundred  acres  of  hay  every  year  with  the  back-breaking 
pitchfork  method,  and  when  he  saw  the  fork  work  and  the 
ease  with  which  i  filled  my  mow,  he  said,  "That  thing  works 
like  it  had  good  sense."  I  told  him  that  the  man  who  made 
it  had  a  good  supply. 

I  shall  always  be  ready  to  demonstrate  the  outfit  to  any 
of  my  neighbors,  for  I  feel  that  it  is  the  best  hired  man  that 
a  farmer  can  get.     Thanking  you  for  all  favors.  I  am 

Yours  very  truly.      (Signed)  J.  L.  Hinshaw. 


LOUDEN  BARN  AND  GARAGE 
DOOR  HANGERS 

PAGE 

Special  Garage  Door  Hanger 59 

Bird  Proof  Barn  Door  Hanger 60-64 

Double   Tread  Barn  Door  Hanger 65 

Double  Strap  Barn  Door  Hanger 66 

Standard  Barn  Door  Hanger 66 

Door  Specialties 67 

Silent  Salesman 68 


.IL 


iiEss^sz: 


o  s^-.>'-jjy-^tf 


^^^^^^ 


^E 


FAIRrlELP,  IOWA 


Louden  Special  Garage  Door  Hanger     Fig.  1273 


Fig.  1273 

Patented  May  30.  1916. 
It  is  curved  at  the  corner  and  extends  along 
takes  up  but  little  room  in  turning  the  corner. 
The  roller  bearing  trolleys  are  swiveled  at 
are  attached  to   two  sections 
of    the    door  only,    the   third 
being   free   to   swing    like    an 
ordinary    hinged   door.     This 
affords  a  convenient  doorway 
for   passing   in   and   out,   and 
makes  it  unnecessary  to  open 
the  whole  door  so  frequently. 

The  door  is  held  to  its 
place  at  the  bottom  by  two 
stay  rollers,  screwed  to  the 
floor.  A  third  stay  roller, 
attached  to  the  door  itself, 
prevents  its  rubbing  or  bind- 
ing on  the  side  wall. 

This  hanger  is  destined  to 
be  the  most  popular,  biggest 
selling,  and  most  satisfactory 
garage  Door  Hanger  on  the 
market  to-day. 


Specifications 

Louden    garage    Door    Hanger    complete    consists    of 
sufficient  track  for  6,  8.   10  or  12  foot  door  together 
with   the  following  fittings. 
3  Special  Swivel  Trolley  Hangers. 
6  Six-inch  Strap  Hinges. 
2  Door  Handles. 
2  Floor  Stay  Rollers. 
1  Wall  Stay  Roller. 
1  Hasp  and  Staple. 
6  Dozen  Screws. 

'  _,  Pound  Barbed  Chisel  Point  Nails. 
^Veights;  Track    weighs    1     pound    per    foot.      Fitting 

weigh.    18  pounds, 
installation:      Full  directions  are  furnished  with  each 
outfit.      Any    carpenter    can    build    door    and    hang 
properly.     Track  comes  in  straight  sections  which 
are  easily  bent  to  fit  building. 


This  is  without  doubt  the  best  means  of 
hanging  a  garage  door  ever  devised.  Practi- 
cally no  space  is  wasted  either  inside  or  outside 
the  building.  It  is  neat.  It  is  easily  opened 
and  shut.  Wind  cannot  bother  as  it  does 
swinging  doors.  The  door  being  made  in  three 
sections  does  not  cut  off  a  big  corner  when 
being  opened — compelling  one  to  run  the  car 
three  or  four  feet  further  into  the  garage — thus 
wasting  much  space  in  the  back  of  the  build- 
ing— as  is  necessary  with  a  one-piece  door. 

The  section  of  this  door  which  can  be  used 

as  a  swinging  door  for  passage  in  and  out  ib 

very  convenient.     The   track  for  the  Garage 

Door  Hanger  is  hung  inside  the  door  opening. 

the  adjoining  wall.     The  door  is  hinged  in  three  parts,  and 

It  lies  against  the  side  wall  when  open, 
the  point  where  they  connect  with  the  door  straps.     They 


Fig.  1273-A 


Fig.  1273-B 


Page  Fifty-nine 


J 


Louden  Bird-Proof  Barn  Door  Track  and  Hangers— Fig.  911 


Specifications 

For  all  kinds  of  doors.  large  and  small. 

Track  is  tubular  and  trolleys  travel  inside. 

Trolley  cannot  get  off  the  track. 

Track  is  made  of  No.  14-gauge  special  steel. 

Dimensions  of   track  inside,    I  'g   inches   wide  by  2i'6 

inches  deep. 
Supporting  brackets  for   track  of  steel  with  embossed 

reinforcements. 
Wall  brackets  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Supporting  wall    brackets   may    be   placed   36    inches 

apart,  for  heavy  doors,  space  24  inches  apart. 
End  stops  and  splices  for  track  packed  with  trolleys 
Track  is  furnished  in  4-ft.,  6-ft.,  and  8-ft.  lengths. 
Weight  of  track  per  foot,  I  ^^  pounds. 
Weight  of  supporting  brackets  per  dozen  pair,  9  pounds. 


^  y^u 


Special  Features 


Fig.  911 

Patented  June  II.  1912 


Trolleys  Completely  Enclosed.  The  only  opening  is  the  narrow  slit  beneath  the  track.  There 
is  no  chance  for  the  trolleys  to  be  clogged  or  derailed.  The  track  is  absolutely  proof  against  nesting  birds, 
trash,  rain,  snow  or  sleet. 

Flexible  at  Two  Points.  The  joint  in  the  hanger  strap  allows  the  door  to  swing  out  away  from  the 
building,  frequently  avoiding  breakage  by  crowding  stock.  The  joint  in  the  track  support  permits  the 
track  itself  to  swing  out  from  the  building,  making  it  possible  to  easily  dislodge  trash  and  dirt  which  may 
accumulate  behind  the  track  and  rot  out  the  siding.  This  double  flexibility  allows  the  door  to  fit  snugly 
without  sticking  or  binding. 

Roller  Bearing  Tandem  Trolleys.     The  Trolley  Wheels  revolve  on  hardened  steel  roller  bearings 

around  a  tempered  steel  shaft.     Always  roll  easily.     A  light  push  will  open  or  close  the  heaviest  door. 

Trolleys  Run  on  Level  Tread.     The  Bird-Proof  Track  is  square,  not  oval.     The  level  tread  reduces 

friction  to  the  minimum  and  overcomes  the  wedging  tendency  frequently  found  in  oval  tracks  which  support 

Iieavy  doors. 

Simple  and  Strong  in  Construction.  The  form  of  the  Bird-Proof 
Track,  and  the  special  grade  of  steel  used  in  its  manufacture,  combine  to 
give  it  wonderful  strength  and  rigidity.  It  is  further  strengthened  by  the 
curved  lips  on  the  under  side  of  the  track.  Will  not  sag  under  the  weight 
of  heavy  doors. 

Door  Hanger  Trolleys — Fig.  902 

Specifications 

Frame  of  trolley  of  pressed  steel  with  embossed  reinforcements. 

Supporting  loop  for  strap  that  carries  door  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

Straps  that  carry  door  of  No.  12  gauge  steel,  I  •'4  inches  wide. 

Straps  are  furnished  regular  for  doors  I  ^4  inches  thick. 

Track  wheels  are  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 

Track  wheels  are  2  inches  in  diameter  and  are  roller  bearing.      (See 

Fig.  l9BandC,  Page  62.) 
Bolts  for  attaching  hangers  to  doors,  also  end  stops  and  splices  for 

track  are  packed  with  each  set  of  trolleys. 
Each  set  of  hangers  packed  in  neat  paper  box. 
Weight  per  dozen  sets,  72  pounds. 


Fig.  961 

Showing  End  View  of  Track 
with  End  Stop  Removed 


Metal   End  Stop 

Completely  Closes 

Track 


Page  Sixty 


I — I  ^  cr> 


TnTTirn 


^Sgj^  FAIRFIKfap.  IOWA  ^^^T^ggS 


Fig.    918 


Louden  Bird-Proof  Barn  Door  Track  and  Hangers — Continued 

We  believe  this  to  be  the  neatest,  strongest,  easiest  operated,  and  most  serviceable  barn  door  hanger 
on  the  market.  It  has  been  in  use  on  thousands  of  barns  and  we  have  heard  nothmg  but  good  words 
spoken  of  it.     You  can  make  no  mistake  in  choosing  Bird-Proof.      It  will  give  you  perfect  service. 

The  Track 

The  track  of  the  Bird-Proof  Hanger  is  made  from  a  solid 
sheet  of  steel  pressed  into  shape.  The  ends  are  closed  by 
special  end  stops,  bolted  in.  The  track  is  completely  enclosed, 
with  the  exception  of  the  narrow  slit  at  the  bottom  for  the 
hanger  strap  to  work  in. 

The  lips  of  the  track  on  each  side  of  the  slit  are  curved 
downward  and  outward.  This  feature  gives  strength  and  stiff- 
ness to  the  track  and  insures  an  even  surface  on  which  the 
wheels  run. 

The  track  is  made  in  standard  sections  of  4,  6,  and  8 
feet  long.  When  two  or  more  sections  are  used,  the  ends 
are  held  together  by  a  steel  splice.  The  splice  is  put  on  without 
rivets  or  bolts  and  holds  the  sections  firmly  so  they  can  never 
spread  apart.  No  other  track  on  the  market  has  this 
feature. 

Support  of  the  Track 

The  track  is  supported  by  heavy  steel  brackets  bent  to  fit 
snugly  around  the  track  and  close  up  to  the  lips  on  the  under  j        j     u 

side.     A  heavy   corrugated   rib  in  the  center  reinforces  them  strongly— they  will  never  spread  and  the 
track  cannot  sag  under  the  weight  of  the  heaviest  doors. 

The  brackets  are  hung  to  heavy,  malleable  iron  wall  fixtures  which  are  bolted  to  the  wall  and  support 
the  track  in  the  proper  position.  The  connection  between  the  brackets  and  wall  fixtures  is  flexible  and 
allows  the  track  to  swing  freely  out  sidewise — one  of  two  points  of  flexibility  in  this  hanger. 

Fig.  961  shows  how  closely  the  brackets  fit  around  the  track,  how  the  trolley  wheel  fits  mto  the  groove 
of  the  track  and  how  the  lips  of  this  groove  curve  out. 

Flexibility  of  Track 

Fig.  918  shows  the  track  hanging  in  normal  position,  but  with  the  door  swung  partly  out.  This  is  the 
flexibility  for  which  there  is  the  most  common  need.  It  saves  many  a  break  trom  crowding  stock  and  the 
free  swing  prevents  the  door  from  sticking  and  binding  in  sliding  past  an  uneven  wall. 

The  arrow  points  to  the  narrow  space  between  the  track  and  the  barn  siding  which  sometimes  fills  up 

with  trash  and  dirt.  With  an  enclosed  track  nailed  or 
fastened  solid  to  the  wall  the  dirt  cannot  readily  be  cleaned 
out.  and  when  wet  will  rust  the  track  and  rot  the  barn 
siding. 

The  Louden  Flexible  Bird-Proof  Hanger  is  the  only  one 
that  perfectly    overcomes    this  serious    fault. 

By  simply  pressing  outward  on  the  door  from  the  inside, 
the  track  may  be  swung  out  to  allow  the  trash  and  chaff  to 
drop  out.  This  may  be  done  instantly  and  easily  without 
gouging  it  out  with  a  pitchfork  or  other  tool. 

The  Splice  for  Louden  Bird-Proof  Track 

In  Fig.  893  is  shown  the  splice  clamp  for  holding  the 
ends  of  the  track,  together.  No.  1  shows  the  splice  clamp 
standing  on  edge  on  top  of  the  track  and  ready  to  be  placed 
in  position. 

No.  2  shows   the  splice  in  position  and  the  steel  bracket 

.      „      ,    ^  pushed  partly   over  it.      It  will  be  noted  that  in  No.   1   and 

Track  Bracket  and  Supportmg  Bracket  ^^   ^  ^^^  malleable  bracket  which  attaches  to  the  barn  wall 

For  Bird  Proof  Track 


Page  Sixty-one 


FrrfflrmmrunTTTTmnTnTfiis 


Louden  Bird-Proof  Barn  Door  Track  and  Hangers — Continued 

is  turned  away  from  the  wall.      In  this  position  the  bracket 
will  easily  slip  over  the  splice. 

In  No.  3  the  bracket  is  slipped  entirely  over  the  splice  and 
is  turned  the  other  way  and  fastened  to  the  wall.  In  this 
position  the  bracket  binds  down  on  the  splice,  holding  it  just 
as  firm  and  solid  as  though  it  were  riveted  or  bolted  in  place. 
This  is  a  valuable  and  important  feature,  as  the  splice  abso- 
lutely prevents  the  ends  of  the  track  from  separating  and 
making  a  rough  place  in  the  track,  or  possibly  allowing  the 
trolley  to  drop  out.  The  Louden  Bird-Proof  Track  is  the  only 
tubular  track  having  this  valuable  feature. 


Galvanizing 

At  a  small  additional  cost  the  Bird-Proof  Hanger  may  be 
furnished  galvanized  if  desired.  We  have  our  own  galvanizing 
plant.  By  this  process  steel  or  iron  is  covered  with  a  heavy 
galvanized  coating  which  protects  the  metal  from  rust  and 
corrosion  and  gives  it  a  longer  life  of  service. 


The  Trolleys 

The  Louden  Bird-Proof  Hanger  has  a  set  of  two  tan- 
dem trolleys.  Each  trolley  has  two  solid  iron  wheels,  fitted 
with  steel  roller  bearings  and  revolving  on  a  steel 
shaft.  These  wheels  are  carried  in  a  heavy  double  truck 
frame  of  steel  with  a  corrugated  rib  to  strengthen  it.  The 
wheel  shafts  are  riveted  firmly  into   this  frame  at  each  end, 

and    can   never  work  loose  or    get  out  of  order.      Our  patent  revolving  washer  protects  the  bearings 
from  wear,  reduces  friction  and  adds  years  of  life  to  the  service  of  the  hanger. 


Fig.  895 


Fig.  902 
Roller-Bearing  Tandem  Trolley 


Page  Sixty-two 


The  supporting  parts  are  of  heavy 
malleable  iron,  riveted  to  the  truck 
frame  midway  between  the  two  wheels. 
This  malleable  support  comes  down 
just  below  the  lips  of  the  track  and 
carries  a  broad  steel  strap  which  at- 
taches to  the  door.  This  is  the  .»econd 
point  of  flexibility  in  the  Louden  Bird- 
Proof  Hanger,  and  allows  the  door  to 
swing  freely  sidewise.      (See  Fig.  902.) 


View  B  is  an  end  or  edgewise  view 
of  one  wheel,  showing  the  rib  or  bulge 
in  the  center  of  its  face.  This  rib  fits 
neatly  into  the  slot  in  the  track  (See 
Fig.  961)  and  keeps  the  wheels  always 
in  perfect  alignment;  they  can  never 
wabble  from  side  to  side  and  bind  or 
rub  against  the  side  of  the  track. 
View  C  shows  the  roller  bearings  of 
the  wheels. 


Fig.  19 
Detail  of  Roller  Bearing 


View  B 


View  C 


"irrmnimtiTmrrnnTTrfnT: 


TheLOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPABJY 


( 


m 


r 


Louden  Bird-Proof  Track 

Adjustable  Trolleys 

Fig.  1052 

Patent  Pending. 

Adjustable  hangers  permit  door  to  be  adjusted  ^^  inch 
both  lateral  and  vertical. 

Frame  of  trolley  of  pressed  steel  with  embossed  rein- 
forcements. 

Strap  or  casting  that  carries  door  of  refined  malleable 
iron. 

Adjustable  feature  permits  use  of   hangers  on   doors 
from  1 '  2  to  3  inches  in  thickness. 

Track  wheels  are  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 

Track  wheels  are  two  inches  in  diameter  and  are  roller 
bearing.     (See  Fig.  19  B  and  C,  Page  62). 

Bolts  for  attaching  to  doors,  also  end  stops  and  splices 
for  track  are  packed  with  each  set  of  hangers.      Each  set 
of  hangers  packed  in  neat  paper  box.     Weight,  per  set, 
()j4,  pounds. 
Fig.  1052 

The  Louden  Adjustable  Hanger  for  Bird-Proof  Barn  Door  Hanger  is 
without  doubt  superior  to  other  hangers  where  conditions  make  an  ad- 
justable hanger  necessary.  One  man  with  a  monkey  wrench  can  quickly 
and  easily  adjust  the  hangers  so  that  the  door  will  clear  frost-swollen 
ground  that  would  make  the  door  rub  at  the  bottom,  or  make  the  door  hang  true  where  the  siding  or 
joists  have  become  warped  out  of  shape.  The  Louden  Adjustable  Hanger  makes  it  possible  for  one  man 
to  hang  the  heaviest  door,  as  the  trolleys  are  run  into  the  track  before  being  attached  to  the  door. 

Fig.  1052  shows  front  view  of  Adjustable  Hanger.  By  turning  the  eccentric  (E)  with  a  wrench,  the 
door  may  be  raised  or  lowered  as  desired.  The  bolts  (C  and  D,  Figures  1052  and  1053)  when  nuts  are 
loosened  allow  the  door  to  be  adjusted  up  and  down,  while  the  bolt  (B)  (Fig.  1053)  permits  the  door  to  hang 
closer  or  farther  from  the  barn  as  desired. 

Fig,  1053A  shows  how  the  door  is  "hooked"  into  the  trolley-strap.  This  is  the  feature  that  makes 
hanging  a  door  an  easy  task. 

Double  Bracket  for  Bird  Proof  Track     Fig.  1204 

It  is  often  necessary  to  hang  doors 
in  such  a  way  that  one  can  slide  past 
the  other.  For  such  an  arrangement 
we  furnish  a  double  track  support 
from  which  two  sections  of  Bird  Proof 
Track  may  be  hung,  one  just  outside 
the  other. 


m 

rrrr^  Jj — 

:^ 

p 

( 

1 

1 

( 

11 

K 

1053 


1053A 


Fig.  1285 
Double  Supporting  Bracket 


Fig.  1204 


This  equipment  is  the  same  in  every  way  as  the  regular  Bird  Proof, 
except  that  the  supporting  bracket  is  longer,  and  has  supports  for 
two  track  brackets. 

The  doors  hang  true  and  fit  snugly.  There  is  no  waste  space 
between  them. 


Page  Sixty-three 


TheLOUPEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Fig.   1200 
Specifications 


^BBBBWWBBfr 


Lae:  Screw 


Louden  Covered  Bird 

Proof  Barn  Door  Track 

Fig.  1200 

The   Louden    Covered    Bird-Proof 

Door  Hanger  Track   is   the  heaviest, 

strongest,  and  neatest  barn  door  track 

made.     The  tube  in  which  the  trolleys 

travel  is  made  from  a  single  sheet  of 

14-gauge    steel    pressed    into    shape. 

The  tube  is   1 ''  8  inches  wide  and  Zj^^ 

inches  deep  inside  and  is  exactly  the 

same  as  the  regular  bird-proof   track 

described  on  page  60. 

The   track  is  completely  enclosed 

except    the    narrow    opening    at    the 

bottom  for  the  hanger  strap  to  work 

in.     The  lips  of  the  track  on  the  bot- 
tom   bend    downward    and    outward 

making    a    strong    support    for    the 

trolleys  and  also  preventing  any  dust 

or  moisture  from  getting  in  the  track. 

The   trolleys  travel   on  a  level  tread 

and  there  is  no  opportunity    for   the 

track  to  spread  or  bind  on  the  trolleys. 
The  cover  being  attached  to  the  top 

and  side  of  track  by  a  process  of  electric 

welding,  makes  it  conform  readily  to  its 

shape  and  renders  it  absolutely  strong 

and  rigid. 

The  cover  has  an  embossed  rein- 
forcement every  9  inches  which  adds 

greatly  to  its  strength.    At  the  extreme 

upper   edge   of  the  cover  the  edge  is 

bent    sharply    toward    the    building. 

When  the  track  is  made  fast  to  the 

barn  this  upper  edge  presses  into  the 

barn  siding,  and  no  water  or  moisture 

can  get  behind  the  track.     One  inch 

of  the  upper  edge  of  the  cover  lies  flat 

against  the  barn  wall  and    is    provided    with    holes    to  receive    the    lag   screws    for    making   it    fast. 
The  track  is  rigidly  attached  to  the  barn  wall  and  in  this  respect  it  differs  from  the  regular  bird-proof 

track,  which  is  flexibly  hung.     The  lower  edge  of  the  cover  extends  below  the  upper  edge  of  the  door. 

All  water  and  moisture  is  turned  to  the  outside  of  the  door  and  the  track  and  the  upper  edge  of  the  door 

are  completely  protected  from  the  weather. 

The  back  side  of  the  main  track  has  embossed  knobs  or  buttons  to  hold  the  track  away  from  the  building. 

(See  Fig.   1201.)     This  allows  an  air  space  between  the  track  and  the  building,  with  no  opportunity  for 

moisture  to  accumulate  and  rust  the  track  or  rot  the  barn  siding. 

The  ends  of  the  track  are  closed  with  steel  stops  bolted   in.     (See  Fig.  918,  page  61.)     There  is  no 

(opportunity  for  trash,  dirt  or  weather  to  reach  the  trolleys.     The  track  is  always  clear  and  heavy  or  light 

doors  travel  easy,  smooth  and 
true.  To  the  man  who  desires 
practical  utility,  long  and  per- 
fect service,  a  neat  and  attrac- 
tive design  in  a  barn  door 
track,  the  slight  extra  cost  of 
this  track  as  compared  with 
otheis  on  the  market  will 
always  be  remembered  as  a 
Fig.  1201.     Rear  View  of  C-vered  Bird-Proof  Track  gOO<i  investment. 


For  all  kinds  of  doors,  large  and  small. 

Track  is  tubular  and  trolleys  travel  inside. 

Trolleys  cannot  get  off  the  track. 

The  regular  Bird-Proof  Hanger,  Fig.  902,  or  Bird-Proof  Adjustable  Hanger, 

Fig.  1052,  operates  in  this  track. 
Body  of  track  is  made  of  No.  14  gauge  special  steel. 
Dimensions  of  track  inside.  1  ^  g  inches  wide  by  2^^  inches  deep. 
The  tubular  track  has  a  steel  cover  made  of   No.  18   gauge  steel,  and  being 

attached  by  an  electric  weld,  forms  a  part  of  the  track  making  it  absolutely 

strong  and  rigid. 
Embossed  reinforcements  every  nine  inches  give  great  strength  to  the  cover. 
Cover  is  made  fast  to  barn  wall  with  lag  screws. 
Upper  edge  of  cover  is  provided  with  holes  for  lag  screws  for  attaching  to 

barn  wall. 
Lower  edge  of  cover  extends  dovtrn  beyond  the  upper  edge  of  door  so  rain 

and  snow  cannot  blow  under. 
The  extreme  upper  edge  of  cover  bends  sharply  toward  wall.     When  track 

is  in  place  this  edge  presses  into   the   barn  wall  preventing  moisture  from 

penetrating  behind  the  track. 
The  back  side  of   the  main   tube  is  provided  with  embossed  buttons  which 

hold  the  track  away  and  allow  an  air  space  between  the  track  and  the  wall. 
Track  is  furnished  in  4-ft.,  6-ft.,  and  8-ft.  lengths. 


Page  Sixty-four 


mrnTTKl 


•■T11T  I  r  r,,^, ^^^ 


FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 


■■g 


Louden  Double-Tread  Barn 

Door  Track  and  Hanger 

Fig.  458 

The  Double-Tread  was  the  pioneer  Flex- 
ible Barn  Door  Hanger,  and  continues  to  be 
one  of  the  leading  hangers  in  the  market. 
It  is  compact,  durable,  and  serviceable, 
simple  and  strong  in  construction  and  sure 
in  its  operation.  Thousands  of  these 
hangers  which  have  been  in  constant  use 
for  many  years  are  still  rendering  faithful, 
efficient  service — never  a  hitch  in  their 
operation;  not  a  cent  paid  out  for  repairs. 

Construction 

The  Double-Tread  is  in  reality  two  sets 
of  hangers — a  set  on  each  side  of  the  door 
fitted  to  run  on  opposite  edges  of  an 
inverted  T-rail.  The  track  is  flexibly  hung 
to  brackets  secured  to  the  wall,  and  will 
accommodate  itself  to  the  inequalities  of 
the  barn  siding.  The  door  can  be  closely 
fitted  without  danger  of  sticking  or  binding 
on  account  of  the  warping  of  door  or  siding. 
This  feature  gives  it  a  decided  advantage 
over  all  rigid  hangers.  The  track,  being  a 
T-rail,  takes  up  the  least  possible  room, 
and  the  hanger  frame  is  consequently 
shortened  and  straightened. 

The  parts  of  the  hanger  being  clamped 
solidly  together  on  both  sides  of  the  track 
makes  it  impossible  for  the  trolleys  to  jump 
the   track.     The   door   is   always   in   place 

and  ready  to  go.     There  is  an  absolute  center  draft;  no  side  hitch  to  make  a  strain  on  the   hanger  or 

throw   the  door  out  of  plumb. 

The  four  wheels  which  carry  the  weight  of  the  door  are  fitted  with  turned  and  tempered  steel  roller 

bearings.     Ten  of  these  bearings  revolve  about  a  turned  and  tempered  steel  shaft. 


Door  Hanger  Trolleys 

Frame  of  trolleys  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

There  are  four  trolleys  with  each  set  of  hangers. 

Track  wheels  are  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 

Track  wheels  are  2^4  inches  in  diameter  and  are  roller  bearing.      (See  Fig.  I9B  and  C,  Page  62.) 

Wheels  travel  on  opposite  sides  of  the  inverted  T-rail,  giving  a  perfect  center  draft. 

Suitable  for  use  on  doors  from  1  }  2  to  2  inches  in  thickness. 

Bolts  for  attaching  to  doors  packed  with  each  set  of  hangers. 

Each  set  of  hangers  packed  in  neat  paper  box. 

Weight,  per  set,  6  pounds. 

Track  for  Double-Tread  Hanger 

The  track  is  a  special  T-rail  of  high  carbon  steel.     Will  not  sag  or  break  with  the 

heaviest  door.     The  hooks 
and  brackets  are  of  refined 
SPLICE        L\  malleable  iron. 

The    sections   of    track 
are     securely     spliced     to- 


Fig.  458 

Specifications 
Track 

For  all  kinds  of  doors,  large  or  small. 

Track  is  an  inverted  steel  T-rail. 

Width  of  track  1 3  1  inches. 

Track  hooks  are  of  refined  malleable  iron    and    are    riveted    solid    to 

the  track. 
Wall  brackets  are  of  refined  malleable  iron. 
Track  hooks  engage    eyes  in   the  wall    brackets    making    the    track 

flexible,  a  very  valuable  feature. 
Wall  brackets  and  track  hooks  are  furnished  with  the  track. 
A  steel  splice  clamp  is  attached  to  one  end  of  each  section  of  track. 
The  opposite  end  of    track    section  is  punched  to  receive  splice  and 

rivet. 
Rivets  for  splice  clamps  are  packed  in  box  with  trolleys. 
Track  is  furnished  in  4  ft.,  6  ft.,  and  8  ft.  lengths. 
Weight  of   track  per  foot  (including   track  hooks  and  wall   brackets), 

I  '  3  pounds. 


W^ 


Fig.  453 
Sectional  View 


Fig.  452     (Lvans)  Louden  Double-Tread  Track 
gether;  not  simply  butted  together  as  is  frequently  the  case  with  cheaper  tracks.     Cannot  become  uneven 
or  spread  apart  at  the  joint.     Made  in  4,  6  and  8  foot  lengths. 


Page  Sixty-five 


Louden   Double-Strap   Covered    Jointed 
Barn   Door   Hanger — Fig.   566 

Specifications 

Frame  of  trolley  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

There  are  two  trolleys  with  each  set  of  hangers. 

Track  wheels  are  of  special  quality  gray  iron. 

Track  wheels  are  3  inches  in  diameter  and  are  roller  bearing. 

19BandC.  Page  62.) 
Track    wheels    are   protected    from    weather    and    trash    by    a 

malleable  iron   hood. 
Straps  which  attach  to  the  door  are  of  No.  1 2  gauge  steel,  1 '  g  inches  wide 
Bolts  for  attaching  to  doors  packed  with  each  set  of  hangers. 
Each  set  of  hangers  packed  in  neat  paper  box. 
Weight,  per  set  or  pair,  6}  3  pounds. 


Fig.  483 


r-     r/-/-    ,r>  1-  >  The  Louden  Double  Strap  Barn  Door  Hanger  is  giving  complete  satisfaction  in 

Fig.  566     (Reliance)     ^1  1        r   i  i..  •  •    11  j    j   r  J •  J 

thousands  01  barns.     It  is  especially  recommended  tor  medium  size  doors. 

This  hanger,  like  all  all  others  of  Louden  manufacture,  is  flexible;  that  is,  it  allows  the  door  to  swing 
freely  away  from  the  building.     (See  Fig.  483.) 

The  trolleys  are  fitted  with  tempered  steel  roller  bearings;  always  roll  smoothly  and  easily.  Each 
wheel  is  protected  by  a  malleable  iron  hood.     (See  Fig.  566.) 

The  two  straps  with  four  bolts  make  the  Double  Strap  Hanger  much  stronger  and  more  durable  than 
similar  hangers  having  but  a  single  strap  and  two  bolts.  The  wide  frame  with  the  double  strap  feature 
also  serves  to  hold  the  hanger  rigid  lengthwise  of  the  track  and  eliminates  the  end  play  found  in  hangers 
with  a  single  bearing  directly  under  the  center  of  the  wheel. 

Track  for  Jointed  Hangers — Fig.  487 

Specifications 

Track  is  of  high  carbon  steel  rex\  }4  inches.  The  opposite  end  is  punched  with  hole  to  receive  splice  and 
Supporting  wall  brackets  of  refined  malleable  iron.  the  connection  is  easily  made  and  secure. 

Wall  brackets  are  riveted  solid  to  the  track.  Track  is  furnished  in  4-ft..  6-ft..  and  8-ft.  lengths. 

A  strong  malleable  iron  splice  is  attached  to  each  end  of  each  Weight  of   track,    per  foot,   I    pound   (including    supporting 
section  of  track.  brackets  and  splices) 

Fig.  487  is  the  track  used  for  Louden  Jointed  Hangers.      It  is  made  of  the  best  high  carbon  steel,  j\x 

\]/^  inches,  and  will  stand  twice  the  strain  ordinarily  required. 

The  ends  of  the  sections  are  securely  spliced  together  by  a  malleable  iron  splice  riveted  into  the  ends, 

and  it  is  impossible  for  them  to  become  separated, 

as   do   tracks    that   are  simply  butted  together.  ^^  — -^'-■■■■■■-'' ■■■ ■-—  '^"^  '^ 

This  splice  is  riveted  to  one  end  of  each  section 

before  leaving  our  factory,   and  the   other   end 

punched  so  the  connection  is  easily  and  quickly 

made.     This  makes  one  solid  rail  of  the  whole 

track,    no   matter   how   many  pieces  have  been 

used,    and   makes    a   continuous    even    tread   for    the    hanger. 

We  use  a  refined  malleable  iron  bracket,  mortised  through  the  track  and  riveted  on  by  hand — no 
machine  work.  These  brackets  have  a  heavy  flange  on  each  side  and  a  brace  below 
to  hold  the  track  in  place.  This  adds  materially  to  the  stiffness  of  the 
track  and  gives  it  great  strength.     Made  in  4,  6,  and  8  foot  lengths. 

Standard  Jointed  Barn  Door  Hanger — Fig.  567 

Specifications 

Frame  of  trolleys  of  refined  malleable  iron. 

There  are  two  trolleys  with  each  set  of  hangers. 

Track  wheels  are  of  spjecial  quality  gray  iron. 

Track  wheels  are  3  inches  in  diameter  and  are  roller  bearing.     (See  Fig.  1 9B  &  C,  Page  62.  j 

Track  wheels  are  protected  from  weather  and  trash  by  a  heavy  malleable  iron  hood. 

The  strap  which  attaches  to  the  door  is  of  malleable  iron  with  heavy  reinforcing  ribs. 

Suitable  for  use  on  doors  of  any  thickness. 

Bolts  for  attaching  to  doors  packed  with  each  set  of  trolleys. 

Each  set  of  trolleys  packed  in  neat  paper  box. 

Weight,  per  set  or  pair,  b]/i  pounds. 


Fig.  487     ^Marble) 


Fig.  567    (shamrock) 


g.  485 


Page  Sixty-six 


I — t  e::  nr> 


imsEEsiMaa 


.re  -iT'l 


Standard  Jointed  Barn  Door  Hanger — Continued 

The  Standard  Covered  Jointed  Hanger,  Fig.  567,  is  the  same  as  the  Double  Strap  Covered  Hanger, 
Fig.  566,  except  the  strap  which  attaches  to  the  door  is  refined  malleable  iron  instead  of  steel  and 
bolts  to  one  side  of  the  door  only.  The  trolley  wheel  is  protected  from  weather  by  a  malleable  iron  hood. 
It  is  provided  with  keeper  lugs  which  prevent  trolley  from  getting  off  the  track.  Also  projections  on  each 
side  of  the  trolley  cleans  trash  or  other  obstructions  off  the  track.     Suitable   for  use  on  all    kinds   of 

Louden's  Sliding  Door  Latch — Fig.  455 

Specifications 

Consists  of  3  parts,  viz:  latch  with  knob;   metal  catch  for 
latch ;  metal  strip  for  door  with  slot  in  which  latch  works. 
Length  of  latch-point  to  center  of  knob,  8  inches. 
Length  of  catch.  4  inches. 
Diameter  of  knob.  3  inches. 
Weight,  I  pound  6  ounces. 


€ 


The  latch  is  lifted  and  the  door  opened  and 

closed  by  the  hand  wheel,  W,  which  is  generally 

placed  on   the  outside,    while    the    central   part 

c-     .ICC     /^/I       11  \  (dotted  lines  L)  is  bent  to  form  a  hand  hold  on 

Fig.  455     (Manilla)  .i       •      -j         rru  ,.  l     /^     i         n      •  i 

the  mside.      1  he  catch,  C,   has  flarmg  edges  to 

guide   the   latch    into  it.     It   is  reversible  and    may  be   used  for  right  or   left    hand    doors.     Made  of 

malleable  iron,  is  strong  and  durable  and  can  be  used  on  double  or  single  doors. 

Louden's  Stay  Rollers 

Fig.  456.  This  roller  is  screwed  into  the 
wall  to  suit  the  thickness  of  the  door;  and 
then  the  brace,  B,  is  slipped  over  the  rib.  A, 
and  fastened  to  the  wall  by  screws  or  nails. 
This  prevents  it  from  turning  and  getting  the 
roller  out  of  place. 

Fig.  457.  This  roller  can  be  adjusted  to  the 
thickness  of  any  door,  either  before  or  after 
fastening  to  the  building,  by  setting  one  nut. 

Louden  Door  Stop — Fig.  1205 

Every  sliding  door  should  be  provided  with 
a  stop;  it  prevents  the  continual  wrenching 
of  the  track  supports. 

While  any  block  of  wood  may  be  made  to 
serve  this  purpose,  a  neat  metal  stop  is  desira- 
ble. The  Louden  Pressed  Steel  Bumper  or 
Stop  is  the  most  satisfactory  door  stop  made 
and  costs  but  a  trifle.  Specifj  it  in  your  barn 
door  hanger  order. 


Fig.  456     (Cuba; 
Specifications 

Diameter  of  roller,  1  ?  g  inches. 
Length  of   screw    (to    center    of 
roller),  6  inches.     Roller  adjust- 
able to  suit  thickness  of  door. 
Weight,  12  ounces. 


Fig.  457     (Havana) 

Specifications 

Diameter  of  roller,  I  ^  g  inches. 
Length  of  bracket.  4  inches. 
Roller  adjustable  to  suit   thick- 
ness of  door. 
Weight,  13  ounces. 


Fig.  349     (Puss) 
Specifications 

Width.  7?4  inches. 
Length,  8 '  2  inches. 
Offset.  I  inch. 
Weight,  2  pounds. 


or  horse  power. 


Louden  Offset  Hinge— Fig.  349 

Louden  Offset  Hinges  are  unequalled  for 
hanging  gable-end  doors.  These  hinges  are 
made  with  an  offset  that  allows  the  bottom  of 
the  door  to  lap  on  the  siding  and  keep  out  the 
rain.  When  the  door  is  open  it  drops  down 
against  the  siding  and  hugs  it  so  closely  that  it 
is  out  of  the  way  of  the  load  of  hay  and  allows 
the  wagon  to  be  drawn  close  up  to  the  barn. 
The  wind  does  not  interfere  with  a  door  hung 
with  these  hinges.  Doors  hung  with  Offset 
Hinges  may  be  arranged  to  open  either  by  hand 
and  the  hinges  are  of  sufficient  strength   to  safely  handle 


Fig.  1205 
Specifications 

Width,  332  inches. 
Bumpingsurface.  3}^xl  J-g  inches. 
Reinforced  by  rib. 
Weight.  8  ounces. 

the  largest  doors.     Bolts  or 


screws  may  be  used  for  hanging.     Three  Offset  Hinges  may  be  used  for  extra  large  doors 


Page  Sixty-seven 


*\m)^^§:fMMH-^ 


rAIRFlELD. 


Louden  Silent  Salesman 


Specifications 

Height:  5  ft.  4  inches. 
Width:  5  ft.  2  inches. 
Shipping  weight,  200  pounds. 

Construction:  Tubular  steel  with 
the  smooth,  dust-proof  Louden 
connections.  Model  Door,  beau- 
tiful natural  wood  finish.  Stan- 
chion curb,  wood  painted  to 
resemble  cement. 

Equipment:  One  Louden  Junior 
Fork  Carrier  with  short  section  of 
track,  and  Trip  Block;  one  model 
door  with  Louden  Bird  Proof 
Track,  having  cut-out  to  show 
trolleys;  One  Louden  Tubular 
Steel  Stanchion  equipped  with 
upper  and  lower  holders  and 
stanchion  guide. 

No  charge  for  substituting  Covered 
Bird  Proof  Track  for  Standard. 


Gentlemen:  We  think  this  dis- 
play which  you  furnished  us  has 
practically  doubled  our  business 
in  your  line  over  the  preceding 
year.  1 1  bears  out  the  old  state- 
ment that  goods  well  displayed 
are  half  sold. 
Seaman-Clark  Hardware  Co. 
Albia,    Iowa. 


Every  Louden  dealer  should  have  a  Louden  Silent  Salesman. 

A  Silent  Salesman  is  a  producer — not  an  expense.  It  is  the  greatest  creator  of  sales  for  barn  equip- 
ment ever  put  in  a  store. 

It  is  neat  and  convenient — a  handsome  fixture  that  is  a  credit  to  any  store. 

Hay  carriers,  especially,  have  always  been  hard  to  demonstrate,  but  with  a  Silent  Salesman  the  cus- 
tomer will  often  "sell  himself"  before  he  mentions  to  the  merchant  that  he  needs  an  outfit. 

Many  dealers  have  laid  the  foundation  for  a  big  stall  and  stanchion  business  with  the  Silent  Salesman. 
Many  dealers  who  never  sold  a  steel  stanchion  before  ordering  the  Salesman  are  now  doing  a  nice  stall 
business. 

On  special  orders  any  hay  carrier  desired  may  be  substituted  for  the  Louden  Junior,  and,  if  desired, 
Covered  Bird  Proof  may  be  substituted  for  the  Standard  Bird  Proof  track. 

Send  us  your  order  for  a  Silent  Salesman.      It  will  help  you  build  up  a  big  barn-equipment  trade. 

We  have  hundreds  of  letters  from  dealers  who  are  enthusiastic  over  the  results  obtained. 


Page  Sixty-eight 


LOUDEN  STEEL  STALLS, 
STANCHIONS  AND  PENS 

PAGE 

The  Equipment  of  Dairy  Barns 71-75 

By   IV m.  Louden 

Steel   Stalls  and  Fittings 76-97 

Standardized  Mangers 98-101 

Spring  Balance  Manger  Divisions 102-104 

Spring   Balance  Mangers 104-106 

Stanchions 109-1  14 

Water  Bowls.  .  .  .• 115-119 

Calf  Pens 120-121 

Cow  Pens 124-125 

Bull  Pens 126-128 

Hog  Pens 129-131 

Gates   and  Fittings 132-133 

Building   Columns 134-135 

Cupolas  and  Ventilators 141-143 

Window  Ventilators 146 

Manger  and  Gutter  Drains 147-148 

Paint 149 


rrrmTTin 


±mr 


hpf.OTJDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


The  Equipment  of  Dairy  Barns 

By  William  Louden 

The  growth  of  the  dairy  industry  in  this  country 
during  the  last  few  years  has  been  unprecedented.  This 
growth  marks  an  epoch  in  our  history— the  passing  of  the 
period  of  exploitation  and  the  beginning  of  the  policy  of 
conservation.  In  all  new  countries,  with  cheap  land  and 
a  virgin  soil,  dairying  is  more  or  less  neglected,  but  as  the 
price  of  land  advances  and  its  fertility  decreases,  dairying 
has   to  be   taken  up  to  save  the  soil  and  make  farming 

profitable.  r     -i-  • 

As  the  dairy  business  increases,  better  tacihties  are 
needed  to  keep  pace  with  its  development  and  to  meet 
its  requirements.  This  is  particularly  true  of  Dairy  Barn 
Equipments.  Milk  production  is  the  foundation  of  the 
dairy  business,  and  anything  that  will  add  to  milk  produc- 
tion or  make  it  more  economical  or  profitable  is  important 
and  should  receive  the  most  careful  consideration. 

It  is  well  known  that  the  cow  is  a  sensitive  animal,  and 

that  she  will  respond  readily  and  liberally  to  comfortable  surroundings  and  to  kind 
treatment.  She  has  the  power  of  withholding  her  milk,  and  will  divert  her  energies 
from  its  production  to  the  protection  of  herself  against  uncomfortable  or  unsanitary 
conditions  This  fact  is  known  by  all  who  have  given  attention  to  the  subject  In 
nurnerous  instances  milk  production  has  been  increased  from  30  to  40  per  cent  by 
making  the  cow  more  comfortable  and  giving  her  more  sanitary  surroundings. 

This  fact  is  further  attested  by  the  great  increase  and  growing  popularity  of  modern 
dairy  barn  equipments.  The  old  style  wooden  stalls  and  stanchions,  which  were  little 
aairy  Ddrn  cq     y  ^^^^^^    ^^^^    ancient    inquisition  stocks,  with  their 

flagrantly  insanitary  features  added  to  that  of  posi- 
tive cruelty— seriously  curtailing  milk  production, 
as  well  as  injuring  the  cows  and  making  the  work 
harder— have  been  condemned,  and  are  being  rap- 
idly discarded.  It  makes  no  difference  how  large 
or  how  small  the  herd,  whether  it  consists  of  two 
or  a  hundred  cows — whether  the  owner  is  an  exclu- 
sive dairyman  or  a  general  farmer  —  he  cannot 
afford  to  use  this  old  style,  out-of-date  equipment. 
in  making  the  change  from  the  old  to  the  iiew, 
or  in  selecting  a  new  equipment  for  the  first  time, 
the  question  arises  as  to  the  kind  of  equiprnent 
to  use,  and  the  purchaser  is  sometimes  puzzled  in  making  a  choice.  One  of  the 
objects  of  this  catalog  is  to  assist  in  making  a  wise  selection.  Of  course,  the  primary 
object  is  to  point  out  the  superior  qualities  of  the  Louden  goods,  but.  m  addition  to 
this  we  desire  to  furnish  the  information  necessary  to  enable  the  purchaser  to  get  what 

will  best  suit  his  needs.  ,  .,, 

Above  everything  else  we  desire  satisfied  customers— custorners  who  will  not 
only  be  satisfied  for  the  time  being  while  the  novelty  of  the  thing  is  fresh  but  who  will 
continue  to  be  satisfied  as  the  years  go  by— the  customers  who  will  always  be  glad 
to  speak  a  good  word.  These  are  the  kind  of  customers  required  to  build  up  and 
maintain  a  permanent  business. 


Equally  Comfortable 


Page  Seventy-one 


n,\*i§imMH*-l 


We  know  our  Dairy  Sarn  Equipment  is  superior  to  anything  else  and  we  want 
you,  as  a  prospective  customer,  to  know  it.  Therefore,  we  wish  to  give  you  the  fullest 
opportunity  possible  for  a  thorough  investigation.  If  you  have  used  our  goods  it  would 
be  unnecessary  to  say  a  word  except  to  show  you  the  improvements  we  have  made  since 
our  last  catalog  was  issued.  We  are  sure  that  eventually  you  will  use  our  equipments 
as  many  others  are  now  doing  who  first  tried  something  else.  A  dairyman  having  four 
barns,  three  of  which  are  fitted  with  our  equipments  and  the  other  one  with  an  equip- 
ment of  another  make,  being  asked  why  he  did  not  use  the  Louden  Equipment  in  the 
other  barn,  replied,  "This  was  the  first  barn  we  built  and  we  profited  on  our  other  barns 
by  our  mistakes  on  this  one."     It  is  wise  to  profit  by  the  mistakes  of  others. 

Two  of  the  prime  essentials  in  a  dairy 
barn  equipment  are  cleanliness  and  com- 
fort for  the  cow.  The  cow  should  be 
made  as  comfortable  in  her  stall  as  she  is  in 
the  pasture.  In  short,  "Pasture  Comfort" 
is  the  condition  to  be  sought  for.  While 
being  securely  held  in  place  in  the  stall,  she 
should  be  absolutely  free  to  lie  down  to  one 
side  or  the  other,  and  to  turn  her  head,  or  to 
lick  her  sides,  without  cramping  her  neck  in 
the  least,  or  straining  herself  in  any  way.  A 
cow  rarely  lies  down  squarely  in  the  middle 
of  the  stall,  but  nearly  always  at  one  side  or 
the  other.  Therefore,  the  stanchion  should 
always  be  anchored  to  the  curb  by  a  single 
slack  chain  that  will  permit  its  lower  end 
to  swing  in  a  circle  of  8  to  10  inches. 
No  other  arrangement  will  fill  the  bill. 
A  cow  in  getting  up  and  lying  down  always  pitches  forward.  Consequently  the 
stanchion  must  be  free  to  swing  forward  and  back  or  she  will  be  sure  to  jam  her  shoulders 
against  it.  When  held  by  a  stanchion  too  rigidly  anchored  the  cow  will  sometimes 
make  several  attempts  to  rise  before  she  succeeds  and  will  jam  her  shoulders  with  each 
attempt.  This  condition  should  not  exist.  The  lower  end  of  a  swiveled  or  swinging 
stanchion  should  always  be  sloping  or  well  rounded,  and  never  anywhere  near 
square  or  flat ;  otherwise  the  cow  will  be  liable  to  get  her  foot  caught  between  the 
manger  curb  and  the  lower  square  end  of  the  stanchion  and  have  it  severely  injured. 
This  cannot  happen  when  the  stanchion  has  sloping  ends. 

Cleanliness  is  equally  as  important  as  the  comfort  of  the  cow.  "Sanitary"  is  the 
word  generally  used.  Everything  nowadays  is  "Sanitary,"  even  "Sanitary"  garbage 
cans.  The  word  "Sanitary"  being  so  badly  overworked,  we  prefer  to  use  the  word 
"Cleanliness"  which  is  said  to  be  next  to  Godliness.  The  way  to  keep  a  dairy  barn 
"Sanitary"  is  to  make  it  so  it  will  be  easy  to  clean  and  easy  to  keep  clean.  It  will 
not  and  it  cannot  clean  itself.  There  should  be  no  cracks  or  crevices  anywhere  to 
catch  and  hold  dirt.  Neither  should  there  be  any  recesses  or  pockets  in  which  dirt 
can  collect,  nor  bars  or  pipes  under  which  it  can  gather  and  be  difficult  to  remove. 

Especially  is  it  necessary  that  the  manger  and  the  manger  curb  over  which  the  cow 
has  to  eat  should  be  constructed  to  afford  no  refuge  whatever  for  dirt.  Any  attach- 
ments placed  on  the  curb  are  Hable  to  become  "dirt  catchers.''  In  getting  a  new 
equipment  be  sure  to  avoid  everything  which  may  become  a  "dirt  catcher.' 

Plainness,  smoothness  and  simplicity  are  the  things  to  strive  for  and  not  the 
addition    of    attachments    which    are    frequently   mere    "talking    points"    having    no 


Page  Seventy-three 


rAlRFIELD.  IOWA^"> 


real   value.      In    this    way   only    can    you    have    stalls    and    mangers    which    will   be 
truly     "Sanitary." 

We  have  always  made  it  a  point  to  cut  out  attachments  wherever  possible  and  to 
make  our  stalls  and  stanchions,  and  pens  and  other  equipments  as  plain  and  smooth 
as  possible,  and  to  have  no  sharp  corners  which  might  injure  the  animal.  Also,  to 
properly  proportion  the  parts  so  attachments  will  not  be  needed.  An  examination  of 
this  catalog  will  show  how  well  we  have  succeeded. 

We  have  had  the  longest  and  largest  experience  in  designing  and  manufacturing 
barn  and  stable  equipments,  our  business  being  established  nearly  fifty  years  ago.  We 
do  not,  however,  rely  on  past  achievements.  We  realize  that  the  world  moves  and 
that  an  article  which  was  good  enough  in  the  past  may  not  be  good  enough  for  the 
present.  We  are  always  striving  to  make  our  goods  better,  and  each  year  we  spend 
thousands  of  dollars  in  improvements. 

Our  long  experience  teaches  that  every  change  is  not  an  improvement.  There  are 
many  illusions  and  delusions  in  this  world.  Sometimes  the  most  "taking  things" — 
things  which  for  awhile  will  furnish  the  greatest  selling  points,  do  not  make  good  when 
put  to  the  test  of  time.  We  strive  to  avoid  all  such  things  no  matter  how  alluring  they 
may  be,  and  spare  neither  time  nor  expense  to  make  sure  that  our  improvements  are 
genuine  and  not  merely  fads  or  fancies  which  will  soon  pass  away. 

In  conducting  an  extensive  business,  and  with  thousand  of  people  to  deal  with,  we 
find  that  there  is  apparently  no  end  to  the  different  ideas,  and  sometimes  we  have  to 
make  things  just  to  please  the  purchaser.  In  so  doing,  our  aim  is  to  make  the  very  best 
article  of  the  kind  that  can  be  made  and  to  always  give  value  received.  We  do  not 
wish  to  dictate  or  even  seem  to  dictate,  but  we  will  always  be  frank  in  recommending 
what  we   think  is  best. 

During  the  last  few  years  we  have  given  much  time  and  study  to  the  standardization 
of  our  goods.  Our  Standardized  Mangers  for  cow  stalls  and  our  improved  methods 
of  constructing  them  are  the  greatest  improvements  made  in  dairy  barn  equipments 
during  the  last  decade.  Agricultural  Colleges  throughout  this  and  other  countries  have 
adopted  our  Directions  for  the  instruction  of  their  classes  in  the  proper  method  of  making 
mangers  for  cow  stalls. 

Perhaps  some  who  read  this  catalog  and  look  at  the  elegant  equipments  shown 
will  think  they  are  "only  for  the  rich."  This  is  a  mistaken  idea.  Louden  Equipments 
are  made  for  persons  of  moderate  means  as  well  as  for  those  who  have  greater  wealth 
and  are  within  the  reach  of  every  farmer.  Standardization  enables  us  to  produce 
better  goods  at  less  cost  and  we  are  always  glad  to  give  our  customers  their  full  share 
of  the  benefits  resulting  therefrom. 

We  do  not  say,  nor  wish  to  intimate,  that  if  any  one  buys  our  equipment,  he  will 
"get  rich  quick"  or  immediately  become  a  millionaire.  Such  claims  would  not  interest 
sensible  people.  We  do  say  that  our  equipment  is,  not  only  the  best  that  is  rnade, 
but  that  it  will  return  a  good  profit  on  the  investment  whether  the  purchaser  is  rich 
or  only  in  moderate  circumstances. 

We  are  particular  to  use  the  best  material  in  the  manufacture  of  our  goods,  and  to 
have  everything  strong  and  durable.  We  have  a  thoroughly  equipped,  up-to-date  fac- 
tory and  ample  facilities  to  properly  handle  the  business.  We  have  our  own  galvanizing 
plant  and  malleable  iron  foundry  and  this  catalog  will  show  that  we  have  the  largest 
and  most  complete  hne  of  Dairy  Barn  Equipments  in  the  world. 

We  have  Branch  Houses  in  several  leading  cities.  Our  goods  are  also  carried  in 
stock  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  In  every  way  we  strive  to  give  not  only  the  very 
best  goods  which  can  be  made,  but  also  the  very  best  possible  service.  Upon  this  basis 
we  solicit  your  patronage. 


PaB«  Seventy-five 


Umm^i^^i^^^^a^^m^S', 


The  Louden  Cross  Braced  Double  Post  Cow  Stall — Fig.  812 

Patented,   May  20,   1913 

If  we  were  to  cease  the  manufacture  of  all  other  cow  stalls  and  confine  ourselves  to  a  single  pattern,  it 
would  be  our  Cross  Braced  Double  Post  Stall,  Fig.  812.  It  is  not  only  the  best,  but  is  also  the  most 
popular  stall  manufactured.     The  following  are  some  of  its  most  prominent  features: 

Perfectly  Proportioned.  The  stall  posts  are  so  spaced  that  there  is  a  good  separation  between  the 
feed  in  the  manger  and  the  bedding  on  the  stall  floor,  while,  with  our  flexibly  hung  stanchions,  there  is 
ample  room  between  the  posts  for  the  comfort  of  the  cow.  The  posts  are  set  the  proper  distance  apart  to 
let  the  stanchion  open  wide  enough  to  receive  the  cow's  head,  and  yet  not  so  wide  that  the  cow  can  walk 
right  through  it.     This  is  one  of  the  faults  of  single  post  stalls.     It  is  entirely  overcome  in  our  812  stall. 

No  Attachments  Needed.  With  single  post  stalls  the  cow  is  liable  to  place  her  head  in  the  space 
between  the  post  and  stanchion  and  to  prevent  this,  attachments  of  different  kinds  are  used  to  at  least, 
partially  remedy  the  defect.  Nothing  of  the  kind  is  needed  with  our  812  Stalls.  While  the  posts  are  set 
wide  enough  apart  to  give  the  cow  ample  freedom  to  lie  down  at  one  side  or  the  other,  and  to  turn  her 
head  or  lick  her  side  without  cramping,  the  space  is  not  so  wide  that  the  cow  is  liable  to  get  her  head  in 
the  wrong  place.  There  is  just  one  place  where  the  cow  can  put  her  head  and  that  is  in  the  open 
stanchion,  and  it  will  never  be  so  wide  open  that  she  will  be  tempted  to  force  her  body  through  it. 

Simplicity  of  Construction.  There  are  no  complicated  parts  about  this  stall  to  get  out  of  order  and 
cause  trouble.  In  addition  to  the  stanchion,  it  consists  of  the  continuous  top-rail,  the  vertical  stall 
posts,  the  cross  brace,  and  the  bent  stall  partition  with  the  necessary  couplings  to  hold  the  parts 
together.  The  cross  braces  are  made  of  different  lengths  to  suit  different  widths  of  stalls,  whereby  the 
proper  proportions  are  always  preserved. 


Page  Seventy-six 


>^a^.^i:/.Tt>iiL^i^;i- 


IOWA 


Louden  Cross  Braced  Double  Post  Cow  Stall— Fig.  812 

Specifications  of  Standard  Size 


Size  of  Tubing.  The  stall  posts,  stall  partition,  top- 
rail  and  cross  brace  are  all  made  of  the  best  quality  of  1?^ 
O.  D.  steel  tubing  —  smooth  and  exceedingly  strong.  No 
second  hand  pipe  or  tubing  is  used  in  the  construction  of 
our  stalls. 

Width.  The  standard  width  of  the  stall  is  3  feet  6  inches 
(42  in.)  but  this  may  be  varied  to  suit  requirements  and  the 
top-rail  will  be  cut  to  suit. 

Height.  The  total  height  above  the  stall  floor  is  5  feet, 
3  inches  (63  in.).  The  standard  height  of  the  manger  curb  at 
the  sides  is  I  1  inches  and  at  the  bottom  of  the  cut-out  where 
stanchion  is  anchored  is  6  inches.  Distance  from  stanchion 
anchor  to  the  underside  of  top-rail,  4  feet  7  inches  (55  in.). 

Length  of  Posts.  The  stall  posts  are  5  feet  5  inches 
(65  in.)  long  and  with  the  standard  High  Built-Up  Curb  they 
go  15  inches  into  the  cement.  The  lower  ends  of  posts  and 
partitions  are  indented  to  insure  a  better  hold. 

Stall  Partitions.  The  cut  shows  our  No.  3  Single  Bend 
Partition  which  we  recommend  and  which  we  furnish  unless 
otherwise  specified.  The  lower  end  of  the  partition  goes 
5  inches  in  the  cement.  It  stands  3  feet  6  inches  (42  in.) 
above  the  stall  floor  at  the  inner  end  and  the  same  distance 
out  from  center  of  curb  at  the  bottom.  Our  No.  2  or  No.  5 
Partition,  described  on  another  page,  will  be  substituted  it 
preferred. 

Stanchions.  The  cut  shows  our  Tubular  Steel  Stan- 
chions, Fig.  861 ,  which  we  recommend  and  furnish  with  stalls 
unless  otherwise  specified.  If  preferred,  we  will  furnish  our 
Wood-Lined  Stanchions.  Fig.  937.  at  the  same  price,  or  our 
Five-in-One  or  Quick  Adjustable  Stanchion  at  an  advance 
in  price. 

Finish.  All  the  parts  except  the  U  bolts  which  are 
sherardired.  are  finished  with  our  Special  Dairy  Barn  Paint, 
or  will  be  galvanized  if  ordered. 

Illustration.  The  cut  shows  two  stalls  and  one  end 
section  on  the  cross  alley  where  the  end  curbs  are  located. 
When  there  is  an  alley  at  each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an 
extra  end  section  is  required  for  which  an  extra  charge  will 
be  made. 

812  Stall  Complete  includes:  2  Stall  Posts;  1  Stall  Parti- 
tion: 42  inches  of  top-rail  (more  or  less):  I  Cross  Brace. 
10    inches    long   (more  or   less):    5    Interlocking   Dust-Proof 


Couplings;  I  Tubular  or  Wood-Lined  Stanchion;  1  Stanchion 
Holder;  1  Guide  or  "Hold-Open"  for  Stanchion,  and  I  Stand- 
ard Stanchion  Anchor. 

End  Section  Complete  includes:  2  Stall  Posts;  1  Stall 
Partition;  I  Cross  Brace,  3  inches  long  (more  or  less);  no 
top-rail;  2  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings;  I  Right  Angle 
Corner  Coupling,  and   I   Single  Piece  Elbow. 

Weights.  The  Standard  812  Stall  complete  with  Tubular 
Stanchion  and  42  inches  of  top-rail  weighs  70  lbs.  The 
Standard  End  Section,  complete,  no  top-rail,  weighs  45  lbs. 

Note:  Stalls  wider  or  narrower  than  42  inches  and 
requiring  longer  or  shorter  top-rails  will  weigh  a  pound  or 
two  more  or  less.  The  Wood-Lined.  Five-in-One  or  Quick 
Adjustable  Stanchion  will   also  add  a  little  to   the  weight. 

Note:  When  one  end  of  a  row  of  stalls  is  joined  to  a  wall 
the  end  section  at  the  other  end  will  be  counted  as  a  part  of 
the  stalls,  but  if  a  wall  flange  or  a  partition  next  the  wall  is 
used,  or  a  post  is  set  between  the  stanchion  and  the  wall  or 
is  extended  up  to  the  ceiling,  an  extra  charge  will  be  made 
for  these  parts. 


Dennison,  Minn.,  Sept.  12,  1916 

Louden  Machinery  Co., 
St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Gentlemen: 

Have  now  had  46  cow  stanchions  and  stalls,  calf 
pens  and  litter  carrier  installed  for  nearly  three  years 
and  cannot  speak  too  highly  of  the  equipment. 

It  is  in  just  as  good  condition  now  as  on  the  day  it 
was  installed.  In  addition  to  its  strength  and  dura- 
bility, it  gives  the  cows  a  comfort,  freedom  from  lice, 
light,  airiness  and  ease  that  convince  me  1  would  not 
go  back  to  the  old  fashioned  wood  stanchions  for  any 
price. 

Several   new  barns  have  been  built  in  this  vicinity 
and    they    have    also     been     equipped     with     Louden 
Stanchions,    which    proves    that    they    appeal    to    the 
farmer  who  is  alive  to  his  own  interests. 
Yours  truly, 

J.  O.  Lysne. 


The  Couplings,  a  transparent  view  of  which  is  shown  by  Fig.  933,  are  interlocking  and  practically 
dust-proof,  two  bolts  only  being  required  to  hold  the  parts  together.  The  upper  ends  of  the  couplings  on 
the  top-rail,  where  dust  is  most  likely  to  settle,  are  perfectly  smooth ;  also  the  side  ends  on  the  stall 
posts  are  smooth  where  the  cows  are  hkely  to  rub.  No 
other  couplings  begin  to  compare  with  these.  They  are  the 
strongest  and  most  durable,  and  are  the  easiest  to  clean 
and  keep  clean. 

The  Manger  Construction.  The  cut  shows  one  of  our 
Standardized  Mangers  with  High  Built-Up  Curb  (standard 
height  1 1  inches)  with  a  cut-out  where  the  stanchion  is  anchored, 
so  it  will  only  be  the  standard  height  at  this  point.  By  this 
means  the  cow  cannot  nose  her  feed  out  on  the  stall  floor  and 
at  the  same  time  there  will  be  plenty  of  throat  space  for  her  to 
lie  with  her  head  low  down  in  the  manger,  or  to  turn  her  head 
to  the  side  in  the  stall.  The  cut  also  shows  our  latest  design 
of  High  Built-Up  End  Curbs  for  the  manger  and  the  stall  floor, 
to  prevent  the  feed  and  the  bedding  from  getting  out  into  the 
alley.  These  curbs  and  mangers  with  their  corners  so  com- 
pletely rounded,  and  all  so  smooth  and  perfectly  molded,  are 
positively  the  "last  word"  in  manger  construction.  Fig.  933.    Patented  Sept.  20.  1910;  July  25,  1916. 


Page  Seventy-seven 


^^jn*!')'"^^-*-^^^*^'**-'*^'^!^*^/^ 


Strength  and  Durability.  When  this  style  of  curb  is  used  the  stall  posts  will  stand  15  inches  in 
solid  cement —  I  1  inches  in  the  curb  and  4  inches  in  the  stall  floor.  We  do  not  use  sawed  off  posts  held 
only  by  flimsy  connections  which  can  neither  be  lined  up  properly  nor  held  in  line.  In  addition  to  this, 
the  posts  are  braced  together  a  little  over  half  way  up  between  the  curb  and  the  top-rail.  The  cross 
braces  are  short  pieces  of  tubing  (the  same  size  and  quality  as  the  posts,  which  are  of  the  best  high  carbon 
tubular  steel)  and  are  connected  thereto  by  our  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings. 

Strengthened  Stall  Partition.  In  addition  to  strengthening  the  posts,  this  arrangement  strengthens 
the  stall  partitions  more  than  One  Hundred  per  cent.  This  may  sound  extravagant,  but  it  is  true,  as 
will  be  readily  seen  by  an  inspection  of  Fig.  1  147.  The  upper  ends  of  stall  partitions  are  usually  clamped 
to  the  vertical  stall  posts,  and  no  matter  how  tightly  the  clamping  bolts  may  be  drawn,  a  side  strain  on 

the  partition  will  cause  the  clamp  to  slip  on  the  post  and  permit  the 
partition  to  give  way  sidewise.  By  clamping  the  end  of  the  partition 
to  the  cross  brace  this  cannot  occur.  The  coupling  would  have  to 
break  or  both  stall  posts  would  have  to  bend  before  the  partition 
could  give  a  particle.  This  is  a  valuable  feature  and  is  found  only 
in  our  812  Stall. 

The  Connection  of  End  Partition.  The  end  partition,  while 
it  is  arranged  to  stand  flush  with  the  end  post  on  the  alley,  is  as 
solidly  connected  as  the  center  partitions,  as  will  be  seen  by  Fig. 
1 148.  A  short  cross  brace  is  clarrped  to  an  adjacent  post  and  then 
this  brace  and  the  upper  end  of  the  partition  is  clamped  to  the  end 
post  by  one  of  our  corner  couplings,  as  plainly  shown  in  the  cut.  In 
this  way  the  end  partition  is  solidly  connected  to  both  of  the  posts, 
making  it  as  secure  as  if  it  was  clamped  to  one  of  the  center  braces 
connected  to  two  of  the  center  posts. 

A  Popular  Stall.  This  is  an  exceedingly  popular  stall  and 
undoubtedly  there  are  more  of  them  in  use  giving  the  best  of 
satisfaction  than  any  other  stall  manufactured.  The  Dairy  Division  of  the  U.  S.  Department  of  Agriculture 
recommends  this  stall,  and  it  is  being  used  in  a  number  of  Government  Barns.  It  is  also  used  in  a 
number  of  State  Institutions  and  in  the  dairy  barns  of  Agricultural  Colleges,  as  well  as  by  thousands  of  the 
most  progressive  up-to-date  dairymen  in  this  and  other  countries. 

It  Fills  the  Bill  in  Every  Particular.  It  is  well  built,  strong  and  durable,  and  of  neat  design.  It  is 
properly  proportioned  and  is  without  any  clap-trap  attachments  or  objectionable  frills  of  any  kind.  It 
is  a  thoroughly  busmess  stall.  It  insures  the  comfort  of  the  cow.  It  is  plain  and  smooth  and  simple  in  con- 
struction, and  is  easy  to  clean  and  easy  to  keep  clean,  thus  filling  all  requirements  of  an  up-to-date  cow  stall. 
The  Fittings.  Our  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion  which  is  shown  in  the  cut,  is  included  in  the  fittings, 
but  any  of  our  flexibly  hung  stanchions  with  sloping  or  rounded  lower  ends  may  be  used.  The  guide  or 
"Hold-Open,"  secured  to  the  upper  end  of  the  hinged  side  of  the  stanchion  is  also  included,  as  well  as  the 
stanchion  holder  connected  to  the  top-rail  and  the  anchor  set  in  the  curb.  Other 
fittings  may  be  added,  such  as  manger  division,  for  separating  the  manger  mto 
compartments;  water  bowls,  throat  chains,  and  other  things  shown  on  other 
pages  of  the  catalog,  for  which  an  extra  charge  will  be  made. 

Beware  of  Infringements.  We  desire  to  call  attention  to  our  patents  on 
this  stall  and  on  our  stall  couplings,  and  to  warn  all  whom  it  may  concern 
against  infringements.  The  patent  on  the  stall  is  dated  May  20,  1913,  No. 
1,062,295.  andon  the  coupling,  September  20  1910,  No.  970,737,  andjuly  25. 1916, 
No.  1.192,216.  These  improvements  are  too  valuable  to  let  them  go  by  default, 
and  we  do  not  propose  to  do  so.  We  are  amply  prepared  to  supply  these  stalls  and 
coupling;  in  any  quantities  upon  reasonable  terms.  Therefore,  there  is  no  neces- 
sity for  buying  infringing  devices,  which  at  best  would  only  be  imitations  and 
would  not  possess  the  full  measure  of  the  valuable  features  of  the  Louden  goods.  Fig.  1148 

Complete  Directions  are  furnished  for  setting  up  the  stalls  and  constructing  the  mangers  which  will 
enable  any  person  of  average  mechanical  skill  to  do  a  first-class  job.  Also  tools,  for  which  see  page  101. 
Wood  Will  be  Discarded.  It  will  not  be  many  years  until  wood  will  be  entirely  discarded  in  dairy 
barns  for  stalls,  stanchions,  mangers,  animal  pens  or  other  similar  purposes.  During  the  recent  outbreak 
of  the  foot-and-mouth  disease,  in  a  number  of  cases,  government  inspectors  ordered  the  wooden  parts  of 
the  equipment  to  be  torn  out  and  destroyed.  The  metal  and  concrete  parts  could  be  easily  disinfected 
but  it  was  difficult  to  disinfect  the  wood  so  as  to  kill  the  disease  germs.  This  applies  to  the  wood  Immg 
of  stanchions  as  well  as  other  wooden  parts. 


Page  Seventy-eight 


Louden  Stall  Partitions 


Specifications 

Standard,  made  of  I^s  O.  D.  high  carbon  steel 
tubing.  Height  and  width  given  in  cut.  Lower  ends 
go  3  inches  in  the  concrete. 

Fittings.  When  used  with  our  complete  stalls  the 
fittings  are  included,  except  when  the  partitions  are 
to  be  set  on  a  floor.  In  that  case  5  inches  will  be  cut 
off  the  lower  ends,  and  Floor  Flanges  will  be  used. 
Weights.  Standard  size,  No.  2,  weighs  about 
14  lbs.:  No.  3,  13  lbs.:  No.  5,  12  lbs. 

The  Partition  is  an  important  part  of  a 
Cow  Stall.  It  is  necessary  to  prevent  a  cow 
from  stepping  on  her  neighbor  and  bruising 
her  udder  or  crushing  her  teats  when  she  is 
lying  down.  Also,  to  prevent  her  from  turn- 
ing sidewise  and  crowding  an  adjacent  cow 
or  soiling  an  adjacent  stall.  No  cow  stall  is  complete  without  partitions  and  dairymen  who  have 
tried    to   do    without    them    have  finally  been  compelled   to  use   them. 

We  make  three  different  styles  of  partitions,  as  shown  by  Fig.  994.  We  recommend  our  No.  3  for 
large  and  medium  size  cows  and  No.  5  for  small  cows.  Nos.  3  and  5  are  alike  except  that  No.  3  is  6  inches 
longer.  By  cutting  off  this  extra  6  inches  it  will  become  a  No.  5.  No.  2  is  fancied  by  some  people, 
especially  those  who  have  not  had  the  greatest  experience.  We  are  the  original  designers  of  the  No.  2, 
but  our  experience  has  taught  us  that  it  is  not  as  good  as  No.  3  or  No.  5,  for  the  following  reasons: 
1st.  The  triple  bend  makes  it  weaker  than  the  single  bend.  2d.  It  is  harder  to  line  up  and  will 
not  line  up  at  all  when  the  view  is  quartering.  3d.  There  is  a  liability  of  the  cow  being  crowded  on 
to  the  flat  part  of  the  "Sway-Back"  and  hanging  there  so  as  to  injure  her  udder.  4th.  If  the  cow 
should  happen  to  get  down  under  the  partition  it  would  be  more  difficult  for  her  to  get  up  from 
under  the  No.  2  than  the  No.  3  or  the  No.  3. 

However,  this  is  a  matter  for  purchasers  to  decide.  If  you  prefer  the  triple  bend  (the  "Goose-Neck"  or  the 
"Sway-Back"  as  it  is  sometimes  called),  to  the  plain  Single  Bend  Partitions,  we  have  nothing  further  to  say. 
The  No.  3  partition  will  be  furnished  with  all  Louden  stalls  except  the  Go-Right  unless  otherwise  specified. 


The  Louden    Machinery   Co..   Fairfield,    Iowa. 

Hayward.  Wis..   July  I.    1916 

Gentlemen: 

I  wish    to  state   that    the  Barn    Fixtures    I    bought 

from   you   in    1914   have  given    the  very    best  of  satisfaction    and    we  can   assure   you 

that    we  are  more   than    pleased  with    them. 

Please  send    me  your   latest  General    Catalog. 

C.    D.    Benack.    Prop. 
Idlehurst  Lodge   Farm   and   Summer   Resort  on    Round  Lake. 

A  section  of  a  well-lighted  dairy  barn  equipped  with  the  Louden  812  Stalls,  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions, 
and  High  Built-Up  Manger  Curb.     The  cowa  certainly  look  contented  and  comfortable. 


Page  Seventy-nine 


LOUDEN  MACH^ 


•^ESTABLISHED    IQQTT^ 


11. 


',^m 


i 


lA 


Interior  view  of  the  new  round  barn  of  the  Hershey  Company  of  Hershey, 
Pa.,  manufacturers  of  the  famous  Hershey  Milk  Chocolates:  fitted  through- 
out with  Louden  Equipments.     See  what  the  manager  says  on  next  page. 


^^^ 


NERY  COMPANY  <l^ 


•^^FAIR  FIELD.    I  OW^aT^ 


Louden  Triple  Post  Cow  Stall — Fig.  810 

This  is  a  good,  substantial  stall.  It  is  well  proportioned,  and  has  most  of  the  special  Louden  features, 
such  as  simplicity  and  smoothness  of  construction  and  the  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings.  The  side 
posts  can  be  set  wider  or  narrower  as  may  be  required  for  wider  or  narrower  stalls,  thus  preserving  the 
proper  proportions  between  the  posts  so  the  cow  will  not  be  liable  to  put  her  head  in  the  space  between 
the  stanchion  and  the  post. 

Also,  what  is  of  even  greater  importance  —  the  stanchion  will  not  open  so  wide  that  the  cow  can  walk 
right  through  it.  Such  being  the  case,  no  extra  attachments  will  be  required  to  cure  defects.  There 
is  a  good  separation  between  the  feed  in  the  manger  and  the  bedding  on  the  stall  floor.  The  manger  con- 
struction shown  in  the  cut  is  up-to-date  in  every  respect,  the  corners  all  being  completely  rounded  to  pre- 
vent injury  to  the  cow,  and  to  avoid  "Dirt  Catchers"  which  are  the  bane  of  many  dairy  barns. 

It  has  the  Louden  High  Built-Up  Curb  at  the  sides  of  the  stanchions,  and  also  the  end  curb  to  pre- 
vent the  feed  and  bedding  from  getting  out  into  the  alley.  The  cut  shows  the  end  curb  is  sloped  from 
the  top  of  the  manger  to  within  a  few  inches  of  the  stall  floor  at  the  gutter,  but  if  preferred,  it  may  be 
made  level  from  the  top  of  the  manger  to  the  stall  post  and  then  level  from  the  manger  curb  as  shown  by 
Fig.  812. 

This  stall  is  specially  adapted  to  use  with  columns  or  large  posts,  as  shown  by  Fig.  934,  Page  134.  The 
stall  partitions  are  connected  directly  to  the  columns  by  our  large  post  couplings,  see  N-14  and  N-15, 
Plate  I  5,  Page  1  36.  When  a  large  post  or  column  is  used  and  the  stalls  are  narrow  the  side  posts  are 
generally  dispensed  with. 


Page  Eighty-two 


SSy^  FAIRFIELD.   I  O  WA'^J^^T^ji^ 

Louden  Triple  Post  Cow  Stall— Fig.  810 

Specifications  of  Standard   Size 


Sizes  of  Tubing.  We  use  I  %  O.  D.  steel  tubing  for 
the  center  posts,  stall  partitions  and  top-rail.  The  side 
posts  are   I  A   O.   D.   tubing. 

Note:  The  width  and  the  height  of  810  Stalls,  and  the 
lengths  of  the  posts,  are  the  same  as  the  812  Stalls.  See 
Specifications  on  Page  77.  The  stall  partitions,  the  stan- 
chions,  and   the  finish   are  also  the  same. 

Illustration.  The  cut  shows  two  stalls  and  one  end 
section  on  the  cross  alley  where  the  end  curbs  are  located. 
When  there  is  an  alley  at  each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an 
extra  end  section  is  required  for  which  an  extra  charge  will 
be  made. 

810  Stall  Complete  consists  of  I  Center  Stall  Post;  2 
Side  Posts.  42  inches  of  Top  Rail  (more  or  less);  I  Stall  Par- 
tition; 2  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings:  2  Grip  Clamps 
for  side  posts  (See  N-19,  Plate  13,  page  136);  1  Tubular  or 
Wood-Lined  Stanchion;  I  Regular  Stanchion  Holder;  I  Guide 
or  "Hold-Open"  for  Stanchion,  and  1  Regular  Stanchion 
Anchor. 

810  End  Section,  consists  of  1  Main  Stall  Post;  I  Par- 
tition; no  top-rail;  I  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Coupling;  I 
Grip  Clamp,   and    I    Single  Piece  Elbow. 

Weight.  The  Standard  810  Stall  complete  with  Tubular 
Steel  Stanchion  and  42  inches  of  top-rail  weighs  72 '  2  lbs. 
The  Standard  810  End  Section,  no  top-rail,  weighs  37  lbs. 

Note:  Stalls  wider  or  narrower  than  42  inches  and  re- 
quiring  longer   or   shorter   top-rails   will   weigh   a   pound   or 


two  more  or  less.  The  Wood-Lined.  Five-in-One  or  Quick 
Adjustable  Stanchion  will  also  add  a  little  to  the  weight. 
Note:  When  one  end  of  a  row  of  stalls  is  joined  to  a  wall 
the  end  section  at  the  other  end  will  be  counted  as  a  part  of 
the  stalls,  but  if  a  wall  flange  or  a  partition  next  the  wall 
is  used,  or  a  post  is  set  between  the  stanchion  and  the  wall 
or  is  extended  up  to  the  ceiling,  an  extra  charge  will  be 
made  for  these  parts. 


River  Falls,  Wis.,  Dec.  20.  1915 
Louden  Machinery  Company 

Fairfield.  Iowa 
Gentlemen : 

1  now  have  my  fixtures  installed  complete  and 
am  very  proud  of  the  result.  They  lighten  the  work 
and  make  it  a  pleasure.  My  barn  now  presents  an 
excellent  example  of  what  can  be  done  with  a  some- 
what old  and  not  overly  well-planned  barn  by  a 
judicious  use  of  modern  fixtures.  Should  you  ever 
care  to  direct  visitors  to  view  this  transformation, 
1  bid  them  hearty  welcome.  1  am  now  a  Louden 
Booster. 

Thanking  you  most  heartily  for  your  cour- 
teous and  considerate  treatment.    1   am 

D.  E.  Flower. 

Flowercrest  Herd. 


Louden  High  Built-Up  Curb  and  the   Low  Level  Curb— Fig.  1187 


Fig.  1187 

Fig.  1187  shows  the  difference  between  the  ordinary  level  curb  and  the  Louden  High  Built-Up  Curb 
with  cut-out  for  stanchion.     The  dotted  line  shows  the  difference  in  height. 

The  Louden  stanchion  has  a  distinct  advantage  over  any  other  type,  in  that  it  can  be  used  with  either 
the  Built-Up  Curb  or  the  low  level  curb.  Double-chain-hung  or  square  bottomed  stanchions,  or  those 
that  require  wide,  flat  anchors  cannot  be  used  with  a  Built-Up  Curb.  They  must  be  hung  on  a  level 
curb  not  more  than  6  inches  high,  to  allow  the  cow  to  lie  down  comfortably  when  in  the  stanchion. 

The  lowest  point  in  the  "cut-out"  of  the  Built-Up  Curb  is  the  same  height  as  the  top  of  the  ordinary 
level  curb.     The  top  of  the  curb  is  5  inches  higher. 

This  design  allows  the  stanchion  to  hang  low  enough  for  the  comfort  of  the  cow  but  does  not  permit 
her  to  nose  her  feed  out  of  the  manger.  Feed  is  never  thrown  out  of  the  manger  directly  behmd  the 
cow's  nose,  but  always  to  one  side  or  the  other. 

With  the  Louden  tools  it  costs  no  more  to  put  in  the  High  Built-Up  Curb  than  the  low  level  type. 
Its  handsome  design  improves  the  appearance  of  the  stall  row,  and  the  saving  of  feed  commends  it. 

We  are  prepared  to  furnish  all  forms  for  manger  and  curb  construction. 


Page  Eighty-three 


Louden  Side  Post  Stall-Fig.  959 

Our  Side  Post  Stall  is  the  same  as  our  Triple  Post  Stall,  Fig.  810,  with  the  side  post  next  the  open  side 
of  the  stanchion  left  off.  It  is  a  simple,  neat  appearing  stall—  exceedingly  smooth  and  easy  to  clean  and 
keep  clean.  It  has  our  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings  and  other  special  Louden  Features.  Any  dairy- 
man or  farmer  who  has  small-sized  cows,  or  who  has  to  provide  stabling  for  young  stock,  will  find  this  a 
very  satisfactory  stall. 

When  a  wider  stall  is  required,  the  stanchion  may  be  prevented  from  opening  too  wide  by  using  our 
Stanchion  Side  Chain  which  is  attached  to  the  top-rail  and  to  the  open  end  of  the  stanchion,  as  shown  by 
Fig.  1 1 49.  This  chain  takes  the  place  of  the  guide  or  "  Hold-Open  "  generally  used  to  catch  on  the  adjacent 
stall  post  and  hold  the  stanchion  in  open  position  to  receive  the  cow's  head.  When  the  stanchion  is  closed 
the  slack  in  the  chain  will  permit  it  to  turn  freely,  thus  giving  the  cow  the  necessary  freedom  of  movement. 

The  Louden  Stanchion  Side  Chain  is  1  !  inches  long,  and  is  fitted  with  a  Pressed  Steel  Clip  at  each 
end  (see  N-24,  Plate  I  5,  page  I  36).  the  clip  at  the  lower  end  being  adapted  to  clamp  on  the  open  end  of 
the  stanchion,  and  the  clip  at  the  upper  end  to  clamp  on  the  top-rail  as  shown  in  cut.  Be  sure  to 
specify  the  size  of  the  top-rail  so  we  can  furnish  clip  to  fit. 

Fig.  1 149  also  shows  our  Improved  Throat  Chains,  which  are  also  fitted  with  our  Pressed  Steel  Clips 
which  may  be  adjustably  attached  to  the  posts  of  any  of  our  stalls.  There  are  a  pair  of  chains  each  27 
inches  long  and  each  having  a  hook  on  its  free  end  so  they  can  be  hooked  together,  high  or  low,  as  may  be 
wanted.  Dairymen  will  find  our  throat  chains  useful  for  a  number  of  purposes.  The  clips  are  made  for 
Ifs  and  1  J^3  O.  D.  tubing.     Be  sure  to  specify  size  in  ordering. 


Page  Eighty-four 


Louden  Side  Post  Cow  Stall-Fig.  959-Continued 

Specifications 


Fig.  959  Stall  Complete  consists  of  I  Main  Post;  1  Side 
Post:  I  Stall  Partition:  39  inches  of  Top-Rail  (more  or  less):  2 
Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings:  I  Grip  Clamp:  1  Tubular 
or  Wood-Lined  Stanchion:  1  Regular  Stanchion  Holder:  I  Guide 
or"HoId-Open"  for  Stanchion,  and  I  Regular  Stanchion  Anchor. 

End  Section  Complete  consists  of  I  Main  Post:  I  Stall 
Partition;  no  Top-Rail:  I  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Coupling: 
and   1  Single  Piece  Elbow. 

Weight.  939  Stall  complete  with  Tubular  Steel  Stan- 
chion and  39  inches  of  top-rail.  62 '2  lbs.:  End  Section  Com- 
plete  (no  top-rail).  29  lbs. 

Note:  When  one  end  of  a  row  of  stalls  is  joined  to  a  wall 
the  end  section  at  the  other  end  will  be  counted  as  a  part  of 
the  stalls,  but  if  a  wall  flange  or  a  partition  next  the  wall 
is  used,  or  a  post  is  set  between  the  stanchion  and  the  wall 
or  is  extended  up  to  the  ceiling,  an  extra  charge  will  be 
made  for  these  parts. 


St.  Ansgar.  Iowa,  July  16,  1916. 
Louden  Machinery  Co..  Fairfield.  Iowa. 
Gentlemen: 

In  reply  to  yours  of  recent  date  wish  to  say  that 
1  am  very  well  pleased  with  the  equipment  I  bought 
from  you  two  years  ago  and  am  satisfied  that  no  man 
would  go  wrong  in  buying  equipment  from  your 
Company.  For  the  treatment  I  received  was  prompt 
and  courteous  and  the  workmanship  and  material  are 
of  the  best.  Will  try  to  send  you  a  photo  of  my  barn 
at  some  future  time  should  you  wish  it.  And  will  be 
glad  to  have  prospective  buyers  look  over  my  equip- 
ment at  any  time  and  1  will  recommend  it  as  being  the 
best  line  of  barn  equipment  that  I  know  of. 

Robt.  Doscher. 


Fig.  1149 

Standard  Size.  The  top-rail,  main  posts  and  parti- 
tions are  made  of  Pg  O.  D.  best  quality  of  steel  tubing. 
The  side  posts  are  made  of    I  5^  steel  tubing. 

Note:  The  height  of  959  Stalls  and  the  lengths  of  the 
Posts  are  the  same  as  the  812  Stalls  See  specifications  on 
page  77.  The  Stall  Partitions,  the  Stanchions  and  the  finish 
are  the  same. 

Illustration.  The  cut  shows  two  stalls  and  one  End 
Section  on  the  cross  alley  where  the  end  curbs  are  located. 
When  there  is  an  alley  at  each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an 
extra  end  section  is  required  for  which  an  extra  charge  will 
be  made. 

Separate  Stalls  or  a  Continuous   Top-Rail — Which? 

If  preferred,  we  can  furnish  Stalls  Built  Separately  (in- 
stead of  having  a  Continuous  Top-Rail),  as  represented  by 
Fig.  I  194.  which  shows  the  Louden  812  Stalls  with  the  top-rail 
left  off  and  the  upper  ends  of  the  posts  joined  together  over  each 
stall,  the  only  connection  between  them  being  the  cross  braces  to 
which  the  upper  ends  of  the  stall  partitions  are  connected.  Not- 
withstanding our  ability  to  furnish  stalls  of  this  kind,  we  must 
cond'^nin  them. 

The  Continuous  Top-Rail  is  an  important  part  of  cow 
stalls,  and  when  we  discard  it  we  sacrifice  strength  and  dura- 
bility. Stalls  built  separately  are  also  harder  to  line  up  and 
to  hold  in  line.  In  addition  to  this,  it  is  more  difficult  to 
adjust  them  to  fit  the  barn.  With  the  Continuous  Top- 
Fig.  1194  Rail  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  adjust  the  couplings  to  make  the 
stalls  any  width  desired  or  to  make  them  different  widths  to  accommodate  the  space  in  the  barn.  If  the 
top-rail  is  too  long,  cut  it  off;  if  too  short,  add  a  piece  to  it.  ,  „     ,  ,  j  .     ^u 

With  stalls  built  separate  this  cannot  be  done.  In  such  cases  the  stalls  have  to  be  returned  to  the 
factory  and  other  stalls  built  to  take  their  place.  Everybody  knows  that  in  Union  there  is  strength, 
while  in  "division  there  is  weakness."  Build  your  stalls  with  a  continuous  top-rail  arid  you  make  them 
strong.  Build  them  separate  and  you  make  them  weak.  It  is  also  easier  to  add  nriore  stalls  as  they 
are  needed  when  the  Continuous  Top-Rail  is  used.  In  every  way  the  Continuous  Top-Rail  is  superior  to 
the  separately-built  stalls  and  we  cannot  help  but  think  that  this  idea  is  a  passing  fad.  Nevertheless, 
if  our  customers  want  stalls  of  this  kind  we  will  bow  to  their  wishes  and  will  give  them  the  best  possible 
under  the  circumstance. 


Page  Eighty-five 


Thp  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


^V^C"  FAIRFIELD.   IOWA  ^^jV^ 


Louden  Single  Post  Cow  Stall      Fig.  796 


Specifications 


Weights.  Our  Standard  Size  796  stall  complete,  weighs 
51  '2  lbs.;  Standard  796  End  Section  complete,  weighs  27  lbs. 

Note:  When  one  end  of  a  row  of  stalls  is  joined  to  a  wall 
the  end  section  at  the  other  end  will  be  counted  as  a  part  of 
the  stalls,  but  if  a  wall  flange  or  a  partition  next  the  wall 
is  used,  or  a  post  is  set  between  the  stanchion  and  the  wall 
or  is  extended  up  to  the  ceiling,  an  extra  charge  will  be 
made  for  these  parts. 


Standard  Size.  The  top-rail,  stall  posts  and  stall 
partitions  are  made  of   \^ g  O-   D-  steel  tubing. 

Note:  The  height  of  the  796  Stall  and  the  length  of  the 
posts  are  the  same  as  our  812  Stall.  See  sf)ecifications  on 
page  77.  The  stall  partitions,  the  stanchions  and  finish  are 
also  the  same. 

Illustration.  The  cut  shows  two  stalls  and  one  end 
section  on  tlie  cross  alley  where  the  end  curbs  are  located. 
When  there  is  an  alley  at  each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an  extra 
end  section  is  required  for  which  an  extra  charge  will  be  made. 

Fig.  796  Stall  Complete,  consists  of  1  Stall  Post;  I 
Stall  Partition;  36  inches  of  Top-Rail  (more  or  less);  2  Inter- 
locking Dust-Proof  Couplings;  I  Tubular  Steel  or  Wood- 
Lined  Stanchion;  1  Regular  Stanchion  Holder;  1  Guide  or 
Hold  -  Open  for  stanchion,  and  1  Regular  Stanchion 
Anchor. 

End  Section  Complete  consists  of  I  Stall  Post;  I  Stall 
Partition;  I  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Coupling,  and  1  Single 
Piece  Elbow. 

This  is  an  excellent  Stall  for  young  stock  or  for  small  cows  where  it  is  not  necessary  to  make  the  stalls 
over  3  feet  wide.  Many  dairymen  wish  to  provide  for  stabHng  young  stock,  especially  heifers,  until 
they  are  old  enough  to  join  the  producing  herd.  These  Stalls  when  equipped  with  our  Narrow  Stanchions 
are  well  adapted  to  this  purpose.  They  are  not  recommended  for  cows  requiring  wider  stalls  because  there 
would  be  too  much  space  between  the  stall  posts  and  stanchions,  and  the  stanchions  would  open  too  wide 
unless  stanchion  side  chains  were  used. 

These  stalls  have  our  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings  and  other  Louden  features.  The  cut  shows 
one  of  our  Standardized  Mangers  with  High  Built-Up  End  and  Manger  Curbs  —  the  best  that  has  ever 
been  made.  Probably  it  is  not  necessary  that  so  fine  a  manger  be  used  with  this  inexpensive  stall,  but 
for  all  the  difference  there  is  in  cost,  hardly  anyone  would  want  to  use  the  common  manger. 


Hazel  ton 

No.  Dak.,  July  12 

1916 

Louden  Machinery 

Co. 

St.  Pau 

.  Minn. 

Gentlemen: 

The  • 

'Louden 

Barn  Equipment' 

I    bought 

three 

years  ago 

has  given  me 

very  great  sa 

tisfaction. 

L.  H. 

Koon. 

Va 

lley  View  Stock  Farm. 

Page  Eighty-seven 


mmi,uu\i>.'tu^4'.wi*!i'Mn>\-^^(l 


Louden  Go-Right  Cow  Stall     Fig.  999 


(Patented  May  30,   1916) 


This  is  an  attachment  to  use  with  our  Single-Post  Stalls  to  close  the  space  between  the  stall  post  and 
the  stanchion  when  open  and  thus  prevent  the  cow  from  putting  her  head  in  the  wrong  place.  While 
not  needed  with  our  Double-Post  and  Triple-Post  Stalls  it  is  used  with  Single-Post  Stalls  when  made  wide 
enough  to  accommodate  medium  or  large  size  cows.  The  Louden  Go-Right  is  decidedly  the  best  arrange- 
ment of  the  kind  in  the  market,  and  we  recommend  it  for  the  following  reasons: 

1st.  As  will  be  seen  by  Figs.  999  and  1000,  which  show  the  Go-Right  in  both  open  and  closed  position, 
it  is  extremely  simple  in  construction  and  easy  to  keep  clean.  There  are  no  sharp  corners  anywhere  to 
injure  the  cow.  Neither  are  there  any  cracks,  crevices  or  pockets  to  catch  and  hold  dirt  or  afford  breeding 
places  for  disease  germs. 

2d.  The  swinging  guard  which  prevents  the  cow  from  putting  her  head  between  the  stanchion  and 
the  stall  post  does  not  have  to  be  set  in  or  on  the  curb  where  it  would  be  liable  to  bind  on  the  hay  in  the 
manger,  or  strike  the  cow's  knees  or  pinch  her  feet,  or — worst  of  all — form  a  "dirt  catcher."  The  lower 
ends  of  the  guards  which  are  made  of  I  ,V  O.  D.  steel  tubing,  are  rounded,  and  are  hinged  to  the  stall  posts 
a  sufficient  distance  above  the  curb  to  avoid  any  interference. 

3d.  The  operating  mechanism  is  both  simple  and  effective.  It  consists  of  a  shift  rod  made  of  \^g 
O.  D.  steel  tubing  extending  over  a  row  of  stalls  and  connected  by  swivel  malleable  castings  to  the  upper 
ends  of  the  guards  as  shown  in  the  cuts.  At  one  end  a  shift  lever  which  is  connected  to  the  shift  rod,  is 
pivoted  to  the  top-rail  of  the  row  of  stalls.  By  moving  the  lever  in  one  direction  the  Go-Right  Guards 
are  swung  into  line  with  the  stall  posts,  thus  closing  the  space  between  the  stall  posts  and  the  stanchions, 
and  by  moving  the  lever  in  the  opposite  direction  the  guards  are  swung  out  in  line  with  the  stall  parti- 
tions, as  shown  in  the  cuts.  At  the  same  time  and  without  additional  mechanism,  the  guards  are  auto- 
matically locked  in  either  position.  When  closed  the  guards  cannot  be  opened  and  when  opened  they 
cannot  be  closed  without  moving  the  shift  lever — a  most  valuable  feature  not  found  in  other  devices  of 
this  kind. 

The  illustrations  show  our  Wood-Lined  Stanchions,  Triple  Bend  Stall  Partitions,  High  Built-Up 
Manger  Curbs,  and  Spring  Balanced  Mangers  which  are  described  on  other  pages.  To  make  the  stalls  com- 
plete, the  stanchions  should  be  fitted  with  our  Stanchion  Side  Chains  (see  Figure  1 149,  Page  85),  to  pre- 
vent them  from  opening  too  wide. 


Page  Eighty-eight 


Louden  Go-Right  Cow  Stall— Fig.  1000 

Specifications 


Size  of  Tubing.  The  top-rail,  stall  posts  and  stall 
partitions  are  made  of   I ''  g  O.  D.  steel  tubing. 

Note:  The  width  and  the  height  of  these  Stalls  and  the 
lengths  of  the  Posts  are  the  same  as  the  812  Stalls.  See 
specifications  on  page  77. 

Go-Right  Attachment.  The  guards  are  made  of  1  i^j 
O.  D.  steel  tubing,  having  their  upper  and  lower  ends  bent 
as  shown,  and  hinged  to  the  stall  posts  by  malleable  iron 
clamps  which  hold  the  ends  of  the  guards  securely,  while 
they  loosely  encircle  and  rotate  on  the  posts.  The  lower 
ends  of  the  guards  are  held  up  from  the  curb  by  collars  on 
the  posts,  as  shown  in  the  cuts. 

Shift  Rod.  The  Shift  Rod  which  is  connected  to  the 
upper  ends  of  the  guards  to  open  and  close  them  is  of  X^i 
O.  D.  steel  tubing  and  is  cut  to  suit  the  length  of  the  section 
of  stalls  to  which  the  Go-Right  is  applied.  The  lever  and 
the  clamp  by  which  the  lever  is  pivoted  to  the  top-rail  are 
malleable  iron.  The  Pitman  connecting  the  shift  rod  and 
the  lever  together  is  halt-inch  wrought  iron. 

Illustration.  The  cuts  show  three  stalls  and  part  of 
another  and  one  End  Section.  When  there  is  an  alley  at 
each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an  extra  End  Section  is  required 
for  which  an  extra  charge  will  be  made.  The  cuts  also 
show  our  Spring  Balanced  Galvanized  Mangers  which  are 
illustrated  and  specifications  given  on  other  pages. 

Go-Right  Stall  Complete.  (Without  Manger  shown  in 
cut)  consists  of  1  Stall  Post;  I  Stall  Partition;  42  inches  of 
Top-Rail  (more  or  less);  2  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings;       I 

Bending  Steel  Tubing 

High  Carbon  Tubular  Steel  is  too  stiff  and  strong  to  bend  readily.  The  bending  apparatus  must  be 
the  very  best  and  the  curves  must  be  not  too  sharp.  The  only  tubing  we  bend  in  the  manufacture  of 
our  Cow  Stalls  are  the  stall  partitions,  the  sides  for  our  Tubular  Stanchions  and  the  guards  for  our  Go- 
Right  Stalls.  We  believe  that  a  piece  of  tubing  is  stronger  straight  than  bent  and  only  bend  it  when 
absolutely  necessary,  and  certainly  never  to  prove  the  quality  of  the  tubing.  The  quality  of  the  tubing 
cannot  be  proved  in  this  way  because  a  soft  iron  tube  or  a  piece  of  lead  pipe  will  bend  more  easily 
than  high  carbon  tubular  steel,  but  this  does  not  prove  that  soft  iron  tubing  or  a  piece  of  lead  pipe 
is  as  good  material  for  cow  stalls  as  high  carbon  tubular  steel.  We  get  our  tubing  from  the  best  mills 
in  the  country  and  warrant  it  equal  to  any  tubing  made. 


1  Wood-Lined  or  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion  ;1  Regular  Stanchion 
Holder;  1  Guide  or  Hold-Open  for  Stanchion;  I  Regular 
Stanchion  Anchor;  1  Go-Right  Guard  fitted  with  hinge  cast- 
ings for  the  stall  posts;  1  Collar  to  support  lower  end  of  guard. 

In  addition  to  the  above  we  furnish  1  Shift  Lever;  1  Pivot 
Clamp  for  shift  lever;  1  Tubular  Shift  Rod  for  each  section 
of  2,  3  or  more  stalls,  cut  the  proper  length  to  connect  to 
the  upper  ends  of  the  hinge  castings  and  to  operate  the 
guards,  and  one  Pitman  to  connect  the  Shift  Lever  and  Shift 
Rod   together. 

End  Section  Complete.  Consists  of  1  Stall  Post;  I 
Stall  Partition;  1  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Coupling;  1  Single- 
Piece   Elbow. 

Weight.  Go-Right  Stall  complete,  as  specified.  63  lbs.; 
End  Section  complete  (no  top-rail),  as  specified,  27  lbs. 

Note:  When  one  end  of  a  row  of  stalls  is  joined  to  a  wall 
the  end  section  at  the  other  end  will  be  counted  as  a  part  of 
the  stalls,  but  if  a  wall  flange  or  a  partition  next  the  wall  is 
used,  or  a  post  is  set  between  the  stanchion  and  the  wall 
or  is  extended  up  to  the  ceiling,  an  extra  charge  will  be  made 
for  these  parts. 


The  Louden  Machinery  Co..  Mitchell,  So.  Dak.,  July  I  1-16 

Fairfield,  Iowa 
Gentlemen;      I    am    happy    to  state  that    the    barn    equipment 
which  I  purchased  from  you  has  given  complete  satisfaction. 

I  appreciate  the  kind,  businesslike  treatment  which  1  have 
received  at  your  hands,  and  will  be  sure  to  call  upon  you  when  I 
need  goods  in  your  line.  1  remain,  very  truly  yours. 

Frank  Weller. 


Page  Eighty-nine 


Louden  Go-Right  Stalls  in  a  Government  Dairy  Barn 

The  illustration  shows  an  interior  view  of  the  dairy  barn  of  the  Haskell  Institute,  the  great  Govern- 
ment Indian  School  at  Lawrence.  Kan.  Eighty-one  Louden  Go-Right  Stalls  are  used  together  with 
Louden  Calf  Pens,  Cow  Pens  and  Bull  Pens,  and  Feed  and  Litter  Carriers. 

The  following  letter,  written  by  Mr.  McArthur,  dairyman  at  Haskell  Institute,  gives  the  opmion 
of  the  users: 

Gentlemen:  ,  ,    ,         _.,,,.,  j   u   j 

The  Louden  Equipment  has  been  put  to  the  test  with  inexperienced  help.  The  Indian  boys  were  inexperienced,  had  no 
training,  which  together  with  a  herd  of  young  cows,  was  very  trying  regarding  strength  and  utihty.  I  will  confess  that  1 
had  fears  that  our  Indian  boys  would  be  too  reckless  and  careless  and  would  therefore  cause  considerable  breakage  but 
to  my  surprise,  the  hard  strain  of  a  winter's  use  with  125  head  of  cattle,  there  is  not  the  least  repair  needed  in  stanchions 
bull,  cow,  or  calf  pens.  You  remember  we  hung  up  96  feet  of  Go-Right  to  pull  with  one  lever,  which  you  were  atraid 
would  be  too  hard  to  handle.     It  works  easily,  and  the  boys  handle  it  with  one  hand.  ■      •         c 

The  High  Curb  with  cut-out  for  stanchions  is  great  from  a  standpoint  ot  econ- 
omy, as  the  cows  can't  possibly  waste  their  feed  by  throwing  it  under  their  feet. 
We  water  the  stock  in  the  cement  mangers  during  stormy  weather.  The  dairy  barn 
at  Haskell  is  now  a  place  of  interest  to  visitors  who  pass  constantly  through  the 
institution,  and  remarks  of  praise  regarding  Louden  Equipment  are  constantly  heard. 


Very  respectfully. 


Donald  McArthur. 


The  United  States  Government  has  been  using  Louden  Equiprnent 
for  many  years,  and  the  fact  that  it  is  specified  for  government  buildings 
is  one  of  the  strongest  recommendations  that  can  be  given. 


Fig.  1189 


Fig.  1 189  shows  the  concrete  cut  away  around  the  lower  ends  of  the 
stall  posts  and  stall  partitions  and  around  the  stanchion  anchor  which 
is  sherardized  so  the  nuts  will  not  rust  but  may  be  taken  off  and 
replaced  any  time  to  change  a  stanchion.  See  how  securely  the  parts 
are  held  in  the  concrete,  particularly  the  stanchion  anchor  which  reaches 
nearly  to  the  bottom  of  the  curb.  The  crimps  in  the  lower  ends  of  the 
tubing  will  effectually  prevent  them  from  pulling  out.  Also,  note  the 
absence  of  pockets  or  other  "dirt  catchers"  at  the  bottoms  of  the 
stall  posts  or  at  the  stanchion  anchor. 


Page  Ninety 


Louden  Simplicity  Cow  Stall  —  Fig.  951 

We  do  not  recommend  any  wood  parts  for  cow  stalls,  especially  since  Government  Inspectors  in  deal- 
ing with  the  recent  outbreak  of  the  foot-and-mouth  disease  have  in  some  instances  ordered  the  tearing  out 
of  all  wood  fixtures  in  dairy  barns.  Nevertheless,  there  may  be  some  parties  who  have  timber  of  their  own 
which  they  can  use  and  who  can  possibly  save  some  money  by  so  doing.  To  such  parties  our  Simplicity 
Stall  will  appeal.  It  is  inexpensive,  and  at  the  same  time  is  in  a  certain  measure,  sanitary  — easy  to  clean 
and  easy  to  keep  clean. 

The  posts  are  made  of  2  x  6,  and  the  top-rail  of  2  x  4  timbers.     They  should  be  dressed  and  painted  to 

make  them  easy  to  clean.     The  mangers  and  the  curb  should  be  of  concrete,  and  if  wood  scantlings  are 

used  for  the  curb,  the  space  between  them  should  be  filled  with  concrete  to  prevent  it  from  filling  with 

objectionable  matter.  o        -ti      ..• 

'  bpecincations 


Metal  Parts.  We  furnish  only  the  Metal  Parts  as 
follows:  Stall  Partitions;  Flanges  to  connect  upper  ends 
of  partitions  to  stall  posts;  Stanchions;  Bolts  to  connect 
upper  ends  of  stanchions  to  top-rail;  Guides  (or  hold-open) 
for  stanchions;  Stanchion  Anchors.  When  wood  floors  are 
used  or  cement  floors  are  already  in.  Floor  Flanges  will  be 
needed,  also  Anchor  Bolts.  We  do  not  furnish  the  bolts 
to  join  the  wood  parts  together  as  they  can  be  procured  at 
any  hardware  store.  Directions  are  furnished  for  making 
and  setting  up  stalls. 

Illustration  shows  our  No.  3  Stall  Partition  which  we 
recommend  and  will  furnish  unless  our  No.  2  or  No.  5  par- 
titions are  specified.  (See  Fig.  994,  page  79.)  Also,  our 
Tubular  Steel  Stanchions  which  we  recommend  and  will 
furnish  unless  otherwise  specified.  There  will  be  an  extra 
charge  for  either  the  Five-in-One  or  Quick  Adjustable  Stan- 
chions, but  no  extra  charge  for  our  Wood-Lined  Stanchions. 

Finish.  All  the  parts  except  the  U  bolts  for  stanchion 
anchors,  which  are  sherardized.  are  coated  with  our  Sf)ecial 
Dairy  Barn  Paint  or,  if  so  ordered,  will  be  galvanized  at 
extra   prices  given. 

Cut  shows  three  stalls  and  one  End  Section.  When  there 
is  an  alley  at  each  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  an  extra  End  Section 
will  be  required  for  which  an  extra  charge  will  be  made. 


Simplicity  Fittings,  complete  for  each  stall,  consist  of 
1  Stall  Partition;  I  Post  Flange;  1  Tubular  Steel  or  Wood-Lined 
Stanchion;  I  Bolt  to  connect  stanchion  to  top-rail;  1  Guide  or 
Hold-Open  for  stanchion:    1    Regular  Stanchion  Anchor. 

Simplicity  End  Section,  complete,  consists  of  I  Stall 
Partition  and    I    Post   Flange. 

Weights.  Fittings  for  stall  weigh  31  lbs.;  End  Section, 
18  lbs. 

Special.  When  the  stall  is  to  be  set  on  a  wood  floor 
or  on  a  cement  floor  already  in,  the  lower  ends  of  the  par- 
tition will  have  to  be  cut  5  inches  shorter  and  floor  flange 
will  be  required  together  with  lag  screws  for  the  wood  floor 
and  anchor  bolts  for   the  cement  floor. 


Barron.   Wis. 

.  July 

11.    1916. 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

St.   Paul 

Min|n. 

Gentlemen: 

1  am  very 

much  pleased  with  the 

barn  equipments 

1 

got  from  you 

and  will 

certainly  call 

on  you   again   if 

1 

need  more. 

Dr.   H.   M. 

Coleman. 

Page  Ninety-one 


I — I  ^  CT) 


Louden  (Patent  Allowed)  Adjustable  Cow  Stalls— Fig.  948 

One  of  the  important  things  in  Cow  Stalls  is  to  get  the  stall  floor  the  proper  length  to  suit  the  cow. 
If  made  too  short  the  cow  will  either  stand  with  her  hind  feet  in  the  gutter  or  be  cramped  too  close  against 
the  manger.      If  made  too  long  the  droppings  will  fall  on  the  rear  end  of  the  stall  floor  and  soil  the  cows. 

A  number  of  things  have  been  devised  in  the  attempt  to  overcome  this  difficulty,  but  most  of  thern  have 
proved  of  little  or  no  value  except  perhaps,  to  furnish  "talking  points"  in  making  sales.  The  principal 
device  used  has  been  the  so-called  "Stanchion  Alignment."  It  is  claimed  that  by  adjusting  the  stanchion 
backward  or  forward,  long  and  short  cows  alike  can  be  aligned  on  the  gutter  regardless  of  the  distance  from 
the  manger  to  the  gutter.     This  has  seemed  plausible  and  it  is  certainly  "easy"  if  it  will  only  do  the  work. 

A  few  facts  briefly  stated  will  show  the  futility  of  this  plan  of  alignment.  In  the  first  place,  the  cow  will 
always  align  herself,  if  possible,  on  her  feed  in  the  manger,  and  the  only  sure  way  to  align  her  on  the  gutter 
will  be  to  make  the  distance  between  the  gutter  and  the  manger  to  suit  the  length  of  the  cow. 
That  it  cannot  be  done  by  merely  adjusting  the  stanchion  backward  or  forward  is  eviderit  from  the  fact 
that  the  cow's  neck  is  from  15  to  20  inches  long.  A  long  cow  "aligned  forward"  will  simply  step  back 
until  her  head  comes  in  contact  with  the  stanchion,  and  a  short  cow  "aligned  back"  will  simply  move 
forward  until  her  shoulders  come  against  the  stanchion.     She  always  aligns  herself  on  her  feed. 

A  change  of  5  to  10  inches  in  the  location  of  the  stanchion,  will  never  do  the  business.  The  way  to  do 
it  effectively  is  to  regulate  the  distance  between  the  manger  and  the  gutter  to  suit  the  length  of  the 
cow.  This  is  the  plan  we  have  adopted  in  our  Adjustable  Stalls.  Individual  mangers  are  attached  to 
special  frames  which  are  adjustable  on  the  permanent  frame  of  the  stall,  so  that  the  distance  between  the 
manger  and  the  gutter  can  be  adjusted  back  and  forth  13  inches,  or  more  if  required  to  suit  the  length  of 
each  individual  cow. 

A  good  view  of  the  arrangement  is  shown  by  Figs.  948  and  949,  the  latter  being  an  end  view,  and  the 
former  a  rear  view  showing  one  of  the  mangers  raised  for  cleaning.  The  special  frames  to  which  the  stan- 
chions and  mangers  are  attached,  are  provided  with  horizontal  ends  which  are  secured  to  the  stall  posts 
by  clamps  which  are  readily  tightened  to  hold  the  mangers  and  stanchions  in  the  proper  positions,  and 
loosened  to  adjust  them  to  those  positions.  The  adjustment  is  made  by  loosening  the  upper  bolts  of 
the  clamps,  while  the  lower  bolts  remain  tightened  to  hold  the  clamps  in  their  proper  positions. 


Page  Ninety-two 


finrnmn 


Fig.  949 
Specifications 

Size  of  Tubing.  Stall  posts,  stall  partitions  and  top- 
rail.  I  J'g  inch  O.  D.  steel  tubing.  Upper  and  lower  hori- 
zontal rails  to  which  stanchions  are  connected,  Hg  O.  D. 
steel  tubing.  Side  guards  adjustably  attached  to  upper 
and  lower  horizontal  rails  by  Louden  Grip  Clamps,  1^ 
O.   D.  steel  tubing. 

Other  Dimensions.  The  Stall  Posts  are  6  feet  1  inch 
long  and  the  Top-Rail  is  5  feet  10  inches  (70  inches)  above 
the  stall  floor.  This  is  7  inches  higher  than  our  other  stalls 
which  is  necessary  to  give  room  for  the  adjusting  clamps, 
and  have  the  horizontal  rails  53  inches  apart,  the  standard 
space  required  for  Louden  Stanchions.  The  Stall  Posts  and 
the  stall  partitions  go  5  inches  into  the  cement.  The  stand- 
ard width  of  the  stall  is  3  feet  6  inches  (42  inches).  The 
bars  on  the  sides  of  the  adjustable  frame  having  their  hori- 
zontal ends  clamped  on   the  stall  posts  are  of   xS^^^s  inch 


Louden  Adjustable  Stalls 
Fig.  948 — Continued 

The  mangers  are  hinged  to  the  adjustable  frames 
and  are  provided  with  springs  to  assist  in  raising 
them,  and  hooks  to  hold  them  in  raised  position  while 
cleaning.  The  stall  floor  should  be  made  from  6  to  8 
inches  longer  than  with  stalls  having  non-adjustable 
mangers.  Also,  the  longer  stall  partitions  should  be 
used.  Louden  Adjustable  Stalls  answer  all  require- 
ments, and  give  good  satisfaction  wherever  used. 


Mangers.  The  Mangers  are  made  of  18-gauge  gal- 
vanized sheet  steel  reinforced  at  the  ends  and  on  the  edges 
with  heavy  angle  iron.  They  are  39  inches  long.  34  inches 
wide  and  2 1  '  ^  inches  deep  in  the  clear.  They  have  rounded 
bottoms  and  the  same  general  contour  as  our  Standardized 
Cement  Mangers.  The  feeding  front,  including  lower  rail, 
is  6 '  2  inches  above  the  floor. 

Partitions,  Stanchions,  etc.     The  cut  shows  our  No. 

3  Stall  Partitions  and  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions  which  will 
be  furnished  unless  our  other  stanchions  or  our  No.  2  par- 
tition is  specified.  The  Name  Plates  are  not  included  but 
will   be   furnished   if  specified 

An  extra  charge  will  be  made  for  the  Five-in-One  or  Quick 
Adjustable  Stanchions. 

Louden  Adjustable  Stall  complete  consists  of  1  Stall 
Post  (6  feet.  I  inch  long);  1  Stall  Partition:  42  inches  (more 
or  less)  of  Top-Rail;  1  Upper  and  1  Lower  Stanchion  Rail;  2 
Side  Guards;  2  Adjusting  Bars  with  horizontal  ends;  2  Inter- 
locking Dust-Proof    Couplings;  2  pair  of  Adjusting  Clamps; 

4  Corner  Irons  for  adjustable  frame;  4  Grip  Clamps  for  side 
guards;  I  Galvanized  Manger;  2  Hinges  for  manger;  2  Special 
Springs  for  manger:  1  Hook  to  hold  up  manger;  I  Regular 
Stanchion  Holder;  I  Guide  or  Hold-Open  for  stanchion,  arid 
I  Special  Stanchion  Anchor  to  attach  to  lower  stanchion  rail. 

End  Section  consists  of  I  Stall  Post  (6  feet  I  inch  long); 
1  Stall  Partition;  1  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Coupling,  and  I 
Single  Piece  Elbow.  The  adjusting  clamps  at  the  end  of  a 
row  of  stalls  are  single  and  the  central  clamps  are  double. 
Each  double  clamp  is  counted  as  two.  or  a  pair. 

Weight.  Adjustable  Stall  complete  with  galvanized 
manger,  weighs   183  lbs.;  End  section,  33 J4  lbs. 


Fig.  1191 


This  is  a  portion  of  a  cut  which  is  used  by  others  to  show  the  need  of 
a  Stop  Device  to  prevent  a  cow  from  putting  her  head  between  the  stan- 
chion and  the  stall  post.  The  fact  was  overlooked  that  there  is  twice  as 
much  room  in  the  open  stanchion  as  there  is  between  the  stall  post 
and  the  stanchion.  Consequently,  the  liability  of  the  cow  walking 
through  the  stanchion  is  twice  as  great  as  putting  her  head  in  the 
wrong  place.  The  point  which  the  cut  shows  above  everything  else  is,  that 
in  full-width,  single  post  stalls  the  stanchions  open  too  wide,  and  that 
double  or  triple  post  stalls  should  be  used  to  get  the  proper  propor- 
tions and  do  away  with  the  necessity  of  using  stop  devices.  The  liability 
of  the  cow  going  through  a  wide-open  stanchion  is  three  times  greater 
than  putting  her  head  in  at  the  side.  But  if  you  want  a  single-post  stall 
with  stop  device,  we  have  the  best  one  made  —  the  "Louden  Go-Right." 
Our  Side  Chains  will  also  prevent  the  stanchions  from  opening  too  wide. 


Page  Ninety-three 


FmTTTmn 


^^^^^"'^^  FAIRFIELD.   I  O WA '■^^ 


Louden  Name  Plates  and  Name  Plate  Holders 


Qf^:- 


Fig.  935 


:j^i.;i. 


r^OUDEN 

Iname  plates 


Fig.  1181 


Fig.  935  is  our  original  Name  Plate  with  Holders. 
It  is  simply  a  sheet  of  galvanized  steel,  4x1  3  inches, 
standard  size,  and  a  pair  of  clamps  having  upwardly 
extended  ends  to  hold  the  plate  between  them.  The 
size  of  the  plate  may  be  varied  to  suit  requirements. 
Even  as  large  as  24  inches  square  may  be  used  to 
make  a  score  card  to  keep  a  record  of  the  cow's  work, 
or  for  other  purposes.  In  place  of  the  sheet  steel  a 
heavy  cardboard  may  be  used. 

This  is  the  simplest  name  plate  and  holder  ever 
devised  and  it  is  actually  the  best  for  all  purposes. 
It  is  also  the  most  durable.  Cows  with  long  horns 
cannot  punch  holes  in  the  steel  plate.  The  cow's 
name  and  any  other  information  may  be  painted  or 
stenciled  on  the  plate,  or  it  may  be  coated  for  use 
as  a  black-board.  The  cut  shows  the  Holders 
clamped  on  the  top-rail  of  a  stall  and  the  lower  edge 
of  the  plate  cut  out  to  fit  over  the  stanchion  holder 
which  shows  in  the  cut. 

Fig.  H81  is  our  New  Name  Plate  Holder,  also, 
mounted  on  the  top-rail  of  a  stall.  It  is  provided 
with  two  sheets  of  isinglass,  each  4'3xl2j2  inches, 
between  which  the  name  plate  or  card  is  inserted. 

Fig.  1182  shows  the  holder  detached  with  the 
isinglass  in,  but  the  name  plate  left  out.  The  holder 
is  clamped  on  the  top-rail  by  collars  shown  in  the 
cuts.  This  is  the  most  artistic  Name  Plate  Holder 
manufactured. 

The  presence  of  name  plaies  on  stalls  adds  to  the 
appearance  and  identifies  the  cows  in  a  manner  that 
bespeaks  the  owner's  consideration  and  high  appre- 
ciation of  their  value.  There  is  no  doubt  that  buy- 
ers or  patrons  visiting  your  barn  will  be  influenced 
more  or  less  by  neat  and  attractive  name  plates. 

Holders  are  made  for  either  I  ?  g  or  I  J^  top-rail. 

Be  sure  to  specify  size. 


Fig.  1182 


Fig.  1056 

Patent  Pending 


Louden  Salt  Roll  and  Holder 


The  most  convenient  and  economical,  and  altogether  the  best  way 
of  salting  cattle  and  horses.  The  salt  is  formed  by  heavy  pressure 
into  cylindrical  rolls  about  5  inches  in  diameter  and  4}  2  inches  long 
with  convex  ends  and  a  hole  through  the  center.  The  Roll  is  easily 
mounted  on  our  Holders  and  will  revolve  when  the  animal  licks  it. 

The  Roll  is  extremely  hard  to  chip  or  break  and  disintegrates  very 
slowly,  and  is  therefore  the  most  economical  way  that  stock  can  be 
salted.  There  is  no  danger  of  the  animal  getting  toomuchsaltat  a  time. 
Neither  is  there  any  danger  of  the  salting  being  neglected.  .Special 
circular  on  application. 

Fig.  1056  shows  salt  roll  mounted  on  holder  for  vertical  stall  pipe. 
We  also  furnish  holders  for  either  vertical  or  horizontal  wood  stall 
timbers,  to  be  attached  with  bolts  or  screws.      (See  page  210.) 

Mr.  R.  B.  Young,  proprietor  of  The  Chicago  Stock  Farms,  Buffalo 
Center,  Iowa,  after  using  our  Holders  several  months,  writes:  "The 
Salt  Roll  Holders  are  very  satisfactory  and  please  me  in  every  way." 


Page  Ninety-four 


The  Alignment  Problem 


The  Louden  Adjustable  Stalls,  as  explained  on 
preceding  pages,  solve  the  Alignment  Problem  more 
completely  than  anything  ever  produced,  but  if  other 
styles  of  stalls,  having  either  concrete  or  other  non-ad- 
justable mangers  should  be  used,  the  question  arises 
as  to  the  best  way  to  secure  the  most  practical  align- 
ment of  the  cows  on  the  gutter  with  these  stalls. 

In  the  first  place  the  stall  floor  should  be  long 
enough  so  the  cow  can  stand  with  her  front  feet  6 
to  8  inches  away  from  the  curb,  so  she  will  not  jam 
her  knees  against  it  in  lying  down,  and  with  her  hind 
feet  not  more  than  3  or  4  inches  from  the  edge  of  the 
gutter.  A  good  plan  will  be  to  measure  the  distance 
from  out  to  out  of  the  cow's  feet  when  she  is  standing 
in  a  natural  position,  and  then  make  the  length  of 
the  stall  floor  from  9  to  12  inches  longer  in  the  clear 
from  the  side  of  the  curb  to  the  edge  of  the  gutter. 

To  provide  for  different  sizes  of  cows  the  best  way 
is  to  make  different  sections  of  stalls  with  different 
lengths  of  floors — say,  one  section  with  the  floor  long 
enough  for  the  longest  cows,  another  for  shorter  cows, 
another  for  those  still  shorter,  and  then  another  for  the 
shortest  cows,  or  for  young  stock.  Different  widths 
of  stalls  will  probably  be  required,  so  take  it  all  in  all,  this  will  be  the  very  best  arrangement  that  can  be 
made  when  the  barn  is  large  enough  for  different  sections  of  stalls.  When  the  barn  is  small,  the  stall 
floors  can  be  made  longer  at  one  end  and  shorter  at  the  other,  thus  tapering  the  floor,  so  different  lengths 
will  be  provided  for  the  different  sizes  of  cows. 


Louden  "  Stanchion  Alignment " 


Upper  Adjustable 
Stanchion  Holder,  Fig.  1 298 


(Patented  May  26,  1914) 

Another  method  is  the  so-called  "Stanchion  Alignment"  by  which  the 
stanchion  is  adjusted  backward  and  forward  closer  to  and  farther  from  the 
gutter.  This  method  has  been  largely  advertised  and  is  favored  by  some 
dairymen.  In  compliance  with  the  demand  for  a  "Stanchion  Alignment" 
we  have  designed  and  patented  what  we  believe  to  be  the  best  device  of  the 
kind  on  the  market,  as  shown  by  Fig.  938.  The  Adjustable  Holder  secured 
to  the  top-rail  is  arranged  so  the  stanchion  may  be  adjusted  as  much  as  6}/^ 
inches  to  one  side  of  the  center  of  the  top-iail.  By  reversing  the  holder 
the  stanchion  may  be  placed  as  far  in  the  opposite  direction,  thus  making  a  total  adjustment  of  13  inches. 
The  Adjustable  Holdei  is  clamped  upon  the  top-rail  by  four  heavy  bolts. 

The  Alignment  Anchor  (Fig.  1299)  is  inserted  in  the  curb  when  the  cement  is  put  in, 
thus  making  it  as  solid  as  the  curb  itself.  The  chain  holder  is  adjustably  clamped 
upon  a  central  rib  and  has  a   total  adjustment  of  8  inches. 

There  are  no  bolt  head  pockets  in   the  curb  or  any  underneath  spaces  anywhere  to 
catch   and   hold  dirt.     These  adjustable    or    alignment    anchors    are    frequently    regular 
"dirt  catchers,"  and  do  more  harm   in   catching  and   holding  dirt   than   they  do  good  in 
the  alignment  of  the  cows.     Oui   Stanchion  Alignment  is  free  from   these  faults,  and  is    stal^"hiori"Ho?der, 
more  practical  than  any  other  stanchion  alignment  made.  Fig.i299 


Specifications 


Weights.  The  Louden  Adjustable  Stanchion  Holder 
with  bolts  complete  weighs  4  lbs.  The  Louden  Adjustable 
Anchor  complete  with  bolts,  I  J^  lbs. 


Page  Ninety-six 


Note:  Be  sure  to  specify  size  of  top-rail.  Sometimes 
the  Adjustable  Anchor  is  not  used  and  for  that  reason  we 
price  the  Holder  and  Anchor  separately. 


^^^^^^ 


Louden  Step -Back 


Fig.  1151  represents  another  arrangement  to  pre- 
vent the  cow  from  leaving  her  droppings  on  the  stall 
floor.  It  may  be  applied  to  any  of  our  steel  stalls. 
It  is  simply  a  large  spring  wire,  ^f^-inch  diameter,  bent 
as  shown  in  the  cut,  and  adjustably  clamped  upon 
the  top-rail  directly  above  where  the  cow  stands.  It 
is  adjusted  so  the  lower  end  will  be  from  I  to  2 
inches  above  the  cow's  back  when  she  is  standing 
in  a  natural  position,  and  immediately  behind  her 
shoulders. 

When  the  cow  humps  her  back  before  evacuating, 
she  will  strike  it  against  the  wire  and  this  will  cause 
her  to  step  back,  so  she  will  deposit  her  droppings  in 
the  gutter.  Those  who  have  used  this  device  say  it 
is  just  the  thing  and  that  it  is  so  effective  that  after 
it  has  been  used  awhile  the  cow  will  form  a  habit  of 
stepping  back,  when  the  device  may  be  removed  with- 
out changing  the  habit.  It  is  a  simple,  inexpensive 
p.      JJ5J  device  and  is  certainly  worthy  of  a  trial. 

Patent  Pending.  This  Step-Back  is  especially  adapted  for  stalls 

where  the  floor  is  a  little  long  and  when  it  is  used  the  floor  may  be  made  4  or  3  inches  longer  than  the 
standard  length  thus  giving  the  cow  more  room.  The  cut  shows  three  of  our  Fig.  812  Stalls  each  fitted 
with  a  Step-Back.  The  Louden  Step-Back  is  made  for  1^8  and  I's  O.  D.  top-rail,  and  with  clamps 
complete  weighs  4J^  lbs.  Note:    Be  sure  to  specify  the  size  of  the  top-rail. 


Fig.  940  shows  the  position  a  cow  assumes  when 
getting  up  or  lying  down.  She  lowers  her  front  end 
first  in  lying  down  and  raises  it  last  in  getting  up. 
She  invariably  pitches  forward  in  either  getting  up 
or  lying  down — therefore,  the  necessity  for  having 
the  stanchion  flexibly  anchored  so  it  will  swing 
enough  to  prevent  jamming  her  shoulders. 

The  cut  also  shows  why  the  cow  does  not  have 
to  strain  or  jam  her  knees  against  the  curb  to  get 
her  feed  in  our  Standardized  Mangers  as  she  has  to 
do  with  flat  bottomed  mangers.  The  feed  rolls 
down  toward  the  cow  and  if  any  should  remain 
on  the  far  side  she  will  not  have  to  strain  to  get  it. 
The  cut  shows  the  feed-wasting,  low-level  curb.  It 
should  have  our  High  Built-Up  Curb  to  make  it 
complete. 

How  to  Securely 
Clamp  Metal  Parts  Together 

1 .  Put  all  the  clamps  on  loosely  so  the  parts 
can  be  easily  racked  to  line  them  up  properly. 

2.  After  they  are  all  in  proper  position  draw 
the  nuts  up  tight  with  a  wrench. 

Fig.  940  3.  When  tightly  drawn,  hit  the  heads  of  the 

bolts  heavily  with  a  hammer  to  set  them. 
4.  Tighten  up  the  nuts  again  with  a  wrench  as  much  as  can  be  safely  done. 

When  treated  this  way  the  bolts  will  not  be  liable  to  get  loose  but  without  hammering  their  heads  so 
as  to  solidly  set  them  they  will  be  liable  to  work  loose  under  a  strain  and  especially  so  under  a  jar.  This 
is  important  in  attaching  clamps  of  any  kind,  especially  splice  clamps  for  overhead  track,  couplings  and 
clamps  for  connecting  the  tubing  of  animal  stalls  and  pens  together,  especially  pens  to  hold  vicious  bulls 
and  for  other  purposes  requiring  solidity  and  durability  of  structure. 


Page  Ninety-seven 


iOTSIS^^^i 


^O 


FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 


Louden  Standardized  Mangers — Fig.  1152 

One  of  the  most  important  things  in  the  construction  of  cow  stalls  is  to  make  the  manger  the  proper 
size  and  shape  to  suit  the  various  requirements  of  the  different  kinds  of  cows  and  the  different  methods  of 
feeding,  and  at  the  same  time  have  them  standardized  so  any  needed  metal  work  can  be  readily  made  to 
fit  the  manger.  Heretofore  there  has  been  no  recognized  standard.  Mangers  have  been  built  m  almost 
every  conceivable  shape  and  style  to  suit  the  fancy,  and  without  any  effort  to  secure  uniformity. 

Louden  Standardized  Mangers  have  been  devised  to  overcome  the  troubles  resulting  from  this  lack 
of  uniformity.  The  designs  presented  are  on  correct  scientific  lines,  and  are  believed  to  be  the  most 
complete  ever  offered.  While  substantially  uniform  in  all  their  curves  and  lines  they  are  readily  adapted 
to  be  made  different  sizes  to  suit  different  sizes  of  cows  and  different  methods  of  feeding. 

The  standard  curb  is  made  5  inches  thick  and  I  1  inches  high  above  the  stall  floor—  10  inches  above  the 
lowest  part  of  the  manger  bottom  (5  inches  higher  than  usual),  and  the  corners  are  rounded  so  they  can- 
not in  any  way  injure  the  cow.  Where  the  stanchion  is  anchored  the  curb  has  a  semi-circular  Cut-Out 
5  inches  deep  and  13  inches  wide  at  the  top,  which  also  has  rounded  corners.     This  permits  the  stanchion 

to  be  hung  low  while  the  curb  is  high,  thus  giving 
the  cow  perfect  freedom  as  well  as  ample  throat 
room  when  lying  with  her  head  low  down,  and 
prevents  her  from  nosing  her  feed  out  over  the  high 
curb  at  the  sides.  The  side  of  the  manger  next 
the  curb  instead  of  having  the  usual  sharp  corner 
which  prevents  the  cow  from  cleaning  up  her  feed 
and  furnishing  a  place  to  catch  and  hold  dirt,  has  a 
four-inch  radius  which  fits  the  cows  nose  nicely 
and  makes  it  easy  to  keep  the  manger  clean.  The 
other  side  has  a  radius  of  24  or  30  inches  (according 
to  size),  centered  from  the  same  perpendicular  line, 
which  makes  the  lowest  part  of  the  manger  within 
5  inches  of  the  curb.  The  far  side  of  the  manger 
raises  on  a  gradual  curve  so  the  feed  naturally 
rolls  down  toward  the  cow. 


Fig. 


1001     Louden  Low  Cement  Manger,  with  Raised 
Feed  Alley  Floor 


Page  Ninety-eight 


Louden  Standardized  Mangers — ^ Continued 


Fig.  1002 
Louden  High  Cement  Manger,  Standard  Size 


Fig.  1003 
Louden  Extra  High  Cement  Manger,  Standard  Size 


With  our  Patent  Cut-Out  Forms  (see  Fig.  970),  our  High  Cut-Out  Curb  is  made  as  easily  as  a  low 
level  curb  and  it  is  a  hundred  per  cent  better.  It  is  in  reality  a  "High  Built-Up  Curb,"  because  it  is 
the  Standard  Height  where  the  stanchion  is  anchored  and  is  5  inches  higher  on  the  sides. 

There  are  no  cracks  or  crevices  or  pockets  anywhere  in  our  mangers  to  catch  and  hold  dirt  and  form 
breeding  places  for  disease  germs.     Beware  of  "dirt  catchers"  in  your  mangers. 

Sizes  of  Mangers.  These  mangers  are  made  in  five  different  sizes  varying  from  26  to  40  inches  in  width 
and  the  outside  edge  of  the  manger  from  11  to  25  inches  high. 

Fig.  1001  is  a  cross-section  view  of  our  Low  Cement  Manger  (radii  4  inches  and  24  inches),  with 
Raised  Feed  Alley  Floor — a  style  well  adapted  for  common  use.  Fig.  1002  is  our  High  Cement  Manger, 
standard  size  (radii  4  inches  and  24  inches).  Fig.  1003  is  our  Extra  High  Cement  Manger,  standard 
size  (radii  4  inches  and  24  inches).     These  sizes  are  well  adapted  for  average  cows. 


Fig.  1004 
Louden  High  Cement  Manger,  Large  Size 


Fig.  lOOS 
Louden  Extra  High  Cement  Manger,  Large  Size 


Fig.  1004  is  our  High  Cement  Manger,  large  size  (radii  4  inches  and  30  inches),  suitable  for  large 
cows.  Fig.  1003  is  our  Extra  High  Cement  Manger,  large  size  (radii  4  inches  and  30  inches),  suitable 
for  extra  large  cows. 

Our  Standardized  Mangers  and  our  improved  methods  of  constructing  them,  are  everywhere  conceded 
to  be  the  greatest  improvements  recently  made  in  Dairy  Barn  Equipments.  These  improvements  are  so 
much  ahead  of  former  designs  and  methods  that  they  mark  a  distinct  epoch  in  the  development  of  dairy 
equipments.  Leading  dairymen  everywhere  approve  our  Standardized  Mangers  and  Agricultural  Colleges 
in  this  and  other  countries  have  adopted  our  directions  for  the  instruction  of  their  classes. 

We  could  fill  this  catalog  with  testimonials  but  have  room  only  for  the  following: 

"  I  am  glad  to  see  these  improvements.  They  are  certainly  a  credit  to  your  Company,  and  will  be  of 
great  value  to  dairymen  as  well  as  a  benefit  to  mankind  in  general."  Prof.  T.  L.  Haecker,  Chief  of  the 
Division  of  Dairy  and  Animal  Husbandry,  University  of  Minnesota. 

"You  have  done  distinct  service  to  the  dairy  farmer  by  Standardizing  the  Concrete  Mangers  and 
making  it  possible  for  him  to  secure  the  exact  measurements  which  are  necessary  for  the  proper 
construction."  Prof.  C.  H.  Eckles,  Chief  of  the  Department  of  Dairy  Husbandry,  University  of  Missouri. 


Page  Ninety-nine 


PJTf?3MilO>^.^i:/.T>>iii.^i:*rl 


Constructing  Louden  Standardized  Mangers 

Fig.  1153  shows  the  different 
steps  in  the  construction  of  Louden 
Standardized  Mangers.  1st,  the 
stalls  are  set  up  and  lined  up  as 
true  as  line  and  level  can  make 
them.  2d,  the  form-boards  for  the 
curb  are  set  up  to  correspond  with 
the  stalls  and  the  cement  is  then 
put  in,  using  our  patent  cut-out 
forms  to  make  the  cut-outs  in  the 
curb.  3d,  the  curb  form-boards  are 
removed,  the  corners  of  the  curb 
are  rounded  and  the  form-boards 
for  the  manger  are  set  up.  4th,  the 
templets  for  the  manger  are  set  in 
place  and  the  cement  is  then  put 
in.  5th,  after  the  cement  has  set 
sufficiently,  the  templets  and  form- 
boards  are  removed  and  the  manger 
is  smoothed  up.  After  this  the  stall 
floors,  the  gutters,  and  the  litter 
and  feed  alley  floors  are  constructed 
in  the  order  most  convenient. 

We  furnish  Complete  Detailed  Instructions  for  doing  the  work.  Also,  the  necessary  Tools  and 
Appliances.     (Seepage  101.) 

Some  parties  advise  putting  in  the  concrete  work  first  and  setting  up  the  stalls  afterwards,  connecting 
the  stall  posts  and  partitions  to  the  curbs  and  floors  by  means  of  anchors  set  in  the  concrete. 

We  do  not  recommend  the  anchoring  of  stalls  in  this  manner  if  it  is  possible  to  install  them  in  the 
usual  manner,  with  stall  posts  securely  embedded  in  the  concrete. 

It  is  practically  impossible  to  get  a  first  class  job  when  separate  anchors  are  used.  No  matter  how 
careful  the  concrete  worker  may  be  he  cannot  set  the  anchors  accurately  enough  to  make  the  stalls  line 
up  properly,  and  some  of  them  will  have  to  be  sprung  into  line  and  held  by  the  top  rail  and  stall  parti- 
tions. The  stalls  will  not  be  as  strong  as  those  set  in  solid  concrete,  and  the  anchors  offer  a  place  for  the 
accumulation  of  dirt. 

The  principal  advantages  of  the  anchors  are,  first,  that  they  may  be  shipped  ahead  of  the  stalls  and 
the  concrete  work  put  in  before  the  stalls  arrive;  second,  that  anyone  can  set  up  the  stalls  without  the  aid 
of  concrete  workers  after  the  anchors  are  in.  Nevertheless,  these  advantages  hardly  offset  the  advantages 
of  stalls  set  up  in  the  manner  shown  by  Fig.  1  I  55,  where  the  stall  posts  extend  fifteen  inches  into  the 
solid  concrete. 


Louden  Improved  Stall  Anchor 


Fig.   1282 
Front  and  Side  Views  of  Mal- 
leable Clamp  for  Improved 
Stall  Anchor 


Fig.   1283 

Anchor  Iron  for  Improved 

Stall  Anchor 


Where  the  use  of  anchors  is  necessary,  the  Louden  Improved 
Stall  Anchor  provides  the  most  secure  anchorage,  and  the 
simplest  method  of  installation  ever  offered  to  barn  owners. 

The  Louden  Anchor  is  the  strongest  and  heaviest  made.  It 
is  the  only  anchor  that  is  made  as  strong  as  the  pipe  it  supports. 

The  lower  part  of  the  anchor — which  is  embedded  in  the 
concrete — is  made  of  heavy  strap  iron.  It  is  3^4  inches  wide  at 
the  top  and  7}i  inches  wide  at  the  bottom,  flared  to  make  it 
hold  securely. 

The  stall  post  is  secured  to  the  anchor  by  means  of  over- 
lapping, dustproof.  malleable  castings,  clamped  on.  There 
are  no  bolts  through  the  anchor  to  break  off  or  weaken  the 
connection.  A  heavily  ribbed  hook  or  flange  three  inches  in 
length  grips  the  anchor  iron  securely  on  each  side,  making  a 
connection  that  is  almost  unbreakable. 

Fig.  1284  shows  the  parts  assembled  and  clamped  to  the 
anchor  iron;  also  a  short  section  of  the  stall  post.  The  top  of 
the  anchor  iron  is  set  level  with   the  top  of   the  curb,  and   the 

broad  flanged  base  of  the  malleable  connection  rests  flat  against    Showing  Stall  Anchor 
the  concrete.  Assembled 


Fig.   1284 


Page  One  hundred 


mtnmn 


^~*iyy*^  FAIR  FIELD.   lOWA^jyi^^ 


Patent 
Pending 


Tools  and  Appliances  for  Constructing  Louden  Standardized  Mangers 

Fig.  970  represents  the  Louden  Cut-Out  Form  to  make  the 

cut-outs  in  the  Louden  High  Built-Up  Manger  Curb.     The  forms 

are  set  in  between  the  boards  used  in  constructing  the  curb  where  the 

stanchions  are  to  be  anchored.     No  cutting  of  the  boards  nor  extra 

work  of  any  kind  is  required  to  make  the  cut-outs  and  they  will  all  be 

uniform  in  size  and  shape.     The  anchors  which  connect  the  stanchions 

to  the  curb  are  easily  attached  to  the  forms  and  the  cement  being  slushed 

around  them  will  make  a  better  bond  than  if  they  were  set  afterwards.     The  cut 

shows  one    of    our    large   sherardized    U    bolt  anchors    connected    to  the    form. 

There  should  be  4  to  6  forms  for  each  installment  according  to  the  size  of  the 

Fig.  970    barn  and  the  speed  required  in  doing  the  work. 

Fig.  1074  is  a  top  view  of  our  Curb  Gauge,  by  means  of  which  the 
form-boards  for  the  curb  will  be  held  the  proper  distance  apart,  and 
equal  distances  from  the  stall  posts.  No  measuring  or  cutting  of  boards 
is    required.     There    should    be    8    to    12    gauges    for    each   installment. 


Fig.    1013  is  a  perspective  of  one  of 

the  Louden  Manger  Templets.     There 

are  seven  different  sizes  —  one  for  each  of 

the  three  sizes  of  concrete  mangers  and  one  for  each  of  the 

bottoms  of  two  sizes  of  galvanized  mangers.      No  other  device 

has  ever  been  made  that  will  begin  to  compare  with  these  templets 

for  ease  and  rapidity  in  the  construction  of  cement  mangers  as  well  as  for 

the  excellence  of  the  work. 


u 

ig.  97 

1 


Fig.  1013 
There  should  be  5  to  8  templets  for  each  installment, 


No.  4 


Louden  Cement  Tools 

No.   I   is  our 

Straight     Edger 

for  rounding  off 

the  upper    edge 

of    the    manger 

\  curbs,  also  the  sharp  edge  of  the  gutter. 

No.  2  is  our  Curved  Edger  for  rounding 

off  the  edges  of  the  cut-out  in  the  curb 

and  other  curved  works. 

No.  1  No.  2  [\Jq   4  is  a  small  tool  to  round  out 

and  smooth  up  the  corners  between  the  curbs  and  the  stall  floor.     Also  the  corners  between  the  manger 

and  the  feed  alley  floor  and  any  similar  corners  liable  to  catch  and  hold  dirt. 

No.  5  is  our  4-Jnch  radius 
Steel  Trowel  for  rounding 
out  and  smoothing  the 
corner  of  the  manger  next 
the  curb.  No.  6  is  our  24- 
inch  radius  Steel  Trowel  for 
smoothing  the  bottom  of 
No-  5  No.  6  the    manger.     The     blades 

of  these  trowels  are  of  the  finest  steel  and  they  are  light  and  easy  to  handle.     No  one  can  afford  to  be  with- 
out a  supply  of  these  tools  in  doing  the  cement  work  in  a  dairy  barn. 


Fig.  1192 


Star  Drills.  For  drilling  holes  in  brick,  stone  or  concrete.  We 
carry  only  the  sizes  necessary  for  the  anchor  shields  we  use  and  only 
in  one  length.  Other  sizes  and  lengths  will  be  furnished  on  application, 
at  market  prices.  Sizes — ^2x8  inches,  /jxS  inches,  ^4x8  inches,  and 
J-gxS  inches. 


Page  One  hundred  one 


.1    ^^   ! 1  1 


DX!W<;.iii.^»t.'i;feT.iiti.'>i>;*«<o.^mCig^ai 

^Spy^f^  FAIRFIELD.    I  QNVA  ^Til^  ^  ^^^^"^^^  ^"wia^gft^^fei 


^'■ 


m 


Louden  Spring  Balance  Manger  Divisions — Fig.  1018 

(Patent  Pending) 

Fig.  1018  shows  a  Louden  Standardized  Manger  fitted  with  a  section  of  our  Spring  Balance  Manger 
Divisions  which  are  made  to  fit  the  manger.  How  comfortable  the  cows  look,  each  eating  her  apportioned 
feed  without  interference  from  her  neighbor  • —  the  shape  of  the  manger  bringing  the  feed  close  so  she  does 
not  have  to  strain  to  get  it,  and  the  manger  divisions  preventing  her  from  straining  to  get  the  feed  belong- 
ing to  her  neighbor. 

The  Individual  Manger  is  an  advantage  in  a  number  of  ways.  It  prevents  the  fast-eating  cow  from 
robbing  the  slow-eating  cow  —  the  one  getting  more  than  is  good  for  her  and  the  other  not  getting  enough. 
The  amount  of  feed  can  be  varied  to  suit  the  individual  cow  and  different  kinds  of  feed  can  be  given  to 
different  cows  to  suit  their  requirements.  It  prevents  the  cow  from  straining  and  injuring  herself  in  trying 
to  get  the  feed  in  the  adjoining  section.  It  helps  to  prevent  one  cow  from  infecting  another.  In  short, 
it  enables  the  dairyman  to  feed  and  handle  his  cows  as  his  best  judgment  tells  him  they  should  be  fed  and 
handled,  instead  of  each  cow  striving  to  help  herself. 

The  Divisions  are  made  of  heavy  galvanized  sheet  steel  and  are  hinged  to  the  stall  posts  so  they  can  be 
raised  for  cleaning  the  manger.  They  are  connected  together  in  sections  by  means  of  a  brace  rod,  as  shown 
in  the  cut,  so  that  all  the  divisions  in  the  section  can  be  raised  at  one  operation  instead  of  only  one  at  a  time. 

Malleable  Iron  Hinges  are  used  as  shown  by  Fig.  1 1  53, 
pattern  926  being  the  single  hinge  used  at  the  outer  ends 
of  the  sections,  and  patterns  927  and  928  being  the 
double  hinges  used  on  the  central  divisions.  These  hinges 
are  connected  to  the  stall  posts  by  pivot  clamps  when 
used  with  stalls  having  central  posts.  With  our  Double 
Post  Stalls  the  hinges  are  connected  to  pivot  pins  which 

„  are  attached  to  the  posts  by  our  Grip  Clamps,  as  shown 

Figr.  1153  •      .1  . 

^  in  the  cut. 

To  assist  in  raising  the  divisions  and  to  hold  them  in  elevated  position,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1020,  we  use 
Special  Coil  Springs  which  are  attached  to  some  of  the  central  hinges  by  means  of  clevises,  the  upper 
ends  of  the  springs  being  adjustably  connected  to  the  stall  partitions.  Two  sizes  of  springs  are  used,  each 
having  a  working  strength  of  from  300  to  500  pounds  according  to  size  and  adjustment. 

When  the  Divisions  are  raised  halfway  up  they  will  be  held  in  a  perfect  balance  at  any  higher  point 
without  any  additional  assistance  whatever.  The  attachment  of  the  springs  is  such  that  they  can  be  ad- 
justed to  help  hold  the  divisions  down  when  feeding  and  thus  prevent  the  cows  from  nosing  them  out 
of  position.  With  the  different  sizes  of  springs  and  with  the  complete  and  convenient  adjustment  any  size 
or  weight  of  Manger  Division  may  be  balanced  to  perfection. 


Page  One  hundred  two 


Louden  Spring  Balance  Manger  Divisions — Fig.  1020 


Specifications 


The  Dimensions.  All  of  our  Manger  Divisions  are 
24  inches  high  where  the  hinges  are  placed.  The  other 
dimensions  are  given  in  Plate  14.  page    104. 

The  Material.  All  the  Divisions  are  made  of  No.  18 
galvanized  sheet  steel.  Each  Division  is  reinforced  entirely 
around  the  edge  with  heavy  iron,  giving  it  great  strength 
and  rigidity. 

The  Brace  Rod  is  made  of  1  j^s  O.  D.  steel  tubing  and  is 
attached  by  malleable  iron  clamps  which  are  bolted  to  the 
reinforcing  irons  so  as  to  hold  them  rigidly  in  place. 

The  Springs.  The  lighter  spring  is  made  of  ^  inch 
and  the  heavier  spring  of  Yg  high-grade  spring  wire — the 
best  that  can  be  procured.  Generally  two  springs  are  used 
on  a  section  of  4  divisions,  3  springs  on  a  section  of  i  di- 
visions and  so  on.  If  the  heavier  springs  are  used  a  less 
number  may  be  required. 

The  Finish.  The  sheet  steel  of  which  the  divisions  are 
made  is  galvanized,  and  then  the  whole  is  coated  with 
our  Special    Dairy    Barn    Paint.      If   the   fittings   are   to   be 


galvanized  there  will  be  an  extra  charge  for  this  extra  work. 
Louden  Spring  Balance  Manger  Division  complete 
consists  of  1  Galvanized  Division  of  the  size  specified,  42 
inches  (more  or  less)  of  1  rs  O.  D.  Tubular  B  race  Rod :  1  Keeper 
with  Anchor  Bolts  to  support  lower  corner  of  divisions:  1 
Single  Hinge  for  each  end  division:  1  Single  Pivot  Clamp  for 
each  single  hinge;  1  Double  Hinge  for  each  central  division: 
I  Double  Pivot  Clamp  for  each  double  hinge,  provided  stalls 
with  central  posts  are  used.  With  the  Louden  Double 
Post  Stalls,  1  F'ivot  Pin  and  2  pair  of  Grip  Clamps  to  attach 
the  pivot  pin  to  the  stall  posts  are  used  in  place  of  the  double 
pivot  clamp.     In  ordering  specify  the  size  of  posts. 

The  Spring  Outfit.  Each  Spring  Outfit  consists  of  1 
Louden  Special  Coil  Spring  of  the  size  to  suit  requirements: 
1    Clevis  and   1    Holder  tor  spring. 

Weights.  With  hinges  and  their  connections  complete 
as  specified  are  as  follows:  New  No.  2  Division  about  16^ 
lbs.:  No.  3  Division  about  \8}i  lbs.:  No.  4  Division  about 
20  lbs.     The  weight  of  the  spring  outfit  is  about  3^4  lbs. 


B/?y)C£  /SOD 


Fig.  1186 


Louden   Hold-Down   Hook  for  Manger  Divisions 

Fig,  1  186  is  a  side  view  of  our  Hold-Down  Hook  for  Manger  Divisions. 
Usually  this  hook  is  not  needed.  The  manger  springs  could  be  adjusted  so 
it  would  be  impossible  to  root  up  the  divisions  but  it  would  make  them 
heavy  to  lift  for  cleaning.  By  using  our  Hold-Down  Hook  the  cows  cannot 
root  up  the  divisions,  and  at  the  same  time  they  will  be  easy  to  lift.  The 
hook  catches  automatically  and  is  easily  unlatched  by  pressing  a  finger  on 
its  upper  end.  The  hook  catches  against  a  plate  secured  to  the  concrete  by 
two  anchor  bolts. 

Keepers  like  that  shown  by  Fig,  1072  are 
secured  to  the  inner  side  of  the  curb,  as  shown 
in  Figs,  1018  and  1020  to  support  the  lower 
corners  of  the  divisions  and  prevent  husky  cows 
from  pushing  them  out  of  place.  Fig.  1072 


Page  One  hundred  three 


Louden    Spring    Balance 
Manger  Divisions  —  Cont'd 


Plate  14 


We  make  three  different 
sizes  of  Manger  Divisions, 
as  shown  in  Plate  14,  which 
also  shows  the  divisions 
fitted  in  the  different  sizes 
of  our  Standardized  Con- 
crete Mangers  for  which 
they   are  intended. 

The  new  No.  2  division 
is  for  Fig.  1001  manger  only. 
It  is  not  fitted  with  springs 
or  brace  rod,  and  each 
division  is  raised  and  low- 
ered separately.  It  is  inexpensive,  and  is  designed  for  barns  where  it  is  not  desired  to  put  in  the 
expensive  divisions.      All  other  manger  divisions  are  fitted  with  springs  and  brace  rod. 

No.  3  division  is  intended  for  Figs.  1001  and  1002  mangers,  and  No.  4  for  Figs.    1002  and   1003. 
description  of  these  mangers  on  pages  98  and  99. 


more 
See 


Louden  Spring  Balance  Mangers 


This  illustration  shows  two  sections  of  the  Louden  Spring  Balance  Galvanized  Mangers  in  the 
dairy  barn  on  the  farm  of  the  University  of  Minnesota,  at  St.  Paul.  See  how  perfectly  they  line  up  and 
how  much  higher  they  raise  than  the  mangers  shown  in  the  rear  which  are  not  the  Louden.  The  superior- 
ity of  the  Louden  Equipment  speaks  for  itself.     Louden  Mangers  are  made  regularly  in  sections  of  four. 

This  was  a  somewhat  difficult  job  to  install  on  account  of  the  large  posts  which  are  in  the  manger.  We 
found  a  way  to  get  around  the  posts,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  cut,  without  cutting  the  sections  into  single 
mangers  as  was  done  with  the  mangers  in  the  rear,  which  is  objectionable  and  should  be  avoided  if  pos- 
sible. It  is  better  to  have  the  large  posts  or  columns  in  line  with  the  stall  posts  and  then  the  mangers 
will  not  have  to  be  cut  to  get  around  them. 


Page  One  hundred  four 


Louden  Spring  Balance  Galvanized  Manger — Fig.  990 


Patent  Pending. 


Specifications 

Standard  Size  is  24  inches  high  from  the  manger  bottom 
and  extends  out  36  inches  from  the  center  of  the  stall  posts. 
The  standard  width  is  42  inches  but  it  will  be  made  wider  or 
narrower  as  specified,  to  suit  the  width  of  the  stalls  with 
which  it  is  used.  No  18  gauge  galvanized  sheet  steel  is  used, 
reinforced  entirely  around  the  edge  with  heavy  iron. 

The  Brace  Rod  is  made  of  1  yg  O.  D,  steel  tubing  and  is 
attached  to  the  manger  divisions  by  malleable  iron  clamps 
which  are  bolted  to  the  reinforcing  strips  so  as  to  hold  them 
rigidly  in  place. 

The  Hinges  are  malleable  castings.  No.  741  being  the 
pattern  number  of  the  end  hinge,  and  No.  797  R.  &  L.  the 
pattern  numbers  of  the  center  hinges.  With  stalls  having 
central   posts   the   hinges  are  connected   to   them   by   pivot 


Fig.  1154 

clamps — single  pivots  being  used  on  the  end  posts,  and 
double  pivots  on  the  central  posts.  With  our  Double  Post 
Fig.  812  Stall,  shown  in  Fig.  990,  the  central  hinges  are 
connected  to  pivot  pins  made  of  1  ,5  O.  D.  tubular  steel, 
and  connected  to  the  stall  posts  by  a  pair  of  our  Grip  Clamps. 
If  the  springs  have  to  be  set  vertically  (which  is  seldom 
done)  hinge  castings,  pattern  Nos.  876  and  877  R.  &  L. 
(not  illustrated)  will  be  used. 

The  Springs.  The  lower  ends  of  the  Springs  are  con- 
nected to  clevises  having  their  ends  fitted  to  hook  in  the 
eyes  of  the  hinges,  and  the  upper  ends  of  the  Springs  are 
connected  to  holders  (the  same  as  our  Regular  Stanchion 
Holders)  which  are  adjustably  clamped  on  the  stall  par- 
titions. Generally  2  Springs  are  used  on  a  section  of  3 
mangers  and  3  Springs  on  a  section  of  4  mangers.  If  heavier 
springs  are  used  a  less  number  may  be  required. 


The  Finish.  The  Sheet  Steel  of  which  the  manger  is 
made  is  galvanized,  and  then  the  entire  manger  is  coated 
with  our  Special  Dairy  Barn  Paint.  If  the  fittings  are 
to  be  galvanized  there  will  be  an  extra  charge. 

Louden  Spring  Balance  Manger  Complete  consists 
of  42  inches  (more  or  less)  of  Galvanized  Front  (or  back): 
42  inches  (more  or  less)  of  Brace-Rod;  I  Manger  Division 
for  each  manger,  and  I  End  Division  for  each  section  of 
mangers;  Clamps  and  Bolts  to  attach  the  Brace-Rod  to  the 
Divisions;  I  Single  Hinge  for  each  End  Division;  1  Single 
Pivot  Clamp  for  each  Single  Hinge;  1  Double  Hinge  for  each 
Central  Division;  and  1  Double  Pivot  Clamp  for  each  Double 
Hinge — provided  stalls  with  central  posts  are  used.  With 
the  Louden  Double-Post  Stalls.  1  Pivot  Pin  and  2  pairs  of 
Grip  Clamps  to  attach  the  Pivot  Pin  to  the  stall  posts  are 
used  in  place  of  the  Double  Pivot  Clamp. 

The  Spring  Outfit.  Each  Spring  Outfit  consists  of  1 
Louden  Special  Coil  Spring  of  the  size  to  suit  requirements; 
1    Clevis  and    1    Holder  for  spring. 

End  Division  complete,  consists  of  1  Galvanized  Sheet 
Steel  End;  1  End  Clamp  to  attach  Brace-Rod;  1  Single  Hinge 
and  1  Single  Pivot  Clamp  for  hinge.  The  End  Divisions 
are  included  in  prices  quoted. 

Note:  The  Pivot  Clamps  for  manger  hinges  on  central 
post  stalls.  Grip  Clamps  to  hold  Pivot  Pins  for  81 2  Stalls, 
and  the  Spring  Holders  are  all  made  to  fit  either  IJg  or  1'-^ 
O.  D.  steel  tubing.  In  ordering  be  sure  to  specify  the  size 
of   tubing  with  which  they  are  to  be  used. 

Weights.  Standard  size  Manger  complete,  as  specified, 
with  either  Pivot  Clamp  or  Pivot  Pin  and  Grip  Clamps  for 
Hinges,  but  without  End  Division  or  Spring  Outfit,  about 
47  lbs.;  End  Division  complete,  as  specified,  about  18  lbs.; 
Spring  Outfit  complete,   as  specified,  about   5]'^  lbs. 

Note:  There  is  a  little  variation  in  weights  on  account 
of  the  different  sizes  of  the  fittings  for  different  sizes  of 
tubing. 

Large  Size  Manger.  The  dimensions  are  the  same  as 
the  Standard  Size  except  that  it  extends  out  from  the  stall 
posts  40  inches  instead  of  36  inches. 

Weights  of  Large  Size  Mangers,  complete,  as  specified, 
about  50  lbs.;  End  Division,  as  specified,   about  21    lbs. 


Page  One  hundred-five 


^Iiin^'j"'^'*-*-^^^'*'**-'*^'^!^^.*^ 


Louden  Spring  Balance  Mangers — Continued 


BJ?XC£  J?OD 


■iAv."  A  .-J  .V  ;  ^-i'^- 


BffACS  f!OD. 


STALL   FLOOK.\ 


Fig.  1006     Standard  Size 


Fig.  1007     Large  Size 


The  Louden  Spring  Balance  Galvanized  Manger  is  the  most  convenient  as  well  as  the  strongest  and  most 
durable  manger  of  the  kind  manufactured.  The  upper  part  which  is  made  of  heavy  galvanized  sheet  steel 
is  made  to  fit  a  concrete  bottom,  as  shown  in  the  cut.  The  divisions  which  convert  the  manger  into  com- 
partments, or  individual  mangers,  are  reinforced  by  Spot  Welded  T-iron  all  around  the  edges. 
The  back  or  front  (whichever  it  may  be  called)  is  attached  to  the  divisions  by  angle  irons  bolted  thereto. 
The  back  (or  front)  is  left  off  in  shipping  and  the  entire  manger  is  packed  flat  to  take  a  low  rate  of 
freight.      In  putting  the  manger  together  no  punching  or  drilling  of  holes  or  riveting  is  required. 

The  manger  is  generally  built  in  sections  of  4  to  5  compartments  and  is  further  strengthened  by  a  brace 
rod,  running  the  entire  length  of  the  section,  the  brace  rod  being  clamped  on  the  upper  edges  of  the  divisions 
by  malleable  iron  clamps.  The  brace  rod  also  serves  as  a  guard  to  hold  the  hay  in  the  manger.  The  manger 
is  hinged  to  the  stall  post  by  malleable  hinge  castings  adjustably  secured  to  the  inner  ends  of  the  divisions. 
Pivots  adjustably  secured  to  the  stall  posts  are  used  to  hold  the  hinges  in  place  and  permit  the  raising  and 
lowering  of  the  manger.  By  this  means  it  is  readily  adjusted  up  or  down,  or  in  or  out,  to  make  it  fit  the 
concrete  bottom.  With  stalls  having  central  posts,  pivot  clamps  are  used  instead  of  the  pivot  pins  required 
by  our  double-post  stalls. 

To  assist  in  raising  the  manger  and  to  hold  it  in  elevated  position  for  cleaning,  heavy  Special  Coil 
Wire  Springs  are  used,  as  shown  by  the  cuts.  Two  different  sizes  of  springs  are  used  for  lighter  and  heavier 
mangers,  which  are  made  of  the  best  spring  steel  wire  that  can  be  procured.  Many  experiments  were  made 
and  scores  of  sample  springs  from  all  the  leading  spring  manufacturers  in  the  country  were  tested  before  we 
decided  upon  the  springs  to  use.  As  a  result  we  have  a  Spring  Balance  Manger  which  cannot  be  equaled. 
Each  spring  has  a  working  strength  of  from  400  to  600  pounds,  according  to  size  and  adjustment,  and  after 
the  mangers  are  raised  one-half  way  up,  they  will  be  held  by  the  springs  in  a  perfect  balance  at  any  point 
and  without  any  additional  assistance  whatever. 

The  attachment  of  the  spring  is  such  that  when  the  mangers  are  down  in  feeding  position  the  springs 
will  help  to  hold  them  more  securely  in  lowered  position  and  to  keep  the  cow  from  nosing  them  out  of  place. 
The  upper  ends  of  the  springs  are  usually  connected  to  the  stall  partitions  by  clamping  holders  similar  to 
our  standard  stanchion  holders  which  may  be  readily  and  easily  adjusted  back  or  forth  thereon  to  increase 
or  diminish  the  tension  of  the  springs.  With  the  two  sizes  of  springs  and  the  complete  and  convenient 
adjustments,  any  size  or  weight  of  manger  may  be  balanced  to  perfection. 

The  mangers  when  raised  stand  8  to  10  inches  higher  than  any  others  in  the  market  and  there  is 
ample  room  for  the  heads  of  the  cows  when  the  manger  is  raised.  They  are  so  rigid  that  a  section  of  four 
to  six  can  be  raised  or  lowered  at  one  end  — something  that  cannot  be  done  with  any  other  manger  with- 
out twisting  it  all  out  of  shape.  We  do  not  know  of  any  point  that  can  be  imagined  but  what  has  been  taken 
care  of  in  our  Spring  Balance  Mangers. 


Page  One  hundred  six 


m^mm^^mn 


)^;y!^<;0n>^;*.^iJ^tt^tiL^ip>;4\ 


A  Few  Words  About  Stanchions 


aeossiEl 


fee  ted 
or 


necessary. 


There  is  nothing  of  greater  importance  in  Dairy 
Barn  Equipment  than  the  Stanchion  by  which  the 
cow  is  held.  It  should  be  strong  and  durable  to  hold 
the  cow  securely  and  yet  allow  her  all  the  freedom 
of  movement  necessary  for  her  comfort.  A  rigidly 
hung  stanchion  should  not  be  permitted,  and  if  the 
law  against  cruelty  to  animals  was  strictly  enforced  it 
would     not  be  permitted. 

The  cow  must  be  made  comfortable  to  produce 
the  most  milk  and  return  to  her  owner  the  largest 
profits.  Therefore  the  stanchion  must  be  flexibly 
hung  so  its  lower  end  will  be  free  to  swing  in  a  circle 
of  8  to  10  inches.  This  is  necessary  to  allow  the  cow 
to  pitch  forward  in  getting  up  and  lying  down 
without  jamming  her  shoulders  against  the  stanchion 
and  to  avoid  cramping  her  neck  in  lying  down  at  one 
side  or  the  other  of  the  stall. 

The  stanchion  should  be  as  smooth  as  it  is  possible 
to  make  it,  so  it  will  always  be  easy  to  clean  and 
easy  to  keep  clean.  Also,  to  make  it  easily  disin- 
no  cracks  or  crevices  anywhere  to  catch  and  hold  dirt 


There  should  be 

to  furnish   breeding   places  for  disease   germs. 

There  should  be  no  square  corners  to  rub  against  the  cow's  neck.  This  applies  with  greater  force  to 
the  lower  end  of  the  stanchion  than  it  does  to  the  sides,  because  a  cow  when  in  her  stall  will  be  lying 
down  half  the  time,  and  her  neck  will  be  in  contact  with  the  lower  end  of  the  stanchion. 

The  lower  ends  of  the  stanchion  bars  should  always  be  sloping  or  well  rounded  and  never  flat  nor 
have  square  or  sharply  rounded  corners.  This  is  necessary  to  prevent  the  cow  from  getting  her  front  foot 
caught  between  the  manger  curb  and  the  lower  flat  or  square  end  of  the  stanchion  and  having  it  seriously 
injured.     A  number  of  cases  have  occurred  in  which  valuable  cows  have  been  ruined  in  this  way. 

The  hinges  at  the  lower  end  should  be  exceedingly  strong  and  be  laterally  rigid  to  prevent  torsional 
displacement  of  the  stanchion  sides  in  which  case  the  latch  at  the  upper  end  will  fail  to  register  with  the 
catch  on  the  hinged  side.  There  should  be  no  flat  surfaces  on  the  hinge  castings  to  catch  and  hold  dirt 
nor  sharp  corners  to  injure  the  cow's  neck. 

The  latch  should  be  strong  and  absolutely  animal  proof,  and  at  the  same  time,  be  easily  unlatched. 
A  "Push-Down"  latch  is  better  than  a  "Lift-Up"  or  a  "Turn-Around"  latch,  because  it  can  be  opened 
with  one  hand,  closed  or  mittened,  which  cannot  be  done  with  the  other  kinds  of  latches. 

The  Louden  High  Carbon  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion  shown  on  other  pages,  has  all  the  good 
points  enumerated  and  is,  without  any  question,  the  best  stanchion  manufactured.  It  is  decidedly  the 
strongest  stanchion  in  the  market,  the  tubes  of  which  it  is  made  measuring  4}  2  inches  in  circumferences 
as  against  2 '8  inches  for  the  "T"  steel  of  which  many  stanchions  are  made.  It  is  also  the  neatest  and 
smoothest,  and  has  no  "dirt  catchers"  or  other  objectionable  features. 

The  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions  are  made  in  three  different  widths — 53^2,  7  and  8V2  inches, 
(Narrow,  Standard  and  Wide).  These  sizes  will  fit  the  smallest  or  largest  cows.  Some  people  have  the 
mistaken  idea  that  a  stanchion,  like  a  hat  or  a  coat  or  a  pair  of  shoes  should  fit  closely.  On  the  contrary 
it  should  never  fit  closely.  The  looser  the  better  provided  the  cow  cannot  pull  her  head  through. 
Fig.  1  157  shows  a  large  cow  and  a  six-months  old  calf,  each  securely  held  by  the  same  size  Louden 
Tubular  Steel  Stanchion. 

With  the  three  sizes  we  make  any  cow,  from  the  smallest  to  the  largest,  can  be  securely  and  comfort- 
ably held,  90  per  cent  of  them  requiring  only  the  standard  or  7-inch  size.  A  large,  beefy-neck  cow  will 
occasionally  require  the  wide  or  83^-inch  size,  and  occasionally  it  would  be  better  to  have  the  narrow  or 
53/^-inch  size  for  an  exceedingly  small  cow  or  heifer. 

One  size  of  stanchion  can  generally  be  taken  out  and  a  different  size  put  in  as  easily  and  quickly  as  an 
adjustable  stanchion  can  be  adjusted,  and  you  can  buy  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions  for  30  to  40  per 
cent  less  money  than  you  will  pay  for  adjustable  stanchions. 

The  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion  has  stood  the  test  of  time  and  is  growing  more  popular  every  day. 
Half  a  million  are  already  in  use  in  all  parts  of  the  world  and  the  sale  is  rapidly  approaching  the  million 
mark.  In  the  long  run  it  is  cheaper  than  a  halter  and  is  much  more  convenient.  As  a  cow  tie  the  Louden 
Stanchion  is  safer  and  better  in  every  way. 


Page  One  hundred  nine 


Louden  High  Carbon  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion — Continued 


The  great  strength  of  the  Louden  Reinforced 
Stanchion  Hinge  is  readily  seen  by  an  inspection  of 
Fig.  1  I  58.  The  hinge  castings  are  made  in  our  own 
foundry  of  the  best  high-grade  malleable  iron.  The 
castings  are  shaped  to  practically  encircle  the  lower 
ends  of  the  stanchion  sides  which  are  made  of  I  fV  High 
Carbon  Tubular  Steel  and  are  securely  connected 
thereto  by  four  heavy  rivets. 

The  pivot  end  of  the  hinge  is  made  twice  as  wide 
Fig.  1158  as  the  pivot  ends  of  other  stanchions  and  the  looped 

end  helps  to  support  the  other  end.  A  large  pivot  pin 
passes  through  four  thicknesses  of  malleable  iron  spread  apart  to  make  them  bracjng.  It  is  therefore 
of  much  greater  strength  than  other  stanchions,  especially  in  the  torsional  or  twisting  strain  where 
nearly  all  other  stanchions  are  weak. 

There  are  no  flat  surfaces  on  the  Louden  Stanchion  Hinge  where  dirt  will  collect.  The  ends  being 
sloping  and  rounded,  debris  will  roll  off  and  if  any  should  get  in  the  joint  the  opening  in  the  center  will  let 
it  pass  through.  If  disease  should  get  into  the  barn  the  stanchions  can  be  dipped  in  a  disinfecting  solution 
which  will  reach  every  part,  inside  as  well  as  outside,  and  will  destroy  every  germ  which  may  be  making 
his  dweUing  place  there.  ■         i       ii 

The  latch  spring  is  especially  reliable  and  is  completely  protected.  If  a  new  spring  should  ever  be 
needed,  which  is  seldom  the  case,  it  can  be  sent  by  mail  for  a  few  >,onts,  and  by  removing  one  small  bolt 
it  can  be  quickly  put  in  place. 

If  the  barn  should  ever  burn  that  will  not  necessarily  put  our  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions  out  of  commis- 
sion. The  barn  of  Mr.  L.  W.  Putman  of  Frederick,  Md.,  having  a  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stall  Equipment 
recently  burned  and  in  two  days  he  had  a  shed  over  the  stalls  and  stanchions,  and  was  using  them  the 
same  as  ever.  There  was  nothing  injured  by  the  fire  except  the  latch  springs  of  the  stanchions,  and  these 
we  sent  him  free  of  charge  by  parcel  post. 

Mr.  Putman,  under  date  of  April  20,  1915,  writes  as  follows: 

"Last  fall  my  barn  containing  some  1200  bushels  of  grain  and  100  tons  of  hay  and  provender  caught  fire  and  burned  to 
the  ground.  The  most  remarkable  thing  about  this  fire  was  the  condition  of  the  Louden  Stalls  which  were  in  the  basement. 
The  entire  weight  of  the  timbers  and  the  heat  of  the  fire  went  into  these  stalls.  I  thought  they  were  ruined  but  after 
clearing  the  debris  away  I  found  they  were  absolutely  intact.  I  built  a  temporary  roof  over  them  and  in  two  days  I  was 
using  them  the  same  as  before  the  barn  was  burned.     I  think  this  is  a  remarkable  test  of  the  quality  of  the  Louden  Stalls." 

The  best  material  of  which  a  stanchion  can  be  made  is  High  Carbon  Tubular  Steel.     It  is  the 

strongest  as  well  as  the  lightest  and  is  also  the  easiest  to  keep  clean.  It  has  no  sharp  corners  to  injure  the 
cow's  neck:   no  cracks  or  crevices  to  harbor  disease  germs,  nor  built-on  strips  to  work  loose  and  come  off. 

The  chains  by  which  the  stanchions  are  hung  and  anchored  to  the  curb  are  made  of  the  best  quality  of 
steel  wire  approximately  f  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  its  tensile  strength  is  5000  pounds — strong  enough 
to  hang  up  three  large  cows  by  the  necks.  Why  use  a  double  chain  at  the  lower  end  of  your  stanchion  to 
restrict  and  hamper  the  freedom  of  the  cow. 

The  Louden  Tubular  Stanchion  is  the  essence  of  simplicity.  It  has  no  complicated  trouble-making 
parts  to  get  out  of  order.  It  can  be  used  almost  anywhere,  in  the  smallest  as  well  as  the  largest  barn  —  for 
the  largest  or  the  smallest  cows — in  a  common  wood  frame  as  well  as  the  most  up-to-date  cow  stall.  No 
one  who  keeps  cows,  whether  one  or  a  hundred,  can  afford  to  do  without  Louden  Stanchions. 

We  call  attention  to  our  patent  No.  990,827,  dated  April  25,  1913,  which  covers  the  main  features  of 
our  Stanchion,  including  the  Hinge,  the  Latch  and  the  Sloping  Ends.     Beware  of  infringements. 

Specifications 


Three  Sizes.  Narrow,  having  a  width  of  5H  inches; 
Standard,  7  inches,  and  Wide,  8>2  inches,  all  in  the  clear 
and  all  having  a  length  45  inches  in  the  clear,  and  57 '  2  inches 
from  end  to  end  of  the  chains.  Standard  size  will  always 
be  furnished  unless  otherwise  specified.  Space  from 
top-rail  to  curb  must  be  4  feet  7  inches  (53  in.)  to  hang 
stanchion  properly. 

Equipment.  Stanchions  are  furnished  in  four  ways  as 
shown  by  cuts  on  opposite  page.  1st.  the  Naked  Stanchion; 
2d,  the  Stanchion  with  Guide  or  Hold-Open;  3d.  Stanchion 
with  Holder  and  Anchor;  4th,  Stanchion  with  Guide.  Holder 
and  Anchor.  For  convenience  the  Attachments  are  left  off 
and  packed  separately  in  shipping. 


Page  One  hundred  ten 


Weights.     The  naked  Stanchion,  standard  size,  weighs 
15  lbs.:  with  Guide,   15J2  lbs.;  with  Holder  and  Anchor    16 
lbs.;  with  Guide,  Holder  and  Anchor,   17  lbs.     The  Narrow 
Stanchion  weighs  a  little  less  and  the  Wide  Stanchion  a  little 
more. 

The  Holder  is  made  to  fit    \^s  and   \]4  O.  D.  tubing. 

Be  sure  to  specify  size  in  ordering. 


■Hi>,'lJfcTiHIL'M-I 


FAIRFIE LP.  IOWA, 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions— Continued 


Stanchion 
Only 


Stanchion 
with  Guide 


Stanchion 
with  Holder 
and  Anchor 


Stanchion     | 
with    Hold- 
er,    Anchor 
and    Guide 


Fig.  861  Fig.  861-A 


Fig.  861-C  Fig.  861-B 

Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions— Naked  and  with  Attachments 


Page  One  hundred  eleven 


fmmlTI 


The  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden  Wood-Lined  Steel  Stanchion — Fig.  937 

Some  people  think  that  steel  is  cold  on  the  cow's  neck  and  want  the  stanchion 
lined  with  wood  to  keep  her  neck  warm.  Our  Wood-Lined  Stanchion  is  in 
response  to  this  demand.  We  do  not  think  there  is  anything  in  this  contention, 
or  at  least,  not  enough  to  overcome  the  objectional  features  of  the  wood  lining. 
We  all  know  that  metal  is  a  more  active  conductor  of  heat  and  cold  than 
wood,  and  that  when  metal  is  pressed  against  the  naked  skin  in  freezing  weather 
it  will  have  a  greater  chilling  effect  than  wood.  This  fact  is  responsible  for 
the  belief  that  an  all-metal  stanchion  is  cold  on  the  cow's  neck. 

The  conditions,  however,  are  not  parallel.  To  make  them  so,  the  hair  on 
the  cow's  neck  would  have  to  be  shaved  off  and  the  metal  bar  would  have  to 
be  pressed  against  her  naked  skin.  A  properly  hung  stanchion  will  not  often 
more  than  merely  touch  the  cows  neck,  and  the  hair  on  her  neck  is  certainly 
the  equal  of  a  mitten  on  the  hand  in  resisting  cold. 

Put  mittens  on  a  man's  hands,  blindfold  him,  set  up  a  well-oiled  fork 
handle  and  a  piece  of  tubular  steel  of  the  same  size,  let  him  loosely  encircle 
them  with  his  mittened  hands,  the  same  as  the  cow's  neck  touches  the  stanchion, 
and  he  cannot  tell  the  one  from  the  other  by  the  difference  in  temperature. 
We  have  never  had  a  single  complaint  on  this  point  from  the  users  of  our  half 
million  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion  —  many  of  them  in  the  coldest  parts  of  Canada. 
It  is  always  the  person  who  has  not  used  them  who  raises  the  objection. 
A  wood-lined  stanchion  is  not  as  strong  as  the  Tubular  Steel.  It  is  not  as 
smooth  and  as  easily  kept  clean.  The  crevice  below  the  wood  lining  is 
objectionable  on  account  of  collecting  dirt  and  harboring  disease  germs.  No 
wood-lined  stanchion  has  any  lining  at  the  lower  end  and  as  the  cow  will  be 
lying  down  at  least  half  the  time  her  neck  will  be  in  direct  contact  with  the 
"cold"  steel.     We  will  not,  however,    try    to  convert  you. 

If  you  want  a  Wood-Lined  Stanchion  we  will  furnish  you  the  best  one 
made.  With  the  exception  of  the  side  bars,  it  has  all  the  superior  features  of 
our  famous  Tubular  Steel.  It  has  the  same  extra  strong  hinge,  the  same  con- 
venient animal-proof  latch,  and  the  same  sloping  ends.  It  is  also  provided 
with  the  same  chain  of  5000-lb.  tensile  strength  and  is  arranged  to  be  flexibly 
hung  to  give  freedom  of  movement  and  comfort  to  the  cow. 

In  addition  to  this  it  has  special  features  of  its  own.     The  "T"  Bar  which  is 
heavier  than  that  generally  used  in  wood-lined  stanchions  has  an  extra  rib  on 
its  inner  side,  as  shown  by  Fig.   1026,  which  makes  it  still 
stronger.     The  wood  lining  strip  has  a  groove  on  its  inner 
face  which  fits  over  the  rib  on  the  bar  and  this  makes  it 
extremely  difficult  to  knock  the  strip  off,  even  with  a  ham- 
mer.    It  would  have  to  be  all  broken  up  and  split  to  pieces 
before  it  could  be  knocked  off  the  bar.     The  wood  linings 
of   other   stanchions    are   not   half    as    strongly    attached. 
Another  point,  there  are  no  sharp  corners  on  the  ends  of 
the  wood  linings   as   there  are  on   other   wood-lined   stanchions.     They   are 
beveled  off  and  made  entirely  smooth  as  shown  in  the  cut. 

There  are  thousands  of  our  Wood-Lined  Stanchions  in  use  giving  good  satisfac- 
tion. We  are  well  equipped  to  manufacture  this  stanchion  and  from  a  manu- 
facturing point  of  view,  it  makes  no  difference  to  us  which  stanchion  you  choose. 

Specifications 


Fig.  937 

Patented  Aug.  I,  191 


The  Louden  Wood-Lined  Stanchion  is 
made  one  size  only,  7  inches  wide  and  4  ft.  long 
in  the  clear.  The  "T"  Bar  is  high  carbon 
steel  IxlxfVwith  jiii-rs  "b.  The  Wood  Lin- 
ing is  ^4x1,  seasoned  hard  maple. 

It  is  furnished  naked:  or.  with  I  Guideor 
Hold-Open;  or,  with  I  Guide.  I  Interlocking 
Stanchion  Holder,  and  I  Regular  Stanchion 
Anchor. 

Weight.  Naked  Stanchion,  20  lbs.  With 
1  Guide  or  Hold-Open,  205^  lbs.  With 
I  Guide,  I  Holder  and  I  Anchor,  22  lbs. 


Note:     The  Stanchion  Holders  are  made 
for   1  %  and   I J^  O.  D.  tubing. 

Be  sure  to  state  which  size  is  wanted. 


Clear  Lake,  Minn.  June  8,  1916 
The  Louden  Machinery  Co., 

Fairfield,  Iowa. 
Gentlemen: 

We  installed  10  cow  stalls  and  one  bull  pen 
and  they  have  been  thoroughly  tested  to  their 
strength.  We  have  another  make  of  stanchions 
but  we  are  going  to  throw  them  away  and  put 
in  Louden 's  for  they  are  the  best. 

Very  truly  yours.  W.  Bowers  &  Son. 


Page  One  hundred  twelve 


Louden  Quick  Adjustable  Stanchion 


We  offer  our  Quick  Adjustable  Stanchion   to 

meet  the  demand  which  has,  no  doubt,  been  created 
.largely  by  the  advertising  of  adjustable  stanchions. 
We  have  thought  that  with  the  different  sizes  of  stan- 
chions we  make,  and  with  the  fact  that  a  stanchion 
should  always  fit  loosely  on  the  cows'  necks,  there 
was  no  need  for  an  adjustable  stanchion. 

The  demand,  however,  exists  and  we  herewith 
present  the  very  best  adjustable  stanchion  manufac- 
tured. 1 1  is  made  of  high  carbon  tubular  steel  (the  best 
material  of  which  a  stanchion  can  be  made)  and  is 
provided  with  adjustable  heads  and  bottoms  of  malle- 
able iron  which  can  be  instantly  adjusted  from  the 
narrowest  to  the  widest  size.  They  are  each  provided 
with  large  double  ended  right  and  left  handed  screws 
fitted  in  threaded  blocks,  B  (see  Fig.  1160).  and  by 
turning  this  screw  with  a  key  the  sides  of  the  stanchion 
will  be  instantly  adjusted  in  or  adjusted  out. 

There  are  no  bolts  or  set  screws  to  tighten  or  loosen 
and  be  liable  to  slip  and  spoil  the  adjustment.  The 
change  from  the  widest  to  the  narrowest  or  to  any 
intermediate  size  can  be  made  by  an  expert  in  half  a 
minute  and  by  any  one  in  less  than  a  minute.  When 
the  stanchion  is  adjusted  to  a  certain  width  it  will 
stay  there  until  the  screw  is  turned  by  the  key. 

The  adjusting  mechanism  cannot  be  equalled.  As 
will  be  seen  by  Fig.  1  160,  which  is  an  interior  view  of 
the  head  (the  malleable  plates  on  the  front  side  being 
removed),  the  stanchion  sides,  A,  are  fitted  with  corner 
plates,  C  and  D,  to  which  the  ends  of  the  threaded 
blocks,  B,  are  attached.  The  head  plates,  E  (the  plate 
on  the  near  side  being  removed),  which  cover  the 
adjusting  mechanism  are  fitted  with  slots  through 
which  the  threaded  blocks,  B,  are  passed  to  connect 
with  the  corner  plates,  C  and  D. 
By  applying  the  key,  shown  in  Fig.  1 160.  to  the  square  end  of  the  screw,  it  can  be  easily  and  quickly 
turned  in  either  direction,  and  will  move  the  blocks.  B,  in  or  out  in  the  slots  of  the  heads,  E,  and  carrymg 
the  corner  plates,  C  and  D.  with  them  will  adjust  the  sides.  A.  wider  apart  or  closer  together  as  desired. 
The  lower  end  is  the  same  except  that  the  block  on  the  opening  side  of  the  stanchion  is  pivoted  to  the  corner 
plates,  as  shown  by  Fig.   1 1  59.     This  is  certainly  the  most  perfect  adjustable  stanchion  ever  invented. 

Specifications 

The  Louden  Quick  Adjustable  Stanchion  is  made  of  I  Yi  O.  D. 
high  carbon  tubular  steel.  In  the  clear  it  is  45  inches  long 
and  is  adjustable  from  3  >  2  to  8  inches  in  width.  Extreme  length 
from  end  to  end  of  chains.  57  J^  inches.  The  space  from  top- 
rail  to  curb  must  be  55  inches  to  hang  stanchion  properly.  A 
iVey  will  be  furnished  with  each  bundle  of  stanchions  or  with  each 
single  stanchion  shipped  eJone. 

Weights.  The  stanchion  is  furnished  in  two  ways,  naked  or 
with  Interlocking  Holder  and  Regular  Anchor.  The  Guide  or 
Hold-Open  is  permanently  connected  to  the  Stanchion.  The 
naked  Stanchion  weighs  23!^  lbs;withHolder  and  Anchor,  24^  lbs. 


The  Holders  are  made  for  15^  and  1 J^  O.  D.  top-rail. 
Be  sure  to  specify  which  size  is  wanted. 


Fig.  1159 

Patented  July  6,  1915. 


Page  One  hundred  thirteen 


rjMRflKLJ>.  ^OVVA 


cSr^^**# 


-5V- 


Louden  5-in-l  Stanchion— Fig.  1161 

Patented  Aug.S,  1916.  .        „  .    . 

The  "  Louden  5-in-l "  may  be  called  an  "Adjustable  Stanchion  "  but  it  is  hardly  that  in  the  common 
acceptation  of  the  term.  It  cannot  be  adjusted  from  one  width  to  another  by  turning  a  screw  or  tightening 
and  loosening  a  "slip-joint,"  like  regular  adjustable  stanchions.  Each  of  the  hinge  irons  have  three  sepa- 
rate holes,  in  any  one  of  which  the  hinge  bolts  may  be  placed.  The  head  of  the  stanchion  is  made  to  set 
in  three  different  positions  on  the  rigid  side,  and  the  hinged  side  is  arranged  to  latch  in  three  separate  posi- 
tions by  changing  the  central  bolt,  B.     (See  Fig.  1  162). 

By  this  means  the  stanchion  may  be  set  in  five  different  widths  53^,  6j4-.  7,  7^  and  8J/^  inches  wide 
in  the  clear.  In  whatever  position  it  may  be  set  it  will  stay  there  and  will  be  just  as  solid  and  unchange- 
able as  if  that  was  its  only  width.  In  short  it  is  a  stanchion  which  may  be  set  in  five  different  widths,  thus 
combining  five  different  sizes  in  a  single  stanchion,  hence  its  name  "  5-in-l ." 

The  sides  are  straight  pieces  of  high  carbon  tubular  steel.  The  hinges  of  refined  malleable  iron  are 
rounded  as  shown  in  the  cuts  so  as  to  encircle  the  lower  ends  of  the  sides  and  are  secured  thereto  by  four 

rivets.     Fig.  II 62  is  an  interior  view  of  the  head,  the  front 

plate  which  is  of  malleable  iron  being  removed  to  show 

the  latch,  L,  and  other  interior  parts.     The  rack,  R,  in  which 

Dpn    "  A-  ^  -^^^Si^    jc  the  latch  works  acts  as  a  support  to  the  upper  end  of  the 

hinged  side,  retaining  ribs,  being  formed  on  the  inner 
sides  of  the  end  of  the  head  plates,  H,  and  on  the  ends  of 
the  rack,  so  they  cannot  be  drawn  past  each  other. 

This  arrangement  prevents  the  side  from  being  opened 

out  too  wide  and  does  away  with  the  need  of  a  stop  on 

the  hinge.     It  has  no  top  support  and  the  hinge  is  fitted 

Fig.  1162  with  a  stop  to  prevent  it  from  opening  too  wide.     It  has 

a  push-down  latch  which  catches  the  rack  automatically  and  is  completely  protected  by  the  head  plate 

so  a  cow  cannot  reach  it  with  her  horns.      It  is  easily  changed  from  one  size  to  another. 

Specifications 


The  Louden  5-in-l  Stemchion  is  45  inches  long  in  the 
clear.  The  sides  are  1  ^  O.  D.  high  carbon  tubular  steel. 
From  end  to  end  of  the  chain  is  57  J/^  inches.  The  space 
from  the  top-rail  to  the  curb  must  be  55  inches. 

Weights,  etc.  The  Stanchion  is  furnished  in  two  ways, 
either  naked  or  with  Interlocking  Holder  and  regular  Anchor. 
The  Naked  Stanchion  weighs  23 H  lbs.:  with  Holder  and 
Anchor  it  weighs  24%  lbs. 


Page  One  hundred  fourteen 


The  Holders  are  made  for  1 J^  or  \}i  O.  D.  f^op-rail. 
Be  sure  to  specify  the  size  wanted. 


Hoffman.  Minn.  June  8,  1916 
The  Louden  Machinery  Co..  St.  Paul.  Minn. 
Gentlemen; 

I  am  using  Louden  Stanchions  and  find  them  very  satisfactory. 
Would  be  pleased  to  get  your  new  catalog. 

Chas.  A.  Willd. 


Gravity  Water  Bowls— Fig.  1275 

Specifications 

Operation:  Cow  pushes  back  lid  with  her  nose  when  she  drinks.  As 
she  drinks,  the  governing  tank,  by  reason  of  gravity  and  the  float,  permits 
water  to  run  into  the  bowl — keeping  the  water  at  the  same  level.  Opera- 
tion is  simple  and  dependable.  No  labor  and  little  attention  is  needed 
upon   the  part  of   the  attendant. 

Construction:  Bowls  are  heavy  cast  iron  of  excellent  quality,  with  brass 
and  malleable  iron  fittings.  Bowls  are  constructed  to  fit  *4-inch  supply 
pipe.  No  inlet  or  drain  pipes  are  furnished.  All  pipes  and  fittings  are 
stock  sizes  that   may   be  secured   from  any  plumber. 

Capacity:  About  6  quarts.  Automatic  action  of  governing  tank  keeps 
bowl   filled   to  desired   point  while  animal   is  drinking. 

Dimensions:     (Outside  of  Bowl)  8>2x9  by  3,'2  inches  deep. 
Finish:     Painted  or  galvanized. 
Weight:      13   pounds. 

Governing  Tank 

Fitted  complete  with   Inlet  Valve  and   Float  and  3-inch  section  of  pipe  to 

which   main   supply  is   to  be  attached. 
Construction:     Heavy  galvanized  Sheet  Steel  with  lid. 
Capacity:      5   gallons. 

Dimensions:     Depth,    II    inches;  diameter,    16  inches. 
Weight:      I  I    pounds. 

NOTE — The    Gravity    System    of    Watering    Includes:     The    necessary 
number  of  bowls — one  for  each   cow — an  automatic  governing  tank,   and 
_.  ,  sufficient  pipe  for  carrying  water  from  governing  tank  to  each  bowl.      We 

hig.    1.^75  furnish    only    the    bowl — no    part    of    the    pipe    or    connections — and    the 

Patent  Pending  governing  tank.      Bowls  are  priced  singly,  and  governing   tank  separately. 

The  Louden  Gravity  Watering  System  is  a  simple,  convenient,  and  reliable  method  of  watering  the 
cows. 

The  bowls  are  attached  to  the  stall  posts  at  a  uniform  distance  from  the  floor,  the  top  of  the  bowls 
being  level  with  each  other.  At  the  end  of  a  row  of  stalls,  in  a  convenient  position,  is  located  the  govern- 
ing tank.  As  the  animal  drinks  from  the  bowl,  the  float  on  the  valve  in  the  governing  tank  drops,  per- 
mitting water  to  enter.  The  governing  tank  keeps  the  water  in  all  bowls  at  a  uniform  depth  at  all  times. 
The  principles  of  our  gravity  system  have  been  used  successfully  for  many  years,  and  are  known  to 
be  correct  and  unfailing.  ii      u- 

In  our  Gravity  System  only  one  main  water  pipe  is  necessary.  At  one  end  of  row  of  stalls  this  pipe 
is  attached  to  the  governing  tank  while  at  the  other  end  of  row  it  is  attached  to  a  drain,  or  may  be  run 
into  gutter  if  desired.  When  bowls  are  in  use  the  cock  next  the  drain  should  be  kept  closed,  and  the  cock 
at  the  governing  tank  should  be  kept  open.  This  will  permit  the  governing  tank  to  keep  the  bowls  full. 
When  it  is  desired  to  drain  the  pipes,  the  cock  at  the  governing  tank  should  be  closed  and  the  drain  cock 

should  be  opened.  This  permits  all  water  to  drain  off. 
We  furnish  our  Gravity  Bowls  either  "right"  or 
"left"  so  that  they  may  be  used  on  either  right  or 
left  side  of  stalls.  Figure  1275  shows  how  these 
"right"  and  "left"  bowls  may  be  arranged  —  either 
singly  or  in  pairs. 

Water  bowls  should  be  attached  singly  to  single 
post  stalls.  Fittings  for  attaching  two  bowls  to  a 
single  post  are  charged  extra. 

As  different  barns  require  different  types  of  piping 
systems,  we  furnish  no  pipe  with  the  bowl.  All  pipe, 
together  with  elbows,  etc.,  are  standard  stock  sizes 
that   may   be  obtained  from  a  plumber. 

Gravity  Bowls  can  be  furnished  either  with  or 
without  lids.  We  recommend  that  'lids  be  used, 
as  they  prevent  dirt  from  gathering  in  the  bowls. 
Cows  readily  learn  to  push  back  the  lids  to  drink, 
and  when  through  drinking  the  lid  drops  back  into 
"Ghost  View"   of  Governing  Tank  and  Bowls.  ,  ^-^^   ^^^   equipped   with   rubber   bumpers   to 

The  water  in  the  tank  and  bowls  is  kept  at  the  ^  ,     .  .        ^     .'^'^i 

same  level  by  means  of  the  ball  float.  make  their  action  noiseless. 


Page  One  hundred  fifteen 


Louden  Sanitary  Automatic  Drinking  Bowls — Fig.  1274 


Specifications 


Double  Bowl 


The  Double  Bowl  consists  of  two  water  bowls  with  all  con- 
nections necessary  for  joining  to  stall  posts.  Pipes  or 
Bowls  do  not  interfere  with  the  operation  of  Mangers  or 
Manger    Divisions. 

No  inlet  or  drain  pipes  are  furnished.  All  pipes  and  fittings 
are  stock  sizes  that  may  be  secured  from  any  plumber. 

Operation:  Cow  pushes  back  lid  with  her  nose  when 
she  drinks,  automatically  opening  the  supply  pipe,  thus 
admitting  water  to  the  bowl.  The  water  is  entering 
constantly  as  she  drinks.  When  she  finishes  drinking 
the  weight  of  lid  dropping  back  into  place  closes  supply 
pipe,  and  automatically  opens  drain,  permitting  all  water 
to  run  out.  Bowl  has  overflow  connection  with  drain 
so  that  if  water  enters  faster  than  the  cow  drinks,  it  will 
not  run  over  on   the  floor. 

Construction:  Heavy  malleable  iron  bowl  with  steel  lid. 
All  parts  rounded  edges.  Sanitary  construction  through- 
out.    Made  to  use  with   j4-inch  supply  pipe. 


Capacity:  Each  bowl  is  so  regulated  that  it  holds  about 
two  quarts  while  cow  is  drinking.  Entire  capacity  about 
3    quarts. 

Dimensions:     (Outside  of  bowl)  8'  2x9 '2  by  4'  2  inches  deep. 

Finish:      Painted     or     galvanized     as  specified. 

Weight:  (per  pair  complete  with  connections)  26}^  pounds. 
Single  Bowl 

Single  Bowl  consists  of  one  water  bowl  with  all  connections 
necessary  for  joining   to  stall   posts. 

Operation,  Capacity,  Dimensions,  and  Finish.  Same 
as  described  under  Double  Bowls  sp>ecifications. 

Weight:     One  bowl  complete  with  connections,  1334  pounds. 

NOTE;  In  warm  climates  or  in  barns  where  there  is  no 
danger  of  freezing  it  may  be  desired  to  run  water  supply 
pipe,  parallel  with  stall  top  rail  instead  of  under  floor 
as  is  recommended.  With  this  plan  a  supply  of  our 
Parallel  Clamps  should  be  ordered  with  the  Bowls.  There 
are  four  sizes  of  clamps.  Be  sure  and  give  outside  diameter 
of  your  stall  top-rail  and  we  will  send  Clamps  to  fit. 


Page  One  hundred  sixteen 


^^in^'J">^^-*>-^^^^ 


Points  of  Superiority  in  Louden  Sanitary 
Automatic  Water  Bowls 

It  is  the  only  really  sanitary  v/atering  system.  It  is  strictly  individual.  No  cow 
ever  comes  in  contact  with  water  from  which  another  cow  drinks. 

Each  bowl  has  a  separate  inlet,  connected  directly  to  the  main  supply  pipe,  and  a 
separate  drain,  connected  with  the  main  sewer.     The  refuse  water  does  not  run  from  one 

bowl  to  another. 

The  cow  waters  herself.  She 
has  clear,  fresh  water,  of  the 
right  temperature,  always  be- 
fore her. 

Water  does  not  stand  in  the 
bowl.  When  the  cow  drops  the 
lid  all  refuse  water  drains  off. 

There  is  only  enough  water 
in  the  bowl  at  one  time  to  per- 
mit the  cow  to  drink  comfort- 
ably. Very  little  water  is 
wasted. 

The  bowl  is  shaped  to  fit 
the  cow's  nose.  There  are  no 
corners  to  catch  dirt.  It  is 
easily  kept  clean. 

The  close-fitting  lid  keeps 
out  all  impurities.  Rubber 
bumpers  on  each  side  of  the 
bowl  deaden  the  sound  of  the 
dropping  lid. 

The  Louden  Automatic  Wa- 
ter Bowl  System  will  save  you 
valuable  time.  It  will  keep 
your  cows  in  better  condition 
and  increase  their  milk  yield. 

It  will  begin  paying  for  itself 
the  day  you  put  it  in  your  barn. 

With  the  Louden  Automatic  Watering  System  the  cow  drinks  as  much  as  she  likes  as  often  as  she  desires, 
without  any  attention  or  labor  upon  the  part  of  the  attendants.  There  is  very  little  wasted  water  and 
it  is  always  pure  and  fresh. 

With  the  ordinary  watering  system,  water  stands  in  the  bowls  till  the  cow  is  ready  to  drink — some- 
times for  hours — gathering  impurities  and  becoming  stale.     With  our  Automatic  Bowls  no  water  is  in 

(Continued  on  page  1 19) 


Fig.  1294 — Inside  View  showing  Simple  Mechanism  of  Bowl. 
It's  always  in  "working  order.  " 


Page  One  hundred  seventeen 


ASK  THE  OWNERS 

I  Of     Tkese     Modern.     Money 

;  Making     Barns     How     Much 

:  The  Louden  Automatic  Water 

-  Bowls     Have     Increased     tKe 
^-K  \  M.Ik  Yield. 


EE.Lch  mantis  Bam, 
UKeViUa,UI. 
Louden  Planned  and  ^ouipp&et 


frnnrni 


FAIR  TIE  L  D.   IOWA 


Louden  Automatic  Water  Bowls — Continued 

bowl  except  when  the  cow  is  drinking.  Fresh  water  is  admitted  by  the  cow  raising  the  lid  of  the  bowl 
(as  she  will  readily  learn  to  do).  This  automatically  opens  the  water  valve,  at  the  same  time  closing 
the  drain.  When  the  ow  finishes  drinking  the  lid  drops  into  place,  closing  the  water  valve  and  opening  the 
drain,  so  that   the  water  will  all   run  out   through   the  drain  pipe. 

Louden  Sanitary  Water  Bowls  are  individual  which  is  the  only  safe  way  to  prevent  a  diseased  cow 
from  infecting  her  neighbor,  and  while  they  may  be  placed  singly,  it  is  preferable  to  arrange  them  in  pairs 
as  shown  in  Figure  1274,  one  on  each  side  of  every  other  manger  division,  when  divisions  are  used,  which 
they  should  be.     The  bowls  are  made  right  and  left  to  suit  this  arrangement,  saving  considerable  in  piping. 

The  bowls  have  no  sharp  corners  anywhere  to  catch 
and  hold  dirt  or  to  injure  the  cows.  They  are  compactly 
built  and  arranged  to  occupy  but  little  room,  the  top  of 
the  bowls  being  about  24  inches  above  the  stall  floor, 
which  is  the  most  convenient  and  natural  location  for 
the  cow. 

The  bottom  of  the  bowl  is  made  rounding  to  fit  the 
cow's  nose,  thus  requiring  the  very  smallest  amount  of 
water  to  enable  her  to  drink.  The  outer  edge  of  the 
bowl  is  fitted  with  two  rubber  bumpers  which  makes 
the  dropping  of  the  lid  noiseless.  By  this  means  the 
cows  are  not  induced  to  play  with  the  lids.  When  the 
bowl  is  full  the  water  will  overflow  through  the 
drainage  plug. 

Every  imaginable  point  has  been  looked  after  in  the 
construction  of  these  water  bowls  and  we  have  decidedly 
the  best  ever  made.  The  principle  is  correct  and  the 
construction  is  right. 

Louden  Sanitary  Water  Bowls  are  secured  to  the  stall 
posts  by  means  of  brackets  riveted  to  the  sides  of  the 
bowls.  These  brackets  are  secured  to  the  posts  by  clips. 
The  brackets  have  an  adjustment  of  several  inches  to 
suit  pofts  set  different  widths  apart,  and  may  be  con- 
nected to  the   posts    of   any   of   our  stalls. 

Bowls  may  be  attached  in  pairs  to  single  post  stalls  if 
necessary,  but  we  do  not  recommend  such  an  arrange- 
ment. They  should  be  attached  singly.  Fittings  for 
attaching  two  bowls  to  a  single  post  are  charged  extra. 


Fig.  1274-A 

When  the  cow    drinks  she   pushes    back  the 

hd   of   the    bowl,   automatically  opening 

the  supply   pipe.       When   she  finishes 

drinking,     the    lid    drops    back 

into     place,     closing     supply 

pipe   and   opening  drain. 


Installation 

The  water  for  the  bowls  may  be  drawn  from  a  supply 

pipe  laid  in  the  cement  in  front  of  the  cow's  feet  or  pipe 

may  be  attached  to  and  parallel  with  the  top  rail.     We 

are  prepared  to  furnish  parallel  clamps  for  this  method,  but  recommend  the  other  plan. 

Where  this  watering  system  is  to  be  installed  at  the  time  of  new  floor  and  manger  construction,  the 

curb  and  manger  is  made  first,  according  to  our  directions,  and 
the  water  bowls  and  pipes  for  same  are  put  in  place  before  putting 
in  the  stall  floor.  The  supply  pipe  may  either  be  on  the  ground 
below  the  cement  or  it  may  be  placed  near  the  top  of  the  floor.  If 
the  cement  is  already  in,  a  groove  may  be  cut  in  the  floor  and  the 
supply  pipe  laid  in  it  so  it  will  only  be  covered  with  the  fresh  cernent 
used  to  fill  the  groove.  Many  of  our  customers,  when  putting  in  a 
concrete  floor  have  found  it  desirable  to  lay  a  4x4  where  the  pipes 
are  to  go  in.  This  timber  can  be  removed  whenever  it  is  desired  to 
lay  the  pipes — whether  it  is  in  six  days  or  six  months. 

When  cork  brick  or  creosoted  blocks  are  used  it  is  best  to  place 

the  supply  pipe  immediately  below   them.     Located  in   this  position 

the  supply  pipe  may  be  readily  taken  up  and  replaced  if  this  should 

Fig.  1274-B  g^g^  {jg  necessary.     By  placing  the  supply  pipe  under  the  floor  the 

^'"^for  ^u'he'r  "i"ght%r"le"t  water  will  be  kept  cooler  in  hot  weather  and  will  not  be  so  liable  to 

side  of  stall.  freeze  in  cold  weather. 


Page  One  hundred  nineteen 


Louden  Calf  Pen  with  Individual  Mangers — Fig.  1021 

(Corner  Couplings  Patented  Aug.  17.  1915.) 

Here  is  something  for  your  barn  that  will  greatly  improve  it  and  will  start  your  calves  on  the  way  to 
future  productiveness  and  profit.  The  Louden  Calf  Pens  are  complete  in  every  respect,  being  light,  well 
ventilated  and  easy  to  keep  clean.  They  are  fitted  with  stanchions  to  hold  the  calves  in  place  while  feeding. 
They  are  provided  with  individual  mangers  which  will  prevent  the  calves  from  stealing  each  other's  feed 
or  upsetting  their  buckets.  They  have  Patented  Stationary  Up-Standing  Shields  which  com- 
pletely overcome  the  harmful  habit  of  sucking  each  others  ears. 

The  stanchions  can  be  opened  all  at  once  or  only  one  at  a  time.  The  manger  is  spring  balanced  so 
that  a  boy  can  easily  raise  and  lower  it.  When  raised  half-way  up  it  will  stand  at  any  point  without  any 
hooks  or  latches  or  anything  else  to  hold  it  in  an  elevated  position.  The  manger  divisions  telescope  with  the 
stationary  shields  in  raising  and  lowering.  The  springs  can  be  readily  adjusted  to  always  perfectly  balance 
the  manger.  The  pen  is  securely  enclosed  by  a  strong  gate  hung  on  substantial  hinges  and  has  a  Hold- 
Shut  Latch,  described  on  another  page,  which  prevents  the  calves  from  getting  out  or  other  animals  from 
getting  in.     The  design  is  neat  and  artistic  and  besides  its  great  usefulness,  it  is  an  ornament  in  any  barn. 

Calves  will  grow  faster  and  will  do  better  in  a  neat,  light,  well  ventilated,  thoroughly  sanitary  Louden 
Calf  Pen  than  in  the  old,  stuffy,  dark,  dirty,  wooden  boxes  which  are  sometimes  called  pens  and  which  are 
too  often  used  to  stow  away  little  calves  until  they  are  able  to  shift  for  themselves.  As  the  "  twig  is  bent  so 
the  tree  is  inclined,"  is  as  true  of  baby  calves  as  it  is  of  other  babies,  and  they  should  have  the  kindness 
and  care  that  will  make  their  wabbly  little  legs  grow  straight  and  strong  and  which  will  best  develop  their 
vitality  so  they  will  be  most  efficient  when  they  take  their  place  in  the  world  as  producers.  A  Louden  Calf 
Pen  is  one  of  the  essentials  in  raising  calves. 

Fig.  1021  shows  the  manger  in  feeding  position  and  Fig.  1022  on  opposite  page,  shows  it  raised  for  clean- 
ing. The  manger  divisions  are  hinged  to  the  vertical  tubing  or  fillers  of  the  pen.  The  lower  ends  of  the 
springs  are  pivotally  connected  to  the  hinges  and  their  upper  ends  are  adjustably  connected  to  the  tubing 
as  most  plainly  shown  in  Fig.  1 02 1 .  The  manger  raises  high  enough  to  pass  away  above  the  calves'  heads. 
The  stanchions  are  easily  adjusted  to  suit  growing  calves. 


Page  One  hundred  twenty 


;  T-  j'^^  t 1  ^  t— t  E=I=> 


Wi\^  K'i "  ^^  ^- *-  ^-^**  ■  *  *- *  ^  '^^^^^^^^^ 


Louden  Calf  Pen  with  Individual  Mangers — Fig.  1022 

Specifications 


Sizes  of  Tubing.  The  top  and  bottom  rails,  comer 
posts  and  gate  posts  and  the  arch-rail  are  I  ^^  O.  D.  steel 
tubing.  The  vertical  fillers  and  stanchion  bars  are  I  yj  O.  D. 
steel  tubing. 

Lengths  of  Tubing.  The  comer  posts  are  52  and 
the  gate  posts  are  81  inches  long.  The  fillers  and  stanchion 
bars  are  36  inches  long.  The  standard  height  of  panel  is 
46  inches  above  the  floor. 

The  Connections.  The  top  and  bottom  rails  are  con- 
nected to  the  corner  post  by  the  Louden  Corner  Couplings. 
The  fillers  are  set  4 '  2  inches  apart  on  centers  and  are  con- 
nected to  the  top  and  bottom  rails  by  Louden  Grip  Clamps. 

The  Construction.  The  pens  are  built  in  panel 
sections  extending  from  one  corner  post  to  another  and  from 
the  corner  posts  to  the  gate  posts.  The  fillers  in  the  stan- 
chion section  are  spaced  to  suit  the  stanchion  bars.  All 
the  fillers  are  adjustable  on  the  top  and  bottom  rails. 

The  Stanchion  Section.  The  standard  width  be- 
tween the  Stanchions  is  2  feet.  A  section  8  feet  long  will 
have  4  stanchions:  a  10-foot  section.  5  stanchions,  etc.  The 
stanchion  bars  are  hinged  to  the  bottom  rail  and  their  upper 
ends  have  malleable  castings  which  extend  above  and  slide 
on  the  top-rail. 

The  Shift  Bar.  The  upper  ends  of  stanchion  slide 
castings  are  connected  to  a  Steel  Shift  Bar  i^xl  inch,  and 
long  enough  to  take  in  the  row  of  stanchions.  Near  one 
end  it  is  provided  with  a  shift  lever,  which  is  pivoted  to  a 
casting  on  the  top-rail  so  that  by  rocking  the  lever  back 
and  forth  the  shift  bar  will  be  moved  and  will  open  and 
close  the  stanchion  bars. 

Drop  Pins.  Each  slide  casting  is  fitted  with  a  Drop 
Pin  which  drops  in  an  adjacent  notch  in  the  shift  bars  and 
thus  connects  the  slide  casting  to  the  shift  bar.  By  lifting 
the  drop  pin  the  stanchion  bar  may  be  moved  independently. 


Manger  Construction.  The  Manger,  comprising  the 
outside,  the  ends  and  the  divisions  are  made  of  No.  18  gal- 
vanized sheet  steel.  The  outside  is  reinforced  at  the  top, 
and  the  ends  and  the  divisions,  are  joined  to  the  outside  by 
IxlxJs  steel  angles.  The  lower  edge  of  the  outside  and 
the  upper  and  lower  and  inner  edges  of  the  ends  and  divi- 
sions are  reinforced  by  j^xl  inch  spot-welded  steel  strips. 
The  standard  dimensions  of  Manger  are  23  inches  out  from 
panel  at  top,  16  inches  out  at  bottom,  18  inches  high  and 
2  feet  wide. 

The  Stationary  Shields  are  made  of  No.  18-gauge 
sheet  steel,  reinforced  with  i^&\\  inch  spot-welded  steel  strips. 
They  are  24  inches  long  and  20  inches  wide    at    bottom. 

Weights.  Plain  panels,  per  lineal  foot.  1 3  lbs.  Stan- 
chion panels,  per  lineal  foot,  16  lbs.  Gate  with  hin-jes.  58  lbs. 
Arch-rail  and  gate  posts  above  panel,  38'  2  lbs.  Manger,  two 
compartments  in  section,  87 '  2  lbs;  three  compartments  in 
section,  124  lbs. ;  four  in  section,  15432  lbs.:  five  in  section, 
181   lbs,;  Stationary  Shields  with  clamps,  each   II   lbs. 


Windom 

.  Minn. 

June  6.   1916 

Louden  Machinery  Co. 

, 

St.  Paul,  Minn. 

Gentlemen: 

All  of  the  barn  equipment 
you  has  given  the  very  best  of 
recommend  your  goods  to  any 
a  barn  up-to-date. 

You 

which  I  purchased  from 
satisfaction.     1  heartily 
farmer  wishing  to  equip 

rs  truly. 

Delh 

urt  U.  Weld. 

Page  One  hundred  twenty-one 


rrv V 

LOUDEN  STEEL    PENS      \ 

Keep  tKe  Animals  Clean, 
HealtKy,  and  Contented,  and 
Protect    Them    From    Injury. 


--§>:, 


'/^^^^ 


..  I 


:^- 


a; 


ft  .  -f !  ^ 


SOME   LOUDEN   EQUIPPED 
CALF  BARNS 

TKe   Babies  of  ttie  Herd.  Like  Human 
Babies,  Should  Have  a  Rigbt  Start. 


^^  ■x^-^-SiK' 


•15. 


%skell  Institute  Calf  Bam, 
Lawrence,  Kansas. 


^Sy^P*^  FAlRriELD.   IOWA  ^ 


Corner  Couplings  Patented  Aug.  17.  1915. 
Tilting  Manger  Patented  Jan.  25,  1916. 


Louden  Maternity  Pen,  Panel  Construction — Fig.  996 


Size  of  Tubing.  The  corner  and  gate  posts,  the  posts 
and  rails  adjoining  the  manger  and  the  top  and  bottom 
rails  (when  the  latter  is  used),  as  well  as  the  gate  frame,  are 
1 ''  8  O.  D.  steel  tubing.  All  the  fillers,  including  those  for 
the  gate,  are   1  v^   steel   tubing. 

Length  of  Tubing.  All  the  posts  are  set  5  inches  in 
the  concrete  below  the  level  of  the  floor.  The  corner  posts 
are  5  feet  long:  the  gate  post  6  feet  9  inches  long.  The 
length  of  the  main  fillers  for  the  curb  construction  is  57 
inches,  and  for  the  panel  construction.  44  inches.  The 
fillers  above  the  manger,  15 '2  inches.  The  standard  height 
of  panel  is  54  inches  above  the  floor.  The  gate  is  40  inches 
wide  in  the  clear. 

Connections.  The  horizontal  rails  are  connected  to 
the  corner  posts  by  our  Corner  Couplings,  N-6,  Plate  15. 
The  horizontal  rails  are  connected  to  the  gate  posts  and 
the  manger  posts  by  our  Interlocking  Dust-Proof  Couplings, 
Fig.  933.  The  fillers  are  set  approximately  5  inches  apart 
on  centers  and  are  connected  to  the  horizontal  rails  with 
our  Grip  Clamps,   Fig.    1050. 

Dimensions  of  Manger.  The  Manger  is  36  inches  long 
and  28  inches  wide  at  the  top  and  28  inches  deep.  The 
bottom  is  rounded  on  a  radius  of  9  inches.      It  is  made  of 


Specifications 

18-gauge  galvanized  sheet  steel,  reinforced  by  steel  angles 
on  the  ends  and  outside,  and  by  a  slotted  I  ^  O.  D.  tube 
on  the  inside  next  the  cow. 

Other  Features.  The  pen  may  be  placed  against  a 
wall  or  in  a  corner  of  the  building  so  the  wall  or  walls  will 
form  one  or  two  sides  of  the  pen.  A  4-inch  concrete  curb 
should  be  built  under  the  panel  to  prevent  bedding  from 
being  pushed  out  of  the  pen.  The  corner  and  gate  posts 
are  fitted  with  ornamental  knobs. 

Weights.  Sides  of  pen,  curb  construction,  per  lineal 
foot,  22  lbs.:  same,  panel  construction.  21  lbs.;  Manger  panel, 
with  lower,  rail  47  '  2  lbs.  Gate,  with  hinges  and  latch,  84  lbs. 
Arch-rail  and  gate  posts  above  panel,  40  lbs.  Manger  crated, 
95  lbs. 


Manger  Handles 


Fig.  1195 


Fig.  1196 


Eau  Claire,  Wis.  Dec.  13.  1915 
The  Louden  Machinery  Co., 

St.  Paul,  Minn. 
Gentlemen: 

Your  goods  were  satisfactory  in  every  way  and  you 
can  feel  free  to  refer  any  prospective  buyer  to  me  for 
an  indorsement  of  your  barn  equipment. 

Very  truly  yours.    Dr.  E.  L.  Mason. 


Fig.  1 195  is  our  Malleable  Iron  Manger  Handle 
and  Fig.  II 96  is  a  Handle  made  of  1  yV  O.  D.  tubing 
These  handles  are  large  and  strong  and  are  suitable 
for  many  purposes. 


Page  One  hundred  twenty-four 


rrmrrnn 


^ 


Louden  Maternity  Pen,  Curb  Construction — Fig.  995 

Many  cows  have  been  injured  and  calves  lost  for  the  lack  of  suitable  quarters  in  calving.  The  Louden 
Maternity  Pen  has  been  designed  to  supply  this  want  and  to  save  this  loss  to  the  dairy  farmer.  That  it 
"fills  the  bill"  in  the  most  satisfactory  manner  is  the  verdict  of  all  who  have  used  it.  It  is  so  simple  and 
will  be  so  easily  understood  that  any  extended  description  is  hardly  necessary. 

Suffice  to  say  that  it  is  composed  of  tubular  steel  uprights  with  corner  posts  set  in  a  concrete  curb  and 
held  at  the  upper  ends  on  a  tubular  steel  top-rail  by  means  of  our  dust-proof  malleable  iron  connections. 
It  is  provided  with  a  tubular  steel  gate  hung  to  the  gate  post  by  our  adjustable  center  pivot  hinges, 
and  is  held  in  closed  position  by  one  of  our  safety  hold-shut  latches,  elsewhere  described.  The  gate 
posts  are  extended  above  the  top  of  the  pen  and  are  connected  together  by  a  tubular  steel  arch-rail. 

It  is  also  provided  with  a  galvanized  feed  manger  set  on  a  pivot  so  it  can  be  tilted  in  for  feeding  and 
tilted  out  for  filling  or  cleaning,  being  held  in  either  position  by  drop-pins  mounted  in  the  frame  of  the  pen 
above  the  manger.  By  lifting  these  drop-pins  the  manger  may  be  tilted  out  until  it  rests  on  the  floor, 
where  it  will  be  easily  washed  or  disinfected.  The  upper  edge  of  the  manger  nextthe  cow  is  bound  with  a 
slotted  tube  to  make  a  round  edge  and  thus  avoid  sharp  corners  to  injure  the  cow's  neck. 

The  Louden  Maternity  Pen  may  be  constructed  in  two  ways.  1st,  by  inserting  the  fillers  as  well  as  the 
posts  in  the  concrete  curb  as  shown  by  Fig.  995;  and  2d,  by  connecting  them  to  a  bottom  rail,  as  shown 
by  Fig.  996.  The  former  is  much  the  best  way  as  well  as  cheaper.  1 1  is  considerably  stronger  and  is  more 
easily  kept  clean. 

Two  or  more  Louden  Maternity  Pens  are  a  necessity  in  any  dairy  barn.  They  are  ideal  as  hospitals 
during  sickness  in  the  herd.  Besides,  there  is  a  simple  artistic  beauty  about  the  Louden  pens  that  helps 
to  set  off  the  appearance  of  the  stock  to  the  best  advantage.  Many  breeders  say  they  are  a  good  invest- 
ment for  this  feature  alone. 


Page  One  hundred  twenty-five 


LOUDEN 

CORNER  MANGER 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Bull  Pen—Fig.  1164 


Specifications 

Size  of  Tubing.  The  corner  posts  of  the  pen  and  the 
manger,  the  posts  and  frame  of  the  large  gate,  the  top-rails 
of  the  pen  and  manger,  the  stanchion  bars  and  the  arch  of 
the  gate  are  all  made  of  1  Jg  O.  D.  steel  tubing.  The  fillers 
of  the  pen  and  large  gate,  and  the  frame  of  the  manger  gate 
are  of  1  5  g  O.  D.  f  teel  tubing.  The  fillers  of  the  manger  gate 
are  of  1 1^  steel  tubing. 

Length  of  Tubing.  The  height  of  the  pen  above  the 
floor  is  5  feet  3  inches.  The  tubing  goes  10  inches  into  the 
cement  (6  inches  in  the  curb  and  4  inches  into  the  floor) 
making  all  the  posts  and  main  fillers  5  feet  5  inches  long, 
except  the  large  gate  posts  which  are  6  feet  7  inches  long. 

Size  of  Gates.  The  standard  size  of  the  Main  Gate  is 
56  inches  high  and  41  inches  wide,  out  to  out.  The  gate 
opening  is  4  feet  wide,  center  to  center  of  gate  posts.  The 
manger  gate  (or  feed  gate,  as  it  is  sometimes  called),  is  41 
inches  high  and    16' 2  inches  wide,  out   to  out. 

Connections.  The  top-rails  including  the  curved  top- 
rail  of  the  manger,  are  connected  to  the  corner  posts  by  our 
corner  couplings(see  N-6.  Plate  15.  page  1 36).  The  top-rails  are 


connected  to  the  large  gate  posts  by  our  Interlocking  Dust- 
Proof  Couplings  (Fig.  933).  The  fillers  are  set  approxi- 
mately 6  inches  apart  and  are  connected  to  the  top-rails 
by  our  Grip  Clamps.   Fig.    1050. 

Size  of  Pens.  The  pens  should  be  10  to  12  feet  square 
to  give  the  bull  sufficient  freedom.  It  may  be  built  against 
the  wall  or  in  a  corner  of  the  building  in  which  case  one  or 
two  of  the  sides  will  not  be  required,  but  wall  flanges  will 
be  needed   to  join   the  top-rails  to  the  wall. 

Size  of  Mangers.  The  size  of  the  Corner  Manger  has 
already  been  given.  The  size  of  the  Tilting  Manger  is 
39  inches  long,  36  inches  deep  on  the  outside  and  30  inches  wide. 
It  tilts  into  the  pen  25  inches  and  out  into  the  alley  22  inches. 
The  stanchion  bar  can  be  adjusted  wide  enough  apart  for  the 
largest  bull  and  close  enough  together  to  hold  a  calf. 

Approximate  Weights.  The  material  for  the  sides  of  the 
pen  weighs  29 '2  lbs.  per  foot.  The  standard  size  of  gate 
with  posts  and  arch  rail,  and  the  hinges  and  latches  complete, 
weighs  1 77  lbs.  The  gate,  with  latches  only,  weighs  1  1 8  lbs. 
The  tubing  and  fittings  for  the  corner  manger  with  stanchion 
complete  weighs  from  123 '2  to  '26  lbs.,  according  to  size. 
The  tilting  manger,  crated,   weighs    159  lbs. 


"A  bull  in  a  china  shop"  is  not  more  to  be  dreaded  than  a  bull  "broke  loose"  in  the  barn  yard.  His 
giant  strength  will  be  sure  to  manifest  itself  in  a  way  that  will  not  be  pleasant  and  may  be  dangerous.  No 
matter  how  gentle  a  bull  may  seem  you  never  can  tell  what  may  happen  to  arouse  him  to  deeds  of  violence. 
Therefore,  it  is  not  safe  to  take  chances  in  using  a  stanchion  to  hold  a  bull  the  same  as  a  cow.  A  Louden 
Bull  Pen  should  be  used. 


Page  One  hundred  twenty-six 


■m*,'i:feT.>!IL'M;T 


FAIRFIELP.   IOWA 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Bull  Pen  —  Continued 

In  the  Louden  Bull  Pen,  "safety  is  first" —  safety  for  the  herd,  safety  for  the  bull  and  safety  for  human 
life.  In  its  construction  the  best  quality  of  heavy  steel  tubing  is  used  —  the  lower  ends  set  firmly  in  solid 
cement  and  the  upper  ends  held  securely  together  by  the  Louden  Malleable  Iron  Connections  described  in 
this  catalog.  It  is  provided  with  a  heavy  bull-proof  gate  made  of  the  same  material  and  held  shut  by  a 
pair  of  bull-proof  latches,  both  of  which  have  to  be  lifted  out  of  the  catches  before  the  gate  will  open. 

Fig.  1 164  represents  a  Louden  Bull  Pen  fitted  with  two  mangers  —  a  tilting  manger  made  of  wood 
with  galvanized  steel  ends  and  the  Louden  Corner  Manger  made  of  concrete  protected  by  bars  of  tubular 
steel.  It  will  be  understood,  of  course,  that  two  mangers  are  not  to  be  used  at  the  same  time,  and  the  two 
are  shown  here  to  better  enable  the  purchaser  to  decide  which  kind  to  use.  The  tilting  manger  is  made  of 
2-inch  planks  securely  held  together  by  heavy  steel  angles  secured  to  edges  of  the  galvanized  steel  ends. 
It  is  mounted  on  a  pivot  bar  set  in  one  side  of  the  pen  so  it  may  be  easily  tilted  in  for  feeding,  as  shown  in 
the  cut,  or  tilted  out  for  filling  and  cleaning. 

The  Louden  Corner  Manger  is  a  new  departure  and  we  believe  it  is  the  best  manger  ever  devised  for  a 
bull  pen.  It  is  all  inside  of  the  pen  instead  of  being  mounted  in  one  of  the  sides  where  it  will  be  out  in 
the  alley  a  part  of  the  time.  There  is  nothing  loose  for  the  bull  to  play  with  and  keep  up  an  incessant  racket. 
It  is  stronger  and  more  durable  and  is  more  easily  kept  clean  than  a  wooden  manger.  It  takes  less  room 
because  it  occupies  only  one  of  the  corners  instead  of  projecting  into  a  central  part  of  the  pen. 

Louden  Bull  Pen  with  Corner  Manger 

Bull  Pen  Stanchion  Patented  Dec.  7.   1915.  and  July  25,  1916 

Fig.  1165  is  an  inside  view  showing  the  Louden 
Corner  Manger  with  a  Bull  Pen  Stanchion  open  to 
receive  the  bull's  head.  It  gives  an  especially  good 
inside  view  of  the  manger,  showing  the  high  sides  with 
cut-out  for  lower  end  of  stanchion,  the  curved  top-rail 
connected  to  the  top-rails  of  the  pen  and  the  vertical 
railing  which  encloses  the  manger  to  hold  hay,  and  to 
prevent  the  bull  from  getting  into  the  manger  with 
his  feet  or  soiling  it.  It  also  shows  the  smooth 
rounded  corners  and  the  absence  of  cracks  or  crevices 
to  catch  and  hold  dirt. 

Fig.  I  1 65  also  gives  a  good  view  of  the  Louden 
Bull  Pen  Stanchion  which  is  used  only  to  hold  the  bull 
while  cleaning,  his  head  being  securely  held  in  the 
manger  while  the  attendant  is  in  the  pen  or  the  gate 
is  open.  At  all  other  times  the  bull  should  be  given 
the  freedom  of  the  pen.  With  the  stanchion  in  one 
side  of  the  pen,  the  bull's  head  would  be  out  in  the 
alley  where  he  could  injure  a  person  who  might  hap- 
pen to  get  too  close.  This  cannot  happen  with  our 
Corner  Manger. 

The  Louden  Bull  Pen  Stanchion  consists  of  two 
bars  of  1  "a  O.  D.  tubular  steel  hinged  to  clamps  on  a 
lower  rail  having  its  ends  connected  to  aajacent  ver- 
tical posts  or  fillers,  as  well  as  embedded  m  tfie  concrete 
when  the  corner  manger  is  used.  The  upper  ends  of 
the  stanchion  bars  are  fitted  with  malleable  sleeves 
which  slide  on  the  top-rail,  and  with  latches  which 
engage  catches  clamped  on  the  top-rail,  so  as  to  hold  the  stanchion  bars  securely  in  closed  position.  The 
hinges  below  and  the  catches  above  can  be  adjusted  on  the  rails  so  as  to  set  the  stanchion  bars  wider 
apart  or  closer  together  to  suit  bulls  having  different  sizes  of  necks  from  the  largest  to  the  smallest.  The 
latches  are  protected  by  guards  so  it  is  impossible  for  the  bull  to  open  them  with  his  horns. 

The  manger  gate  is  placed  on  the  side  of  the  pen  next  the  alley  for  convenience  in  placing  feed  or  a  bucket 
of  water  in  the  manger,  or  for  cleaning  it  while  the  bull  is  in  the  pen.  The  bull  can  be  shut  out  from  the 
manger  by  closing  the  stanchion  bars.  The  latches  of  the  stanchion  can  be  easily  reached  from  the  outside 
of  the  pen.  In  everyway  it  is  convenient  and  easily  managed.  The  corner  manger  also  makes  the  pen 
stronger,  while  a  tilting  manger  set  in  one  of  the  sides  tends  to  make  it  weaker. 

Some  one  has  said  that  the  phrase  "Sunny  Disposition"  was  coined  by  a  dairyman  who  observed  the 
contentment  of  his  bull  in  a  clean,  light,  well-ventilated  Louden  Bull  Pen  after  seeing  another  bull  in 


Fig.  1165 


Page  One  hundred  twenty-seven 


Pr^ 


Bull  Pen  with  Corner  Manger — Cont'd 

gloomy,  foul  places  where  bulls  are  sometimes  kept, 
not  this  is  correct,  no  one  can  doubt  the  fact  that  a  bull 
uden  Pen  will  be  always  in  the  best  condition  and  besides 
g  more  contended  he  will  be  a  healthier  and  a  more  profit- 
bull,  and  that  in  addition  to  this,  the  element  of  safety, 
more  than  pay  for  the  pen. 

1 1 66  is  a  top  or  plan  view  of  the  Curved  Top-Rail  used 
in  the  Louden  Corner  Manger.  Also,  a  plan  view 
of  the  outside  curb  of  the  manger,  showing  the 
location  of  the  posts  and  fillers  and  the  manger  gate. 
The  cut  shows  two  sizes  —  36x36x36  inches  for 
medium  and  smaller  size  bulls,  and  42x42x42  inches 
for  larger  bulls.  The  bottom  of  the  manger  should 
be  I  to  2  inches  above  the  level  of  the  floor  of  the 
pen  and  should  be  rounded  to  leave  no  sharp 
corners  in  the  mangers.  It  should  also  be  provided 
with  means  for  drainage. 


Fig.  1166 


Two  Other  Types  Of  Bull  Pen 
Mangers 

Fig.  1300  and  Fig.  1301  show  two  popular  types 
of  open  bull  pen  mangers.  Fig.  1 300  shows  a  low 
manger  built  on  the  outside  of  the  pen,  26  inches 


Fig.  1301.     Showing  Regular  Corner  Manger 
with  Low  Railing  Outside 


Page  One  hundred   twenty-eight 


Fig.  1300.     Bull  Pen  with  Low  Outside  Manger 


wide,  38  inches  long,  and  30  inches  high,  from  the 
floor.      Size  may  be  varied  if  desired. 

Fig.  1301  shows  our  regular  corner  manger  with 
low  outside  railing.  All  measurement  are  the  same 
as  for  regular  corner  manger  except  height  of  out- 
side railing,   which   is  30  inches  high  from  the  floor. 

Either  of  these  mangers  is  suitable  for  a  gentle 
bull,  but  for  a  vicious  animal  the  completely  en- 
closed manger  is  safest. 

The  open  manger  gives  the  animal  a  little  more 
freedom,  is  more  easily  filled,  and  is  cheaper  than 
the  enclosed  type. 

Our  regular  bull  stanchion  is  used  in  both  the 
mangers  shown. 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens — Fig.  1167 


TTTilUJ 


Fig.   1167 — Hog  Pen  With  Swinging  Section  and  Concrete  Trough 


Specifications 


Size  of  Tubing.  Corner  posts,  top  and  bottom  rails, 
frame  of  swinging  panel,  gate  posts,  guard  rails,  and  uprights 
to  which  guard  rails  are  clamped,  are  made  of  \  ■' ^"  O.  D. 
steel   tubing.      Fillers  are  made  of    1  ^t-"  O.    D.  steel   tubing. 

Length  of  Tubing.  The  height  of  the  panel  above 
the  floor  is  3'10".  Fillers  for  main  panel  are  3  feet  long. 
Fillers  for  swinging  panel  are  2'6"  long.  Corner  posts  are 
4'4"  long,  and  should  be  set  5"  in  the  concrete. 

Size  of  Gate.     The  standard  size  of   gate  is  3'4"  high 


over  all,  by  I'll"  wide  over  all.     The  gate  opening  is  2'6" 
wide,  center  to  center  of  gate  posts. 

Connections.  The  top  rails  are  connected  to  the  corner 
posts  by  corner  couplings.  They  are  connected  to  the  gate 
posts  by  interlocking  dust-proof  couplings.  (Fig.  933,  page 
77.)  The  fillers  are  spaced  2^  ■>•  3.  3' 2.  or  4  inches  apart  on 
center.  a£  ordered,  and  are  connected  to  top  and  bottom 
rails  by  grip  clamps.  Price  of  panel  varies  according  to 
spacing  of  fillers. 


There  is  a  rapidly  growing  demand  for  the  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens.  Farmers  are  learning  that 
to  make  hogs  profitable  they  must  —  like  cows  —  be  kept  clean  and  made  comfortable.  The  question 
is  whether  the  hog  will  have  to  spend  his  energy  in  fighting  filth  and  disease,  or,  by  proper  treatment,  be 
free  to  devote  it  to  the  production  of  fat  which  the  world  wants  and  for  which  it  is  willing  to  pay  a  good 
price. 

A  hog  to  be  profitable  must  be  a  fat  producer,  as  a  profitable  cow  must  be  a  milk  producer.  The 
greater  fat  producer  a  hog  becomes  the  more  tender  he  will  be,  the  more  liable  to  contract  disease  and 
the  more  care  and  attention  will  he  require.  The  "Razor  Back"  was  a  healthy  hog  and  needed  little 
or  no  care,  but  there  was  no  profit  in  him.  This  is  generally  the  case  with  things  which  do  not  require 
care.     They  do  not  increase  the  bank  account.  s 


Page  One  hundred  twenty-nine 


'i         'I 


RAISING  HOGS 
FOR  PROFIT 

Three  Views  of  E.  E 

Lehmann's       Louden    %'\J\' 
Planned  and  Equipped 
Hog  House,  Lake   Villa 
Illinois. 


i '  \S 


mi 


terforView  of  -■ 
_;hmann's  HoXBam 


ff"- 


"'SIM'  , 


fpTtrrmi 


^^^^^m 

^ 


FAIRriELD. 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens — Continued 


Hog  House  on  Homewood   Farms,   Moline,  III. — Louden   Equipped 

hog  houses  in  this  country.      It  is  fitted  throughout  with  the  Louden  Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens 

so  clean  and  is  so  well  ventilated  that  it  is  entirely  free  from  the  disagreeable  odor  common  to  hog  pens 


If  we  will  stop  to  consider  we  will 
find  that  the  hog  has  been  outrageously 
abused  in  many  ways  which  it  is  not 
necessary  to  recount  here.  The  hog  is 
not  irrevocably  a  filthy  animal.  It  is 
largely  the  way  he  has  had  to  live  that 
has  made  him  filthy.  The  fattening 
process  is  more  or  less  a  heating  process, 
and  the  hog  goes  into  the  mud  hole  to 
cool  the  fever  in  his  blood.  The  hog 
needs  clean  comfortable  quarters  and 
this  can  be  secured  by  using  the  Louden 
Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens,  set  in  a  con- 
crete floor,  and  supplied  with  plenty  of 
pure  water  to  keep  him  clean. 

The  illustration  to  the  left  shows  a 
section  of  the  Hog  House  on  the  Home- 
wood  Farms  near  Moline,  111., — Owned 
by  Wm.  Butterworth,  President  of 
Deere  &  Co.     This  is  one  of  the  finest 

It  is  kept 


Fig.  1286.     Panel  With  Guard  Rail. 


Fig.  1 167  shows  one  of  the  Lou- 
den Pens  fitted  with  a  swinging  panel 
set  over  a  trough  so  that  the  panel 
can  be  swung  either  to  the  inside  or 
to  the  outside  of  the  trough  and  be 
locked  in  either  position.  The  ob- 
ject is  to  swing  the  panel  in  to  keep 
the  hogs  out  of  the  trough  while  fill- 
ing it  and  then  swing  the  panel  out 
to  give  the  hogs  the  entire  width  of 
the  trough  while  they  are  eating. 

Fig.  II 68  is  a  sectional  view  of 
the  arrangement.  The  panel  is 
hinged  to  the  top-rail  of  the  pen 
and  is  held  in  position  by  a  chain, 
C,  which  is  passed  over  the  top-rail 


Fig.  1168 


and  under  the  lower  rail  of  the  swinging  panel,  and  is  then  fastened  to  opposite  j— ' 

sides  of  the  trough.     The  chain  is  passed  through  a  locking  piece,  L,  which  is 

slidably  mounted  on   the  top-rail.     This  locking  piece  has  an  opening  in  its 

center  large  enough  for  the  chain  to  pass  through  and  let  the  panel  swing  to  the  sides  as  far  as  the  dotted 

lines  in  Fig.  1 168. 

The  ends  of  the  locking  piece  have  narrow  slots  and  when  slid  to  either  one  side  or  the  other  it  will  catch 
the  links  of  the  chain  and  will  hold  it  in  locked  position.  The  arrangement  is  extremely  simple  and  it  is 
easily  operated       It  is  also  strong  and  reliable  in  its  operation.     Fig.  1  168  shows  a  concrete  trough. 

The  pens  in  which  brood  sows  are  housed  should  be  provided  with  strong  guard  rails  along  each  side 
to  prevent  the  sows  from  lying  on  the  young  pigs. 

The  Louden  Guard  Rails  are  made  of  I  "^  g  inch  steel  tubing,  supported  by  short  curved  pieces  of  the 
same  material  clamped  to  extra  heavy  uprights  in  the  panel.  They  are  strong,  durable,  and  ornamental. 
Fig.  1286  shows  a  section  of  a  pen  fitted  with  guard  rails. 

Our  Tubular  Steel  Pens  are  also  well  suited  for  sheep  and  we  are  supplying  them  for  this  purpose.  We 
are  prepared  to  equip  either  hog  houses  or  sheep  houses,  large  or  small,  with  pens  to  suit  requirements, 
and  will  be  pleased  to  furnish  further  information  or  mail  blue  prints  showing  different  installments. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-one 


rrTTTrm 


jjiiii^^lJ^T^tiLiM 


rAIRFIELD.   lONVA 


Louden  Tubular  Steel  Gates 

Fig.  1169 
is  the  Louden 
Heavy  Tubu- 
lar Steel  Gate 
with  patent 
Ad  justabl  e 
Center  Pivot 
Hinges  and 
heavy  Hold- 
Shut  Twin 
Latches,  suit- 
able for  bull 
pens and  other 
places  requir- 
i  n  g  great 
strength.  Fig. 
1  170  is  the 
L  o  u  d  e  n 
Standard 
Tubular  Steel 
Gate  with 
Adj  us  tab  1  e 

Center  Pivot  Hinges  and  a  Single  Hold-Shut  Latch,  suit- 
able for  maternity  pens,  calf  pens  and  similar  uses.  These 
gates  are  made  of  the  best  quality  of  steel  tubing.  For  strength  and  durability  as  well  as  neatness,  con- 
venience and  cleanliness,  these  gates  have  no  equal. 


Fig.  1170 


Fig.  1169 


Specifications 


Sizes  of  Tubing.  The  frame  of  the  Bull  Pen  Gate  is 
made  of  I J^  and  the  fillers  of  I  ?  s  O.  D.  steel  tubing.  The 
frame  of  the  maternity  pen  gate  is  made  of  1  *  g  and  the 
fillers  of  1  1^  O.  D.  steel  tubing.  The  frame  of  the  calf  pen 
gate  is  made  of  I  %  and  the  fillers  of  I A  O.  D.  steel  tubing. 


Fig.  1171 


Dimensions.  The  standard  size  of  Bull  Pen  Gate  is 
3  feet  5  inches  wide  and  4  feet  8  inches  high;  Maternity  Pen 
Gate,  2  feet  1 1  inches  wide  and  4  feet  high,  and  Calf  Pen 
Gate,  2  feet  5  inches  wide  and  3  feet  4  inches  high.  All 
measurements  are  from  out  to  out  of  frame. 
Hinges  and  Latches.  The  Hinges  described  on  another  page,  will  be  fur- 
nished in  the  heavy  size  for  the  bull  pen  gates  and  in  the  standard  size  for 
the  maternity  and  calf  pen  gates.  The  Latches  for  the  bull  pen  gate  are 
made  of  rs"'  's  steel  bars  doubled  back  as  shown  in  the  cut.  For  the  mater- 
nity and  calf  pens  the  Latch  is  made  of  J^xlJ^  steel  bar.  doubled  back  the 
same  way. 

Weight.  The  standard  Bull  Fen  Gate  complete  with  hinges,  latches  and 
hold-shut  catches,  weighs  128  lbs.;  Gate  for  maternity  pen  with  hinges,  latch 
and  catch,  weighs  84  lbs. :  Gate  for  calf  pen,  with  same  fittings,  weighs  58  lbs. 

Louden  Improved  Alley  Gate 

Fig.  1171  is  the  Louden  Improved  Alley  Gate  with  vertical  fillers 
and  a  latch  that  will  slam  shut  from  either  side  and  never  swing 
past.  This  latch  is  absolutely  stock-proof.  No  cow  or  horse 
can  by  any  possibility  open  it.  It  is  furnished  with  hinges  which 
will  swing  both  ways. 

Specifications 


The  Standard  Sizes  of  Alley  Gates  are  3  ft.  4  in.  high 
and  2  feet  1 1  inches,  3  feet  5  inches,  and  3  feet  1 1  inches  wide, 
out  to  out.  These  sizes  are  suitable  for  alleys  3)  j.  4  and  4}4 
feet  wide  in  the  clear.     Other  sizes  will  be  made  to  order. 

Sizes  of  Tubing.  The  frames  are  made  of  l^s  O.  D. 
tubing  and  the  fillers  are  1  ^^  O.  D.  tubing.  The  fillers 
are  spaced  on  centers  8  to  9  inches  apart. 

Weights.  With  latch  and  hinges  and  two  collars, 
which  go  with  the  gate,  the  2-foot  II -inch  size  weighs  57 
lbs.;  3-foot  5-inch  size,  65  lbs.,  and  3-foot  1 1 -inch  size,  73  lbs. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-two 


In  ordering  be  sure  to  specify  the  outside  diameter  of 
posts.  If  different  sizes  are  used,  give  size  to  which  the 
gate  is  hinged  and  also  size  of  post  to  which  the  latch  is 
connected.      If  square  posts  are  used  so  state  in  order. 


f 

Red 

i.a 

ke  Falls.    M 

nn.. 

lu 

iv 

3.  1916. 

Louden    Machinery 

Co.. 

St 

Paul.   Minn 

, 

Gentlemen: 

Your   equipment 

that 

1 

put    in    my 

new 

barn 

has    proved          | 

very   satisfactory  and   m 

Y    i 

oreman   is   well 

p 

eased 

with    It. 

Yours    t 

ru 

y 

J 

A 

Duffy. 

1 

rrmrmn 


^^^"^^^  FAIRFIELD.   IOWA  ^^^^"^ 


Louden  Adjustable  Center-Pivot  Gate  Hinges 


Fig.   1172  Fig.  1173    Pat'd  Jan.  18.  1916.  Fig.   1174 

The  above  are  views  showing  three  different  ways  of  using  the  Louden  Adjustable  Center-Pivot  Gate 
Hinge.  Fig.  1172  shows  the  use  of  the  hinge  with  \^i  or  Ijs  O.  D.  tubing.  Fig.  1173  shows  the  hinge 
attached  to  a  large  post  or  column,  and  Fig.  1  1  74  shows  a  double  hinge  attached  to  a  large  post  or  column 
to  hang  a  gate  on  each  side  of  the  column.  For  1^8  or  I  Ja  O.D.  tubing,  four  pieces  of  malleable  castings 
are  used  which  are  rigidly  clamped  to  the  tubing  by  six  heavy  bolts. 

The  hinges  can  be  clamped  to  the  posts  at  different  angles  as  shown  by  Figs.  1  1  75  and  I  1  76,  to  vary 
the  distance  between  the  gate  frame  and  the  post  to  which  it  is  hinged,  to  suit  requirements.  This  is  an 
important  feature.  If  the  space  between  the  gate  posts  should  happen  to  be  a  little  too  wide  or  too  narrow 
an  adjustment  of  2}  2  inches  can  be  made  in  setting  the  hinges,  so  the  latch  on  the  gate  and  the  catch  on 
the  post  will  always  be  correctly  adjusted. 


Fig.   1175  Fig. 

These  figures  are  sectional  views  showing  the  adjustment  of  the  hinges.  Fig.  1175  shows  the  hinge 
extended  or  widened  and  Fig.  1  1  76  shows  it  contracted  or  narrowed.  Fig.  1  1  77  shows  the  attachment  to 
a  large  post  by  means  of  clip  bolts  which  can  also  be  adjusted  as  explained.  (See  Plate  16,  page  138.) 
When  a  gate  is  hinged  on  each  side  of  a  large  post,  as  shown  by  Fig.  1  1  74,  the  hinge  castings  for  the  large 
post  is  bolted  together  as  shown,  and  by  using  longer  bolts  on  one  side  and  shorter  bolts  on  the  other  side, 
the  castings  may  be  adjusted  on  the  post.  The  center  pivot  permits  these  adjustments  and  also  offsets 
the  hinge  so  the  gate  can  be  opened  clear  back  against  the  panel  of  the  pen  which  is  another  important 

feature  not  possessed  by  other  kinds  of  hinges.     Of  all  other  gate  hinges  for 
M|g  tubular  posts  or  columns,  none  are  so  strong  or  so  convenient  in  use,  or 

MH  Bl^  have  the  desirable  adjusting  features  of  the  Louden  Hinge. 


Fig.  1178 

Patented  May  16.  1916 


Fig.  1180 
Patented  April  18.  1916 


Fig.  1179 

Pat'd  April  18,  1916 

Louden  Safety  Gate  Latches 

Fig  1178  is  a  detailed  view  of  the  Louden  One-Way  Safety  Gate  Latch  used  on  our  animal  pens.  It 
is  provided  with  a  Latch  Guard  which  swings  out  over  the  latch  as  soon  as  it  drops  into  the  catch  and 
prevents  it  from  being  lifted  out  of  the  catch  until  the  keeper  is  pushed  back  out  of  the  way.  No  animal 
can  open  the  latch  when  it  has  this  Latch  Guard.  Fig.  1 1  79  is  a  detailed  view  of  our  Two-Way  Safety 
Latch  for  alley  gates  which  swing  in  both  directions.  The  Latch  Guard  is  pivoted  above  the  notch  and  will 
swing  to  one  side  or  the  other  enough  to  allow  the  latch  to  slide  up  the  catch  from  either  side  and  drop 
into  the  notch,  but  not  enough  to  permit  it  to  pass  clear  through.  To  unlatch  the  gate  in  either  direction  the 
keeper  is  pushed  to  the  other  side.     Fig.  I  1 80  is  a  Two-Way  Safety  Catch  for  a  square  wooden  post  or  a  wall. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-three 


mmt,\»>\ikikihUniiii,M 


Louden  812  Stalls  with  Column  to  Ceiling— Fig.  934 

Fig.  934  shows  how  the  Louden  Stalls  may  be  connected  to  large  posts  or  supporting  columns  in  the  barn. 
All  that  is  necessary  is  to  make  the  stalls  the  required  width  to  fill  the  spaces  between  the  columns,  cut  the 
top-rail  to  suit  and  use  the  proper  size  and  style  of  clamps  to  make  the  necessary  connections.  The  cut 
shows  a  combination  of  our  810  and  81 2  Stalls.  If  the  stalls  are  narrow  the  side  posts  adjacent  to  the  columns 
will  be  left  off.  If  preferred,  or  if  the  columns  do  not  come  right  to  connect  the  stall  partitions  to  them,  the 
columns  may  be  used  in  place  of  one  of  the  812  Double  Posts.  It  is  much  better  to  have  the  stall  posts  m 
perfect  line  with  the  columns  than  to  have  the  columns  set  either  in  the  manger  or  on  the  stall  floor. 


Fig.  1183 


Fig.  1184 


The  Louden  Stalls  can  be  readily  set  up  on  floors  that  are  already  in  without  tearing  out  the  old  floors. 
Figs.  1 183  and  1 184  show  the  most  approved  plans.  In  Fig.  1 183  a  layer  of  new  cement  6  mches  thick  is 
used  for  the  stall  floor  and  2  or  3  inches  is  cut  out  of  the  old  floor  at  "X"  for  the  gutter. 

In  Fig  I  184  the  layer  of  cement  for  the  stall  floor  should  be  8  or  9  inches  thick.  In  this  plan  nothing 
has  to  be  cut  out  of  the  old  floor  for  the  gutter.  If  thought  best  a  layer  2  or  3  inches  thick  may  be  added 
for  the  litter  alley  floor  which  would  then  be  that  much  higher  than  the  feed  alley  floor. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-four 


The  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden   Reinforced   Building   Columns 

The  Louden  Reinforced  Building  Columns  are  made  of  an  outer  shell 
or  tube  of  steel  compactly  filled  with  concrete.  They  are  the  strongest 
and  most  durable  building  columns  made.  They  are  especially  adapted 
for  supports  in  farm  buildings.  Each  column  is  fitted  with  a  suitable 
metal  Cap  and  Base.  Gas  pipe  columns  can  be  furnished,  if  desired, 
at  the  same  prices — See  second  table. 

Carrying  Capacity  in  Tons — Reinforced  Columns 


Outside 
Diam. 

Weight 

in  lbs.  of 

Plain  Col. 

Shaft 

per  ft. 

Length  of  Column  in  Feet 

of 
Column 

6' 

7' 

8' 

9' 

10' 

11' 

12' 

13' 

14' 

15' 

16' 

3" 

9.64 
13.09 
17.02 
21.05 
25.90 
36.82 

Tons 
6 
9 
13 
14 
20 
28 

Tons 
6 
9 
13 
14 
20 
28 

Tons 
5 
8 
12 
13 
19 
27 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

Tons 

3  4" 

8 
12 
13 
19 
27 

7 
11 
12 
18 
26 

4" 

10 
11 
18 
26 

4I2" 

10 
17 

25 

5" 

17 

24 

16 
23 

6" 

23 

22 

Carrying  Capacity  in  Tons — Gas  Pipe  Columns 


Outside 
Diam. 

Length  of  Column  in  Feet 

of 
Column 

6' 

7' 

8' 

9' 

10' 

II' 

12' 

13' 

14' 

16' 

18' 

20' 

30 

12.94 
16.18 

12.27 
15.48 

11.60 
14.78 

10.94 
14.09 

10.27 
13.39 

9.61 
12.69 

8.94 
11.99 

8.27 
11.30 

7.61 
10.60 

6.27 
9.20 

3^" 

7.81 

6.41 

4" 

19.73 

19.00 

18.27 

17.54 

16.81 

16.07 

15.34 

14.61 

13.88 

12.42 

10.95 

9.49 

4^2" 

23.45 

22.69 

21.93 

21.17 

20.40 

19.64 

18.88 

18.11 

17.35 

15.83 

14.30 

12.78 

5" 

27.90 

27.10 

26.30 

25.57 

24.71 

23.91 

23.12 

22.32 

21.52 

19.93 

18.34 

16.74 

6" 

37.23 

36.36 

35.50 

34.63 

33.77 

32.90 

32.04 

31.17 

30.31 

28.58 

26.85 

25.12 

In  ordering  be  sure  to  give  outside  diameters. 


Fig.  1185 


The  Measurements  of  Tubing 

There  are  two  kinds  of  measurements  used  for  tubing  —  the  inside 
diameter,  or  pipe  measurement,  and  the  outside  diameter  (O.  D.),  or 
structural  measurement.  The  following  table  gives  the  O.  D.  measure- 
ment of  the  different  sizes  of  pipes  from  ^-inch  to  6-inch: 


%  inch  pipe 1 1's  inches.  O.  D. 

I       inch  pipe \xs  inches,  O.  D. 

1 J4  inch  pipe 15^  inches,  O.  D. 

1  \-2  inch  pipe 1 J^  inches,  O.  D. 

2  inch  pipe 2?'g  inches.  O.  D. 

2J^  inch  pipe 2J^  inches,  O.  D. 


3  inch  pipe 3  J^  inches,  O.  D. 

3}^  inch  pipe 4       inches,  O.  D. 

4  inch  pipe 4}^  inches.  O.  D. 

4  ]/2  inch  pipe 5       inches.  O.  D. 

5  inch  pipe b^/i  inches,  O.  D. 

6  inch  pipe 65^  inches,  O.  D. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-five 


A  Few  Louden  Dairy  Barn   Fittings  —  Plate  15 
We  have  over  1000  Barn  Equipment  Patterns  and  can  equip  any  kind  of  barn 

Corner   Couplings  N-6  to  N-13,   Inclusive,   Patented  August   17,    1915 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-six 


thf  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Some  of  the  Louden  Dairy  Barn  Fittings 

Plate  15  on  preceding  page  shows  a  few  of  the  Louden  Fittings  for  Dairy  Barn  Equipments.  The 
letters  and  figures  attached  are  neither  figure  numbers  nor  pattern  numbers,  but  are  intended  to  designate 
the  parts  only  in  connection  with  this  plate.        Pat'd  Sept.  20,  1910  and  Aug.  17,  1915. 

In  ordering,  be  sure  to  give  the  Plate  Number  (13)  as  well  as  the  names  and  the  letters  and 
figures  attached  to  the  parts.  Also,  give  size  or  sizes.  All  measurements  are  outside  diameters.  See 
table  of  diameters  on  another  page. 

Specifications 


N-l,  is  our  improved  Single  Piece  Elbow.  It  is  made  in  two 
sizes,  standard,  for  I's".  and  large,  for  IJs"  O.  D.  tubing. 
In  all  couplings  the  1  J^"  size  can  be  used  for  I  ^g"  by  bushing. 

N-2,  Improved  Interlocking  Tee-Coupling,  made  in  three 
sizes,  standard,  for  !■'>(".  and  large,  for  1^^"  O.  D.  tubing: 
also,  for  I  J's"  O.  D.  heads  and  1  ^g"  O.  D.  Tees.  See  Fig.  933. 
page  77. 

N-3,  Improved  Cross  Coupling,  made  in  three  sizes,  stan- 
dard, large  and  small,  for  IJg",  17/8"and  li^"0.  D.  tubing. 

N-4,  Inverted  Y-Coupling,  one  size,  head  tubing,  1  ]/g" 
O.  D.,  legs,  158"0.  D. 

N-5,  Side  or  Angle  Tee-Coupling  (45  degrees),  one  size, 
head  for  1  Jg"  and  Tee  for  1  Jg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-6,  Right  Angle  Corner  Coupling,  two  sizes,  standard,  for 
IS/g"  O.  D.,  and  large,  for  IJg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-7.  Seventy-two  (72)  degree  Corner  Coupling,  two  sizes, 
for  15^"  and  IVg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-8,  One  hundred  and  twenty  (120)  degree  Corner  Coup- 
ling, two  sizes,  for  IJs"  and  1  Jg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-9,  Straight  Side  Partition  Coupling  (90  degrees),  two 
sizes,  for  IJg"  and  IJg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-10,  Angle  Side  Partition  Coupling,  the  sides  being 
disposed  at  an  angle  of  144  degrees  and  the  partition  being 
set  at  an  angle  of  72  degrees  to  the  sides,  two  sizes,  for  I  J'g" 
and  I  7  s"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-ll,  Three  Piece  Center  Partition  Coupling,  each  set  at  an 
angle  of  one  hundred  and  twenty  (120)  degrees  to  the  other, 
two  sizes,  for  I  ''g"  and  1  Jg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-12,  Four-Piece  Center  Partition  Coupling,  each  set  at 
an  angle  of  90  degrees  (right  angles)  to  the  other,  two  sizes, 
for  1  =  g"  and  I  J/g"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-13,  Five-Piece  Center  Partition  Coupling,  each  set  at  an 
angle  of  seventy-two  (72)  degrees  to  the  other,  two  sizes,  for 
1 H"  and  I  J/g"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-14,  Tee-Coupling  for  large  posts  or  columns,  eighteen 
sizes.  The  smaller  or  Tee  ends  are  made  for  l^g"  and  IJg" 
O.  D.  tubing.  The  larger  or  head  ends  are  made  for  2 J g,  ZJg 
or  3.  3^2.  4.  4}2.  5,  5,'2  or  S^g.  6  and  6-'^"  O.  D.  posts  or 
columns.     In  ordering  give  sizes  of  all  connections. 

N-15,  Cross  Coupling  for  large  posts  or  columns,  eighteen 
sizes,  smaller  ends  for  1  ^g"  or  IJg"  O.  D.  tubing,  center  for 
23g.  2  Jg  or  3,  312.  4,  43  2.  5.  5  J^  or  5H.  6  and  65^^"  O.  D.  posts 
or  columns.     Give  sizes  of  all  connections. 

N-16,  Large  Floor  Flange  for  IJ^"  O.  D.  tubing:  will  fit 
I5i"  O.  D.  tubing  by  bushing. 


N-17,  Wall  or  Flat  Post  Range  for  I'g"  O.  D.  tubing. 
Will  fit  15g"  O.  D.  tubing  by  bushing. 

N-18,  Wall  or  Flat  Post  Flange,  two  sizes,  for  I  A"  and  1  ^" 
O.  D.  tubing. 

N-19,  Grip  Clamp,  made  in  eight  sizes,  the  O.  D.  of  the  head 

tubing  being  given  first  and  of  the  Tees,  second.  I  'g  x  15^; 
IJg  X  I  A:  I  '.^  X  I  A:  Pg  X  1  ?s:  Pg  x  1  A:  I  ^g  x  I  J5:  I  ^x  I  Jj, 
and  I  i'exl  j',."  O.  D.  tubing.  (For  description  of  Grip  Clamps, 
see  page  139.) 

N-20,  Interlocking  Stanchion  Holder  and  Manger  Spring 
Holder,  two  sizes,  for  IJg"  and  IJg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-21,  Collar,  two  sizes,  for  15^"  and  1  J^"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-22,  Double  or  Center  Pivot  for  Manger  Hinges,  two 
sizes,  for  15^"  and  l^g"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-23,  Single  or  End  Pivot  for  Manger  Hinges,  two  sizes, 
for  I  5  g"  and  IJ8"0.  D.  tubing. 

N-24,  Pressed  Steel  Clip,  for  throat  chains,  stanchion  side 
chains  and  "Hold  Shut"  for  Gate  Latch:  three  sizes,  for  1  ■^", 
l^^"and  \h"0.  D.  tubing. 

N-25,  Center  Brace  Rod  Clamp  for  Manger  Divisions,  foi 
1  Jg"  O.  D.  tubing. 

N-26,  End  Brace  Rod  Clamp  for  Manger  Division,  for  I  ^" 
O.  D.  tubing. 

N-27,  Right  Angle  Side  Partition  Coupling  for  large  posts  or 
columns  with  built-on  clamp:  sixteen  sizes,  small  ends  for 
1  ^/s"  and  I  Vs"  O.  D.  tubing.  Center  for  2J8  or  3.  3  J2.  4.  41^. 
5,  332  or  5?8,  6  and  6Jg"  posts  or  columns.  This  is  the  same 
as  N-15  with  a  built-on  clamp  added. 

N-28,  Right  Angle  Center  Partition  Coupling  for  large 
posts  or  columns,  with  built-on  clamps.  Sizes  the  same  as 
N-27.     Give  sizes  of  all  the  parts  in  ordering. 

N-29,  Acute  Angle  Cross  Coupling  for  large  posts  or 
columns,  with  built-on  clamps  set  at  an  acute  angle  to  the 
Tee-Heads  and  to  themselves.  Sizes  the  same  as  N-27. 
Built-on  clamps  may  be  placed  on  the  other  side  of  coupling 
if  desired,  making  as  many  as  6  small  clamps,  2  integral  and 
4  built-on.  If  necessary,  the  angles  of  built-on  clamps  may 
be  varied  to  some  extent.  In  ordering,  give  sizes  of  all 
the  parts  and  the  angles  of  built-on  clamps. 

N-30,  (Overlooked  in  Plate  15).  Right  Angle  Corner 
Coupling  for  large  posts  or  columns  with  built-on  clamps  for 
I5g  or  \ys"  O.  D.  tubing.  It  is  like  N-14  with  one  built-on 
clamp.     Same  size  as  N-27. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-seven 


Louden  Special  Connections  for  Posts  and    Columns — Plate  16 

Plate  16  shows  horizontal  sections  of  some  of  our  Special  Connections  for  posts  and  columns  which 
are  clamped  thereon  by  clip-bolts.  These  connections  may  be  used  for  a  number  of  purposes,  such  as 
lugs  for  gate  hinges,  pivots  for  manger  hinges,  catches  for  gate  latches,  sockets  for  pipes  or  tubing,  such  as 
are  used  for  pivot  pins  for  manger  hinges  with  our  double  post  stalls,  etc.  Seven  of  the  figures  show  the 
attaching  parts  of  the  connections  broken  away  which  means  that  these  parts  may  be  made  for  various 
purposes  to  suit  requirements. 

The  object  in  presenting  this  plate  is  to  show  that  the  bodies  of  the  connections  and  the  clip-bolts  which 
are  used  to  clamp  them  on  the  various  sizes  of  posts  and  columns  are  standardized  so  that  no  matter 
what  use  may  be  made  of  the  connections,  their  bodies  and  the  clip-bolts  which  go  with  them,  will  always 
be  the  same  for  each  size  of  post  and  column. 

The  bodies  of  the  connections  are  made  of  thin  malleable  iron  which  is  easily  sprung  to  suit  the  size 
of  the  post  or  column  for  which  they  are  intended.  For  heavier  work,  such  as  gate  hinges,  etc.,  two  clip- 
bolts  are  used  with  each  connection  which  is  made  wider  and  is  furnished  with  four  bolt  eyes  instead  of  two. 
The  plate  shows  I  I  different  sizes  of  posts  or  columns,  the  outside  diameters  of  which  are  as  follows:  \y8, 
\}i,  2^8,  2/8  or  3",  3>^,  4",  4>^,  5",  b}4  or  S-^s,  6"  and  6f8.  Sometimes  common  pipe  is  used,  hence  the 
inside  measurements  of  pipe  given  in  the  plate. 

There  is  a  little  variation  in  two  of  the  sizes.  This  is  caused  by  the  difference  in  the  outside  diameters  of 
the  corresponding  sizes  of  pipe  and  tubing.  The  outside  diameter  of  a  23^-inch  pipe  is  2Jb  or  ^8  less  than 
a  3-inch  tube,  while  the  outside  diameter  of  a  5-inch  pipe  is  byi  or  yk  more  than  a  5j^-inch  tube.  The  con- 
nections are  made  to  allow  for  this  variation. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-eight 


^^^^^^ 


FAIRFIE L D.   IOWA 


Fig.  1150 


Louden  Grip  Clamp 

(Patented  April  7,  1914) 

Fig.  1 1 50  is  a  good  representation  of  our  Grip  Clamp  referred 
to  in  the  specifications  of  our  Figs.  810  and  959  Cow  Stalls,  and 
extensively  used  in  all  of  our  animal  pens,  hundreds  of  thousands 
of  them  being  used  for  this  purpose.  It  is  the  smoothest,  neatest 
and  best  clamp  of  the  kind  ever  made.  It  requires  no  holes  to  be 
drilled  in  the  tubing.  Only  two  bolts  are  used  which  are  so  located 
that  they  will  exert  equal  pressure  on  all  the  adjacent  parts  of 
the  tubing  —  a  feature  that  is  fully  covered  by  our  patent. 

We  make  8  sizes,  outside  diameter  of  the  head  tubing  being 
given  first.  The  prices  of  the  different  sizes  with  bolts,  coated 
with  our  Special  Dairy  Barn  Paint  and  galvanized,  are  given  in 
the  accompanying  price  list. 


Size 

No.  1 . .  1  ^g  X 

No.  2. .  I/^  X 
No.  3 ..  1  %  X 
No.  4..l5^x 


1^8 

ItV 

IKs 


Size 

No.  5. 

.15/8  x1t\ 

No.  6. 

.I58X  ItV 

No.  7. 

.  ItV  X  ItV 

No.  8. 

.lAxhV 

Fig.  879 


Fig.   1073 

Anchor  and  Hook  Bolts 


Fig.  727 


Fig.  879  is  an  Expansion  Bolt  which  we  use  to  make  attachments  to  brick  and  hardened  cement  work. 

Fig.  1073  is  a  smaller  view  of  an  Anchor  Bolt  to  make  attachment  to  either  green  or  hardened  cement 
work.  It  is  provided  with  a  Helical  Steel  Lining  and  is  set  in  a  hole  which  is  bored  with  a  common  auger 
bit  in  green  cement  or  drilled  with  a  star  drill  in  hardened  concrete,  the  hole  and  the  lining  being  filled  with 
soft  cement  before  inserting.  The  bolt  can  be  readily  taken  out  or  replaced  when  the  cement  hardens, 
the  lining  remaining. 

Fig.  727  is  a  Hook  Bolt  to  fasten  stanchions  to  wood  top-rails. 

We  furnish  only  the  sizes  necessary  to  attach  the  fittings  used  with  our  equipments. 


ttm 


Fig.   1190 


Louden  Parallel  Clamps 

These  Clamps  are  used  for  attaching  water  pipes  or  air  pipes  for  milking 
machines,  to  the  top-rails  of  stalls,  or  for  any  other  purpose  where  two 
pipes  or  pieces  of  tubing  are  to  run  parallel  with  each  other.  There  are 
four  sizes,  ly^  x  l^a  and  I  "3  O.  D.,  and  IjV  "  l^a  and  1  Js  O.  D.  The  two 
former  will  connect  an  inch  pipe  with  \^a  or  1  "s  tubing.  The  two  latter 
will  connect  a  54-inch  pipe  with  the  same  sizes  of  tubing. 


Easy  to  Install 

There  is  no  troublesome  or  expensive  installation  with  the  Louden  goods.  The  patterns 
are  made  to  fit;  the  malleable  castings  are  all  "dropped"  to  straighten  and  make  them  uniform,  and 
everything  is  made  to  go  together  easily  and  quickly.  The  most  complete  and  specific  directions 
are  furnished  for  installing  standard  work  and  nothing  is  left  for  guesswork  or  to  be  figured  out. 


Page  One  hundred  thirty-nine 


m^^^^MH 


irrnmir 


TheLOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


3j(vC^  rAIRFIELD.  IOWa'^vUCS 


Louden  Cupola  —  Fig.  1269 


Specifications 

Sizes 

Size 

Ventilating 
Flue 

Base 

Moulding 

Height 

No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 
No. 

4  Louden 
3   Louden 
2   Louden 
1    Louden 
100  Louden 

20-inch 
24-mch 
27-inch 
30-inch 
36-inch 

36x36  inches 
46x46  inches 
49x49  inches 
54x54  inches 
64x64  inches 

9  feet 

11  feet 

12  feet 

13  feet 

14  feet 

Weights  and  Estimate  of  Size  of  Cupola  Wanted 

Building  20x28.  one  No.  4  Louden  Cupola;  shipping  weight.  160  lbs. 
Building  24x28.  one  No.  3  Louden  Cupola;  shipping  weight,  180  lbs. 
Building  30x40.  one  No.  2  Louden  Cupola;  shipping  weight,  200  lbs. 
Building  36x50,  one  No.  1  Louden  Cupola;  shipping  weight.  220  lbs. 
Building  40x70,  two  No.  1  Louden  Cupolas;  shipping  weight,  220  lbs. 
Building  60x60,  one  No.  100  Louden  Cupola. 
No  charge  for  crating 

The  Louden  Cupola  is  built  along  standard  lines  on 
principles  that  have  been  accepted  by  the  leading  ventilator 
authorities  and  most  ventilator  manufacturers. 

It  is  a  well-built,  substantial  cupola  and  will  last  a  life- 
time. As  an  ornament  to  the  barn  it  is  surpassed  by  no 
other  ventilator.  It  is  storm  proof  and  bird  proof.  It  is 
not  how  cheap  but  how  good  we  can  make  the  Louden 
Cupola.      We   do  not  spare  any  cost   to   make  it    lasting. 

Have  your  carpenter  figure  on  a  wooden  cupola,  say 
6x8  feet,  which  at  its  best  is  not  as  good  a  ventilator  as 
the  Louden.  Do  not  overlook  the  cost  of  weather  vane, 
which  would  be  $3.00  to  $5.00,  and  $3.00  to  $5.00  for 
painting,  which  would  have  to  be  done  every  few  years, 
and  would  be  additional  expense.  Then  compare  with 
our  price  and  we  believe  you  will  find  that  the 

Louden  is  much  cheaper,   and  after  all  it  is  abso-  

lutely  impossible  to  build  a  good  ventilator  out 
of  wood. 

You  buy  a  cupola  once  in  a  lifetime  and  you 
want  it  as  substantial  as  you  can  get  it.  Any 
ordinary  mechanic  can  put  it  on  the  building 
in  from  two  to  four  hours.     Wherever  a  carpenter 


Fig.  1269-A 


puts  a  Louden  Cupola  on  a  barn  he  finds  that 
he  does  not  want  to  make  one  out  of  wood 
again,  but  will  always  recommend  the  Louden. 
He  knows  that  he  is  saving  money  for  the 
man  that  he  is  building  the  barn  for  and 
giving  him  a  better  cupola  than  can  be  built 
of  wood. 


The  Louden  Cupola's 
One-Piece  Base 

The  Louden  base  requires  no  frame  on  the 
roof  before  putting  it  in  place,  as  the  base  is 
made  up  complete  in  one  solid  piece  of  galvan- 
ized material. 


Page  One  hundred  forty-one 


'^jm* }*^kih^<iiiiii*M 


Cross  Section 

of  the 

Louden 

Cupola 


We  also  use  our  own  specially  designed  moulding  with    angle-braced    wood 
frame  inside,  which  adds  great  strength   to   the   moulding   and   base   proper, 
besides  being  very  artistic.     We  only  use  the  best  of  galvanized  material  in 
their  construction  including  all  galvanized  bolts  and  washers. 
They  are  built  strong  and  will  stand  windstorms  and  will  not 
get  out  of  shape,   and   are   also  screened    to   keep  out   birds. 
They  are  built  on  scientific  principles  for   ventilation   and  it 
does   not   matter    which    way    the    wind    blows   or    what    the 
surroundings  are  as  the  Louden  Cupola  will  always  have  an  up-draft 
within  and  will  ventilate  the  building  well.     They  require  no  paint- 
ing and  will  last  longer  than  the  ordinary  frame  building.     They 
do  not  weigh  one-third  as  much  as  the  old  style  wood  cupola  and 
will  not  sag  the  roof.     The  Louden  Cupola  is  furnished  with  30-inch 
Full  Body  Gold  Leaf  Weather  Vane,  the  best  that  can  be  made, 
and  one  that  will  stay  bright,  in  the  following  designs:  Horse,  Cow, 
Sheep,    Pig    or    Rooster.      In    ordering    always    state    the    kind    of 
weather  vane  you  want. 


Louden   Ventilators 
Fig.  1268 

Every  living  creature  must  have 
fresh  air — none  can  live  without  it. 
When  air  enters  the  lungs  and  is 
breathed  out,  there  has  been  removed 
from  it  the  life-giving  qualities.  It 
has  changed  to  poisonous  gas. 

The  warmer  and  better  a  barn  is 
constructed  the  more  necessary  is  artificial 
ventilation.  On  thousands  of  farms  there  are 
"well  built"  barns  where  lack  of  pure  air  is 
sapping  the  vitality  of  the  stock.  Upon  open- 
ing the  doors  of  such  a  barn  in  the  morning  a 
man  would  almost  be  nauseated  by  the  sick- 
ening, poisonous  air  were  it  not  for  other  more 
noticeable  but  far  less  dangerous  odors. 

An  average  1 , 000-pound  animal  will  consume 
about  3,000  cubic  feet  of  air  in  24  hours.  This 
"consumed"  or  used  air  must  be  removed  from  the 
barn  and  fresh  air  must  be  allowed  to  enter  to 
take   its    place. 

Most  new  barns  have  vent  flues  to  carry  off 
this   impure   air,    but   in   many   barns   these  outlets 

are  not  doing  the  work  for  which  they  are  intended.      In  some  cases    this    failure   is   due   to   a 
or  "ventilator"   that  hinders  rather  than  assists  the  ventilating  system. 

Note:     We    do    not    furnish    bases    with    Louden    Ventilators.     Different    roof   pitches    and 
different    conditions    for    attaching    make    it    impossible    to    do    so. 


Fig.  1268 


cap 


Page  One  hundred  forty-two 


rrrTTrmn 


TheLOUPEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Specifications 


Size — Diameter 

Gauge  Metal 

A 

rea  in 

Weight 

Capacity 

of  Throat 

in 

used 

sq 

inches 

without 

in  cu.  ft. 

inches 

Base 

per  Hour 

12 

24 

113 

261b. 

36,500 

18 

24 

254 

65  1b. 

82,000 

24 

22 

452 

124  1b. 

145.900 

30 

22 

707 

195  lb. 

231,000 

36 

20 

1,017 

245  lb. 

304,000 

The  above  capacities  are  based  on  a  wind  velocity  of  9.3  mileb  per  hour,  which  is  the  average  for  the  entire  country,  a  difference 
of  20  degrees  between  the  inside  and  outside  temperature  and  a  straight  flue  30  feet  high.  If  you  wish  to  know  the  capacity 
of  any  size  ventilator  under  conditions  different  than  the  above  consult  our  engineering  department.     The  service  is  free. 

When  the  Louden  company  decided  to  design  and  manufacture  a  ventilator  we  started  planning 
from  the  "ground  up."  The  fact  that  some  big  selling  ventilators  were  made  in  a  certain  way  did  not 
influence  our  plans.  Neither  did  we  permit  mere  personal  opinion  to  influence  our  decisions.  We 
purchased  and  have  used  the  most  expensive  and  reliable  instruments  or  machines  (anemometors)  for  our 
tests  and  reached  our  conclusions  through  their  records.  The  anemometors  used  are  the  official  testing 
apparatus  of  the  government. 

It  is  a  fact  well  known  to  ventilation  engineers  that  the  most  efficient  way  to  produce  a  draft  in  a  flue  is 
to  pass  a  current  of  air  across  the  top  of  the  flue.  Careful  tests  show  that  a  plain  flue  projecting  through 
the  roof  will  give  much  better  results  than  most  so-called  "ventilators"  now  in  the  market. 

The  ideal  ventilator  must  depend  upon  correct  scientific  principles  for  its  construction  and  operation. 
It  must  convert  the  largest  possible  per  cent  of  the  energy  contained  in  the  wind  into  a  pumping  or  pulling 
force  to  draw  the  foul  air  up  the  flues  and  out  of  the  building.  At  the  same  time  there  must  be  no  air  enter 
the  ventilator  from  the  outside  to  carry  in  rain  and  snow.  Rain  and  snow  entering  the  ventilator  would  run 
down  the  flue,  necessitating  gutters  to  catch  it  and  drain  it  out.  This  would  be  undesirable  as  the  openings 
would  often  clog  up  in  the  winter.  Neither  should  there  be  any  moving  parts  to  get  out  of  order  and  give 
trouble. 

The  Louden  Ventilator  fulfills  all  requirements. 
The  exhaust  openings  are  of  ample  area  and  they  are 
all  so  placed  that  the  wind  blows  across — never  into 
—  the  openings.  Every  opening  in  the  Louden 
Ventilator  is  an  exhaust  opening.  No  air  enters 
the  ventilator  at  any  point.  Even  on  the  side 
exposed  to  the  wind  the  air  is  constantly  coming  out 
of  all  openings.  No  matter  how  strong  or  light  the 
wind  may  blow — from  north,  east,  south,  or  west — in 
a  March  blizzard,  in  April  shower,  or  on  the  sultriest 
days  of  August — there  is  always  a  strong,  steady  draft 
up  the  flue  that  will  give  ample  ventilation.  It  will 
also  do  its  duty  regardless  of  the  difference  of 
temperature  inside  and  outside  the  building. 

The  Louden  Ventilator  is  absolutely   storm   proof. 

Construction  of  Louden  Ventilators 

The  appearance  of  Louden  Ventilators  is  artistic 
and  attractive  in  its  simplicity. 

The  construction  is  heavy,  rigid,  and  of  the  very 
best  materials.  Neither  time  nor  expense  was  spared 
in  designing  this  ventilator  to  have  it  accomplish  the 
needed  ventilating  results  and  be  time,  storm,  and 
rust  resisting. 

The  lower  band  of  Louden  Ventilators  is  strongly 
braced  inside,  clear    around,   by   eight   braces.     This  _ 

gives  the  whole  ventilator  an  exceptionally  strong  and  rigid  construction.     The  cone-shaped  cap  offers 
the  least  possible  resistance  to  the  wind  and  gives  no  opportunity  for  rain,  snow,  or  sleet  to  collect. 

The  smaller  sizes  of  the  Louden  Ventilator  are  made  of  24-gauge  steel,  the  24  and  30  inch  sizes  of  22-gauge 
steel,  and  the  larger  sizes  of  20-gauge  steel.  All  parts  are  carefully  riveted  with  special  rust-resisting  rivets 
or  are  electric  welded,  and  at  the  joints  the  sheet  metal  is  joined  in  the  most  scientific  and  substantial  manner. 
Figure  1268A  shows  how  the  ventilator  is  constructed. 


Fig.  1268A 


Page  One  hundred  forty-three 


Hospital  Barn — Homewooj 
used  iol  Hospital  Stal 

Bull  Pwi 


NERY  COMPANY 


P  . 


arm  showing  roomy  Pens 
ind  Maternity  Fens. 
I  far  end 


Louden  Window  Ventilator 


Specifications 


Special  ventilators  for  higher  windows 


Size  Window:     Fits  any  window  where  sash  does  not  exceed  48  inches   in  height. 

can  be  furnished,  at  slight  additional  cost,  on  special  orders.  j  -,    ■ 

Fixtures   Include:     2  shields  (one  right  and  one  left),  two  dogs,  two  braces,  I  catch  and  I  keeper,  22  screws,  and  2  rivets. 
Finish:      Galvanized. 

Fresh  air  in  the  barn  is  as  necessary  for  the  comfort  and  health 
of  the  stock  as  fresh  water  and  pure  food.  According  to  experts 
the  average  cow  consumes  more  pounds  of  air  than  she  does  of 
either  food  or  water.  A  1,000  pound  cow  consumes  about  224 
pounds   of    air    daily. 

The  Louden  Window  Ventilator  makes  possible  an  abundance  of 
fresh  air  without  injurious  draughts.  Instead  of  opening  like  an 
ordinary  window  the  sash  tilts  inward  from  the  top  and  rests 
against  metal  shields,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  988-A.  The  cold  air,  instead  of 
striking  the  stock  directly,  is  thrown 
upward,  and  mingles  with  the  warm 
air  near  the  ceiling  before  it  comes 
in  contact  with  the  animals. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  keep  stock 
in  the  barn  during  warm  weather  the 
window  may  be  opened  and  raised, 
as  shown  in  Fig.  988-B,  to  give  a 
direct  and  cooling  circulation  of  air 
throughout  the  barn.  This  feature 
is  a  decided  improvement  over  the 
hinged  type  of  window,  which  cannot 
be  raised.  With  the  Louden  Window 
Ventilator  the  sash  may  easily  be  removed  from  the  window  if  desired. 
All  photos  shown  are  inside  views. 

Fig.  989  is  a  cross  section  of  a  window  fitted  with  a  Louden  Window 
Ventilator.  It  shows  the  window  open  and  slightly  raised.  The  sash  is 
held  in  the  raised  position  by  two  locking  dogs,  one  on  each  side. 

The  shields  are  made  of  galvanized  sheet  steel.  They  are  secured 
to    the   casing   by   screws  along   the   inner    edges.     Flanges  along   the 

outer  edges,  turned  in,  support  the  sash  when 
open.  The  shields  are  stiffened  by  brace 
rods,  riveted  on. 

The  Louden  Window  Ventilator  is  made 
in  different  sizes  to  fit  any  window.  To  get 
the  proper  size,  give  height  of  sash.  This 
measurement  is  absolutely  necessary  before 
we  can  make  up  the  shields.  No  other  is 
needed. 

The  Louden  Window  Ventilator  is  the 
most  perfect  window  ventilator  made.  It  is 
inexpensive  and  extremely  simple.  Specify  it 
when  you  build  or  remodel  your  barn 


Fig.  986 
Window  Closed 


Fig.  988-A 
Window  Open 


Fig.  988-B 

Pat'd  Feb.  7,  1916 

Window  Open  and  Slightly 

Raised 


Pigeon  Falls,  Wis.,  July  10.  1916. 
The  Louden  Machinery  Co.. 

St.  Paul.  Minn. 
Gentlemen: 

A   line  or   two   of   comment   about    the  service   of 
Louden  Goods: 

The  Louden   Equipment  is  the  best  and  most  per- 
fect barn  equipment  that  1  have  ever  seen. 

Die  Kolden.  Kolden  Stock  Farm. 


Fig.  989 
Cross  Section 


Page  One  hundred  forty-six 


Louden  Manger  and  Gutter  Drains 


Specifications 

Manger  Drains  are  4^  i  inches  wide  at  top,  and  4^i  inches  deep,  with  outlet 
to    fit    either   I  '  .-inch  or  2-inch  pipe,  also  4-inch  Cast   Iron  Soil  Pipe  or 
Sewer    Tile,  andare  furnished  with  bell  trap  strainer  and  brass  cover. 
Weight,  5^4   pounds.  ,  ,  .      ,         .  .  , 

Gutter  or  Floor  Drains  are  8  inches  wide  at  top  and  7  inches  deep  with  out- 
let to  fit  either  a  4-inch   Cast  Iron  Soil  Pipe,  or  Sewer  Tile,  and  are  fur- 
nished with  bell  trap  strainer,  grating,  and  with  or  without  brass  cover. 
Weight.   21   pounds.  i  i  •  c   j 

Gutter  Drain  is  always  furnished  with  brass  cover  unless  otherwise  specihed. 

NOTE:     For  other  types  of  Drains  and  Cess  Pools,  see  page  212. 

Proper  drainage  of  the  barn  is  second  in  importance  only  to 
proper  lighting  and  ventilation.  In  many  barns  the  drainage  is 
so  poor  that  it  offsets  to  a  great  extent  the  advantages  of  proper 
ventilation  facilities.  . 

In  addition  to  the  sanitary  advantages  of  proper  dramage. 
the  saving  of  the  liquid  manure  makes  the  system  an  economy. 
Land  to  which  liquid  manure  is  applied  will  very  shortly  return 
in  increased  crops  the  entire  cost  of  the  installation. 

Illustration  shows  an  excellent  method  of  barn  dramage.  In 
the  gutter  at  the  left  of  the  picture  is  a  cross  section  of  our  floor, 

or  gutter  drain.  ,       .„  •  l-  j  l 

As  can  be  seen  in  the  illustrations,  on  this  and  on  the 
next  page,  both  the  gutter   drains   and   the   manger   drains  are 


Page  One  hundred  forty-seven 


Fig.  1270' 2 

Manger  Drain  fitted  to  4-inch 

Drain  Tile 


Fig.  1271 

Gutter  Drain  fitted  to  4-inch 

Tile  or  Soil  Pipe 


equipped  with  bell  trap  so  that  no  odors  or  gases  can  escape  into  tl 
barn.     Each  is  equipped  with  strainers  which  are  a  part  of  the  bell' 
trap.     This  prevents  trash  entering  and  clogging  up  the  drain  pipes. 

Drains  are  made  of  cast  iron  throughout  with  the  exception  of  the 
close-fitting,  water-tight  brass  lid. 

The  brass  lids  have  a  perfectly  milled  seat,  the  same  as  found  on  valves  of  automobiles  and  gasoline 
engines,  which  are  recognized  standard.  The  lids,  while  easily  removed,  close  the  opening  air  tight  by 
their  own  weight. 

The  lifting  rings  on  the  brass  lids  are  counter  sunk,  so  there  is  no  danger  of  the  lid  being  displaced  by 
the  animals  stepping  on  it,  or  rooting  with  the  nose.  While  fitting  snugly,  the  lifting  ring  is  so  arranged 
that  lid  can  be  removed  instantly  with  the  fingers,  no  tools  being  required. 

Manger  Drain  Installation 

Figures  1 270  and  1 270  J  2  show  how  Louden  Manger  Drains  fit  different  sizes  of  drain  pipe.  The  manger 
drain  pipe  should  never  be  less  than  I  '  j-inch  pipe,  and  our  drain  heads  will  fit  that  size;  also  a  2-inch  pipe 
or  4-inch  soil  pipe  or  tile.  Illustration  shows  how  far  below  the  manger  floor  level  the  drain  pipe  may 
rise  to  allow  for  proper  installation. 

The  advantage  of  having  a  drain  for  the  mangers  is  great.  With  the  drain  closed  with  the  close-fitting 
cap,  the  animals  may  be  watered  conveniently,  and  the  mangers  scrubbed  out  as  often  as  desired. 

Gutter  Drain  Installation 

Louden  Gutter  Drains  are  made  to  fit  either  a  4-inch  Cast  Soil  Pipe  or  Sewer  tile.  Illustration  shows 
proper  installation.  The  inside  wall  of  the  Drain  is  4  inches  in  diameter,  the  same  as  the  4-inch  inside  of 
the  drain  tile.  Set  the  flange  end  of  tile  next  to  floor  and  Drain  when  set  in  it  with  cement  will  be  abso- 
lutely rigid.  Every  barn  should  have  a  drainage  system  that  will  make  it  possible  to  save  every  bit  of 
the  liquid  manure.  Different  conditions  in  the  barn  surroundings  will  make  the  installation  of  a  liquid 
manure  system  a  matter  of  personal  choice,  but  the  main  point — save  the  liquids — can  not  be  too  strongly 
urged. 

1 1  is  an  easy  matter  to  arrange  cocks  at  the  cistern  so  that  the  water  from  the  mangers  need  not  enter 
the  cistern,  but  be  carried  to  other  places. 


Let  Our  Experts  Help  You 

We  have  a  large  corps  of  men  who  are  experts  on  barn  construction,  barn  arrangement, 
ventilation,  drainage,  and  kindred  subjects.  These  experts  are  at  your  service  and  advice  is 
free.  If  you  are  going  to  build  or  remodel  your  barn  do  not  hesitate  to  write  us.  Our  sugges- 
tions may  save  you  many  dollars. 


Page  One  hundred  forty-eight 


rrrmmn 


TheLOUPEN  MACHINERY  COMPABJY 


The  Louden  Guarantee 

We  guarantee  all  our  products  to  be  exactly  as  herein  represented,  and  to  perform  the 
work  for  which  they  are  intended  in  a  satisfactory  manner.  Also,  that  the  material  and 
workmanship  is  free  from  defects,  and  we  agree  to  replace  without  charge  anything  which 
may  be  defective. 

This  has  been  our  practice  during  our  fifty  years  of  building  Barn  Equipments,  and 
upon  this  policy  our  extensive,  world-wide  business  has  been  built.  Those  who  know  the 
Louden  Company  or  the  Louden  goods  do  not  require  any  formal  guarantee.  They  KNOW 
that  everything  made  by  us  will  be    FIRST   CLASS   IN  EVERY   RESPECT. 

Our  most  enthusiastic  customers  are  those  who  have  used  other  equipments  and  have 
LEARNED  FROM  EXPERIENCE  the  superior  merits  of  ours.  We  want  the  prospective 
purchaser  to  ask  the  men  who  use  our  equipment  and  to  find  out  for  himself  which  is  THE 
BEST  from  every  point  of  practical  service  and  genuine  utility. 

We  invite  a  thorough  investigation,  and  solicit  a  trial  with  other  equipments,  whenever 
practical,  because  we  know  that  this  is  the  best  way  to  demonstrate  the  decided  superiority 
of  our  goods.  Our  long  established  reputation  for  fair  and  honorable  dealing,  in  addition  to 
the  established  merits  of  our  goods,  is  ample  protection  for  every  purchaser. 

THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  CO/ 

By 


President. 


i>airybakN 

COATING 


Coatings  for  Dairy  Barn  Equipments 

After  many  years  of  scientific  research  and  painstaking  experiments,  we 
have  succeeded  in  producing  an  improved  Coating  for  Dairy  Barn  Equip- 
ments, which  will  be  known  as  "Louden  Tantite."  It  is  a  beautiful  tan 
color,  not  too  dark  nor  too  light,  but  just  right  to  harmonize  with  and  satisfy 
all  the  requirements  of  an  up-to-date  dairy  barn.  It  is  made  from  our  own 
formula  which  was  worked  out  after  years  of  patient  investigation  and  consul- 
tations with  the  foremost  experts  in  the  manufacture  of  paints.  Next  to  gal- 
vanizing it  is  the  most  durable  coating  made  for  barn  equipment.  In  a  well 
ventilated  barn,  where  the  moisture  is  properly  taken  care  of,  it  will  stand  as 
well  as  galvanizing,  and  will  cost  considerably  less. 

All  the  metal  work  of  our  equipment  will  be  coated  with  "Tantite"  unless 
the  order  calls  for  galvanizing.  The  tubing  and  other  metal  parts  are  first 
carefully  cleaned  to  free  them  from  scale  and  dirt,  and  are  then  dipped  in  a 
heavy  mixture  of  "Tantite,"  which  will  run  into  all  openings,  thus  coating 
the  inside  of  the  tubing  and  castings  as  well  as  the  outside.  After  dipping, 
the  parts  are  run  on  an  overhead  track  into  a  large  steam  heated  oven  where  the  "Tantite"  is  thoroughly 
baked  on.  The  result  is  a  heavy  coating  of  "Tantite,"  both  inside  and  outside,  producing  the  very  best 
finish  —  really  an  enamel  —  which  will  be  as  durable  as  the  finish  is  excellent. 

We  strongly  recommend  the  coating  of  stalls  and  stanchions,  the  metal  parts  of  mangers,  and  all 
animal  pens,  at  least  once  a  year,  in  order  to  keep  them  in  a  strictly  sanitary  condition.  This  is  nec- 
essary, whether  galvanized  or  coated  with  paint,  and  when  this  is  done  the  galvanizing  will  be  but  little 
advantage.  Also,  in  view  of  the  rough  handling  in  shipping  and  while  erecting,  it  will  pay  to  give  the 
material  a  coat  of  "Tantite"  after  it  is  erected  and  when  the  cement  work  is  dry.  No  one  would  think 
of  painting  the  material  for  a  house  before  it  was  built  and  not  painting  the  house  afterward.  The  rough 
handling  is  sure  to  more  or  less  damage  the  very  best  finish,  and  to  make  the  equipment  look  strictly 
first  class  it  should  be  coated  after  erecting. 

We  furnish  free  with  each  order  a  small  can  of  "Tantite,"  sufficient  to  touch  up  the  scars  which  may 
be  received  in  shipping  and  handling.  We  also  put  up  "Tantite"  in  two  sizes  of  self-sealing  cans,  labeled 
as  shown  in  cut,  to  be  used  for  additional  coating.  The  larger  can  is  a  half  gallon,  and  the  smaller  is  a 
quart.     When  properly  spread,  a  half  gallon  will  coat  I  5  to  20  stalls,  and  other  work  in  proportion. 

AH  cracks  and  crevices,  wherever  they  may  be,  should  be  filled  with  some  durable  filler,  such  as  iron 
cement,  or  even  good  putty  with  white  or  red  lead  added  to  give  it  body.  This  is  advisable  to  make  the 
equipment  completely  sanitary. 


Page  One  hundred  forty-nine 


LOUDEN  CARRIERS 

LITTER,   FEED,   MILK  CAN,  HARNESS,  AND 
MERCHANDISE 

PAGE 

Litter   Carriers 1 54- 1 66 

Feed   Carriers 1 67- 1  70 

Feed  Trucks 171 

Harness    Carriers 171 

Merchandise   Carriers 1  72 

Milk  Can  Carriers 173-174 

Steel   Track   and  Track  Fittings 175-183 

Swinging  Cranes 185-186 

Rod  Track  and  Fittings 187-190 

Plans  of  Installation 191-193 


Profit    and   Loss    on    the    Farm 


Losses  on  the  farm  result  from  exactly  the  same 
causes  which  make  failures  of  mercantile  establish- 
ments. The  successful  farmer  must  exercise  the 
same  care  to  prevent  losses  as  must  the  superin- 
tendent of  a  great  railway  system. 

Waste  Steals  Profit 

Whether  it  is  of  labor  or  of  material,  waste  is 
the  most  persistent  and  insidious  cause  of  loss. 

The  most  valuable  by-product  of  the  farm  is 
manure.  The  litter  of  the  barn  is  the  balance 
wheel  of  the  farm.  Every  crop  harvested,  every 
blade  of  grass  eaten  by  cattle  uses  just  so  much  of 
your  cash  capital  in  soil  fertility.  You  must  replace 
it  by  fertilizing.  Now  comes  the  opportunity  for 
waste.  What  method  do  you  use  for  handling 
manure?  All  soil  experts  agree  that  manure  used 
fresh  and  containing  its  full  share  of  liquid  is  at 
least  50  per  cent  more  valuable  than  old  manure. 
Are  you  losing  that  50  per  cent  through  lack  of 
facilities  for  handling  it?  A  litter  carrier  installed 
in  your  barn  will  enable  you  to  load  fresh  manure 
into  a  wagon  or  spreader  and  make  the  work  mere 
child's  play. 

If  you  do  not  have  our  little  booklet  entitled 
"Some  Interesting  Facts  on  a  Homely  Subject," 
which  treats  of  manure  values  and  methods  of 
caring  for  same,  send  for  it — it  is  free. 

Stop  Stable    Drudgery 

Labor  costs  money.  Whether  you  clean  your 
barn  and  feed  your  stock  yourself  or  hire  it  done, 
you   cannot  afford   to  waste   the  time  and  energy 


called  for  by  the  old  wheelbarrow  method.  The 
saving  in  time  alone  gained  by  the  use  of  a  litter 
and  feed  carrier  will  pay  handsomely  on  the 
investment. 

Cleanliness  Next  To  Godliness 

Just  as  much  so  in  the  barn  as  in  the  kitchen. 
A  clean  barn  means  healthy  cattle,  more  and  better 
dairy  products.  Removing  the  unpleasant  feature 
of  cleaning  the  barn  by  using  a  litter  carrier  will 
result  in  more  frequent  cleaning.  The  carrier 
places  the  litter  either  in  your  wagon  or  at  any 
desired  distance  from  your  barn,  insuring  not  only 
a  clean  barn,  but  a  clean  yard  as  well. 

Check  Up  the  Profits 

Count  them  on  your  fingers:  The  increase  in 
the  value  of  fresh,  wet  manure  and  consequent 
increase  in  the  fertility  of  the  farm;  the  saving  of 
time  in  the  handling;  the  improved  health  of  your 
cattle;  the  increase  both  in  quantity  and  quality 
of  dairy  products.  Any  one  of  these  reasons  should 
be  sufficient  to  induce  any  farmer  or  dairyman  to 
equip  his  barn  with  a  Louden  Litter  Carrier.  Many 
farmers  say  that  by  using  a  Louden  Feed  Carrier 
they  are  able  to  prevent  a  waste  of  feed  that  soon 
pays  for  a  feed  carrier — to  say  nothing  of  the 
time  saved.  If  you  could  reduce  each  profit  to 
figures,  add  them  up  for  a  year,  setting  down  the 
answer  in  dollars  and  cents,  you  would  very  quickly, 
like  everyone  of  your  friends  who  have  installed 
Louden  Litter  and  Feed  Carriers,  come  to  the  con- 
clusion that  you  could  not  get  along  without  them. 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-two 


)J^;T!}^»)iio>^.^i:^Nth;i^r4v 


Why  You  Should  Buy  Louden 
Carriers 

Because  they  are  the  best.  This  is  a  "look- 
you-square-in-the-eye"  statement  of  facts.  We 
know  they  are  the  best  because  we  have  made  a 
hfe  study  of  overhead  carriers.  We  own  the 
first  patent  issued  by  the  United  States  Patent 
Office  on  Litter  Carriers.  We  have  studied  and 
experimented  constantly,  with  a  full  and  complete 
knowledge  of  the  requirements  to  make  our  carriers 
perfect.  Whenever  we  find  an  improvement  possi- 
ble we  make  it.  We  discard  undesirable  features. 
Our  patents  to-day  cover  practically  every  valuable 
feature  on  litter  carriers.  They  cover  many  special 
features  which  can  only  be  had  in  Louden  Carriers, 
and  without  which  no  carrier  can  be  perfect. 

Quality 

Quality  and  workmanship  have  always  been  of 
first  importance  with  us.  Our  policy  of  building 
the  best  goods  possible,  and  selling  them  at  the 
lowest  prices  consistent  with  good  business  methods, 
has  built  up  an  enormous  trade  for  us;  one  which 
binder  no  circumstances  would  we  take  any  chance 
of  jeopardizing  by  allowing  goods  of  an  inferior 
quality  or  workmanship  to  leave  our  factory. 

Price 

We  have  never  been  engaged  in  the  wild 
scramble  to  build  cheap  goods.  With  us  it  never 
has  been  a  question  of  "how  cheap,"  but  always 
"how  good."  In  making  up  your  mind  to  install 
a  litter  carrier  in  your  barn,  bear  in  mind  that  it 
is  not  for  a  day,  a  week  or  a  month,  but  for  years 
that  you  want  this  carrier  to  work  at  all  times  and 


to  give  you  good  service.  That  once  you  have 
discarded  the  wheelbarrow  you  do  not  want  to  be 
compelled  to  go  back  to  it,  while  making  repairs  on 
a  carrier  system  which  was  built  too  cheaply  to 
stand  up  under  the  work. 

We  build  carriers  of  different  styles,  of  different 
weights  of  materials,  and  at  a  wide  variation  in 
price  to  suit  both  the  needs  and  the  purse  of  all. 
But  from  the  highest-price  outfit  to  the  lowest 
price,  each  one  represents  the  highest  standard  of 
excellence  —  the  Louden  Standard — and  is  posi- 
tively the  best  value  that  can  be  bought  at  the 
price. 

We  invite  prospective  purchasers  to  make  com- 
parison between  Louden  Litter  Carriers  and  others. 
See  them  both  work.  Ask  the  man  who  is  using 
them.  When  you  have  done  this  with  a  mind 
open  to  conviction,  you  will  join  us  in  saying  — 
"None  so  good  as  Louden  Carriers." 

Let  Us  Help  You 

In  this  catalog  we  endeavor  to  make  every 
detail  of  our  different  carriers,  track  and  methods 
of  installing,  very  clear  and  concise.  If  after  care- 
ful reading  you  should  feel  at  a  loss  as  to  the  best 
carrier  or  the  best  method  of  installation  to  suit 
your  purpose,  write  us,  giving  a  floor  plan  of  your 
barn,  showing  location  of  stalls,  and  indicating 
about  where  you  would  wish  to  run  the  litter 
carrier  tracks.  Upon  receipt  of  this  information 
we  will  submit  a  plan  of  installation  suitable  for  the 
conditions  existing  at  your  barn  and  will  give  you 
an  estimate  of  cost. 

No  matter  how  situated,  nor  how  complicated 
the  arrangement,  we  can  install  Louden  Litter  and 
Feed  Carrier  equipment  to  work  and  give  you 
perfect  satisfaction. 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-three 


The  Kind  of  Carrier  for  You 


The  kind  of  carrier  you  will  need  depends  upon  the  arrangement  of  your  barn,  size  of  barn,  number 
of  cattle  housed,  and  the  disposition  you  wish  to  make  of  the  litter. 

In  the  great  majority  of  cases,  one  of  the  carriers  operating  on  a  solid  steel  track  will  be  found  the 
most  desirable,  but  the  arrangement  of  some  buildings  allows  the  use  of  the  lighter  wire  track  outfits 
with  satisfactory  results. 

If  it  is  your  intention  to  drop  the  litter  into  a  wagon  or  spreader,  or  if  it  is  necessary  to  use  many 
curves  or  switches,  the  solid  steel  track  carriers  are  the  only  practical  kind  for  your  use. 

If,  however,  you  simply  wish  to  get  the  litter  out  of  the  barn  quickly,  running  it  into  a  dump  some 
distance  away,  one  of  the  wire  track  carriers  will  answer  your  purpose. 

Following  we  give  a  brief  summing  up  of  the  special  features  of  our  different  carriers,  which  may 
help  you  to  determine  which  outfit  will  best  suit  your  purpose.  All  carriers  are  described  in  detail  on 
the  pages  following. 

Litter    Carriers 

NEW    IMPROVEMENT.      All  Louden   Litter  Carriers  are  now  equipped  with 
roller  bearing  track  wheels. 

EMANCIPATOR.  The  Emancipator  Carrier  is  the  final  summing  up  of 
all  the  desirable  features  which  can  be  incorporated  into  a  Litter  Carrier.  It 
is  the  desirable  carrier  for  use  in  large  dairy  barns  where  the  work  is  heavy. 
It  will  stand  up  under  all  kinds  of  handling.  Every  part  is  built  heavy.  If 
you  want  the  best  litter  carrier  made,  place  your  order  for  the  Emancipator. 
It  will  not  disappoint  you.     Full  description,  page  157. 


STANDARD.  This  is  the  old  reliable,  the  first  Litter  Carrier  placed  on 
the  market  using  a  worm  gear  hoist.  It  is  a  little  lighter  than  the  Emancipator, 
uses  cables  for  supporting  the  box  instead  of  chain,  and  can  only  be  raised 
a  distance  of  4^  or  5  feet,  so  is  not  so  desirable  for  buildings  with  high 
ceilings.  Where  ceilings  do  not  exceed  8  or  9  feet  in  height,  no  better  value 
can  be  bought  than  the  Standard  Carrier.     See  page  161. 


iSELF-ACTING.  The  strongest,  best  behaved  litter  carrier  ever  built  to 
run  on  a  wire  track.  If  you  simply  want  manure  conveyed  from  the  barn 
to  the  yard  and  piled  there,  load  it  in  this  carrier  and  give  it  a  shove.  It  will 
run  out,  empty  itself  and  come  back.  This  carrier  can  also  be  emptied  into 
spreader  or  wagon,  but  requires  a  little  more  head  room.  This  is  a  very 
popular  carrier.     See  page  163. 


u 


LITTER 


LovJ?fN- 


QUICK  OUT.  The  Quick  Out  Carrier  is  a  combination  of  many 
of  the  good  points  of  the  Emancipator  and  Standard  Carrier  with 
the  automatic  quick  return  of  our  Self-Acting  Carrier.  It  runs  on 
wire  track  and  has  improved  raising  and  lowering  device.  Can  be 
used  to  empty  litter  into  wagon  or  spreader,  or  to  be  operated  auto- 
matically. These  carriers  require  no  posts  in  the  yard,  unless  track  is 
over  100  feet  long.     This  carrier  described  fully  on  page  162. 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-four 


Feed   Carriers 

NEW  IMPROVEMENT.     All  Louden  Feed  Carriers  are  now  equipped  with  roller  bearing  track  wheels. 

DOUBLE  END  FEED  CARRIER.  The  largest  feed  carrier  we  make. 
It  is  built  with  sloping  shovel  board  at  each  end  so  two  men  can  work  at  the 
same  time.  It  is  the  carrier  for  heavy  work;  is  the  best  carrier  for  all  barns, 
and  particularly  desirable  where  you  are  feeding  more  than  twenty  head  of 
animals.  The  carrier  is  strongly  reinforced  in  all  parts.  It  is  built  to  stand 
heavy  work  and  give  long  service.     See  page  1 67. 


SINGLE  END  FEED  CARRIER.  If  one  man  is  doing  the  feeding,  this 
carrier  is  the  right  one  for  all  barns.  It  is  easy  to  handle;  can  be  furnished 
with  any  style  of  hoisting  gear,  and  is  a  handy  all-around  feed  car;  is  suitable 
for  carrying  silage  from  silo  to  feed  alley,  or  for  carrying  corn  or  other  grains 
to  bunkers  or  feed  troughs.  Carrier  is  strongly  built  of  the  best  materials. 
Description  on  page  168. 


SIDE  DELIVERY  FEED  CARRIER.  This  carrier  was  designed  to 
meet  the  demand  for  a  carrier  to  be  used  where  feed  is  to  be  distributed  in 
feed  bunkers  or  on  feeding  floors.  It  is  so  arranged  that  the  feed  box  can  be 
tilted  over  sideways  allowing  feed  to  pour  out  a  little  at  a  time  or  feed  can 
be  scooped  out  easily.  It  is  easily  handled  and  is  a  great  saver  of  time  and 
labor.     See  page  170. 


ADJUSTABLE  FRAME  FEED  CARRIER.  This  carrier  is  attached  to 
the  truck  with  a  chain  and  may  be  hung  high  or  low  as  required.  It  fills  every 
requirement  where  it  is  not  necessary  to  raise  or  lower  the  box  during  feeding 
time.  The  materials  used  in  the  manufacture  are  the  same  as  in  other  Louden 
Feed  Carriers.  The  raising  and  lowering  chains  are  quickly  adjusted. 
See  page  1 69. 


WIRE  TRACK  FEED  CARRIER.  This  carrier  has  the  chain  adjust- 
ment for  accommodating  the  carrier  to  the  height  of  the  ceiling,  and  is  built 
for  a  wire  track.  No  wire  track  carrier  on  the  market  is  more  satisfactory. 
The  box  is  the  same  as  those  we  use  on  our  other  carriers.  Full  description 
on  page  169. 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-five 


Fig.  828.     (Hospice) 


Emancipator   Litter   Carrier  —  Fig.  828 

/  Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  steel  track.  Fig.  571.  (For  track  fittings  see  pages  175  to  183.) 
Body  of  box  is  made  of  20  gauge  galvanized  sheet  steel,   reinforced  with  angle  iron. 

Ejids  of  box  are  made  of    16  gauge  galvanized  sheet  steel.  ^  •         ia  u     u  i 

Length  of  box.  48  inches:  width.  27,1  «  inches;  depth.  22  inches,  outside  measurements.      Capacity,    10  bushels. 
Box  is  fitted  regularly  to  raise  and  lower  7  feet;  may  be  fitted  to  raise  and  lower  as  much  as  20  feet  at  slight  additional  cost. 
Track  wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  track  wheels.  4  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  track  wheels,   5  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  box  upright,   50  inches;  box  dumped,   56  inches.  .      r        ■  .     .  i     l 

Length  of  hand  chain.  1 1  feet,  ends  joined  together.  Where  ceilings  are  high,  longer  chains  can  be  furnished  at  slight 
additional  cost. 

Shipping  weight,  208  pounds. 

In  a  litter  carrier  the  demand  should  be  for  dependable,  long  continued  service  and  safety,  together 
with  ease  of  operation  and  convenience  as  these  features  are  essential.  Study  carefully  the  construction 
and  design,  then  consider  the  factory  which  makes  the  carrier,  and  the  reputation  it  bears  for  quality  and 
square  dealing. 

The  Louden  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier  is  the  acme  of  years  of  study  and  experiment;  the  result  of 
Louden  experience  and  Louden  determination  to  manufacture  the  best  barn  equipment  on  earth. 

It-is  made  for  the  man  who  wants  the  best,  who  is  satisfied  with  nothing  short  of  perfection. 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-seven 


There  is  no  other  carrier  like  it;  no  other  carrier  that  has  the  same  strength,  symmetry,  lifting  power, 
or  ease  of  propellment  along  the  track.  No  other  carrier  has  the  exclusive  special  features  of  the  Eman- 
cipator, without  which  any  litter  carrier  falls  short  of  perfection. 

As  has  often  been  said,   "The  best  evidence  of  worth  is  the  name  of 
the  maker."     The  Louden  Machinery  Company  is  too  well  established, 
too  well  known,  and  too  proud  of  its  reputation  for  quality  and  square 
dealing,    to  offer  any  product  that  is  not  satis- 
factory and  SAFE. 

Hoisting  Device 

We  discarded  all  clutches,  brakes  and  ratchets 
in  connection  with  litter  and  feed  carriers  years 
ago.  We  own  the  first  patents  issued  on  litter 
carriers,  but  thorough  tests  so  clearly  proved  the 
superiority  of  our  present  construction  that  we 
threw  away  all  the  old  style  models  and  are  offer- 
ing only  those  which  we  know  to  be  absolutely 
trustworthy. 

It  makes  the  lowering  and  raising  of  the  box 
so  easy  that  with  the  same  effort  practically 
double  as  much  can  be  raised  as  with  any  other  hoisting 
device.  A  boy  can  raise  a  bigger  load  with  this  device  than 
can  a  man  with  any  other  litter  or  feed  carrier.  A  lifting 
chain  of  sufficient  length  to  raise  and  lower  the  box  seven 
feet  is  furnished  regularly,  but  at  small  additional  cost  the 

carrier  can  be  equipped  to  hoist  twenty  feet. 

Fig.  881.     The  Emancipator 
The  wheel  "A"  (see  illustration)  is  the  wheel  over  which  Hoisting  Gear, 

the  hand  chain  passes.     This  chain  is  endless,  like  the  chain 

on  a  bicycle,  and  the  links  fit  snugly  over  the  sprockets  in  the  wheel.  The  eixle  of  wheel  "A"  revolves 
with  the  wheel,  and  a  thread — the  worm — turns  just  as  fast  as  you  turn  wheel  "A"  with  the  hand  chain. 
Now  examine  wheel  "B".  It  has  lugs,  or  pins,  all  around,  into  which  the  worm  threads  fit,  and  when 
these  threads  begin  to  turn  as  a  result  of  pulling  on  the  hand  chain  the  advantage  you  gain  over  the  load 

is  enormous.     It  permits  a  one  pound  pull  on  the  chain  to  raise  forty  in  the  box. 

This  is  the  greatest  leverage  giving  principle  ever  discovered. 

Another  exclusive  Louden  feature  is  the  way  the  lifting  chain  operates.  This, 
like  other  Louden  features,  is  the  result  of  48  years'  study,  and  it  eliminates  all 
possibility  of  the  carrier  box  dropping  too  quickly.  It  also  does  away  with  trouble- 
some ratchets  and  brakes  that  would  make  its  use  by  careless  help  a  constant  danger. 

It  will  be  seen  in  the  illustration  how  the  lifting  chain  is  attached  to  the  carrier 
box,  how  it  runs  over  the  pin  wheel  "B"  and  up  to  and  around  the  drum.  This 
lifting  chain  CANNOT  run  unless  there  is  a  pull  on  the  hand  chain.  The  lifting 
chain,  the  hand  chain  and  the  worm  MUST  work  in  unison. 

The  chain  guides  (or  floats)  "D"  on  both  the  wheel  and  the  drum,  work  perfectly 
and  always  keep  the  chain  even  and  fitting  snugly.  Everything  is  mechanically 
correct  and  is  tested  thoroughly  before  leaving  the  factory. 

Still  another  exclusive  Louden  feature  is  the  extra  strong  swivel  joints  "E" 
which  connect  the  track  wheels  to  the  frame,  and  which  support  the  weight  of  the 
load.  Instead  of  using  an  ordinary  bolt  that  bends  and  gets  out  of  shape  after  a 
little  usage,  we  use  a  heavy  swivel  knee  joint,  the  bearing  surface  of  which  is 
2g  inches  in  diameter.  This  swivel  joint  permits  the  carrier  to  round  curves  as 
easily  as  it  runs  on  a  straight  track.  There  is  no  sticking  or  binding  or  heavy 
friction  to  overcome. 

The  track  wheels  are  set  as  far  apart  on  the  track  as  possible.     This  does  away 

with    the    unsteadiness    and    "jerkiness. "     The    wheels    are  large — four  inches  in 

Fig.  885.  diameter — are  roller  bearing  and  run  smoothly  on  the  track.     The  wheels  turn  on 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-eight 


iiiimiiii.^ij,:i\ 


The  Emancipator  Box. 


special  tempered  steel  axles  |  inch  in  diameter.  The  axles  are  bolted  into  the  supporting  casting  full  size  and 
no  weak  shoulders.  The  wheels  are  strong  enough  to  carry  tons  more  than  will  ever  be  required  in  a  litter 
carrier.  The  flanges  of  Louden  Track  Wheels  are  made  so  that  each  flange  has  two  bearings  against  the  edge 
of  the  track,  instead  of  one  which  ordinary  wheel  flanges  have.  This  prevents  the  wheels  from  wabbling  on 
the  track.  This  is  a  valuable,  patented  and  exclusive  feature.  The  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track 
(Page  175)  used  with  the  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier  is  made  to  stand  great  strains,  and  is  strong  enough 
to  carry  any  load  you  can   pile  on  the  carrier  box. 

Carrier  Box 

The  Emancipator  Carrier  Box  is  built  of  heavy  galvanized  steel, 
reinforced  with  angle  iron.  You  can't  overload  it.  Fill  it  full  of  sand 
or  water,  rush  it  over  the  track  —  you  can't  do  it  a  bit  of  damage. 
The  box  is  water  tight  and  will  hold  every  drop  of  liquid  manure;  no 
spilling  of  liquids  along  the  walk.  The  most  valuable  part  of  the  manure 
is  saved.  The  box  is  built  regularly  48  inches  long,  27,' 3  inches  wide 
and  22  inches  deep. 

Dumping  Device 

Here  again  is  the  Louden  Carrier  in  the  lead.  This  exclusive  arrange" 
ment  was  adopted  after  thoroughly  testing  and  discarding  other  plans. 

The  box  is  hung  to- the  exact  fraction  of  an  inch  to  make  the  balance  Fig.  723. 
most  perfect.  The  trip  lock  in  the  end  of  the  box  is  adjusted  so  that  it 
is  impossible  to  dump  the  box  unless  it  is  so  desired,  yet  makes  it  an  easy  matter  to  dump  the  box  with 
a  shovel  or  fork.  This  trip  lock  is  also  arranged  so  that  the  box  may  be  dumped  with  a  rope,  where  the 
track  arrangement  used  will  allow  the  carrier  to  run  by  gravity  to  manure  pit  or  spreader.  The  rope 
can  be  used  to  return  the  carrier  to  the  barn  for  reloading.  The  box,  on  account  of  its  correct  balance, 
can  be  righted  with  pitchfork  or  shovel.     No  touching  with  hands  is  necessary. 

The  Best  For  You 

If  quality,  workmanship,  durability,  and  perfection  of  mechanism  count  with 
you,  install  the  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier.  There  is  none  like  it;  none  to  com- 
pare with  it;  none  that  will  give  you  that  lasting  satisfaction  of  having  made  a 
wise  investment.  It  is  tested  and  true.  It  is  used  the  world  over,  and  it  is  backed 
by  the  oldest,  largest,  and  best  known  litter-carrier  manufacturer  in  the  world. 

Track 

The  Louden  Double  Bead  Track,  Fig.  571  (Page  175),  is  used  with  the 
Emancipator  Carrier. 

Louden  track  is  stronger,  more  reliable  in  use,  easier  to  put  up,  and  is  in  every 
other  way  SUPERIOR  to  other  styles  of  track  used  for  this  purpose.  It  will 
not  buckle  to  one  side  or  let  the  carrier  run  off  as  side-hitch  tracks  will  do.  We 
warrant  all  our  goods  to  be  SUPERIOR  to  anything  of  the  kind  on  the  market, 
and  we  do  not  ask  purchasers  to  keep  any  article  which  will  not  fill  the 
warranty. 

A  recent  test  in  the  Louden  factory  proved  conclusively  that,  under  exactly 
the  same  conditions.  Louden  tracks  will  carry  almost  double  as  much  weight  as 
other  tracks.  Every  article  bearing  the  name  Louden  is  far  stronger  than 
necessary  for  practical  use  and  is  built  that  way  to  handle  safely  the  unusual 
strain  that  might  be  placed  upon  it. 


Roller  Bearing  Track 
Wheels 

Each  wheel  used  on  our 
steel  track  litter  carriers 
is  fitted  with  1  7  tempered 
steel  roller  bearings.  Size 
of  bearings  for  steel  track 
carriers  -i^xl  inch.  These 
revolve  around  a  J  y -inch 
cold  rolled  steel  axle  or 
shaft.  The  ends  of  the 
steel  roller  bearings  work 
against  our  special  pat- 
ented revolvable  washer. 
This  reduces  friction  to  a 
minimum.  Also  eliminates 
excessive  wear,  prevents 
binding  or  grinding  to- 
gether of  the  rollers.  The 
Louden  Trolleys  with 
roller  bearings  travel 
easily  and  outlast  any 
other  trolleys  of  this  kind 
that  are  made. 


In  speaking  of  Louden  equipment,  Walter  J.  Domes,  Crescent  Hill  Ayrshire  Farm, 
McCoy.  Oregon,  writes: 

"I  have  been  using  Louden  Stalls  and  Stanchions  and  Feed  and  Litter  Carriers  for  several 
years  and  am  more  than  pleased  with  them.      Will  install  two  more  carriers  this  summer. 

"Were  it  not  for  my  Louden  equipment  I  would  not  be  able  to  keep  my  herd  of  100 
registered  Ayrshires  in  the  shape  they  are,  nor  would  I  receive  the  high  score  I  do  by 
the  Dairy  Inspectors. 

"My  two  cow  barns  cost  me  over  $8,000.00  and  have  several  hundred  feet  of  Louden 
track." 


Page  One  hundred  fifty-nine 


Louden  Standard 
Litter  Carrier— Fig.  720 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel 
Track,  Fig.  571.  (See  pages  173  to  183,  for 
Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 

Body  of  box  made  of  20-gauge  galvanized 
sheet  steel,  reinforced  with  angle  iron. 

Ends  of  box  are  made  of  16-gauge  galva- 
nized sheet  steel. 

Length  of  box,  48  inches:  width,  27)^8 
inches;  depth,  22  inches,  outside  measure- 
ments.    Capacity,  10  bushels. 

Box  is  fitted  regularly  to  raise  and  lower 
43^  feet. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels.  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  5 
inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  box  upright,  48 
inches;  box  dumped,  54  inches. 

Length  of  hand  chain,  1 1  feet,  ends  joined 
together. 

Shipping  weight,  185  pounds. 

This  was   the  first   Litter  Carrier 

manufactured    using    the   worm    gear 

hoisting    device.     Seeking    to   overcome    the   objection    of 

ratchet   and    lever   gear,    we   planned    and    perfected    this 

standard  carrier.     It  was  the  pioneer  Litter  Carrier  in  its 

class,     and     is    today    the    most    popular    and    best    selling    Litter    Carrier    in     the    United    States, 

The  Standard  is  built  along  the  same  lines  as  the  Emancipator  except  that  cables  instead  of  chains  are 
used  for  supporting  the  carrier  box.  These  cables  wind  on  drums  which  form 
the  connection  between  the  pin  wheels  at  each  end  of  the  carrier.  The  drums 
will  carry  about  five  feet  of  cable,  which  limits  the  raising  and  lowering  of  the 
carrier  to  about  ^]/2  feet.     (See  detailed  view,  Fig.  722.) 

Using  the  worm  gear,  the  same  lifting  power  is  secured  as  with  the  Emanci- 
pator.    No  ratchets  or  levers  are  used  and  it  will  stand  at  any  point. 

The  material  used  in  the  construction  of  this  carrier  is  the  same  as  that  used 
in  the  Emancipator  Carrier.  The  difference  in  the  two  carriers  being  in  the 
hoisting  gear.  It  is  built  regularly  for  our  Double  Bead  Steel  Track.  Track 
Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

The  same  special  steel  axle  with  roller  bearings  for  the  wheels,  the  same 
strong  swivel  connections  for  joining  the  trucks  to  the  main  frame,  the  same 
connecting  bars  and  the  same  latching  parts  as  used  in  the  Emancipator  Carrier 
are  also  used  in  the  Standard  Carriers.  In  all  of  their  vital  parts  the  two 
carriers  are  alike  in  that  they  have  ample  strength  for  any  work  they  will  ever 
p.     _22  be  called  upon  to  do. 


Fig.  720.      (Merkens). 


Louden  Machinery  Company.  Fairfield,  Iowa.  Murray,  Iowa,  May  8,  1913. 

Dear  Sirs: 

The  Litter  Carrier  I  bought  of  you  last  fall  is  more  than  I  expected.  I  have  it  installed  in  one  of  my  horse  barns 
whicii  holds  fifty  head  of  horses,  and  it  is  the  greatest  labor-saving  piece  of  machinery  I  have  ever  bought. 

One  morning  I  fed  the  fifty  horses  hay  and  grain  and  cleaned  out  the  barn  in  one  hour  and  twenty  minutes  by 
myself.  If  I  had  used  a  wheelbarrow  to  carry  out  the  manure  it  would  have  taken  me  nearly  two  hours  to  clean  out 
the  barn,  and  some  hired  men  have  been  half  a  day  at  the  same  job. 

I  looked  at  various  other  makes  of  carriers  before  I  bought,  but  on  account  of  having  some  of  the  Louden  goods 
on  my  farm  1  was  determined  to  see  the  Louden  Litter  Carrier  before  buying,  and  when  I  saw  your  outfit  at  the  State 
Fair  I  was  very  anxious  to  buy  one  because  I  thought  it  was  far  better  than  any  other  I  had  seen.  I  don't  know  of 
any  place  it  could  be  made  better — it  works  fine. 

I  have  showed  the  Carrier  to  a  great  many  people  and  they  have  always  had  words  of  praise  for  it. 

Yours  truly, 

Lewis  Evans,  Prop.,  Horse  Exchange  Stock  Farm. 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-one 


Pat'd  May  9.  191 


^m^ 


Louden  Quick  Out  Litter 
Carrier — Fig.  882 

Specifications 

Operates  on  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  Track.  (See 
pages  187-190  for  Track  Fittings.)  Body  of  box  is 
made  of  20-gauge  galvanized  sheet  steel;  ends  of  box 
are  16-gauge  sheet  steel  strongly  reinforced. 

Length  of  box,  42  inches:  width,  24  inches:  depth. 
15}2  inches:  capacity,  3  bushels. 

Box  is  fitted  to  raise  and  lower  3J^  feet. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  box  upright,  42  inches: 
box  dumped,  47  inches. 

Length  of  hand  chain  8J^  feet,  ends  joined  together. 
Where  ceilings  are  high,  longer  hand  chains  can  be 
furnished  at  slight  additional  cost. 

Shipping  weight,  125  pounds. 


The  Quick  Out  Carrier  is   equipped   with  f-     ««■>       n   •  t 

an    improved    raising    and    lowering    device.  '^'        "     ^"""^   '• 

The  lifting  power  is  secured  by  a  worm  gear  hoist  on  the  same  principle  used  with  the  Louden  Carriers 
for  solid  steel  track.  The  main  frame  consists  of  two  %.inch  pipe  shafts  held  in  position  by  two 
heavy  malleable  iron  castings.  These  castings  form  heavy,  substantial  sockets  for  receiving  the  swivel 
yokes  which  carry  the  wheels.  This  forms  the  swivel  knee  joint  connection  between  the  trolleys  and 
main  frame  of  the  carrier  (where  the  entire  weight  of  the  load  is  carried)  and  is  one  of  the  important  and 
exclusive  points  of  superiority  found  on  all  Louden  Litter  and  Feed  Carriers. 

The  horizontal  pipes  stand  parallel  with  each  other  and 
about  three  inches  apart.  When  the  carrier  box  is  raised,  the 
bail  of  the  box,  which  is  also  of  pipe,  enters  between  the  two 
horizontal  bars  interlocking  with  them,  forming  a  rigid  frame. 
This  prevents  any  endwise  swinging  or  rocking  motion  and 
permits  the  carrier  to  be  operated  automatically  a  much 
greater  distance  than  other  wire  track  carriers. 

Hoisting  Gear   On  Quick  Out  Carrier 

The  hoist  on  the  Quick  Out  Carrier  is  built  on  the  same 
principle  as  the  hoisting  gear  on  Louden  Carriers  for  solid 
steel  track.  The  worm  gear  gives  ample  lifting  power  for  the 
heaviest  loads.  The  box  is  supported  by  double  chains.  The 
upper  ends  of  the  chains  are  fastened  to  the  two  main  shafts 
and  the  surplus  chain  winds  up  on  these  shafts  as  the  carrier 
is  elevated.  Heavy  loads  can  be  elevated  easily  and  the  double 
Fig.  883.  chains  give  strong  support. 


Special  Features  of  Louden  Wire  Track  Carriers 

The  Quick  Out  Carrier  and  the  Self-Acting  Carrier  (shown  on  next  page)  were  designed  for  use  in 
barns  where  the  work  is  not  so  heavy  and  where  the  arrangement  of  track  is  very  simple  requiring  few 
switches  or  curves.  These  carriers  really  operate  best  where  the  track 
runs  in  a  straight  line.  When  loaded,  a  good  push  will  send  the  carriers 
out  into  the  yard  60  to  80  feet,  where  they  will  empty  themselves  and 
return  automatically  to  the  barn.  The  carriers  cannot  be  operated  auto- 
matically around  curves  or  over  switches.  Where  curves  and  switches 
are  necessary  the  carrier  must  always  be  followed  until  the  last  curve  or 
switch  is  passed  and  from  that  point  it  can  be  sent  out  to  the  end  of  the 
track  and  will  automatically  return. 

SWIVEL  TRUCKS.     Both  the  Quick  Out  and  Self-Acting  Carriers 
are  fitted  with  swivel  trucks.     This  truck  frame  or  supporting  frame  for 

{Continued  on  page  163) 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-two 


Fig.  753.     (Hurl). 
Spring  End  Stop. 


■i.u;iJfeNm.'t^i5 


Louden  Self-Acting 
Carrier — Fig.  721 

Specifications 

Operates  on  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  Track.  (See  pages  187-190 
for  Track  Fittings.) 

Body  of  box  is  made  of  20-gauge  sheet  steel;  ends  of  16-gauge 
sheet  steel  strongly  reinforced. 

Length  of  box,  42  inches;  width,  24  inches;  depth,  153  2  inches, 
outside  measurements.     Capacity,  5  bushels. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  box  upright,  52  inches;  box  dumped, 
57  inches. 

Shipping  weight,  93  pounds. 

The  Self-Acting  Carrier  is  like  the  Quick  Out  Carrier 
except  it  is  not  fitted  with  a  hoisting  gear.  Where  it 
is  not  necessary  to  raise  and  lower  the  load  this  is  the 
best  litter  carrier  ever  made  to  run  on  wire  track.  It 
will  run  the  easiest  and  farthest,  trip  the  most  positive  at 
any  point  along  the  track,  and  return  to  the  barn  without 
getting  off  the  track. 

Where  the  manure  shed  can  be  placed  immediately 
opposite  the  stable  door  so  the  track  may  be  run  straight 
from  the  barn  to  the  manure  shed,  or  if  the  practice  is 
followed  of  piling  the  manure  out  in  the  yard,  the  Self- 
Acting  Carrier  is  handy  and  quick  and  can  be  installed 
at   very    small    expense. 

^  In  handling  the  work  you  simply  shovel  the  litter  and  manure  into  the  carrier  box  and  when  the 
box  is  full  get  behind  the  carrier  and  give  it  a  good  strong  push  out  into  the  yard.  The  trip  which 
fastens  to  the  track  at  point  of  unloading  is  adjustable  and  can  be  moved  from  place  to  place.  When 
the  loaded  carrier  reaches  the  trip  the  latch  on  the  carrier  box  is  released  and  the  box  turns  over  spilling 
its  load.  At  the  end  of  the  track  is  the  Spring  End  Stop.  This  prevents  the  carrier  from  running 
into  the  post  or  building  at  the  end  of  the  track  and  also  gives  the  carrier  a  start  on  its  return  trip 
to  the  barn. 

The  outer  end  of  the  track  should  be  elevated  about  12  to  18  inches  above  the  inside  end  —  the  carrier 
comes  back  quickly  and  smoothly.  While  the  carrier  is  making  the  trip  out  to  the  shed  or  yard,  the 
man  in  the  barn  is  busy  getting  ready  for  another  load.     It  makes  quick,  easy  and  satisfactory  work. 

THE  FRAME.  The  frame  of  the  carrier  is  solidly  constructed  of  heavy  inch  pipe,  held  together  at 
the  ends  by  a  double  set  of  malleable  iron  corner  clamps.  These  clamps  form  the  swivel  socket  into 
which  fit  the  lower  end  of  the  yokes  carrying  the  wheels.  This  form.s  the  strong,  easy  working  swivel 
knee  joint  between  the  carrier  trucks  and  the  main  frame  where  the  weight  of  the  load  hangs,  and  which 
is  found  on  all  Louden  Carriers. 


Fig.  721.      (Hymn). 
Patented  Oct.  6,  1908. 


{Continued  from,  page  162) 

the  carrier  wheel  is  of  heavy  malleable  iron.  At  the  upper  end  of  this  casting  is  fitted  the  steel  axle  on 
which  the  wheels  turn.  At  the  lower  end  the  truck  is  joined  on  to  the  main  frame  of  the  carrier  by  means 
of  a  swivel  joint — one  of  the  strong  features  in  all  Louden  Carriers.  On  the  upper  side  of  the  truck  there 
is  a  small  keeper  which  prevents  the  wheels  from  getting  off  the  track.  These  special  swivel  trucks  allow 
the  carriers  to  be  operated  around  very  short  curves  and  over  switches. 

THE  WHEELS.  The  wheels  are  made  of  best  quality  of  gray  iron. 
They  are  6  inches  in  diameter.  The  wheels  have  deep  wide  grooves, 
turned  perfectly  true,  and  these  are  supplemented  by  a  small  groove  in 
the  middle  to  fit  the  wire.  The  small  groove  holds  the  wheels  in  line  and 
prevents  the  wabbling  motion  which  so  greatly  retards  speed,  and  which 
is  a  serious  objection  in  other  makes  of  wire  track  litter  carriers.  The 
spokes  in  the  wheel  are  heavy,  and  the  wheels  turn  on  roller  bearings. 

ROLLER  BEARINGS. 


The  wheels  are  fitted  with  our  special  case 


Fig.  19. 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-three 


LP.   IOWA"^j^;g^ 


hardened  steel  roller  bearings.  These  bearings  are  of  the  finest  steel,  turned  perfectly  true.  Fifteen 
of  them  in  each  wheel  revolve  around  a  tempered  steel  axle.  On  each  end  of  the  axle  (see  Fig.  19,  page  163) 
there  is  a  revolving  washer  which  prevents  the  friction  that  would  be  produced  if  the  ends  of  the  rollers  were 
allowed  to  rub  against  the  castings.  This  is  one  more  important  Louden  improvement  covered  by  our 
patents.  Our  wire  track  carriers  can  be  operated  a  greater  distance  with  less  exertion  than  any  other 
light  carrier  made. 

THE  BOX.  The  box  for  both  the  Quick  Out  and  Self-Acting  Carrier  is  made  42  inches  long. 
It  is  22  inches  wide  and  I  5,' 2  inches  deep.  The  ends,  sides  and  bottom  of  the  box  are  made  of  high-grade 
galvanized  iron,   reinforced  by  strong  angle  iron  at  the  upper  edges. 

SPRING  END  STOP.  An  important  improvement  with  our  Wire  Track  Litter  Carrier  is  the  patent 
Spring  End  Stop.  (See  Fig.  753,  page  162.)  This  end  stop  not  only  prevents  the  wheels  from  jumping  the 
track  no  matter  how  hard  the  carrier  may  be  running,  but  it  also  starts  the  carrier  back  on  its  return  trip. 

THE  TRIP.  The  trip  for  both  the  Quick  Out  and  Self-Acting  Litter  Carrier  is  adjustable.  The 
trip  can  be  placed  on  the  track  at  any  point,  and  can  be  moved  from  place  to  place  on  the  track  without 
removing  any  bolts.  In  fact  the  position  of  the  trip  may  be  shifted  from  the  ground  with  a  fork  or  shovel 
handle. 

The  trip  for  the  carriers  is  so  arranged  that  when  carriers  reach  the  trip  the  latch  on  the  end  of  the 
box  is  released,  allowing  the  box  to  turn  over  and  empty  its  load.  Another  good  feature  of  our  tripping 
device  on  the  wire  track  carriers  is  the  fact  that  when  tripped  they  stay  tripped.  After  striking  the  trip 
on  the  track  the  carrier  box  will  turn  over  and  can  not  be  latched  in  upright  position  until  the  latch  is 
properly  set.  The  setting  of  the  latch  is  done  without  an  instant's  delay  when  the  carrier  comes  back 
to  the  barn. 


Goes — and  Conies  Back 

Rochelle 

.  lU. 

May  5,  1913.                 1 

Louden  Machin 

ery  Company, 

Fairfield. 

Iowa. 

Gentlemen; 

In  regard  to  my  Litter  Carrier,  whic 

h  has  been 

m 

daily  use  for   1 3  nionths  now,  I  can 

say  it   has 

been  a  success 

from  the  start. 

It  has  never  failed 

to 

dump  when 

reaching  trip,  nor  has  it 

ever  failed 

to 

come    back 

to    door    of    b 

irn    after 

dumping. 

A 

great  machine. 

M.  Su 

Ilivan. 

Page  One  hundred  sixty-four 


bjm  iq  <t«^  II  >r^riuTf5Tfii!i 


Combination  Steel  and  Rod  Track  for  Quick-Out 
and  Self -Acting  Carriers 


Fig,  1287— Using  the  Louden  Self-Acting  Carrier  on  the 
Louden  Combination  Steel  and  Rod  Track 


Specifications 
Rigid  Track 

Made  of  14  gauge  steel,  bent 
"C  '  shaped  to  give  it  great 
strength  and  rigidity.  Depth,  I  3<j; 
inches;  width,  ^2  inch.  Weight 
per  foot,  1  pound.  Hangers  of 
malleable   iron    and    strap   steel. 

Rod  Track 

Made  of  0000  basic  steel  wire. 
Diameter  i\i2  inches;  weight  per 
foot,  6i<  ounces.  The  rod  track 
is  anchored  to  a  post  in  the  yard 
by  means  of  a  tension  bolt  in  the 
same  manner  as  for  our  regular 
rod   track  carriers. 

Advantages  of 
Combination  Track 

Our  combination  steel  and  rod 
track  arrangement  has  many  of 
the  advantages  of  both  the  steel 
and  the  rod  track  outfits,  and 
is  ideal  for  small  barns  where 
a  carrier  of  not  more  than  five 
bushels  capacity  is   needed. 


Fig.  1288 

Hanger  for 

Combination 

Track 


T 


,  ••111  ,  ^°^     track     is    not    satisfac- 

tory mside  the  barn  where  curves  and  switches  are  used.  The  steel  track  used  in  our 
combmation  track  arrangement  is  more  substantial  and  rigid,  and  does  not  subject 
the  barn  timbers  to  so  great  a    strain  as  does  the  rod  track. 

With  the  advantages  of  the  steel  track  in  the  barn  this  arrangement 
combmes   the  advantages  of   the  rod   track  in    the  yard. 

It  isn't  necessary  to  follow  the  loaded  carrier  into  the  yard.  A  strong, 
steady  shove  will  send  it  out  from  fifty  to  one  hundred  feet,  where  it 
dumps  automatically  at  any  desired  point  and  returns  to  the  barn  by 
gravity.  This  feature  saves  time,  and  is  especially  appreciated  in  bad 
weather,   or  when   the  yard  is  muddy. 

The  Louden  combination  track  arrangement  does  not  require  a  special 
carrier  or  special  track  wheels.  Either  the  Quick-Out  Carrier,  page  162 
or  the  Self-Acting  Carrier,  page  163,  may  be  used.  If  you  already  have 
Fig.  1293  °"^  °^  ^^^^^  carriers  installed  in  your  barn  with  complete  rod  track 
Cross  Sec-  arrangement,  and  wish  to  substitute  the  combination  track,  you  may 
Exact  Size      <^°  ^o  without  making  any  change  in   the  carrier. 

Construction  and  Installation  of  Track 

The  rigid  track  is  made  of  14  gauge  steel,  bent  in  the  shape  of  a  letter  "C."  This  form  gives  it 
ample  strength  and  rigidity  for  any  load  that  can  be  placed  in  either  of  the  carriers  that  operate 
on  it.     ^lg.    izyi  shows  a  cross  section  of  the  track,  exact    size. 


I 


Fig.  1289 
Cross  Section  of 

Combination 
Track  and  Hanger 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-five 


Combination  Steel  and  Rod   Track— Continued 


Fig.  1296 
Three-Way  Switch  for  Combination  Track 


Fig  1297 
Two-Way  Switch  for  Combination  Track 


The  track  hanger  consists  of  two  parts,  connected  by  a  short  bolt,  between  which  there  is  an 
adjustment  of  1 ,' 2  inches  to  take  care  of  any  unevenness  in  the  joists  to  which  the  track  is  hung. 
This  adjustment  is  secured  by  means  of  a  slot  (Fig.  1289)  in  which  the  connecting  bolt  may  be  set 
at  any  point  desired.  The  hanger  provides  eight  inches  clearance  between  track  and  joists  when  the 
adjustment  is  at    center. 

The  lower  part  of  the  hanger  fits  inside  the  track,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1289.  The  support  is 
immediately  beneath  the  wheels  of  the  carrier;  no  chance  for  the  track  to  buckle  with  a  heavy  load. 
All  the  hangers  required  for  each  section  of  track  are  slid  into  the  track  from  the  end  before  it  is 
hung.     The  hangers  are  small  enough  to  work  loosely  inside  the    track,  and   are   easily  adjusted. 

A  wedge- 
shaped  key 
is    furnished  ^     V%- 


hha 


Fig.  1290 
Brace  for  Combination  Steel  and  Rod  Track 


rattling    and    allows    no 


shown    in    Fig.     1291.     This    prevents 
easily  removed  at  any  time. 

The  upper  part  of  the  hanger  is  made  of  ,'4x1  >^  inch  steel, 
the  track)  is  made  of  malleable  iion.  The  hanger  is  secured  to 
or    screws. 

The  rod  track  is  connected 
to  the  rigid  track  just  inside 
the  door  opening  by  means  of 
a  malleable  clamp,  7^2  inches 
long,  and  is  secured  by 
bolts,  as  shown  in  Fig.  1292. 


roreac 
ger.  When 
the  hanger 
is  in  place 
the  key  is 
dropped  into 
the  track 
and  driven 
under  it,  as 
end    play  in 


Fig.  1291 

Showing  How  Hanger  is 

Wedged 

the   track.     The  keys   are 


The  lower   part   (which   fits  inside 
the    joist    by   means    of    four  nails 


Fig.  1292- 


Side  Removed  To  Show  How  Steel  and  Rod  Tracks  Are  Joined. 
No  Chance  To  Pull  Apart 

d   track.     The   track   is  smooth  at   the   point  of   transfer 


Twoof  these  bolts  pass  through 

the  brace  shown  in  Fig.   1  290, 

bringing  all  of  the  strain  from 

the  wire  track  on  the  brace,  and  not  on  the  rig 

and  does   not  jostle  the  carrier  as  it  passes  from   the 

The    brace    (Fig.    1290),   is  64  inches  long,   and    provic__  -  ,    ■     ,     r   j     l  l    .k 

for  a   rod   track.      The  heavy  casting   to  which  it  is  connected  at   the  lower  end   is   bolted   through   the 
door  jamb,   as  illustrated.      It  allows  8  inches  clearance  between   the  jamb  and   the   track. 

The  rod  track  is  anchored  to  a  post  in  the  yard  as  described  on  page   188. 


th€ 


Steel  to  the  rod  track, 
ides    the    most    secure    anchorage    ever 


levisec 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-six 


Louden  Double  End 
Feed  Carrier — Fig.  845 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel 
Track,  Fig.  571.  (See  pages  175  to  183 
for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 

Box  is  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with 
strap  iron. 

Length  of  box,  76  inches;  width,  29 
inches;  depth,  20  inches,  outside  meas- 
urements. Capacity,  14  bushels.  Box 
is  fitted  regularly  to  raise  and  lower  7  feet: 
may  be  fitted  to  raise  and  lower  as  much 
as  20  feet  at  slight  additional  cost. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels, 
5  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  56  inches. 

Length  of  hand  chain,  1  1  feet,  ends 
joined  together.  Where  ceilings  are  high, 
longer  chains  can  be  furnished  at  slight 
additional  cost. 

Shipping  weight,  230  pounds. 


Fig.  845.     (Turbin). 


Feed  Carriers 

There  are  a  great  many  advantages  in  having  a  Feed  Carrier.  A  carrier  can  be  run  under  the 
silo  chute  or  spout  from  grain  bins,  and  enough  feed  loaded  into  the  carrier  to  feed  20  or  more  cows  or 
other  stock.  With  a  feed  carrier  operating  on  an  overhead  tracit  you  always  have  clear  right  of  way,  with 
no  obstructions  to  hinder  or  take  time  in  removing.  You  can  run  the  carrier  along  the  feed  alley  in 
your  barn,  or  out  over  the  feed  bunks  in  the  yard,  distribute  the  feed  and  get  through  with  that  part  of 
the  work  in  less  than  half  the  time  it  would  take  you  otherwise.  If  you  are  weighing  your  feed,  attach 
your  scales  to  the  carrier  frame  and  weigh  out  the  feed  as  you  go  along,  if  you  are  feeding  a  balanced 
ration,  partitions  can  be  placed  in  the  carrier  at  small  extra  cost,  so  two  or  more  kinds  of  feed  can  be 
handled  at  the  same  time. 

You  will  often  find  it  convenient  to  have  your  feed  track  connected  by  means  of  switches  with  the 
track  for  the  litter  carrier.  By  doing  this  you  can  get  your  feed  carrier  to  all  parts  of  the  stable,  through 
narrow  alleys,  and  where  it  would  not  be  possible  to  operate  a  truck  running  on  the  floor.  The  tracks 
for  Louden  Feed  Carrier  and  Litter  Carrier  are  the  same,  and  can  be  connected  up  to  secure  any  sort  of  track 
arrangement  your  building  may  call  for. 

Louden  Double  End  Feed  Carrier 

The  Louden  Double  End  Feed  Carrier  is  a  large  carrier,  built  extra  strong  for  heavy  work.  Each 
end  of  the  carrier  has  a  sloping  shovel  board,  so  two  men  can  work  at  it  handy.  The  carrier  is  furnished 
regular  with  the  Louden  Emancipator  Worm  Gear  Hoisting  Device.  The  carrier  can  be  furnished  and 
used,  however,  with  any  type  of  Louden  Hoisting  Gear  and  Trolley.  The  Emancipator  Worm  Gear 
Hoisting  [)evice  is  the  same  as  that  used  with  the  Louden  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier,  and  is  the  most 
powerful  lifting  device  used  with  any  carrier.  One  man  can  easily  raise  and  lower  600  or  800  pounds. 
The  track  wheels  being  large  and  roller  bearing,  the  loaded  carrier  can  be  pushed  along  the  track  with 
scarcely  an  effort.  There  are  no  brakes  or  ratchets  to  bother  with,  and  absolutely  no  danger  of  the 
carrier  dropping  down  and  smashing. 

The  Hoisting  Device 

The  Worm  Gear  Hoisting  Device,  used  with  all  Louden  Carriers,  is  a  marvel  of  efficiency  and 
simplicity.  The  worm  castings  are  riveted  solid  to  the  main  shaft.  These  engage  the  pins  or  lugs  on 
the  special  sprocket  or  pin-wheel,  causing  it  to  revolve.  This  gives  a  lifting  power  at  the  ratio  of  40 
to  ].     One  pound  pull  on  the  hand  chain  will  lift  40  pounds  in  the  carrier  box.      (See  Fig.881,  page  158.) 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-seven 


Sprocket  Wheel  and  Chain 

The  carrier  box  is  supported  by  chains.  These  chains  operate  over  the  special 
sprocket  wheels,  the  surplus  winding  up  on  the  storage  drum.  The  carrier  is 
fitted  regular  with  chains  7  feet  long.  On  special  orders  the  carriers  can  be  fitted 
with  chains  permitting  the  box  to  be  raised  and  lowered  any  distance  up  to 
20  feet.  The  chains  are  a  special  electric  weld.  Each  link  is  true,  they  fit  the 
sprocket  perfectly,  and  there  is  no  chance  for  the  chain  to  slip  or  for  anything 
to  give  way. 

Trucks  and  Wheels 

The  wheels  are  4  inches  in  diameter  at  the  tread,  and  are  reinforced  and 
strengthened  by  heavy  webs.  The  castings  supporting  the  wheel  are  extra 
strong,  and  are  attached  to  the  main  frame  by  heavy  knee  joint  swivels.  The 
bearing  surface  of  this  heavy  swiveled  joint  is  21  inches  in  diameter.  It  is  the 
strongest  connection  between  the  main  frame  and  truck  castings  used  on  any 
carrier.  The  large  track  wheels  cause  the  loaded  carrier  to  travel  along  the  track 
easily  and  smoothly.  The  trucks  and  wheels  on  the  Double  End  Feed  Carrier 
are  fitted  for  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track. 


The  Feed  Box 

The  feed  box  is  made  with  regular  box  straps,  and  the  bottom  is  tongued 
and  grooved  like  a  wagon  box.  The  corners  are  bound  with  iron  and  the  upper 
edges  have  regular  wagon  box  straps.  They  are  well  constructed  throughout,  and 
are  warranted  superior  to  anything  of  the  kind  on  the  market.  The  box  is 
76  inches  long,  20  inches  deep,  29  inches  wide,  and  will  hold  15  to  18  bushels 
of  feed  or  grain. 

Standard  Feed  Carrier 
Fig.  763 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track.  Fig. 
371.  (Seepages  I  75  to  183  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 

Box  is  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with  strap  iron. 

Length  of  box.  67  inches:  width,  29  inches;  depth, 
20  inches,  outside  measurements.  Capacity,  12 
bushels- 
Box  is  fitted  to  raise  and  lower  4J^  feet. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  5  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  53  inches. 

Length  of  Hand  Chain.  1  I  feet,  ends  joined  together. 
Shipping  weight.  210  pounds. 


The  Standard  Feed  Carrier  is  the  same  as 
the  Double  End  Carrier  except  the  box  is  built 
with  shovel  board  in  one  end  only,  and  m  the 
illustration  the  carrier  is  shown  with  a  Stand- 
ard Hoisting  gear  the  same  as  with  the  Standard 
Litter  Carrier  (Fig.  720,  page  161).  The  carrier 
can  be  furnished  with  any  style  of  hoisting 
gear,  or  for  any  style  of  Louden  Track.  The 
carrier  is  built  for  long  service.  The  box  is  made  of  clear,  straight  grain,  select  lumber  with  heavy,  strong 
reinforcements.  The  bails  which  support  the  box  are  made  of  Axl  J  i-inch  steel  straps.  In  addition  to 
offering  ample  strength  for  carrying  heavy  loads,  these  bails  provide  a  stiff  support  to  hold  the  sides  of 
the  box  always  in  shape.  i         i     • 

The  carrier  illustrated  is  one  of  our  best  sellers  and  it  cannot  be  recommended  too  strongly.      It  is 
neat,  serviceable,  and  no  better  single  end  carrier  has  ever  been  offered. 


Construction  of  Track 
Wheels 

Each  wheel  used  on  our 
Steel  Track  Feed  Carriers 
is  fitted  with  1  7  tempered 
steel  roller  bearings.  Size 
of  bearings  for  steel  track 
Carriers,  i%xl  inch.  These 
revolve  around  a  J^-inch 
cold  rolled  steel  axle  or 
shaft.  The  ends  of  the 
steel  roller  bearings  work 
against  our  special  pat- 
ented revolvable  washer. 
This  reduces  friction  to  a 
minimum.  Also  eliminates 
excessive  wear,  prevents 
binding  or  grinding  to- 
gether of  the  rollers.  The 
Louden  Trolleys  with 
roller  bearings  travel 
easily  and  outlast  any 
other  trolleys  of  this  kind 
that  are  made. 


Fig.  763.     (Halve). 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-eight 


■■.li>.'iJfet^itL'M:7 


FAI RFl E L D.   IOWA 


Single  End  Feed   Carrier  with 
Adjustable  Chain — Fig.  886 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track, 
Fig.  571.  (See  pages  175  to  183  for  Track  and  Track 
Fittings.) 

Box  is  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with  strap  iron. 

Length  of  box,  67  inches;  width.  29  inches;  depth, 
20  inches,  outside  measurements.     Capacity,   12  bushels. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessarv  for  Track  Wheels,  5  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  52  inches. 

Shipping  weight,  1 70  pounds. 

Fig.  886  is  the  same  as  the  Standard  Feed 
Carrier,  except  that  it  is  fitted  with  an  adjustable, 
rigid  frame,  instead  of  the  raising  and  lowering 
device,  as  in  some  buildings  the  feed  and  ensilage 
is  located  so  it  can  be  reached  handily  without 
raising  and  lowering  the  feed  carrier.  The  box 
is  supported  by  chains  which  permit  adjustment 
for  the  high  and  low  ceilings.  The  rigid  frame 
carrier  operates  around  curves  and  switches  the 
same  as  the  regular  carrier  and  is  cheaper. 


Fig.  887.     (Hoard). 


Fig.  886.     (Hedge). 

Wire  Track  Feed  Carrier — Fig.  887 

Specifications 

Operates  on   0000   Basic  Steel   Wire   Track.      (See  pages 
87-190  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 

Box  is  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with  strap  iron. 

Length   of    box,    67    inches;    width,     29    inches;    depth, 

inches,  outside  measurements.     Capacity,  12  bushels. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  54  inches. 

Shipping  weight,  1 72  pounds. 

Fig.  887  is  the  same  as  Fig.  886  except  that  it 
runs  on  wire  track.  It  will  run  around  our  special 
curves  and  over  our  special  switches  for  wire  track 
and  can  be  installed  for  practical  work  under  any 
condition  where  a  wire  track  carrier  can  be  used  at 
all.  We  can  furnish  special  Spring  End  Stops  with 
latches  to  catch  and  hold  the  carrier  at  each  end, 
and  the  carrier  can  be  operated  automatically 
reasonable  distances  between  the  silo  and  the  stable 
or  the  stable  and  the  feed  rooms.  This  carrier 
has  the  chain  supports  for  the  box,  permitting 
adjustment  for  high  and  low  tracks. 


Louden  Machinery  Company, 

Fairfield,  Iowa. 
Dear  Sirs: 

I  am  more  than  pleased  with  the  Feed  Carrier  I  bought  of  you.     It  does  all  expected  of  it  sc 
carry  mill  feed  and  silage  for  a  dairy  of  seventy  cows,  and  it  has  never  caused  a  minute's  trouble, 
labor  saver  in  a  dairy. 

Yours  truly, 

Geo.  H.  Keller, 


far.     We  use  it  to 
I  consider  it  a  great 


St.  Charles,  111. 


Page  One  hundred  sixty-nine 


Louden   Improved    Side 

Delivery  Feed  Carrier — 

Fig.  1042 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track, 
Fig.  571.  (Page  175).  On  special  orders  can  be  fitted 
with  any  style  of  Louden  Hoisting  Gear. 

Box  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with  strap  iron. 

Length  of  box,  60  inches;  width,  31  ,'4  inches; 
depth,  21  inches,  outside  measurements.  Capacity, 
1 5  bushels. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels.  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  5 

Total  clearance  necessary,  box  upright, 
box  dumped,  56  inches. 

Shipping  weight,  2 1 0  pounds. 


inches. 
53  inches; 


FEED 


IoudeN/ 


Patented 
Sept.  10,  1907, 

and 
Dec.  15.  1908. 


A  side  delivery  Feed  Carrier  is,  in  a  number 
of  respects,  more  convenient  than  shoveling 
the  feed  out  of  the  end  of  the  feed  box.  Where 
a  large  number  of  stock  is  to  be  fed,  and  it  is 
practical  to  run  the  track  close  enough  to  the 

troughs    or  manger  to   dump   directly    from  "  F»g-  1042.     (Side) 

carrier,  the  Louden  Improved  Side  Delivery  Carrier  will  prove  a  great  time  and  labor  saver.  This 
carrier  is  especially  recommended  for  out  door  feeding  where  it  is  comparatively  easy  to  arrange  the 
troughs  or  bunks  to  accommodate  a  simple  track  arrangement. 

The  gearing  is  very  simple  and  well  arranged  and  a  boy  can  tip  the  box  when  it  is  full  of  grain  or  silage, 
and  do  it  as  safely  and  satisfactorily  as  a  man  One  turn  of  the  crank  will  tip  the  box  one  third  way  over 
as  shown  in  Figure  1044,  allowing  a  part  of  the  feed  to  empty,  and  will  stay  there  till  crank  is  given  another 
turn,  throwing  the  box  half  over.  Three  turns  and  the  box  is  bottom  side  up,  and  three  more  turns  will 
revolve  it  all  the  way  around.  The  crank  is  pivoted  on  the  end  of  the  axle  which  carries  a  small  gear  that 
meshes  in  the  large  gear  secured  to  the  end  of  the  box,  and  is  provided  with  a  spur  which  springs  into  the 
pockets  in  the  face  of  the  castings  on  which  it  is  mounted,  holding  the  feed  box  in  any  desired  position. 

To  rotate  the  box  the  handle  of  the  crank  is 
drawn  out  to  release  the  spur  from  the  pocket. 
When  the  operator  lets  go  of  the  handle  a 
spring  throws  it  in  as  shown  in  the  cuts,  and 
forces  the  spur  into  the  nearest  pocket. 

Like  all  products  bearing  the  name  of 
Louden,  the  Improved  Side  Delivery  Feed 
Carrier  is  the  result  of  years  of  study.  Each 
piece  of  wood  and  each  piece  of  metal  that 
goes  into  its  construction  is  the 
the    purpose    that  1 

money  can  buy. 
Louden  quality  is 
evident  through- 
out. If  you  feed  a 
considerable  num- 
ber of  stock,  this 
carrier  will  pay  for 
itself  in  a  short  time 
by  labor  and  feed 
saved. 


Improved    Side    Delivery     Carrier, 
Adjustable  Chain,  Emancipator  Truck. 


Fig.  1044. 

Patented  October  3,  1916 


Fig.   1044-A. 


Page  One  hundred  seventy 


rrrnmin 


TheLOUPEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden  Feed  Truck — Fig.  973 

Specifications 

Box  made  of  wood,  reinforced  with  strap  iron. 

20-bushel    size:      Length    of    Box,    86    inches;    width.    28 
inches:  depth,  22  inches. 

25-bushel    size:      Length    of    Box,    86   inches;    width.    28 
inches;    depth,   26  inches. 


The  Louden  Feed  Truck,  Fig.  973,  is  furnished 

regularly    in     two     sizes,    having    a     capacity    of 

twenty  and  twenty-five  bushels,  respectively.     This 

is  a  thoroughly  well  built  piece 

of  equipment,  and  is  designed  ,,.      ._.       ,„ 

•i-L   ,.      J  L  F'g-  973.     (Hove), 

to  withstand  rough  usage. 

The  swiveled  small  wheels  at  either  end  and  the  large  wheels  in  the 
center  make  the  Louden  Truck  easy  to  handle.  It  may  be  moved 
about  with  little  effort,  even  with  a  heavy  load,  and  is  so  balanced 
that  it  can  be  turned  within  its  own  length.  The  sloping  ends  of  the 
box  make  shoveling  the  feed  out  easy. 

The  body  of  the  truck  is  removable,  see  Fig.  1065,  and  four  stakes  are 
supplied  with  each,  making  a  very  handy  piece  of  equipment. 
Fitted  with   the  stakes,  it  is  suitable  for  handling  sacked  grain,  ground 
feed,  etc. 

Louden  Harness  Carriers 

Fig.  1276— 12-hook  Carrier 

Specifications 

Length  of  Carrier,  7  feet. 

Total  clearance  necessary  (without  harness),  38  inches. 

Length  of  hooks  (from  tip  to  tip),  24  inches. 

Track  wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Weight,  63  pounds.  » 

Fig.  1048 — 4-hook  Carrier 

Total  clearance  necessary  (without  harness),  26  inches. 
Length  of  hooks  (from  tip  to  tip),  24  inches. 
Track  wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Weight,  16  pounds. 

Figures   1276  and   1048  illustrate  two  inexpensive  harness   carriers.     They  operate  on  roller  bearing 
trolleys  like  those  used  in  our  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier.     The  frame  and  hooks  are  of  tubular  steel. 

It  is  desirable  in  every  barn  to  have  a  harness  room  separated  from  the  rest  of  the  barn  by  solid  parti- 
tions. The  Louden  Harness  Carrier  offers  a  convenient  means  of  carrying  the  harness  from  the  horse 
stalls  to  the  harness  room.  The  trolleys  will  operate  on  the  same  track  as  the  litter  carrier  or  feed  carrier. 
Usually  a  short  switch  from  the  main  line  of  the  litter  carrier  track  into  the  harness  room 
is  all  the  extra  track  needed  in  order  to  install  the  harness  carrier 

These  carriers  will  be  found  handy  and  convenient  in  livery  barns  and  in  other 
stables  where  a  number  of  horses  are  kept.  In  farm  barns  it  has  always  been 
the  custom  to  hang  the  harness  on  pegs  or  holders  immediately  back  of  the  horses. 
The  odors  and  ammonia  fumes  in  stables  are  one  of  the  greatest 
enemies  of  iron  and  leather.  They  attack  the  iron,  causing  it  tocor- 
'rode  badly  and  also  cause  the  leather  to  rot.  If  the  practice  was 
followed  of  carrying  the  harness  into  a  separate  room  closed  entirely 
by  means  of  tight  partitions,  from  the  stables  where  the  horses  stand, 
it  would  stop  one  of  the  big  leaks  on  a  farm.  There  could  be  no  easier 
or  handier  way  of  carrying  the  harness  from  the  room  than  on  a 
^Louden  Harness  Carrier,  and  the  expense  of  installing  an  outfit  of 
this  kind  is  so  little  that  it  amounts  to  practically  nothing,  in  com- 
parison with  the  saving  effected. 


Fig.  1049. 


Page  One  hundred  seventy-one 


FmtffmmiTTTiTrrTnwfrf 


Louden  Merchandise  Carrier — Fig.  888 


Fig  888. 
(Gotch). 

•^^^ 
Specifications 

Operates  on  L  ouden  Double  Bead 
Steel  Track.  Fig.  571.  (See 
pages  175  to  183  for  Track 
and  Track  Fittings.) 

Length  of  Carrier,  1  5  inches 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  wheels,  4  inches. 

Clearance  required  above  track, 
5  inches. 

Clearance  from  track  to  bottom 
of  hook,  10  inches. 

Shipping  weight.  22  pounds. 

Carrying    capacity.    2000    pounds. 

The  Hoist  and  Barrel  Grabs  are 
not  a  part  of  the  Merchandise 
Carrier,  but  are  sold  separately. 


Fig.  888  is  our  new  Merchandise  Carrier.  This  car- 
rier is  suitable  for  use  in  warehouses,  storerooms  and  fac- 
tories, for  moving  heavy  packages,  such  as  boxes,  barrels, 
machinery,  or  other  heavy  merchandise.  The  carrier  is 
fitted  with  large  track  wheels,  and  heavy  truck  castings 
which  make  it  easy  to  operate  on  the  track  while  the  strong 
swivel  joints  insure  ample  strength.  It  is  built  for  our 
Double  Bead  Steel  Track  only. 

Fig.  889  shows  our  Merchandise   Carrier   supporting  a 
load.     The  barrel  is  lifted  and  held  suspended  at  any  height 
our    Perfect     Hoists. 


with  one  of 
The  hoist  can  be  furnished  in  differ- 
ent sizes  with  capacity  from  400 
to  3000  pounds.  Either  screw  eyes 
or  brackets  may  be  used  for  support- 
ing the  track. 

Specifications 

Perfect  Hoist 

Two  sheaves  above  and  below. 

Diameter  of  sheaves,  4  inches. 

Size   of    rope   which    may  be  used,   3  2  inch 

to  ?  8  inch. 
Capacity,  1500  pounds. 
One  man  can  lift  500  pounds. 
Weight   (without  rope),   II  1-2  pounds. 


Note:  The  Per- 
fect Hoist  is  made 
in  8  styles,  having 
from  400  to  3000 
pounds  capacity. 


Length,  21  inches. 
Weight,  63/|  pounds 


Fig.  890. 


Louden  Double  Truck  Merchandise 
Carrier — Fig.  890 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track,  Fig.  571.      (See  pages   175  to 
83  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 

Length  of  Carrier.  28  inches. 
Diameter  of  wheels,  4  inches. 
Track  wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Clearance  required  above  track,  5  inches. 
Clearance  from  track  to  bottom  of  hook,  15  inches 
Shipping  weight.  55^2  pounds. 
Carrying  capacity,  4000  pounds. 

Hoist    and    Chains   are    not    a    part    of    carrier,    but   are    sold 
separately. 


Fig.  890  is  our  Double  Truck  Merchandise  Car- 
rier. This  is  really  two  of  the  regular  carriers  joined 
together  by  a  strong  connecting  bar.  It  is  adapted 
for  use  in  marble  factories,  stone  quarries,  heavy 
machinery  factories,  nursery  warerooms.  The  trucks 
are  swiveled,  and  the  carrier  can  be  operated  around 
short  curves  and  over  switches  and  run  to  any  part  of 
building. 


Page  One  hundred  seventy-two 


The  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Platform  Milk  Can  Carrier— Fig.  802 


Fig.    571.      (See    pages 


Fig.  802.       (Hank). 


Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead    Steel    Track, 

175  to  183  for  Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 
Platform  made  of  wood,  bound  with  angle  iron. 
Length  of  platform.  56  inches;  width,  14  inches. 
Capacity,  four  railroad  milk  cans. 
Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels.  4  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  5  inches. 
Total  clearance  necessary.  66  inches. 
Shipping  weight,  84  pounds. 

Fig.  802  is  our  Platform  Milk  Can  Carrier  for  use  on  our 
solid  steel  track  of  the  Double  Bead  pattern.  The  carrier 
consists  of  a  wooden  platform  braced  across  the  bottom  and 
reinforced  around  the  edges  with  angle  iron.  The  carrier  is  suspended  from  swivel  trucks  the  same  as 
are  used  with  our  regular  litter  carriers  and  feed  carriers  by  means  of  a  heavy  steel  frame  or  bail. 
This  carrier  is  built  regularly  to  hold  four  ordinary  railroad  milk  cans,  but  can  be  built  in  special  sizes. 

Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier— Fig.  1045 

Specifications 

Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track,  Fig.  571.      (Page  175.) 

Capacity,  three  railroad  milk  cans. 

Fitted    regularly    to    raise    and    lower  7  feet;    may   be  fitted   to  raise  and  lower  greater 

distance  at  slight  additional  cost. 
Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  4  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  5  inches. 
Total  clearance  necessary,  loaded,  54  inches. 
Length  of  Hand  Chain.    I  1    feet,  ends  joined  together.      Where  ceilings  are  high,  longer 

chain  may  be  furnished  at  slight  additional  cost. 

This  is  a  convenient,  inexpensive  device  for  handling  the  milk  cans  at 
milking  time,  and  for  transporting  them  from  the  cow  barn  to  the  dairy 
building.  The  carrier  can  be  furnished  with  either  Standard  or  Emancipator  gear  (Emancipator  gear  illus- 
trated) to  operate  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track.  With  one  of  these  gears  the  cans  can  be  lowered  to 
within  a  few  inches  of  the  floor  and  operated  from  one  end  of  the  building  to  the  other.  This  keeps  the  cans 
up  out  of  the  dirt  and  at  the  same  time  within  easy  reach  of  the  milkers.  The  carrier  may  be  operated 
on  the  regular  Litter  or  Feed  Carrier    tracks.     It  is  built  to  handle  three  railroad  milk  cans. 

Wire  Track  Milk  Can  Carrier — Fig.  766 

Specifications 

Operates  on  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  Track.     (See  pages   187   to  190  for  Track  and 

Track  Fittings.) 
Platform  made  of  wood,  reinforced  by  2x4  supports  underneath. 
Length  of  platform,  42  inches;  width,  16  inches. 
Capacity,  three  railroad  milk  cans. 
Track  Wheels   are   roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 
Total  clearance  necessary,  56  inches. 
Shipping  weight,  733  2  pounds. 

Fig.  766  is  our  Platform  Milk  Can  Carrier  to    run   on   wire  track. 

It  carries  three  large  railroad  cans.      It  is  fitted  with  the  swivel  trucks 

the  same  as  our  wire  track  litter  carriers,  and  can  be  operated  over  c-      -rcc 

.      ,  J  J  •^  hig.  7bb. 

switches  and  around  curves. 

By  using  our  special  Spring  End  Stops  with  latch  to  catch  and  hold  the  carrier  and  which  we  furnish  on 

special  orders,  the  man  in  the  barn  can  safely  send  thirty  gallons  of  milk  to  the  milk  house  one  hundred 

feet  or  more  away.     The  latch  will  catch  and  hold  the  carrier  until  unloaded.     The  man    at  the  milk 

house  can  take  charge  of  the  milk,  unlock  the  latch  and  by  a  little  push  send  the  carrier  back  to  the  barn. 


(Burlington). 


(Hark). 


Page  One  hundred  seventy-three 


^J^in^'?"^^^-*-^^^*^'**-'*^'^'^ 


Suspended  Milk  Can  Carrier  —  Fig.  767 

Specifications 

Operates  on  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  Track.       (See  pages  187   to  190  for 

Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 
Capacity,  five  hand  milk  or  cream  cans. 
Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels.  6  inches. 
Total  clearance  necessary,  loaded,  50  inches. 
Shipping  weight,  45)2  pounds. 

Fig.  767  is  our  Suspended  Milk  Can  Carrier  for  carrying 
five  hand  milk  or  cream  cans.  The  hooks  for  attaching  the 
cans  to  the  carrier  go  with  the  carrier.  This  carrier  is  also 
fitted  with  the  swivel  wheels  to  run  over  curves  and  switches. 
We  can  furnish  this  carrier  with  trucks  to  run  on  our  solid  steel 
track  when  desired. 


767.     (Harper) 
Patented 
Oct.  6,  1908 


■^atii 


n 


Fig. 


Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier  for  Wire 
Track  —  Fig.  1046 

Specifications 

Operates  on  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  Track.      (See  pages  187  to  190  for 

Track  and  Track  Fittings.) 
Capacity,  three  railroad  milk  cans. 
Fitted  regularly  to  raise  and  lower  3J^  feet. 
Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 
Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  6  inches. 
Clearance  necessary  for  Track  Wheels.  6  inches. 
Total  clearance  necessary,  loaded,  50  inches. 
Length  of  hand  chain,  S'-i  feet,  ends  joined  together. 
Shipping  weight,  60  pounds. 


1046.     (Pacific) 
Patented 
May  9,  1911 

This  carrier  operates  on  the  same  principle  as  the  regular  Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier,  Fig.  1045.  It 
has  a  different  gear,  however,  built  to  run  on  wire  track.  It  will  handle  three  railroad  milk  cans. 
The  cans  can  be  raised  and  lowered  for  convenience  at  milking  time,  and  for  lifting  in  and  out  of 
cooling  tanks.  This  carrier  is  often  used  where  the  dairy  building  stands  some  distance  from  the  cow 
barn,  wire  track  being  stretched  between  the  buildings.  The  track  may  also  be  continued  to  the  inside 
of  the  cow  barn,  and  the  cans  kept  in  the  place  most  convenient  for  the  milkers. 


Louden  Platform  Hay  Carrier  —  Fig.  809 


Specifications 


(See  pages 


Operates  on  Louden  Double  Bead  Steel  Track,  Fig.  57 
175  to  183  for  track  and  track  fittings.) 

Platform  made  of  wood,  reinforced  by  2x4  supports  underneath. 

Length  of  platform,  72  inches:  width,  30  inches. 

Track  Wheels  are  roller  bearing. 

Diameter  of  Track  Wheels,  4  inches. 

Clearance  necessary  for  track  wheels,  5  inches. 

Total  clearance  necessary,  68  inches. 

Weight,  130  pounds. 

Fig.  809  shows  a  Platform  Hay  Carrier  for  conveying 
either  loose  or  baled  hay  into  the  feed  alleys.  The  carrier 
consists  of  a  wood  platform  supported  by  means  of  a  steel 
bail  or  frame  from  the  trolleys.  On  each  side  of  the  carrier 
there  is  a  special   tubular  shaft,   into  which  are  fitted   steel 

teeth.  These  teeth  can  be  folded  down  to  lie  flat  on  the  platform,  and  the  carrier  may  be  used  for 
handling  baled  hay,  milk  cans,  etc.  When  hauling  hay  the  steel  teeth  are  opened  outward  as  shown 
in  the  illustration.     A  very  large  bunch  of  loose  hay  may  be  handled  with  this  carrier. 


Fig.  809.     (Troy). 


Page  One  hundred  (eventy-four 


P^rt^  9^t}  n  ijjciu  h\¥ ;  I  iTran 


Steel  Track,  Track  Hangers,  Rafter  Brackets,  Etc. 


Louden  tracks  are  made  of  the  finest  and  strongest 
high  carbon  steel  and  are  especially  adapted  to 
carrying  heavy  loads.  The  shape  of  Louden  track 
eliminates  all  unnecessary  friction,  and  much  less 
power  is  necessary  to  operate  a  car  than  with  the 
ordinary,  cheaply  constructed  track.  A  thin,  flat 
sided  track  will  buckle  over  or  become  wavy,  carrying 
half  the  load  that  Louden  track  will  carry  with  ease. 


Fig.  571.     (Clara). 


No.  2. 


Fig.  832.  iTrout). 
Patented 
Sept,  1.  1908 


Fig.  1066. 


Figure  571  is  our  Double  Bead  steel  track.     Number  2  is  an  end  view.     This  track  weighs  2  pounds 
to  the  foot.     Width  of  track  2  inches;  height,  1  ^^  inches. 

Figure  832  is  our  link  track  hanger  which  we  furnish  in  assorted  odd 
inch  lengths  up  to  6!  inches.  Link  track  hangers  at  least  5  inches  in 
length  should  always  be  specified  with  Steel  Track  Litter  Carriers. 
Longer  lengths  may  be  specified  where  track  passes  under  beams. 
Five-inch  length  track  hanger,  weight  per  dozen,  73-2  pounds. 

Figure  1066  is  our  Adjustable  Link  Track  Hanger.  Handy  for  use 
where  joists  are  uneven.     Weight  (5-inch  length)  per  dozen,  Sj/^  pounds. 

In  specifying  Link  Track  Hangers  for  Steel  Track  Carriers  to  permit 
track  to  pass  under  the  girder  or  beams,  the  hanger  should  be  3  inches 
longer  than  the  thickness  of  the  timber  under  which  the  track  is  to  pass. 
Example — For  an  8-inch  timber  an  I  I -inch  link  hanger  would  be 
neccessary. 

Figure  424  is  our  Standard  Rafter  Bracket. 
This  is  the  bracket  to  order  for  the  litter  carrier 
track  where  the  track  is  supported  from  joists  or 
beams  running  at  right  angles  to  the  track.  Weight 
per  dozen,  43^2  pounds. 

Figure  465  is  our  Ridge  Pole  Bracket  which 
is  used  when  the  track  is  hung  parallel  to  a  joist  "^ 

or    other    2-inch    timber.     Weight    per    dozen,    3 
pounds. 

Figure  675  is  our  Side  Rafter  Bracket,  used 
where  track  is  supported  from  sloping  rafter 
running  at  right  angles  to  the  track.  Weight 
per  dozen,    53^   pounds. 

Figure  725  is  our  Side  Beam  Bracket  for 
hanging  track  to  a  timber  running  parallel  with 
the     track.       Weight     per     dozen,      6     pounds. 


465.     (Cubeb). 


Fig.  424.      (Casper). 


Fig.  725.     (Beam). 


Fig.  675.     (Cute). 


Fig>  523.  Junior,     (Cage). 


Figure  726  is  a  Screw  Eye  used  for  supporting 
the  track  under  ceilings,  or  this  Screw  Eye  may 
be  substituted  anywhere  for  the  brackets 
if    preferred.      Weight    per    dozen,     6    pounds. 

Figure  523  is  an  end  stop  block  to  clamp 
on  the  end  of  track  to  prevent  carrier  from 
running  off  the  open  rail.    Weight,  %  pound. 


Fig.  726,    (Eli). 


Page  One  hundred  teventy-fiva 


frnirrrrifTlTTiTmfTmTTrlTl 


^^in't*)"^^'*-*-^^*^'**-*'*'^!^ 


^Sjy^^*^  FAIRFIELD.   I  OWA  ^j\'!>^^ 


Outside  Track  Supports — Fig.  1277 

Where  the  practice  is  followed  of  hauling  manure  to  the  field  as  fast  as  made 
arrangement  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  illustration  is  handy  and  eliminates 
posts  in  the  yard.     The  track  is  bracketed  to  the  end  of  the  barn  far 
enough  out  to  permit  the  manure  to  be  dropped  into  the  spreader  or 
wagon.     No  switches  are  necessary  and  the  arrangement  is  strong 
and  neat  looking.      We  furnish   all  of   the   metal    parts   as 


shown  in  the  detailed  view.  Fig.  1277-A  except  the  track 

and  track  hangers. 

\l/here  desired  wood  brackets  may 
used  for  supporting  track  at  the  end 
barn  ana  in  which  case  all   material 


be 
of 


would  be  arranged  for  on 
y  the  ground. 


Fig.  1277-A 


Specifications 

Main  frame  or  rail 
which  supports  the  track 
1  ,'8-inch  steel  tubing. 
Braces  holding  same  from 
the  wall  I  ■"'  s  -  inch  _  steel 
tubing  3  feet  9  inches 
long. 


Fig.  1278. 


Supporting  straps   Jixl   inch  steel,  6  feet  long. 

Connections  are  of  malleable  iron.      Upper  end  of    supporting   straps  are    fastened    by  means  ot  lag  screws, 
end  of  straps  attach   to  main  rail  by  means  of  special  clamp  holders. 

Heel  of  brace  is  held  in  place  with  wall  flanges  secured  by  lag   screws. 


Lower 


Page  One  hundred  seventy-eight 


FAIRFIELD.   I  0> 


Steel   Support  for  Yard  Track — 
Fig.  1279 

Specifications 

Standard  lengths  of  post.  8,   10.   12.   14  and  16  ft. 

Diameter  of  post  4'  i   inches,  outside  diameter. 

Length  of  upper  horizontal  arm,  36  inches. 

Length  of  brace.  44  inches. 

Diameter  of  arm  and  brace,  1 1/%  inches. 

All  connections  are  of  malleable  iron. 

Fig.  1279  shows  the  best  method  of  supporting  litter  carrier  or 
milk  can  carrier  track  in  the  yard.  A  steel  post  is  used,  with 
strongly  braced  tubular  steel  arm.  A  2x8  wood  beam  is  hung 
beneath  the  supporting  arm,  and  the  track  is  attached  to  it  in  the 
same  manner  as  in  the  barn. 

Fig.  I279-A  shows  in  detail  the  method  of  attaching  beam  to 
supporting   arm. 

|/''^/frn<T""^|  The  posts  should  be 

set  in  concrete  to 
make  them  rigid. 
This  makes  a  perma- 
nent support  that  will 
not  be  affected  by 
"soft"  weather  and 
that  cannot  be  pushed 
out  of  line  or  broken. 


■■!-ri- 


te/v-i 


*t. 


Fig.  1279-A 


Fig.  1295  shows  two  good  methods  of  supporting  the  track 
in  the  yard  by  means  of  wood  posts.  The  posts  should  be  set 
in  conciete  to  make  them  rigid  and  to  prevent  rotting  off. 


'■',\ 


When  a  single  post  is  used  it  should  be  well  anchored  by 
means  of  a  guy  rod  or  wire  to  offset  the  unbalanced   strain 
r'?>?r?r!    put  upon  it  by  running  a  heavy   load   over   the   track.     No 
anchor  is  necessary  when  two  posts  are  used. 


1    U' 


Fig.   1295 — Two   Good    Methods   of   Supporting 
Track    in    Yard    By    Means    of    Wood    Posts. 


Any  kind  of  wood  posts  may  be  used,  but  the  steel  posts  are 
better  and  more  lasting. 


In   hanging  a   track  to   joists  it  is 


Fig.  576. 


sometimes  necessary  to  run    under  beams  "B".     To  do  so  spike 

a  2-inch  piece  "D"  to  the  joist  "J"  so  as  to  come 

down  even  with  the  lower  edge  of  beam  "B".  When 
the  track  runs  lengthwise  with  the  joist  nail  a 
ridge  pole  bracket  to  lower  end  of  the  drop 
piece  "D"  and  attach  the  track  hanger  to  this,  as 
shown  in  Figure  576.  When  the  track  runs  crosswise 
of  the  joist  use  a  regular  bracket  as  shown  in  Figure 
577.  In  place  of  the  drop  "D"  a  screw  eye  and  link 
hanger  can  be  used,  as  shown  in  Figure  578.  The 
link  hangers  should  be  about  three  inches  longer  than 
Fig.  578.     the  depth  of  beam. 


Page  One  hundred  ceventy-nin* 


Pat'd 

Nov.  17,  1903 

June  23,  1908 


Two-Way  Switch 

Two-Way  Switch  for  Louden  Steel 
Track 

Length  of  Mounting  Block,  38  inches. 
Width  of  Mounting  BlocK,  15  inches. 
Distance  from  top  of  block  to  bottom 

of  track,      10  in. 
Weight,  29  pounds. 


Louden  Track  Switches 

Louden  Track  Switches  are  the  easiest  operated,  strongest  and  altogether 
the  most  satisfactory  on  the  market.     When   the  switch  cord  is 
pulled,  the  track  is  thrown  into  the  desired   position,  and  an  auto- 
matic safety  catch  makes  it  impossible  for  a  car  to  run  off  the  track. 
\  Switches  can  be  furnished  unmounted  on  special  orders,  but 

mounted  switches  are  recommended  as  they  are  much  easier 
to  install. 

Fig.  849  shows  our  Cross  Track  Switch  mounted 
on  a  board  ready  to  attach  to  ceiling.  It  is 
often  necessary  or  convenient  to  have  two 
tracks  cross  at  right  angles.  The 
central  section  of  the  cross  track  switch 
is  thrown  into  position  for  either  track 
as  desired  by  pulling  on  the  cords.  The 
guards  work  automatically,  dropping 
in  place  to  guard  the  open  rail  and 
elevating  to  clear  the  carrier  wheels 
when  the  central  track  is  in  place. 

Switches  take  2  feet  of  space  in  track. 
Switches  should  never  be  placed  in  door- 
way, especially  when  sliding  doors  are 
used. 


Fig.  736.    Jur 

This  can  nearly  always  be  avoided  by  reversing 
the  switch  inside  the  building  and  making 
the  side  line  to  the  main  line. 

The  illustration  at  right  shows  a  Three- 
switch  mounted  on  plank  "B"  ready  to 
attach  to  the  joist  or  ceiling  of  building. 
The  Switch  "S"  is  hinged  to  the  main 
track  "A"  at  "H."  By  pulling  on  the 
cords  "C"  and  "D"  the  switch  or  hinged 
section  will  slide  on  the  plate  "E"  and 
change  from  one  track  to  the  other,  so  that 


Two-Way.     (Cat) 


Junior,      f  Acorn). 
Pat'd  Mar.   12,  1912 
Cross  Track  Switch  for  Louden  Steel  Track 
Length  of  Mounting  Block,  24  inches.     Width,  12  inches. 


Fig.  795.    Three-Way  Switch.     (Caboose). 

Three-Way  Switch  for  Louden  Steel  Track 

Length  of  Mounting  Block.  38  inches. 

Width  of  Mounting  Block.  13  inches. 

Distance  from  top  of  block  to  bottom  of  track,     10  in. 

Weight,  31  pounds. 

the  operator  can  use  any  one  of  the  three  tracks 
at  will.  The  hinged  track  "S"  is  locked  in 
place  by  latch  "F."  It  can  be  operated  from 
below  no  matter  how  high  the  track  may  be 
hung.  A  guard  "G"  which  works  automat- 
ically, is  used  to  prevent  carrier  from  running 
off  track,  should  switch  be  left  open.  We 
furnish  the  switches  Two-Way  or  Three-Way, 
and  as  many  tracks  or  switches  as  are  neces- 
sary can  be  used.  The  track  can  be  run  to 
any  part  of  the  barn. 


Disteince  from  top  of  Block  to  bottom  of  track. 
Weight.  28  pounds. 


10  inches. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-one 


FAlRriELD.   IOWA 


Track  Brace 

Standard  length  of  brace  2  feet.  Brace  is  made  of  5^  x  I -inch  steel.  Clamp  is  of  malle- 
able iron. 

Where  extremely  long  link  track  hangers  are  used  to  permit  track  to  be 
hung  under  beams  or  in  suspending  track  from  a  very  high  ceiling,  it  is 
sometimes  necessary  to  brace  the  track  at  the  ends  to  prevent  the  track 
from  swinging  endwise  and  from  creeping.  Fig.  1209  shows  two  views  of  the 
Clamp  and  Brace  attached  to  a  link  track  hanger.  The  brace  can  be  placed 
in  any  position,  one  end  being  clamped  to  the  hanger  and  the  other  end 
attached  to  any  convenient  timber  or  wall  where  it  can  be  secured  with  a 
lag  screw  or  bolt.  This  brace  is  also  used  to  prevent  sidewise  swinging 
of   the   track. 


Track   Opener   For 
Sliding  Doors— Fig.  859 

Specifications 
Louden  Automatic  Track  Opener 

Fig.  859. 
Includes    section  of  Track,  Splice  Clamp, 
two  Special  Rigid  Hangers,  two  special  Straps 
for   supporting    timber    and    Operating    Bar 
for  attaching  to  door. 
Length,  46J|  inches. 
Weight,   13}^  pounds. 


Fig.   1209. 


Fig.  859.     Junior.     (GaitJ. 

Patented  Nov.  13.  1909 


Louden  Track  Openers  are  for  use  on  sliding  doors  through  which  Litter  and  Feed  Carriers  pass.  This 
device  automatically  opens  a  way  through  the  track  so  the  door  may  be  opened  or  closed  without  a 
moment's  delay.  (See  illustration  Fig.  860.)  A  bar  "T."  having  its  ends  downwardly  inclined,  slips 
under  and  lifts  the  section  "S"  when  the  door  is  closed.  When  the  door  is  open  the  section  "S"  drops 
into  place  joining  the  two  ends  of  the  track,  making  the  track  continuous,  ready  for  the  earner  to  pass 
over.  (See  illustration  Fig.  859.)  By  having  both  ends  of  the  bar  "T"  downwardly  inclined  it  may 
be  set  at  either  edge  of  the  door  and  will  open  the  track  from  either  side. 

Special  rigid  hangers  "H"  and 
"J"  are  required  to  hold  the  adjoin- 
ing ends  of  the  track  "A"  and  "B" 
in  position  so  the  section  "S"  v/ill 
always  drop  into  its  place  without 
missing,  and  so  the  bar  "T"  will 
always  lift  it  instead  of  pushing  it  to 
one  side;  also  special  straps  "1,  "bent 
at  an  angle  to  fit  the  side  of  the  barn 
and  the  sides  of  the  timber  "E"  and 
hold  it  clear  of  the  door  hanger  and 
low  enough  to  attach  the  hanger  "H." 
When  the  door  is  hung  on  the  inside 
of  the  barn,  the  section  "S"  is  hinged 
to  the  track  "A"  and  the  support 
"C"  is  secured  to  the  track  "B." 
This  is  a  simple  device,  is  easily  fitted  up  and  works  perfectly.  The  outfit  consists  of  the  opener 
"T"  with  brackets  to  attach  to  the  door,  hangers  "H"  and  "J,"  the  section  "S"  with  its  hinged  con- 
nection, the  support  "C"  and  the  straps  "I." 


tig.  860. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-two 


^S^y^-^  FAIR  TIE  LP.   lOWA^jyi^S 


Track  Curves. 
Fig.  639.  (Grade). 


Curved    Track 

Figure  639  is  a  diagram  for  measuring  a  track  around  curves. 
Where  a  6-foot  Right  Angle  Curve  "C"  is  used,  it  will  make  up  for 
approximately  4  feet  of  straight  track  on  each  side  from  "A"  to  "B,"  or 
about  8  feet  in  all.  When  an  8-foot  curve  is  used,  it  will  make  approx- 
imately 5  feet  on  each  side,  or  10  feet  in  all.  Generally  a  6-foot  curve 
is  long  enough  to  turn  a  square  corner. 


Track     Through 
Swinging    Doors 


Where  the  track  is  to  pass  through  swinging  door  a  nice  way  to 
arrange  the  door  is  as  illustrated  in  Fig.  1208.  The  top  of  the  door  is 
sawed  off  and  the  space  on  each  side  of  the  track  under  the  door  jamb 
is  built  down  to  meet  the  door. 

Another  plan  would  be  to  place  a  hinged  section  on  the  top  of  the 
door.  This  could  be  dropped  down  when  necessary  to  open  the  door. 
When  the  door  is  closed  the  hinged  section  on  top  of  the  door  could  be 
hooked  up  into  place,  fitting  neatly  around  the  track. 


Removable    Section  For 
Sliding  Doors  —  Fig.  633 


A-- 


633.    (Craft). 
Louden  Removable  Section. 


piece  firmly  in  place,  but 
it  can  be  easily  lifted 
out  to  allow  the  door  to  shut,  or  be  replaced  when  the  carrier  is  to  be  used. 
"J"  is  a  joist;  "B"  the  brackets;  "1"  the  hangers;  "A"  the  track; 
"E"  the  ridge  pole;  "H"  ridge  pole  brackets,  and  "G"  a  wall  bracket 
to  fasten  ridge  pole  to  barn.  Where  the  door  opening  is  too  low  for  the 
track  to  run  out  level  from  the  joists  and  a  swinging  door  is  used,  it  may 
be  arranged  as  shown  in  Fig.  643.  Removable  sections  are  made  in  two 
and  four  foot  lengths. 


Fig.  1208. 

Where  the  track  passes  through  a  door,  a  removable 
section  "L,"  Fig.  633,  may  be  used  instead  of  the  track 
opener  described  above.  This  is  furnished  with  special 
splice  clamps  that  bolt  to  the  ends  of  the  adjoining 
track   sections    "M.    M."     These  clamps  hold  the  loose 


v^wJSm^y. 


B 


X 


T 


B 


m 


DOOR  OPENINQ 
Fig.  643. 


Louden  Machinery  Company,  Dec.  II.  I9I4. 

Fairfield,  Iowa. 
Gentlemen: 

In  reply  to  your  inquiry  we  wish  to  say  that  we  began  using  your  Overhead  Track  and  carriers  some  five  or  six  years 
ago  and  at  the  present  time  we  have  had  about  one-third  of  a  mile  of  the  iron  track  in  use  on  our  farm.  We  use  it 
for  carrying  feed  and  grain  and  also  for  the  manure  carriers.  The  Track  has  given  perfect  satisfaction,  as  have  the 
Feed  Carrieis.  and  we  think  the  Manure  Carriers  are  as  good  as  can  be  had. 

You  also  made  for  us  a  large  Milk  Vat  that  runs  on  a  carrier  and  in  which  we  carry  the  skimmed  milk  to  the  calves. 
This  has  been  of  much  help  to  us. 

Wishing  you  continued  success,  we  remain. 

Sincerely  yours. 

The  Maplecrest  Stock  Farm  Co.; 

Kalamazoo,  Mich. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-three 


Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane 

Specifications 


Main  Boom  made  of  2  ?  g  inch  O.  D.  steel  tubing. 
Cranes  30  feet  long  or  over  are  side  trussed. 
Cranes  less  tfian  30  feet  long  are  not  side  trussed. 
Truss  Rods  made  of  I  ,'t-inch  O.  D.  steel  tubing. 


Truss  Stays  made  of  1  fj-inch  O.  D.  steel  tubing. 
Guy  Wires   made  of  0000  basic  steel  wire. 
Vertebra  hinge  of  refined  malleable  iron. 


lbs 


Weight   of    12-ft.  Crane   complete. 

Fig.    974   with    track.    114 

•■     22 

"      976       ••          ••         192 

•■     30 

••     978      •■         "        348 

"     40 

■•     980      •■         •■        472 

(NOTE:  A  Crane  of  any  length  up  to  40  feet  is  practical  that  does  not  exceed  in  number  of  feet  the  distance  from  the 
point  where  the  base  of  the  Crane  is  to  set  to  the  plate  on  which  the  rafters  rest,  multiplied  by  2 '  o-  't  is  well  to 
remember  that  there  is  the  same  inward  pressure  at  the  base  of  a  Crane  as  outward  pull  where  the  guys  are  attached.  This 
pressure  and  pull,  however,  comes  at  the  barn's  strongest  points — the  mow  floor  and  the  rafter  plate,  and  a  little 
bracing  is  all   that  is  necessary   to  neutralize   the  strain  on   the  end  of   the   barn.     See  Figure  1067.  page  186. 

In  erecting  Crane  see  that  the  longest  guy  wire  carries  enough  of  the  weight  to  pull  it  taut,  intermediate  guy  wires  may 
be  slightly  slack  but  the  guy  reaching  to  the  end  of  the  Crane  should  always  be  taut.) 

A  Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  is  attached  to  the  barn  above  the  door  in  Hne  with  the  Litter  Carrier 
track,  and  extends  out  over  the  yard  for  a  distance  of  1  2  to  40  feet  without  posts  or  supports  of  any  kind 
in  the  yard  being  necessary. 

The  use  of  the  Swinging  Crane  not  only  makes  unnecessary  all  posts  and  supports  in  the  yard,  but 
gives  a  far  greater  area  in  which  manure  may  be  dumped  as  the  Crane  may  be  swung  around  from  left  to 
right  till  it  strikes  the  sides  of  the  barn.  To  all  practical  purposes  a  Swinging  Crane  of  30-foot  length 
gives  a  dumping  area  as  great  as  a  straight,  rigid  track  running  out  a  couple  of  hundred  feet  from  the  barn 
door.  To  empty  the  Litter  Carrier  direct  into  wagon  or  spreader,  all  that  is  necessary  is  to  drive  to  any 
point  within  the  Crane's  radius. 

The  Swinging  Crane  is  also  a  great  convenience  where  litter  is  to  be  dumped  on  the  opposite  side  of  a 
yard  fence  or  down  a  hillside  from  the  barn,  and,  as  it  may  be  swung  around  close  up  against  the  barn 
when  not  in  use,  is  entirely  out  of  the  way  of  passing  stock  or  wagons. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-fiva 


Fig.  1062. 


The  Louden  Crane  is  built  regularly  In 
lengths  of  12  feet,  22  feet,  30  feet  and  40  feet. 
Each  Crane  will  carry  many  times  any  prac- 
tical load.  In  factory  test  a  40 -foot  Crane 
was  operated  with  a  1,500  pound  weight  at 
extreme  end.  It  is  absolutely  guaranteed  to 
handle  1 ,000  pound  loads.  For  very  heavy 
loads,  however,  care  should  be  taken  to  see  that 
the  timbers  of  the  barn,  to  which  the  Crane  is 
anchored,  are  strong  and  well  braced. 

Construction 

The  Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  is  guar- 
anteed to  be  the  strongest  and  most  substan- 
tial Crane  for  Litter  and  Feed  Carriers  on  the 
market.     All    Louden   cranes   30   feet   long   or 
over,  are  side  trussed.     This  is  the  only  Crane 
made  that  is  side  trussed  with  tubular  steel 
(see  Fig.   1067).      It  is  built  on  the  same  scientific  principle  employed  in  steel  bridges,  and  is   50  per  cent 
stronger  than  a  more  cheaply  constructed  wire  trussed  Crane.      It  is  absolutely  impossible  for  it  to  buckle 
under  the  heaviest  load,  as  the  tubular  steel  truss  will  handle  an  enormous  back  pressure. 

Cranes  under  30  feet  in  length  are 
not  side  trussed. 

Figure  1062  shows  the  construc- 
tion of  the  Crane  at  doorway. 
A  special  malleable  iron  vertebrae 
hinge  made  in  our  own  factory  in- 
sures the  free,  easy,  and  steady  move- 
ment of  the  Crane.  It  will  handle 
double  the  load  that  it  will  ever 
be  called  upon  to  handle. 

Where  swinging  crane  passes 
through  sliding  door  and  this  hinge 
is  used,  the  door  should  be  made 
double.  Doors  can  then  be  notched 
to  fit  closely  around  the  hinge  as 
shown  in  Fig.  1062.  The  type  of 
hinge  used  is  the  best  for  the 
purpose. 


Swinging  Track  at  Door — Fig.  791 

Specificatiotis 

One  set  of  fittings  consists  of  malleable  hinge 
and  bolts  for  attaching  to  barn,  steel  supporting 
rods  and  special  clamps  and  fixtures  for  connect- 
ing to  track  at  outer  end. 

In  instances  where  the  litter  carrier 
track  extends  out  of  the  barn  at  the  end 
where  the  hay  is  taken  up,  it  is  some- 
times desirable  to  have  a  section  of  track 
which  will  swing  around  out  of  the  way 
or  lift  out.  This  plan  is  shown  in 
Fig.  791. 

Please  remember  that  we  have  a 
solution  for  any  problem  that  may  come 
up  in  the  installation  of  our  goods. 


Fig.  791. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-six 


Fixtures  for  Louden  Wire  Track  Litter  Carriers 


The  Track 


The  track  is  made  of  the  finest  grade  of  Basic  Steel  Wire  and  is  manufactured  expressly  for  us.  Its 
tensile  strength  is  remarkable,  and  while  it  makes  a  good  spring  it  will  bend  double  twice  without 
breaking.  We  furnish  the  standard  size.  No.  0000  which  is  amply  strong  for  all  work.  This  size  is 
13-32-inch  in  diameter  and  runs  27  inches  to  the  pound.  The  track  can  be  run  100 
feet  or  more  without  center  supports  (see  Figure  1068,  next  page). 

When  longer  lengths  are  required  additional  supports  may  be  used  by  means  of 
our  Patent  Spring  Suspender,  as  shown  in  Figure  746,  which  supports  the  wire 
and  permits  the  carrier  to  run  past  the  post.  The  body  of  the  suspender  is  of 
inch  pipe  fitted  with  a  strong  spring  10  inches  long  which  supports  the  track 
and  at  the  same  time  makes  it  flexible  to  suit  the  weight  of  the  load  and  to  let  the 
carrier  run  easily  over  it. 

A  similar  suspender  made  shorter  may  be  used  in  connection  with  a  pulley,  as 
shown  by  Figure  747,  to  raise  and  lower  the  track  in  the  stable  as  may  be  desirable, 
and  to  assist  the  loaded  carrier  to  run  out  and  the  empty  carrier  to  return.  The 
outer  end  of  the  track  should  be  set  15  to  18  inches  higher  by  the  level  than 
the  end  in  the  barn  for  each  100  feet  long.  The  cut  shows  the  tension  bolt  passed 
through  the  wall  below  the  sill  to  facilitate  the  raising  and  lowering  of  the  track. 
Otherwise  it  should  be  passed  through  the  sill.  Common  pulleys  and  hooks  may 
be  used  to  hold  up  the  suspender.  When  a  tackle  block  hoist  is  specified,  extra 
charge  is  made. 


Fig.  746.     (Horizon) 

Specifications 

Patent  Spring 
Suspender. 

Length,  17' 2  inches. 
Weight,  4I4  pounds. 


Sometimes  it  is  necessary  to  run 
one  end  of  the  track  to  one  side  of  a 
straight  line.  This  we  do  by  means 
of  our  Angle  Iron,  as  shown  in 
Figure  750.  The  curved  end  of  the 
iron  has  a  groove  in  which  the  wire 
fits  and  the  other  end  is  held  by  a 
guy  secured  to  a  post  or  otherwise, 
so  as  to  hold  the  track  in  proper 
position.  The  guy  should  be  of 
sufficient  length  to  freely  raise  and 
lower  with  the  track.  The  carrier 
wheels    will   readily   pass   over   the 


I U 


Fig.  747.     Louden  Tackle  Block  Suspender. 

(Including  pulley.) 

Specifications 

Weight,  6j  2  pounds. 


Wire  Track  to  Two  Barnsi 


curved  end  of  the  iron.     We  make  two  sizes,  one 
20  and  the  other  a  35  degree  curve. 


Roy  L.  Moyer  of  Maroa,  Illinois, 
who  has  been  using  a  Louden  Litter 
Carrier  says: 

"The  Louden  Litter  Carrier  outfit 
that  I  purchased  of  you  is  all  that  you 
claim  for  it.  This 
outfit  has  been  in 
use  now  about  two 
years  and  carries 
litter  without  any 
bother.  Before  in- 
stalling this  outfit 
the  boys  were  a 
little  careless  about 
keeping     the    barn  Fig.  750. 

cleaned     out,     but       Angle  Iron  for 
now     with     the         Wire  Track. 
Carrier,  we  nave  a  r.         -c      «.• 

clean   barn   all   the         bpeClhcatlOns 
time."  Weight,  2  pounds. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-seven 


Anchoring  Louden  Wire 
Track 


The  anchoring  of  the  track  is  an  important 
matter.  If  it  is  securely  anchored  it  is  surprising 
what  loads  it  will  carry,  but  if  not  securely 
anchored,  it  will  sag  and  get  out  of  shape  and 
cannot  do  good  work.  The  post  must  be 
securely  set  in  the  ground.  The  other  end  of 
the  track  will  most  probably  be  anchored  to  the 
sill  of  the  barn  and  the  post  should  be  made  as 
solid  as  the  sill. 

A  large  flat  stone  or  a  good  broad  plank 
should  be  placed  below  the  end  of  the  post  (see 
Figure  745).  Unless  the  ground  is  as  solid  as  a 
rock  it  will  not  stand  the  pressure  of  the  post 
and  it  will  settle,  and  keep  settling  every  time 
the  track  is  tightened.  The  next  thing  is  to 
place  a  log  or  timber  8  to  10  inches,  or  more,  in  diameter  and  5 
the  ground.     Our  anchor  bolts   "A"  are  ^-inch  in  diameter  by 


Wire  Track  Anchor 


to  6  feet  long,  not  less  than  4   feet  in 
6  feet  long.      They  will  stand  a  strain 
of  at  least  8  to   10  tons,  and  the  log  should  be  solid  enough  to  stand  that  also. 

Our  anchoring  device  has  no  equal.  It  reaches  clear  to  the  top  of  the  post,  a  heavy  cross  pin  being 
used  to  prevent  the  loop  "X"  from  slipping  down  on  the  tension  bolt  "T."  The  anchor  bolt,  which 
goes  through  the  log,  has  a  long  threaded  end  above  the  ground  (not  below  where  it  is  of  no  use)  and  is 
arranged  with  a  yoke  "Y,"  so  the  anchor  can  be  tightened  as  may  be  necessary  to  hold  the  post  in 
proper  position.  We  can  use  both  the  tension  bolt  and  the  anchor  bolt  to  tighten  up  the  track,  whereas 
others  can  use  the  tension  only.     Extra  heavy  wire  is  used  in  our  anchor  to  insure  ample  strength. 

Another  important  precaution  is  to  set  the  post  slanting  as  shown  in  Figure  745.  If  set  straight  it 
will  be  much  harder  on  the  anchor  wire  than 
on  the  track  wire.  It  is  the  anchor  wire  which 
generally  gives  way.  If  there  is  room,  the  longer 
the  guy  wires  are  the  better.  Also  be  sure  the 
anchor  wire  is  in  direct  lines  with  the  track  wire. 

When  you  buy  an  article  bearing  the  name 
Louden  you  may  be  sure  that  it  is  the  best, 
and  when  a  method  of  installation  is  recom- 
mended you  may  be  sure  that  our  recom- 
mendations are  based  upon  actual  tests.  That 
is  why  Louden  goods  are  known  in  every 
civilized    country    of  the  world. 


Louden  Tension  Bolt 
Fig.  1207 


Louden  Tension  Bolts  are  made 
steel.      They    are    furnished     in 
sizes    54  X  30    inches,    ^4  x  I  5 


of 

three 

inches  and  J8x30  inches.  The 
heavy  bolt  should  be  used  for  ex- 
treme long  lengths  of  tracks  or 
where  the  work  is  very  heavy.  The 
bolts  have  heavy  deep  threads  and 
will  not  strip.  Each  Tension  Bolt 
is  furnished  with  large  hexagon  nut 
and  washer.  The  5^x30  inch  bolt 
will  always  be  furnished  unless 
otherwise  specified. 


Fig.  1207. 


Fig.  1068. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-eighf' 


^~'WjC^  fairfiejld.  IOWA  '■^TSi'^  ^^*^i^^i& 


Louden  Wire  Track  Switches 


Fig.  892. 


(Hurrah). 
Patented  Oct.  6,  1908 

Specifications 

Length,  72  inches. 
Weight,  5^4  pounds. 


Fig.  893. 


We  have  the  most  perfect  switches  ever  devised  for  a  wire  track.  They  are  made  of  pipe  ("C"  and 
"D")  slotted  on  the  lower  side  to  fit  over  the  wires  and  are  held  securely  in  place  by  specially  fitted 
keys  "E,"  which  are  readily  driven  in  or  out  without  kinking,  or  otherwise  injuring  the  wire.  The 
switches  can  be  easily  and  quickly  placed  or  removed  and  will  run  in  both  directions  so  as  to  form  a 
Three- Way  switch. 

Figure  892  shows  the  switches  set  for  carrier  to  pass  from  the  main  line  "A"  to  the  left  hand  line  "B." 

Figure  893  shows  switches  set  for  carrier  to  pass  onto  the  right  hand  side  line  "B."  To  change  the 
carrier  to  the  opposite  side,  the  wheels  must  be  lifted  from  the  track  and  swiveled  around  so  the  castings 
supporting  the  wheels  will  be  on  the  same  side  of  the  main  wire  as  the  switch  that  is  being  used.  This 
is  easily  and  quickly  done  by  lifting  the  entire  carriage,  one  end  at  a  time,  and  setting  the  wheel  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  wire. 

The  switches  are  interchangeable  and  one  switch  instead  of  two  may  be  used,  changing  the  switch 
from  side  to  side.     Where  it  is  desired  to  use  the  main  line  "A"  and  pass  under  the  cross  line  "B,"  place 
the  end  of  both  switches  in  the  hook  "H"  and  remove  the  cross  track 
holder.     The  sag  of    the   main    track    "A"  will  easily  let  the  carrier 
wheels  pass  under  the  cross  track  "B." 

When  two  tracks  cross  and  switches  are  used  something  is  needed 

to  hold  the  tracks  together.     This  we  accomplish   by  means  of  cross 

track  holder,  Figure  749.     It  is  hooked  on  the  wire  "B"  so  the  point 

"P"  will  pass  under  the  wire  "A"  and  then  over  the  wire  "B"  on  the 

opposite  side.     It  is  held  in  place  by  pressing  the  hook  "C"  up  over  ^       -r     i  u  u       r-.    ,.«    ...       .  ^ 
the  wire  "A."  .-  t-  =  t-  Cross  Track  Holder.  Fig.  749.  (Hopple). 

There  is  more  strength  and  less  friction  in  the  Louden  wire  track  Specifications 

switches  than  any  others,  and  they  are  the  easiest  and  quickest  to 
change  from  one  position  to  another. 


Weight,   14  pound. 


Oconomowoc,  Wis. 


Louden  Machinery  Company,  Fairfield,   Iowa. 
Dear  Sirs: 

Three  years  ago  we  had  one  of  your  carriers  installed.  Today  I  wouldn't  have  it  taken  out  for  five  times  what 
it  cost.  It  is  as  good  as  new  and  has  never  cost  us  one  cent  for  repairs.  Can  feed  twenty-five  head  of  cattle  with  one 
filling  of  carrier.  We  have  had  the  stanchions,  calf  pen,  bull  pen  and  one  box  stall  for  two  years  and  we  are  perfectly 
satisfied  with  them.  Yours  truly. 

Miller  Bros. 


Page  One  hundred  eighty-nine 


ThpT^OUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Louden  Wire  Track  Reverse  Curve 


Fig.  797.   (Tense.) 
Patented  Mar.  31,  1908 


Specifications 

Length,  41   inches. 
Weight,  20  pounds 


By  the  use  of  our  reverse  curves  and 
switches  the  Wire  Track  Litter  Carriers 
may  be  run  around  either  inside  or  out- 
side curves.  Figure  797  shows  our  re- 
verse curve  as  it  appears  when  used  inside 
of  building,  where  it  is  attached  to  and 
supported  by  the  joists  or  ceiHng. 


Sundry  Wire  Attachments 


Fig.  753.   (Hurl.) 


Spring  End  Stop. 
Distance  from  bottom  of  spring  to 
track,  16  inches. 

Weight,  4  pounds. 


Fig.  755. 

Specifications 

Anchor   Loop. 

Length,    14  inches 
Weight,  2  pounds. 


(Hone.) 


Improved  Clamp  Loop. 

Weight,    ^4  f>ound. 


Fig.  756. 


Anchor  Yoke. 

Length,  20  inches. 
Weight,  438  pounds. 


Figure  753  is  a  detail  view  of  our  Patent  Spring  End  Stop,  the  most  complete  device  of  the  kind  ever 
invented.  It  is  composed  of  two  malleable  iron  pieces  bolted  together  so  as  to  slide  freely  on  the  track, 
and  connected  to  a  special  spring  as  shown.  The  wheel  yokes  of  the  carrier  straddle  the  pointed  ends 
of  these  pieces  and  cannot  run  off.  The  spring  eases  off  the  momentum  of  the  carrier  and  starts  it  back 
on  its  return  trip.     The  spring  and  the  pieces  "A"  can  be  easily  removed  from  or  replaced  upon  the  track. 

Figure  755  is  a  detailed  view  of  our  Improved  Anchor  Loop  which  goes  over  the  top  of  the  post  as  in 
Figures  745  and  1068  (page  188).  It  is  made  of  0000  wire,  the  same  as  the  track,  and  will  stand  any  strain 
that  can  be  put  upon  it.  Figure  756  is  our  Patent  Anchor  Yoke  with  malleable  casting  for  anchor  bolt, 
as  shown  in  Figures  1068  and  745.  It  will  stand  a  tremendous  strain.  Anchor  Loop,  Figure  755  and 
Anchor  Yoke,  Figure  756  are  included  with  the  Complete  Anchor,  Figure  745,  page  188. 

Figure  757  shows  different  ways  of  looping  the  track  and  guy  wires.  The  upper  is  the  common  way 
of  twisting  the  wire  around  itself.  The  lower  is  our  Improved  Clamp  Loop.  The  first  is  good  enough 
for  a  moderate  strain,  or  where  the  wire  is  double,  as  in  our  anchor  loops  or  anchor  yokes;  but  when 
there  is  only  a  single  loop  the  Clamp  is  much  stronger  and  better,  as  well  as  easier  made  and  attached 
and  detached.  All  that  is  necessary  is  to  remove  the  bolts  which  hold  the  clamps,  and  it  can  be  hooked 
into  an  eye,  which  cannot  be  done  with  a  twisted  loop. 


Kootenai,   Idaho. 


Louden  Machinery  Company,  Fairfield,   Iowa. 

Gentlemen:  j  l     u  I     (  I 

I  have  used  your  Stanchions  and  Manure  Carriers  since  last  fall  and  am  wrell  pleased  with  them.  In  fact.  1 
don't  know  how  1  got  along  without  them  before.  The  manure  I  notice  is  far  better  this  spring.  The  horse  manure 
used  to  burn  in  the  pile,  and  now  1  get  it  mixed  with  the  cow  manure  and  it  improves  them  both. 

Respectfully  yours. 

Matt  Schmitt. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety 


Plans  for  Installation 


Plan  No.  1. 


We  show  here  a  few  plans  to  illustrate  some  of  the  many  ways  in  which  Louden  Carriers  can  be 
made  to  meet  any  plan,  no  matter  what  the  seeming  difficulties.  The  plans  mean  nothing  so  far  as  size 
and  shape  of  buildings  are  concerned  and  the  length  and  width  are  given  that  you  may  understand 
how  to  figure  the  number  of  feet  of  track  and  the  number  of  other  fixtures  required. 

Plan  No.  I  shows  a  straight  run  of  solid  steel  track  extending  from  the  rear  of  the  building  30  feet 
out  in  the  yard.     For  this  arrangement  the  following  would  be  required: 

Figure  Page 

70  ft.  Double  Bead  Steel  Track 571  173 

24  Link  Track  Hangers   (3-inch  length) 832  1  73 

14  Rafter  Brackets  'B" 424  173 

10  Ridge  Pole  Brackets  "M" 465  173 

1  Automatic  Track  Opener 859  1 82 

2  End  Stop    Blocks  "ES" 523  173 

I    Emancipator  Litter  Carrier 828  1 37 


In  all  of  the  plans   where    the   Automatic   Track   Opener,    Figure 
Section,  Figure  633,  page  1 83,  may  be  substituted  if  desired. 


859,    is  specified,    the   Removable 


Joists  are  usually  18  inches  on  center.  We  recommend  a  supporting  hanger  and  bracket  every  other 
joist  or  every  3  feet  for  the  Double  Bead  steel.  If  the  joists  are  24  inches  on  center  it  would  be  well 
to  use  a  hanger  on  every  joist,  as  four  feet  is  rather  too  wide  a  space  between  hangers,  especially  if 
the  work  is  to  be  heavy. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-one 


Thp  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Plans    for   Installation — Continued 


Plan  No.  2. 

Plan  No.  2  shows  the  same  plan  as  No.  1  but  equipped  with  our  wire  track  Litter  Carrier  System. 
This  illustrates  the  use  of  the  Self-Acting  Carriers  which  can  be  loaded  at  any  point  along  the  track, 
given  a  push  and  they  will  run  out  and  empty  at  the  trip  "D,"  strike  the  spring  "G,"  and  return 
to   the  building.     For  this  plan  the  following  would  be  required: 

Self-Acting  Carrier 

Figure  Page 

1  Self-Acting  Litter  Carrier 721  163 

70  ft.  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire Top  of  187 

2  Tension  Bolts.  ''4  x  30  "T" 1207  188 

1    Wire  Track  Anchor  "Q" 745  188 

1  Patent  End  Stop   "G" 753  190 

2  Loop  Clamps  "L" 757  190 


One  trip    "D"   is  furnished  free  with    each    wire  track  Litter   Carrier.      Where    two  or    more   tracks 
are  used  or  the  carrier  is  to  be  unloaded  at  two  different  points  extra  trips  "D"  should  be  specified. 


£^ 


^■^. 


Plan  No.  3. 

Plan  No.  3  shows  a  barn  with  a  stable  on  each  side  and  a  solid  steel  track  for  litter  carrier  in  each 
stable.  One  track  runs  in  a  straight  hne  40  feet  out  into  the  yard.  The  other  track,  after  passing 
through  the  door,  is  curved  and  carried  along  the  end  of  building,  another  curve  is  used  before  it  joins 
on  the  switch  and  joined  onto  the  straight  track  with  a  two-way  switch. 


Note. — When  track  runs  at  right  angles  to  joists.  Rafter  Brackets,  Figure  424,  page  175,  are  used. 
When  the  track  runs  parallel  with  and  is  supported  under  a  2-inch  joist  or  other  timber  the  Ridge  Pole 
Bracket,  Figure  465,  page  175,  should  be  specified.  Screw  Eyes  are  used  for  smooth  ceilings  and  may 
also  be  substituted  for  the  brackets  whenever  desired. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-two 


trrrmTOrmmr: 


i\n>W§:fjeM^iWi 


Plans  for  Installation — Continued 


Plan  No.  5. 


Plan  No.  5  shows  a  building  with  three  tracks  inside  joined  together  by  a  three-way  switch  near  the 
door  and  a  single  track  continuing  40  feet  out  into  the  yard.  For  an  arrangement  cf  this  kind  the 
following  items  would  be  necessary: 


Emancipator  Carrier 


216 

4 


Figure 

ft.  Double  Bead  Steel  Track 571 

Bent  Sections  "C"  for  Curves 639 

80  Link  Track  Hangers  (3-inch) 832 

56  Rafter  Brackets  "B" 424 

24  Ridge  Pole  Brackets  "H" 465 

1    Three-Way  Switch  "S" 795 

1    Automatic  Track  Opener 859 

4  End  Stop  Blocks 523 

1   Emancipator  Litter  Carrier 828 


Page 

175 
183 
175 
175 
175 
181 
182 
175 
157 


If  the  arrangement  of  the  building  does  not  permit  placing  the  switch  inside,  the  three  tracks  may 
be  joined  on  the  outside  by  supporting  the  two  side  lines  along  the  end  of  the  building  as  shown  in  plan 
No.  3,  page  192.  If  desired,  one  of  the  side  lines  of  track  can  be  run  straight  out  from  the  building  and 
the  tracks  connected  by  the  use  of  two  Two-Way  Switches  instead  of  one  Three-Way  Switch. 


-^^ 


Plan  No.  7. 


Plan  No.  7  shows  an  arrangement  for  solid  steel  track  in  a  building  with  a  double  row  of  stalls  and 
all  of  the  litter  to  pass  out  at  one  door.  At  the  rear  of  the  building  the  track  is  curved,  crosses  the  end  of  the 
building  and  continues  in  a  straight  line  out  into  the  yard.     No  switches  are  necessary. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-three 


HORSE   BARN    EQUIPMENT 

PAGE 

Hay    Racks 1 98-203 

Feed  Boxes 204-206 

Window  Guards 207 

Water  Troughs 207 

Stall   Guards 208-210 

Harness  Hooks 210 

Salt  Rolls  and  Holders 210 

Stall  Posts 211 

Cess  Pools 212 

Oats  Cleaner 213 


A  modern,  sanitary,  economical,  durable,  and  convenient  type  of  horse  stall 

Complete   in  every  detail 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-six 


Horse  Stable  Equipment 

You  have  noticed  how  a  horse  sticks  his  nose  down  to  the  bottom 
of  the  manger,  roots  around  awhile,  and  then  pulls  out  a  hatful  or 
so  of  hay  onto  the  floor  with  his  nose. 

You  have  seen  him  when  he  was  eating  grain,  push  a  handful  or 
two  over  the  side  of  the  box  in  his  earnest  attempt  to  get  a  big  mouthful. 

You  have  noticed  your  horses  do  these  things;  but  did  you  ever 
try  to  imagine  the  total  expense  in  this  waste? 

Conservative  estimates  place  this  waste  at  20%  of  the  feed  given 
the  animals.  Figured  on  this  basis  the  average  horse  wastes  something 
like  $15  or  $20  each  year. 

Louden  Horse  Stable  Equipment  was  designed  to  prevent,  and 
does  prevent,  this  waste.  It  also  gives  to  the  barn  a  clean,  up-to- 
date  appearance,  is  more  sanitary,  and  keeps  the  horses  in  better 
condition  at  all  times. 

The  cost  of  the  equipment  is  more  than  saved  in  a  very  few 
months.  The  purchase  is  good  business  judgment,  whether  the  buyer 
is  farmer  or  town  man.  For  years  the  city  big  barn  owners — stables 
where  from  50  to  500  horses  are  fed — have  realized  the  necessity  of 
this  feed-saving,  money-making  equipment,  and  now  up-to-date, 
economical  farmers  everywhere  are  putting  it  in. 

It  costs  no  more  to  install  modern,  time-saving,  sanitary  steel 
and  iron  equipment  than  it  does  to  build  of  lumber. 

For  nearly  a  half  century  we  have  been  making  a  study  of  barn 
needs  and  have  the  most  complete  line  ever  offered. 

Louden  Horse  Barn  Equipment,  Louden  Dairy  Barn  Equipment, 
Louden  Hay  Unloading  Tools,  and  Louden  Litter  and  Feed  Carriers 
are  known  for  their  high  quality  in  every  country.  It  is  our  aim  to 
make  the  name  Louden  stand  for  all  that  is  best  in  barn  equipment. 

THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-seven 


-I  ^s  I — r  1 


Automatic  Hay  Racks     Figs.  1210  to  1218 

(Warren  Patent) 


Fig.  1210 


Specifications 

Styles  Made:     For  horses;  for  cattle;  for  sheep.     Each  style  in  many  different  sizes  to  meet  any  ordinary  requirement. 

Construction:  Neat,  strong,  rigid.  Will  stand  hard  usage.  Main  framework  (Full  Back  construction)  1x1  inch  high  carbon 
steel  angles.  Corners  are  rounded  and  reinforced  with  steel  plates.  Frame  is  also  braced  by  angle  cross  bars  and  upright 
l-:j-inch  spring  steel  rods  which  will  bend,  but  always  spring  back  into  place.  Space  between  rods  is  varied  to  meet  require- 
ments of  horses,  cattle,  sheep,  and  calves. 

Open  Back  Construction:     Same  as  Full  Back,  except  the  back  does  not  have  upright  rods. 

Full  Back  construction  is  used  where  both  front  and  back  of  rack  must  be  utilized  to  hold  in  hay. 

Open  Back  construction  is  recommended  where  rack  sets  against  solid  wall,  or  on  the  outside  of  a  pen. 

Automatic  Action:     A  special  torsion  coil  spring  which  also  acts  as  the  hinge  upon  which  rack  operates. 

Spring:  2  5-16  inches,  outside  diameter,  made  of  ?s-inch  steel.  Every  spring  given  severe  test  before  sold,  and  is  guaranteed 
against  defect  or  breakage. 

Locking  Device:  Consists  of  two  1  J^-inch  steel  side  arms  operating  in  steel  links.  Links  work  in  unison.  Will  allow  rack  to 
be  locked  when  opened  to  widest  point.      Rack  closes  completely  when  unlocked,  except  when  feed  is  in  rack. 

Operation:  Pull  rack  open  till  it  locks.  Put  in  hay.  Raise  locking  arm  and  rack  closes  against  hay.  Pressure  is  constant 
and  hay  is  held  firmly  at  all  times.     As  the  animal  eats  the  hay,  the  rack  closes,  slowly  and  automatically. 

Rods:     Held  securely  by  the  angle  steel. 

Finish:    Special  quality  black  Japan. 

Installation:  Plain  bolts  for  installing  are  furnished  with  each  rack.  Lag  bolt  expansion  shields  for  brick  or  cement  walls 
are  extra. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-eight 


Warren  Automatic  Hay  Racks  —  Continued 

Sizes,  Weights 


Figure 

Height 

1210 

36  in. 

1211 

36  in. 

1212 

36  in. 

1213 

42  in. 

1214 

30  in. 

1215 

36  in. 

1216 

(Pony) 

30  in. 

1217 

(Sheep 

or  Calf) 

24  in. 

1218 

(Cow 

Pen) 

36  .n. 

Full  Back 

Width 

Weight 

42  in. 

49  pounds 

48  in. 

54  pounds 

36  in. 

44  pounds 

36  in. 

51  pounds 

54  in. 

53  pounds 

72  in. 

85  pounds 

30  in. 

33  pounds 

54  in. 

42  pounds 

36  in. 

42  pounds 

Open  Back 

Figure 

Weight 

1210'  , 

40  lbs. 

I2III2 

45  lbs. 

mi'A 

37  lbs. 

nwA 

41  lbs. 

nwA 

44  lbs. 

1215^ 

74  lbs. 

12161^ 

26  lbs. 

12171^ 

35  lbs. 

(Open  Front  only  for  Cow  Pen) 


Rack  in   Feeding  Position 


No  means  of  feeding  hay  has  ever  been 
devised  that  so  totally  eliminates  all  waste. 
The  horse  pulls  out  a  mouthful  at  a  time 
and  the  rack  gradually  closes  as  the  hay 
is  eaten  out,  the  hay  being  held  with  suffi- 
cient firmness  to  keep  it  from  falling  out  at 
the  sides  of  the  rack,  but  not  so  tightly  that 
the  horse  cannot  eat  comfortably. 

The  value  of  this  automatic  closing  fea- 
ture cannot  be  over-estimated,  for  without 
it  no  rack  can  completely  prevent  the  waste 
of  hay.  By  means  of  the  opening  and 
closing  device,  the  rack  can  be  instantly 
locked  open  and  conveniently  filled.  After 
being  filled  the  catch  is  released,  allowing 
the  rack  to  close  automatically  against 
the  hay  by  means  of   the  springs. 

The  rack  is  practically  self-cleaning,  as 
dirt  or  chaff  sifts  through  to  the  floor.  In 
the  old-fashioned  type  of  manger  this  chaff 
and  dirt  settles  to  the  bottom  of  the  manger 
and  is  often  breathed  into  the  nostrils  of 
the  horse  while  eating.      Failure  to  clean 


The  material  used  is  the  best  steel, 


out  the  old-fashioned  manger  also  causes  much  hay  to  be  spoiled  by  this  chaff  and  dirt  mixing  with  the  hay. 

Another  advantage  in  the  Automatic  Hay  Rack  is  the  removal  of  danger  to  the  animal's  eyes. 
Under  the  old-fashioned  feeding  arrangements  often  a  horse's  eyes  have  been  injured  by  straws  while  the 
animal  was  rooting  in   the  manger.     This  cannot  occur  with    the  Automatic  Rack. 

There  are  no  sharp  corners  or  points  on  which  an  animal  can  injure  itself.  Still  another  advantage  is 
the  free  circulation  of  air  about  the  horse's  head  at  all  times.  This  feature  can  best  be  appreciated  during 
hot  weather. 

The  Automatic  Hay  Rack  is  constructed  to  withstand  rough  usage, 
and  as  there  are  no  "wearing  points"  the  rack  will  last  a  lifetime. 

The  Automatic  Hay  Rack  is  made  in  many  sizes  and  in  different  styles  to  meet  every  requirement,  but 
the  principle  is  the  same  in  each.  All  styles  have  the  same  strong,  almost  indestructible  steel  con- 
struction with  the  automatic  spring-press  feature. 

Open  Back  Construction 

Warren  Automatic  Hay  Racks  with  Open  Back  Construction,  should  be  specified  when  to  be  attached 
to  wood,  cement,  or  brick  surfaces. 

The  principal  advantage  of  having  these  racks  furnished  without  the  upright  wiring  in  the  back  is  to 
eliminate  the  possibility  of  hay  accumulating  between  the  back  of  the  rack  and  the  wall.  While  the 
regular  full-back  rack  can  be  used,  the  Open  Back  is  preferable  and  can  be  furnished  at  a  reduced  cost. 

When  our  racks  are  to  be  installed  in  stables  where  the  windows  have  been  set  exceptionally  low,  our 
22-inch  Open  Back,  as  illustrated  in  Fig.  1210' j-A,  can  be  used  to  advantage.  This  allows  the  rack  to 
be  installed  flush  with  the  under  side  of  the  window  sill  where  it  will  not  interfere  with  the  opening  and 
closing  of  the  window. 


Page  One  hundred  ninety-nine 


FrmrTTn 


i^^^^^^ 


Open  Back  Construction     Continued 


Fig.  1210H-A 
Manner  of  Attachment  to  Brick  Wall 


Fig.  I2IOI2-A  illustrates  our  improved 
method  of  attaching  Open  Back  Racks  to 
brick  or  cement  walls.  This  is  done  by  means 
of  steel  clamps  which  are  adjustable  up  and 
down  between  the  angle  iron  uprights  at  either 
end  of  the  frame. 

In  new  construction  bolts  or  2  x  4s  are 
usually  set  in  the  wall  to  which  these  clamps 
are  attached.  If  bolts  are  used  they  must  be 
spaced  the  proper  distance  apart  lengthwise. 
Complete  measurements  with  full  information 
will  be  furnished  upon  request. 

Where  the  walls  are  already  constructed 
the  frame  may  be  as  securely  attached  with 
expansion  bolts. 

The  vertical  adjustment  of  the  clamps 
allows  for  any  up-and-down  variation  in  the 
spacing  of  either  the  2x4s  or  bolts. 

See  page  199,  for  sizes  in  which  the  Open 
Back  Racks  can  be  furnished. 


Operation  of  Racks  and  Feeding 

Loft  and  Front  Aisle  Feeding 

Filling  the  rack  from  front  aisle  is  illustrated  in  Fig.  1221.  Here  the  back 
is  the  movable  portion  and  operates  the  same  as  the  front  in  other  installations. 
The  locking  open  device  and  the  releasing  is  the  same  as  illustrated  and 
described  on  foregoing  pages.  When  filled  and  released  it  occupies  but  a  small 
amount  of  the  aisle  space.  The  heavy  spring  pressure  holds  the  hay  to  the 
front  feeding  surface  and  keeps  it  within  easy  reach  of  the  animal  until  entirely 
consumed. 


In  stables  arranged 
for  feeding  the  hay 
from  the  loft,  our 
racks  may  be  used 
with  exceptional  ad- 
vantage and  are  very 
conveniently  filled  as 
shown  in  illustration. 
Chutes  are  not  neces- 
sary as  the  opening  of 
the  rack  is  sufficiently 
wide  to  catch  the  hay. 
Where  the  ceilings  are 
exceptionally  high,  we 
suggest  the  use  of 
Special  Hay  Rack, 
which   has   greater 


height. 


Fig.  1221 
Filling  from  Front  Aisle 


Page  Two  hundred 


Filling  Rack  from  Loft 


Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack^ — ^Fig.  1225 


Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack 


Specifications 

No.  1225-A.  Small  size:  24  in.  wide  by  30 
in.  high  by  16  in.  deep.    Weight,  31  pounds. 

No.  1225-B.  Medium  Size:  30  in.  wide  by 
30  in.  high  by  16  in.  deep.  Weight,  37 
pounds. 

No.  1225-C.  Large  Size:  42  in.  wide  by  30 
in.  high  by  16  in.  deep.     Weight,  44  pounds 

Upright  bars  are  }  2-i"ch  rods,  set  3  J^  inches 

apart. 
Main  frame  and  cross  bars  are  1x34  inch  size. 

Where  a  heavy,  strong  hay  rack  is 
desired  to  attach  to  the  wall,  and 
the  spring-press  feature  is  not  essen- 
tial, this  rack  can  be  recommended. 
It  is  being  used  in  thousands  of 
barns  and  is  giving  complete  satis- 
faction from  the  standpoint  of  con- 
venience,  sanitation,   and  durability. 

The  construction  is  such  that  the 
rack  is  almost  indestructible.  The 
upright  rods  are  ' 2-inch  size,  spaced 
3''4  inches  apart — just  the  right  dis- 
tance to  make  feeding  convenient, 
but  not  so  far  apart  that  the  hay  will 
work  out.  The  cross  rod  near  the 
top  of  the  rack  adds  greatly  to  the 
strength  and  rigidity. 


Wrought  Iron  Corner  Hay 
Rack  — Fig.  1226 


Specifications 

Height,  35   inches. 

Projects  out  from  corner,  24  inches. 

Uprights  are  heavy  }  o-inch  rods,  spaced  3J2  inches  apart. 

Weight,  27  pounds. 


Our  Fig.  1226  Wrought  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack  is 
a  strong,  durable  rack  that  will  stand  hard  usage.  It 
is  suitable  for  either  side  of  stall.  The  cross  bar  adds 
greatly  to  the  strength  and  rigidity  of  rack.  We 
recommend  this  rack  for  convenience,  durability  and 
sanitation.  It  is  one  of  the  biggest  selling  hay  racks 
ever  put  on  the  market. 


Wrought  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack 


Page  Two  hundred  one 


trnnrmnTnTTnTrnrmTin: 


Extended  Hay  Rack  For  Hay  Chute— Fig.  1227 

(Flat  Wall) 


Specifications 

No.   1227.     Height,  5  feet;  width,  33  inches;  extends  18  inches 

from  wall. 
Uprights    are    heavy    J  2-i"ch    rods,    spaced    4    inches    apart. 
Main  frame  and  cross  braces  are  of    1x3^  inch  size. 
Weight,  57  pounds. 

No.    1227' 2-     Height.  5  feet  6  inches;  width,  42  inches;  extends 

19  inches  from  wall. 
Uprights  are  heavy    '  2-i'^ch   rods. 
Main  frame  and  cross  brace,    li 
Weight,  67  pounds. 

This  rack  is  long  enough  to  reach  to  the  average 
mow,  and  where  used,  there  is  no  opportunity  for 
hay  to  be  scattered  on  the  stall  floor  while  being 
filled.  This  advantage  soon  pays  for  the  additional 
cost  of  this  rack  over  lower  racks  in  the  average 
barn.  More  hay  can  be  put  into  this  rack  at  one 
feeding,  thus  saving  some  labor. 

The  rack  is  strong  and  substantial  and  adds  greatly 
to  the  good  appearance  of  the  barn.  It  is  cross 
braced  and  heavy. 


1-J 

! 

L\ 

— ^  i 

,; 

j 

1         i          ' 

i     1     ' 

™  : 

i 

i 

1 

/ 

\ 

t 

mi 

|P 

^^^    . 

Fig.  1227 

Extended  Corner  Hay  Rack 
For  Hay  Chute-  Fig.  1228 

(Corner  Rack) 
Specifications 

No.    1228.     One  size  only. 

Made  either  for  right  or  left  corner  of  stall.      Cut  shows    left    hand.       (In 

ordering  be  sure  and  state  whether   rack   is   to   be   used  in   right   or   left 

hand  corner  of  stall.) 
Height,  5  ft.  6  inches. 
Projects  20  inches  from  corner. 
Uprights:  Heavy    J  2-'"ch   rods. 
Main  frame  and  cross  brace,    lx'4'   inch   rods. 
Weight,   38  pounds. 


Like  Fig.  1227  this  rack  is  high  enough  to  be  filled  from  the 
mow  without  wasting  any  hay.  It  is  made  either  for  right  or 
left  corner  of  stall.      Illustration  shows  left    hand    corner    style. 

The  heavy  cross-braced  construction  of  this  rack  is  a  guarantee 
of  its  durability.     It  should  outlast  the  barn. 


Fig,  1228 


Page  Two  hundred  two 


smm^^MM 


^ 


F-AIRFIEL D.   IOWA 


Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay 
Rack  — Fig.  1229 

(Without  Crossbar) 

Specifications 

No.  1229-A.     Small  Size:     24  in.  wide  by  30  in.  high  by  16 

in.  deep.     Weight.  29  pounds. 
No.  1229-B.     Medium  Size:     30  in.  wide  by  30  in.  high  by 

16  in.  deep.     Weight,  36  pounds. 
No.  I229-C.     Large  Size:     42  in.  wide  by  30  in.  high  by  16 

in.  deep.      Weight,  40  pounds. 
Upright  bars  are   '  2-inch  rods  set  3J^  inches  apart. 
Main  frame  is  1x34  in-  bars. 

This  is  a  duplicate  of  our  Fig.  1225  rack,  except  that 
it  does  not  have  the  supporting  cross  bar  below  the  top 
of  the  main  frame.  It  is  a  strong,  dependable  rack, 
made  in  standard  sizes. 


Fig.  1229 


Wrought  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack 
Fig.  1230 

(Without  Crossbar) 

Specifications 

One  size  only.     Projects  out  from  corner  24  inches. 

Height,   35   inches.     Uprights,  heavy   J  2-'"ch   rods  spaced   33-2 

inches  apart.     Main  frame,   1x^^  inch  bars. 
Weight,  25  pounds. 

This  is  a  duplicate  of  our  Fig.  1226,  except  that  it 
does  not  have  the  extra  bar  near  the  top  of  the  rack. 


Fig.  1231 


Fig.  1230 

Cast  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack 
Fig.  1231 

Specifications 

One  size  only.     Projects  out  from  corner  23  inches. 
Width,  24  inches:  height,  28  inches. 
Uprights  are  spaced  4  inches  apart. 
Uprights  are  oval    }2^^i  inch  bars. 
Weight,  22  pounds. 

This  rack  provides  a  very  satisfactory  corner  feeding 
arrangement  at  a  \ovf  price.  Under  ordinary  condi- 
tions it  should  last  a  lifetime. 


Page  Two  hundred  three 


ZlSty^r^  FAIRFIELD. "lOWA 

Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Box — Fig.  1232 

(Warren  Patent) 


Fig.  1232 
Specifications 

Construction:  Body  of  18-gauge  Wood's  refined  cold-rolled  steel,  reinforced  around  the  top  with  a  steel  band.  All 
corners  are  welded,  making  box  rigid.  All  parts  galvanized  to  make  them  rust  proof.  Two  rods  set  across  Inside  of  box 
act  as  braces  and  prevent  waste  of  feed. 


Installation:  Box  sets  in  a 
heavy  1 3  ^xj^  inch  steel  frame, 
to  which  it  is  attached  at 
each  end  with  heavy  ma- 
chine bolts  which  form  pivots 
on  which  the  box  swings  when 
it  is  tilted  for  cleaning.  Can- 
not be  tilted  by  horse. 

Attachments:  Steel  clamps; 
one  end  brace,  and  lag  bolts 
for  installing  are  furnished 
with  each  box.  If  manger  is 
to  be  set  away  from  corner  of 
stall,  an  extra  supporting 
brace  should  be  ordered. 
Where  box  is  to  be  attached 
to  brick  or  cement  wall,  ex- 
pansion shields  will  be  needed, 
for  which  a  small  extra  charge 
will  be  made. 

Showing  how  box  tips  on  pivots  for  cleaning;   also  shows  cross  rods  which  act  as 
braces  and  prevent  feed  waste 

Sizes  and  Weights 


(Box  made  in  three  sizes) 


No.  1232-A 
No.  1232-B 
No.  1232-C 


Length 
20  in. 
20  in. 
14  in. 


Width 

12  in. 

13  in. 
12  in. 


Depth 
7  in. 
9  in. 
7  in. 


Weight 
20  lbs. 
22  lbs. 
14  lbs. 


Nos.  A  and  B  are  recommended  for  horses.    No.  C  is  recommended  for  ponies. 


Page  Two  hundred  four 


^^:k^§:LUiiL^k;k 


FAIRriELO 


Showing  amount  of  space  an  average  feed  occupies  in  the 
Standard  Size  Box 


Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Boxes — Continued 

(Warren  Patent) 

Our  Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Box  was  devised 
for  the  man  who  wants  the  best.  It  is  more 
sanitary,  more  durable,  more  convenient,  and 
of  neater  appearance  than  any  other  all-metal 
feed  box  on  the  market. 

This  box  is  practically  indestructible.  It  is 
made  of  heavy  material  and  in  a  most  substan- 
tial manner.  The  body  is  constructed  of  1 8- 
gauge  Wood's  refined  cold-rolled  steel,  and  is 
reinforced  around  the  top  with  a  steel  band. 
No  rivets  are  needed  in  the  construction,  as 
special  double  seaming  machinery  is  used. 

The  most  essential  and  exclusive  feature  in 
the  feed   box  is   the  convenient  arrangement 

for  tilting.  Near  the  front  of  the  box  on  each  end,  a  heavy  machine  bolt  is  attached  to  box  and  mounting 
frame.  (See  Illustration.)  This  bolt  acts  as  a  pivot,  and  the  box  can  be  turned  entirely  over  and  cleaned 
out  before  each  feeding.  As  the  rounded  corners  of  the  inside  of  the  box  make  it  difficult  for  dirt  to  accu- 
mulate,   the   box   is   always    in  a    sanitary  condition. 

All  seams  and  pores  are  filled  when  the 
box  is  galvanized,  thus  creating  a  smooth 
surface,  with  no  cracks  or  crevices  to  afford 
breeding  places  for  disease  germs. 

The  advantage  in  having  such  an  easily 
cleaned  feed  box  is  self  evident  to  the  man 
who  knows  how  quickly  the  ordinary  feed 
box  will  accumulate  dirt  and  dust,  which, 
mixed  with  the  slobberings  of  the  horse 
makes  a  most  unhealthful  condition.  Where 
bran  mash  and  other  quickly  fermenting 
feeds  are  used,  the  need  of  an  easily  cleaned 
Frame  in  which  box  sets  box  is  still  more  apparent. 

Preventing  Feed  Waste 

Illustration  shows  the  space  an  average  feed  occupies  in  the  box.  It  also  shows  position  of  the  two 
rods  or  cross  bars  that  prevent  the  animal  from  rooting  out  and  wasting  grain.  It  is  estimated  that  a 
horse  will  root  out  and  waste  from  10  to  15  per  cent  of  the  grain  when  fed  in  an  ordinary  box.  This 
saving  alone  would  make  the  purchase  a  good  investment,  even  without  the  sanitary  features. 

The  round  sloping  bottom  of  box  and  the  cross  rods  allow  the  grain  to  be  well  distributed,  and 
provide    a  check  on  the  too  rapid  eaters. 

Sizes  of  Boxes 

No.  A  box  is  considered  standard  for  use  in  the  average  stable.  It  has  a  capacity  of  about 
yi  bushel,  and  the  average  feed  occupies  the  space  below  the  cross  bars. 

No.  B  box  has  a  total  capacity  of  about  a  bushel,  and  where  the  feeding  is  very  heavy,  and  bulky 
feed  is  used,  it  is  recommended. 

No.  C  is  built  exclusively  for  use  in  pony  stables. 


The  Louden  Machinery  Co..  Charles  City.  Iowa,  July  15,  1916 

Fairfield,  Iowa. 
Gentlemen : 

Yours  of  the   I4th  inst.,   received.     Concerning  barn  equipment  purchased  of  you  last  year,  wash  to  say  that 
so  far  as    I    can   see  it   is  very  satisfactory  and  everything  in  smooth  working  condition  on  both  farms.      Certainly 
it  has  been  a  saving  in  labor  to  the  tenants  for  with  no  more  help  they  are  caring  for    nearly    twice    the    stock. 
Kindly  send  me  the  catalog  you  mention  as   I   may  need  some  more  equipment  later  on. 

Arthur  L.  Olds. 


Page  Two  hundred  five 


Fig.  1234 

Patent  Slow-Feed  Corner 
Manger— Fig.  1234 

Specifications 

Size:  17x17x6  inches  deep.  Each  manger  has  7  cells,  each 
holding  one  pint.      Total  capacity.    15   quarts. 

Finish:      Either  japanned,   galvanized,  or   enameled. 

Weight,  each,   32   pounds. 

If  you  have  a  horse  that  eats  too  fast,  here  is  the  prevention. 

The  illustration  shows  how  the  manger  is  divided  into  sep- 
arate cells.  These  divisions  make  it  difficult  for  a  horse 
to  bolt  the  grain.  They  also  prevent  the  wasting  of  feed, 
as  the  animal  cannot  root  grain  over  the  edges  of  the  box. 


Fig.  1235 

Roll  Front  Corner  Manger 
Fig.  1235 

Specifications 

Dimensions:   17x17x10  inches  deep. 

Construction:     Cast    iron,  with    roll    front    as    feed    guard. 

Installation:     Attach  to  wall  in  corner  with  screws  or  nails. 

Finish:     Japanned,    galvanized,   or  enameled. 

Weight.    33   pounds. 

This  is  a  large,  roomy,  waste-preventing  corner  feed  manger. 

The    manger,    being   cast  in  one   piece,   is  without  seams  or 

cracks  and  crevices  to  hold  dirt.  ,       r     <      \.       \ 

The  roll  front,  which  extends  over  the  front  side  of  the  bowl 

makes   it    impossible   for    the    horse   to  drag   the  feed  out. 


Fig.  1236 


Fig.  1237 


Flange  Front  Manger— Fig.  1236  Wall  Manger-Fig.  1237 


Standard  Size:      16xl6x9>2  inches  deep. 

Construction:  Cast  iron,  with    flange    on    inside  of  bowl  to 

prevent  feed  waste. 
Installation:     Attach   to  corner  walls  with   screws  or  nails. 
Finish:     Japanned,  galvanized,  or  enameled. 
Weight,  24  pounds. 

Large  Size:  17x17x10  inches  deep.  Weight,  28  pounds. 
This  is  a  very  popular  type  of  waste-preventing  comer  manger. 
The  flange  extends  from  one  wall   side  to  the  other,  and  no 

grain  can  be  dragged  out  with  the  nose. 


Page  Two  hundred  six 


Standard  Size:      18x12x8  inches  deep. 

Construction:     Cast  iron,  with  feed  flange  on  inside  edges 

of  front  and   two  sides. 
Installation:     Attach  to  wall  with  screws  or  nails.      Can  be 

furnished  on  special  orders  with  detachable  wrought  iron 

attachment  to  fasten  to  wall  so  manger  can  be  removed 

at  pleasure. 
Finish:      Japanned  only. 
Weight.   30   pounds. 

Large  Size:     24x14  by   11    inches  deep.  ,      ,     ■ 

Construction,  installation,  and  finish  same  as  Standard  size. 
Weight,  40  pounds. 


frrrmmn 


TheLOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


^/i  inch  mesh.  No.  14  wire 
I  inch  mesh,  No.  14  wire 
1  inch  mesh.  No.  1  3  wire 
1  /^  inch  mesh,  No.  1  3  wire 
I  M  inch  mesh.  No.  12  wire 


Wire  Window  Guards 
Fig.  1251 

Louden  Wire  Window  Guards  will  keep  an  animal 
from  severely  cutting  itself  in  a  broken  window  when 
excited.  All  windows  near  horses'  heads  should  have 
guards.  A  Guard  hke  the  one  illustrated  is  a  com- 
plete protection.  Factories,  garages,  and  even  private 
residences  are  often  equipped  with  these  guards  as  a 
measure  of  safety. 

In  ordering,  always  give  exact  overall  size  you 
want  Guards  made,  i.  e.  extreme  outside  dimensions 
from  out-to-out  of  wires  clinching  around  the  frame. 
For  "Diamond"  Mesh  Guards,  please  state 
which  is  the  height. 

Our  Wire  Window  Guard  can  be  furnished  in  the 
diamond,  diagonal,  or  square  mesh.  The  illustration 
shows  the  diagonal  mesh.  All  of  the  guards  are  well 
made,  and  strong.  The  usual  size  of  the  round  rod 
frame  is  ,\  inches;  |<-inch  is  sometimes  used  for  small 
light  guards  and  a  ^8-inch  frame  can  be  furnished  for 
large  ones. 

Window  guards  are  made  in  the  following  designs: 


I  5^  inch  mesh.  No.  1  I  wire 

I  Ji  inch  mesh.  No.  10  wire 

1  ^-i  inch  mesh.  No.  9  wire 

2  inch  mesh.  No.  10  wire 
2  inch  mesh,  No.  9  wire 
2       inch  mesh.  No.  8  wire 


I  J4  inch  mesh.  No.  1  1  wire 
1 1^  inch  mesh.  No.  1  3  wire 
13^  inch  mesh.  No.  12  wire 
1  J^  inch  mesh.  No.  1  1  wire 
1  J4  inch  mesh.  No.  10  wire 


Iron  Drinking  Fountain      Fig.  1238 


Specifications 

Construction:  Iron.  Heavy,  substantial, 
and  sanitary.      Equipped  with  overflow. 

Dimerisions:  I  foot  9  inches  high  by  3  feet 
10   inches  long   by  2   feet    I    inch  wide. 

Base  3  feet  4  inches  by  1  foot  6  inches. 

Weight.  315  pounds. 


Fig.  1238 
J     .^'f-  'P^  shows  a  neat,  artistic  and  convenient  fountain  for  outdoor  or  indoor  use.     It  is  particularly 
desirable  for  a  location  where  horses  are  to  be  watered  from  all  sides.     It  is  strong  and  heavy,  and  so  con- 
structed that  when  water  is  splashed  over  the  edge  it  will  run  off  the  fountain  quickly. 
This  fountain  needs  no  bracing  of  any  kind  to  insure  its  standing  in  pla 


lace. 


Page  Two  hundred  seven 


Louden  Horse  Stall  Partition  — Fig.  1241 


The  stall  illustrated  is 
an  excellent  type.  The 
space  between  the  planks, 
and  the  open  steel  partition 
permit  free  circulation  of 
air,  and  the  heavy  plank 
and  steel  construction 
would  make  it  extremely 
difficult  for  a  horse  to  in- 
jure itself  in  any  way. 

The  difference  in  cost 
of  constructing  a  durable 
stall  and  a  "makeshift"  is 
very  little.  Horses  are 
often  badly  injured  by  be- 
coming frightened  in  a 
poorly  constructed  stall. 
The  insurance  alone  is 
worth  the  investment,  to  say 
nothing  of  the  pride  a  man 
enjoys  in  having  a  neat, 
attractive  barn;  and  a  Lou- 
den Stall  is  as  cheap  as 
lumber. 

Figure  1241  shows  an 
excellent  method  of  con- 
structing a  horse  stall. 

Different  requirements 
and  personal  opinions  will 
vary  the  type  of  floor  insta 


Fig.  1241 


^U     M„.^^f  floor  in>;talled   SO  we  will  leave   that   to   individual  choice   without   recommendation  or 
L'SeltnTe^ctt  to  :rthS  ''^-^^  -^°  '^^  ^""^^  °^  ^'^^  '' 

the  rear  of  the  stall.  .  ^ 

The  Stall  Partition  above  illustrated  consists  ot:  ■  u     \      \.    \ 

4  Ten-inch  Planks,  9  feet  long.      (We  do  not  furnish  planks.) 
1  Extra  Heavy  Steel  Stall  Post,  Fig.  1246- A,  page  211. 

1   Steel  Stall  Partition,  Fig.   1242.  ,  r       .u  "U     ^     f^J 

Any  style  of  stall  partition  shown  on  following  pages  can  be  substituted  for  the  one  illustrated. 
When  desired  the  wood  sides  of  stall  may  be  constructed  of  upright  boards,  in  which  case  our  Cap  Rail 
with  grooveX  wood,  should  be  used  on  the  upper  edge,  and  our  grooved  Base   Rail   should    be   used 

to  hold  lower  end  of  boards  firmly.  ,      ,         ^  c-       mac         ^  U     o„k=Hi-,,i-«.r1 

Where  bottom  of  post  is  to  be  attached  to  fioor,  Fig.   1245  post  may  be  substituted, 


■■"*»>■.,,,, 


f:^,f 


W.  B.  Ayer's  Horse  Barn,  McMinnville,  Oregon. 
Louden  Planned   and  Equipped. 


Horse  Barn  at  St.  Charles  Seminary,  Cartha- 

gena,  Ohio.      Louden  Planned  and 

Equipped. 


Page  Two  hundred  eight 


Louden  Horse  Stall  Guards 


The  construction  and  design  of  Louden  Horse  Stall  Guards  are  in  keeping  with  the  durable,  clean-cut 
simplicity  of  all  Louden  Goods.  The  plainer  and  simpler  barn  and  stable  equipments  are  made,  the  easier 
it  will  be  to  keep  the  stable  sanitary. 

Our  Wrought  Steel  Guard  is  an  excellent  type  of  construction,  and  quite  popular.  The  two  styles 
,;hown  on  this  page  and  top  of  next  page  are  the  same  general  construction,  except  that  Figs.  1242-B  and 
1242-C  have  both  ends  square  to  attach  to  rear  stall  posts.  The  ^2-inch  round  steel  uprights  are  firmly 
set  in  the  heavy  channel  steel  frame,  making  substantial  and  durable  guards. 

All  three  forms  of  construction  offered  are  very  popular  and  will  give  satisfaction  in  every  respect.  All 
guards  are  carried  in  standard  stock  sizes,  but  any  size  may  be  had  upon  special  order. 


One  end  only 
attaches  to  upright  post 

f 

n 

^ 

m 

i 

r 

j 
i 

f 

1 

i 

f 

i 

!              1 

A 

^ 

PI 

ri 

f 

f 

/ 

1 

1 

i 

i 

Li 

_ 

H 

_ 

L 

_ 

.__ 



J . 

J 

^ 

I  -^ 

_  ^ 

; 

X— 

^^ 

Li 

Fig.  1242-A 
Specifications 

Dimensions:     2  feet  high  by  6  feet  long.     Can  be  made  any  size  upon  special  order. 
Uprights:      j2-mch  round  steel  rods  set  apart  3}o  inches  at  centers,  in  steel  channel  frame. 
Main  Frame:      IJ  4x1  J  2  inch  channel  steel,  with  steel  plate  top  rail.     Finish:     Black  enamel. 
Weight:     37  pounds. 


Both  ends  of  this  guard  can 
be  attached  to  posts 


Fig.  1242-B 
Specifications 

Dimensions:     2  feet  high.     Can  be  made  any  length  or  size  upon  special  order. 

Main  Frame:      U4XI  ^2  inch  channel  steel,  with  steel  plate  on  top  rail. 

Uprights;     3  2-mch  round  steel  rods  set  apart  3J^  inches  at  centers,  in  steel  channel  frame. 


Page  Two  hundred  nine 


FrTTiTnn 


^-^im'j"^^'*-*'^^^'^'**-'*^'^*^ 


Louden  Horse  Stall  Guards — Fig.  1242 — Continued 

Our  Fig.  1242-C  Stall  Guard  is  used  principally  for  box  stalls.  It  is  of  the  same  general  construction 
as  the  two  guaids  described  on  previous  page,  but  is  made  any  length  to  order.  A  box  stall  can  be 
made  light  and  well  ventilated  by  using  this  guard. 


:;^<Jii.-V.-iP---T-: 


Fig.  1242-C 
Specifications 

Dimensions:  2  ft.  high  by  any  length  desired. 

Uprights:  }2-'"ch  round  steel  rods  set  apart  3?  2  inches  at  centers,  in  steel  channel  frame. 

Main  frame;   1  '4XI32  '"ch  channel  steel  with  steel  plate  on   top  rail. 

Finish:  Black  Enamel. 

Weight:  6  lbs.  per  lineal  foot. 

Louden  Salt  Rolls  and  Holders — Fig.  1061 

Specifications 

Size  of  Salt  Roll:  Length.  4  inches;  diameter.   5  inches.     Weight.   5'^  pounds. 

Holders  are  fitted  with  grip  clamps  for  use  on  tubular  steel  stalls,  or  with 
connections  for  attaching  by  means  of  screws  or  bolts  to  vertical  timbers 
of  wood  stalls.      Can  be  furnished,  also,  for  horizontal  timbers.      (Fig.  1061.) 

Louden  Salt  Rolls  are  the  most  convenient  and  economical, 
and  altogether  the  best  way  of  salting  cattle  and  horses. 

The  Steel  Holder  is  attached  to  the  steel  stall  frame  by 
means  of  a  grip  clamp  or  can  be  fastened  to  a  wood  stall  frame 
with  bolts  or  screws. 

Heavy  Harness  Hook — Fig.  1260 

Specifications 


Fig.  1061 
Salt  Roll  attached  to  wood  manger 


Dimensions:  13-inch 
extension  from  wall  by 
8-inch  total  up  and 
down.  Weight,  each,  7 
pounds. 

Construction:  Heavy 
iron.  Diameter  of  round 
iron  of  hook,  I  inch. 
Will  hold  heaviest  har- 
ness safely  and  securely. 

Heavy  Harness  Hooks  are  far  superior  to  ordinary 
spikes  or  wood  pegs  to  hold  harness.  When  hung  on 
one  of   these  hooks  the  harness   cannot  slip  off. 

The  13-inch  size  is  generally  used,  but  we  can  fur- 
nish 8  and   10-inch  lengths. 


Page  Two  hundred  ten 


Stall  Partition  Top  and  Base  Rails — Fig.  1245 


Fig.    1245 

Specifications 

Dimensions:   3  inches  diameter,  with  groove  to  hold  2-inch  board.      Any  length  furnished.      Finish;  Japanned. 
Weight,   per  lineal  foot.  4 '4  pounds. 

In  constructing  a  horse  stall,  rails  for  the  top  of  the  wooden  partition  to  hold  the  stall  guard  in  place 
are  quite  necessary  to  get  a  first-class  job.  A  base  rail  is  often  necessary  to  hold  bottom  of  partition  lined 
up  properly.     Specifications  on  both  cap  and  base  rail  are  the  same. 


Fig.  1246 


Stall  Posts— Fig.  1246 

Specifications 

Construction:  Heavy  wrought  steel  tube.       Cannot  be  broken  like  cast  iron  posts.      Pro- 
vided with  grooved  flange  to  receive  stall  boards. 

NOTE:  Heights  given  are  to  lower  part  of  the  cast  top.      In  ordering,  be  sure  to  give  exact 
dimensions;  also  size  number. 

No.   1 .     Heavy:    5  inches  diameter,  5  feet  4  inches  high.     Weight,  each.  160  pounds. 

No.  2.   E>.tra  Heavy:     G'^-inch  diameter,  5  ft.  4  in.  high. 

Weight,  each,  205  pounds. 

Finish:  Ball  tops  can  be  finished  on  sf>ecial  order  in  solid  brass,  bronze,  or  nickel  plate  at 
small  extra  cost. 

This  post  is  far  superior  to  anything  of  its  kind  on  the  market,  and  makes 
the  construction  of  a  neat,  sanitary  stall  partition  an  easy  task. 

The  Improved  Heavy  Steel  Post  has  a  flanged  groove  to  hold  the  ends  of 
the  boards  in  the  stall  partition,  making  it  a  simple  matter  to  remove  or 
replace  boards  when  desired. 

The  post  is  neat  and  symmetrical,  and  greatly  helps  the  appearance  of  any 
barn. 

When  desired,  posts  may  be  purchased  long  enough  to  reach  the  ceiling, 
thus  combining  stall  post  with  building  support. 
...         Figure  I  246  shows  post  to  set  on  floor.     Figure  1246-A  shows  the  post  with 
lib    6-inch  extension  to  go  into  cement. 


Fig.  1246-A 


Heavy  Post  Socket — Fig.  1247 


Fig.  1247 


Specifications 

For  6-inch  wood  posts.      Construction:      Heavy  iron. 
Diameter  of  flange:  2)4  inches. 

Height  Weight 

"iYi  inches  15  pounds 

5J^  inches  21  pounds 

8       inches  27  pounds  pj        1948 

Figure  1247  shows  a  substantial,  heavy,  firm  socket 
for  a  6-inch  wood  post.     It  is  made  in  three  heights — 3>^,  5>^,  and  8  inches.       Wood  posts  rot   at   the 
bottom,  and  by  using  this  socket  the  post  will  last  longer,  as  well  as  keep  in  line  all  the  time. 

Socket  Plate  for  Post— Fig.  1248 

Specifications 

For  6-inch  wood  post.      Dimensions  of  plate:    6x12  inches.     Attaches  to  floor  with  screws.      Weight,  each,  20  pounds. 

Figure  1248  shows  a  type  of  socket  used  to  hold  6-inch  post  firmly.     It  is,  however,  neither  as   firm 
nor  sanitary  as  the  Heavy  Post  Socket. 


Page  Two  hundred  eleven 


^^^^^m 


This  is  a  type 
riage  or  automobile  wash 


Cess  Pools 

The  advantages  and  conveniences  in  having  good  sanitary  drains  for 
the  stable  can  hardly  be  over-estimated,  and  most  new  barns  that  are 
being  erected  are  now  equipped  with  good  drainage  facilities. 

We  show  but  three  types  of  Cess  Pools  on 
this  page,  but  are  prepared  to  furnish  special 
curved  heads  for  gutters,  "T"  gutter  con- 
nections, and  other  supplies  of  like  nature, 
upon  special  order.  Manger  and  Gutter 
Drains  are  also  shown  on  pages  148  and  149. 

Heavy  Carriage  Wash  Cess 
Pool  — Fig.  1261 

Specifications 

Construction:     Heavy    iron.     Spigot    outlet    extra 

long  for  calking. 
Dimensions:      Head.    10  inches  square. 
Outlet:      4  inches.      Finish:   Plain. 
Weight,  43   pounds. 
NOTE:      Same  Cess   Pool    can    be    furnished    with 

short  spigot. 

of  Drain  Head  with  Cess  Pool  especially  designed  for  a  car- 
It  has  an  extra  long  Spigot  Outlet.     Fig.  1261  shows 


Fig.  1261-A 


Drain  Head  raised  to  show  Bell  Trap.    Fig.  1 261  -A  shows  same  in  closed  position 


Heavy  Stable  Cess  Pool  —  Fig.  1262 

Specifications 


Construction:     Heavy  iron.     Has  grating 

and  bell   trap.     Made  in  three  sizes. 

Dimensions:  Weigiit 

15' 2  inches  square,  with 

4  inch  square  outlet  60  lbs. 
Same    size,    with    extra 

long  spigot  70  lbs. 

12   inch    square,  with  4- 

inch  outlet  49  lbs. 

This  is  a  standard  stable  Cess 
Pool,  and  is  considered  the  best  of 
its  type.  It  has  the  grating  and 
Bell  Trap  shown  in  illustration. 


^7  MiDCBSDCST^ 
£7£/AI££JKJK]U 


Fig.  1262-A 


Fig.  1262 


Basin  Cess  Pool  —  Fig.  1263 

Specifications 

Construction:      Heavy  iron,  standard  type,  with  bell  trap. 


Dimensions 
4x  4  inches 
6x  6  inches 
8x  8  inches 
9x  9  inches 

12x12  inches 


Weight 

3   pounds 

5  pounds 
10  pounds 

I6J2  pounds  (heavy) 
18  pounds  (heavy) 


Fig.  1263 


Figure  1263  shows  a  very  popular  design.  The 
rounding  base  of  this  Cess  Pool  makes  installation 
very  simple. 


Page  Two  hundred  twelve 


nOi^:i:^Tt>tiL^^ 


Self -Acting  Oats  Cleaner 
Fig.  1250 


(Higbie  Patent) 


Specifications 


Construction:     See  general  description. 

Sizes:     The  Self-Acting  Oats  Cleaner  is  made  in  three  sizes. 

Styles:     When  ordering  specify  whether  discharge  of  oats  is  to  be  on 

right  or  left  side.      Illustration  shows  right  side  delivery. 
Construction  and  Finish:     Made  of  kiln-dried  whitewood.  with  brass 

trimmings,  natural  finish,  and  with  two  coats  of  varnish.      When 

desired  to  have  the  finish  correspond  with  the  stable  finish,  specify 

kind  of  wood  to  be  used,  and  ask  for  quotations. 
No.  A 

Dimensions:    6  ft.  3  inches  high  by  15  inches  wide  by  8'  2  inches 
deep. 

Capacity:      J 2  bushel  per  minute. 

Weight,  each,  65  pounds. 


6  ft.  3  inches  high  by    16  inches  wide  by  1  1  inche 


No.  B 

Dimensions 

deep. 

Capacity:      I  bushel  per  minute. 
Weight,  each,  80  pounds. 


No.  C 

Dimensions:      6  ft.  3  inches  high  by    16  inches  wide  by  12  inches 

deep. 
Capacity:     2  bushels  per  minute. 
Weight,  each,  82  pounds. 

Special  sizes,  suitable  for  any  stable  can  be  furnished  on  special 
order. 

Clean  oats  aid  in  maintaining  the  normal  health  of 
the  horse  and  the  favorable  results  obtained  by  feeding 
oats  that  have  been  drawn  through  a  self-acting  oats 
cleaner  are  recognized  by  every  veterinarian. 

The  Higbie  Oats  Cleaner  is  a  valuable  asset  to  the 
modern  stable.  It  will  remove  one  bushel  of  dirt  and 
other  foreign  matter  from  every  25  to  30  bushels  of  oats. 

This  oats  cleaner  is  hand  built  and  assembled  in  the 
most  durable  manner  possible.  It  is  constructed  of  kiln- 
dried  whitewood,  with  brass  trimmings,  natural  finish, 
and  with  two  coats  of  varnish. 

Extending  from  top  to  bottom  of  the  cleaner  are  eleven 
downwardly  inclined  screens,  operating  in  pairs.  Below 
each  pair  of  screens  is  located  a  table  elevated  in  the 
center,  thus  the  oats  fall  alternately  from  the  screens  to 
the  table;  the  object  of  these  tables  being  to  divide 
the  oats  and  to  give  them  a  very  rapid  impetus  before 
dashing  to  the  next  set  of  screens.  This  system  has 
shown  a  great  improvement  over  the  old  way  of  running 
the  oats  down  a  single  set  of  screens  all  together. 

The  operating  valve  is  located  in  the  top  of  the  cleaner; 
directly  below  this  is  a  large  coarse  grate  which  permits 
the  oats  to  pass  through  but  throws  off  everything  larger, 
such  as  stones,  sticks,  glass,  or  any  coarse  accumulations. 
Below  this  grate  are  the  zig-zag  screens  and  the  tables 
extending  through  the  entire  cleaner  to  the  discharge 
spout  below.  The  dirt  box  is  in  the  base  of  the  cleaner 
and  may  be  emptied  through  a  hand-hole  in  the  bottom. 


Page  Two  hundred  thirteen 


LOUDEN  BARN   PLANS 

PAGE 

Get  Plans  Before  You  Build 217 

Why  Build  From  Plans? 217 

Louden  Plans 217 

The  Advantages  of  a  Well  Planned  Barn 218 

The    Individual   Plan 218 

Our  Complete  Architectural  Service 219 

Our  Charges 219 

Louden  Book  of  Barn  Plans 220 

Barn   Designs 220-22 1 


H 


=THE  LOUDEN  ARCHITECTURAL  DEPARTMENT 


GET   PLANS   BEFORE  YOU  BUILD 

Guess  work  in  building  a  barn  is  not  only  slow,  wasteful  and  expensive,  but  it  results  in  a  barn  that 
is  a  constant  source  of  dissatisfaction  as  long  as  it  stands. 

You  expect  that  barn  you  are  planning  to  build  to  serve  you  the  rest  of  your  life — then  why  not  get 
it  right?  The  few  days  or  weeks  you  spend  getting  ready  for  a  right  start  will  be  regained  by  the  time  the 
building  is  completed,  and  the  few  dollars  you  spend  for  plans  will  be  saved  many  times  over  during  its 
construction. 

But  most  important  of  all,  you  will  have  a  barn  that  exactly  meets  your  needs — convenient,  labor- 
saving,  properly  lighted  and  ventilated,  free  from  waste  space — in  fact,  the  ideal  barn  for  you,  and  one 
you  will   take  pleasure  and  pride  in. 

No  other  organization  of  architects  is  so  well  equipped  to  give  you  expert  advisory  service  and  prac- 
tical barn  plans  as  the  Architectural  Department  of  The  Louden  Machinery  Company. 

Unlike  most  architectural  concerns,  its  services  are  limited  strictly  to  one  line  of  work.  Agricultural 
Architecture.  Every  man  on  the  staff  is  a  Farm  Building  Specialist.  As  a  result  they  are  more  com- 
petent to  advise  you  on  your  farm  building  problems  than  any  organization  of  general  practicing  architects. 

Our  staff  of  skilled  architects  and  builders  is  supplemented  by  an  auxiliary  of  75  practical  field  men 
who  know  barns  from  basement  to  ridgepole. 

There  is  probably  a  field  man  in  your  territory.  Write  us  about  your  building  plans  and  we  will 
have  him  see  you,  if  possible,  and  talk  the  matter  over  with  you.  There's  no  expense  —  no  obligation. 
We're  glad  to  confer  with  you  about  the  matter  that's  nearest  our  hearts  —  the  building  of  better  barns 
—  and  we  sincerely  believe  we  can  benefit  you. 


Why  Build  From  Plans? 


Complete  plans  will  protect  you  against  waste  of  material  due  to  guessing  and  working  in  the  dark 
as  to  measurements. 

They  will  protect  you  against  waste  of  time,  due  to  delay  necessary  in  figuring  our  details  of  construc- 
tion, while  the  work  is  in  progress. 

They  will  protect  you  against  the  misunderstandings  which  so  often  arise  between  owner  and  builder. 
Even  the  most  reliable  builder  may  misinterpret  your  desires,  and  go  wrong,  when  no  complete  plans  are 
followed. 

They  will  help  you  to  adjust  your  loss  in  case  of  fire. 

Louden  Plans 

will  effect  a  valuable  saving  in  material  and  labor.  They  will  expedite  your  building  operations.  They 
will  give  you  the  advantage  of  the  knowledge  of  experts,  gained  through  many  years  of  study  and  expe- 
rience. They  will  correctly  convey  your  wants  to  your  builder.  They  will  help  him  to  give  you  efficient 
service. 

Every  plan  we  execute  is  of  the  highest  order.  Our  great  organization  enables  us  to  give  you  the 
very  best  service  at  a  very  moderate  price. 


„,      ,        ,       „,     ,.  Guelph.  North  Dakota,  Sept.  7.  1916. 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

Fairfield,    Iowa. 
Gentlemen: 

You  will  remember  I  built  a  barn  last  Fall,  following  your  Architectural  Department's  plan  No.  3404,  and  will 
say  I  am  so  very  well  pleased  with  the  barn,  although  it  has  been  rather  expensive  to  build  in  this  country. 

I  am  so  well  pleased  with  the  ventilating  system,  and  the  barn  is  so  light  and  pleasant,  and  the  air  so  fresh  and 
cool  in  summer,  and  so  warm  and  dry  in  winter,  that  it  has  been  pleasing  to  me  to  think  I  carried  out  your  instruc- 
tions in  full. 

Very  truly  yours, 

Chas.  B.  Denison. 


Page  Two  hundred  seventeen 


FAIRFIELD.   IOWA 


The  Advantages  of  a  Well  Planned  Barn 


The  primary  feature  of  a  well  planned  dairy  barn  is  its  provision  for  cow  comfort.  Practical  tests 
have  proved  conclusively  that  the  cow's  physical  comfort  is  a  big  factor  in  her  milk  yield. 

The  well  planned  dairy  barn  has  a  ventilating  system  that  ventilates.  The  number  and  areas  of 
vent-flues  necessary  are  scientifically  determined.  The  window  area  is  carefully  calculated,  accordmg  to 
the  number  of  animals  to  be  housed.  Floors,  mangers,  and  gutters  are  designed  for  durability  and  clean- 
liness.    The  cows  are  provided  with  light,  airy  stalls  that  give  them  utmost  freedom  and  comfort. 

The  well  planned  barn  is  convenient  for  the  workmen,  as  well  as  comfortable  for  the  cows  and  other 
livestock,   an   extremely   important  feature  where  help  is  scarce  and  high-priced. 

It  is  so  designed  and  equipped  that  no  labor  is  lost.  The  silo  is  located  where  it  is  convenient  for 
feeding,  as  well  as  for  filling.  The  feed  bins  are  located  where  they  can  be  reached  with  the  fewest  number 
of  steps.  The  manure  pit  is  located,  if  possible,  so  that  it  is  not  necessary  to  push  a  load  uphill.  The 
barn  is  equipped  with  labor-saving  appliances  that  increase  the  profits  derived  from  it,  and  transform  barn 
drudgery  to  pleasant  labor. 

Louden  barn  plans  meet  every  requirement  for  the  comfort  of  the  stock  and  the  convenience  of  the 
workman.  Economy  in  construction  is  carefully  sought,  so  far  as  it  does  not  interfere  with  strength,  dura- 
bility, or  sanitation. 

Write  us  about  your  building  plans.     We  can  give  you  valuable  suggestions. 


The  Individual  Plan 


When  you  build  a  barn  you  build  for  a  definite  purpose  and  that  purpose  should  be  kept  constantly 
in  mind.  Whether  you  build  for  horses  or  cows,  for  dairying  or  feeding,  for  the  storage  of  feed  or  farm  imple- 
ments, or  for  a  combination  of  these,  the  correct  amount  of  space  should  be  allowed  for  each  purpose,  the 
total  of  which  will  determine  the  size  of  the  building.  ... 

This  rule  seems  simple  enough,  but  becomes  complicated  when  economy  of  construction  is  taken 
into  consideration.  A  barn  40  feet  square,  with  1600  square  feet  of  floor  space,  may  meet  your  require- 
ments satisfactorily.  It  may  be  found,  however,  that  a  barn  32x50,  having  the  same  floor  area,  will  meet 
your  requirements  equally  well,  and  will  cost  less  on  account  of  requiring  lighter  construction  for  a  32-foot 

span,  than  for  a  40-foot  span.  ,,,,  ,  ,,  j-i 

In  such  matters  as  this  our  trained  architects  and  builders,  thoroughly  versed  in  the  requirements 
of  the  modern  barn,  can  be  of  real  service  to  you. 

Our  Architects  Make  Every  Plan  an  Individual  Study 

In  working  out  a  plan  for  you,  they  will  make  a  study  of  your  special  requirements  and  shape  the 
plan  to  meet  your  needs.  They  will  take  into  consideration  climatic  conditions  in  your  territory,  current 
local  prices  of  building  materials,  transportation  problems,  and  labor  conditions.  If  you  so  desire  an 
architect  will  be  sent  to  confer  with  you  and  look  over  the  building  site,  in  order  to  niake  more  intelligent 
suggestions  in  regard  to  drainage,  disposal  of  manure,  and  general  arrangement  of  buildings. 

We  are  prepared  to  work  out  complete  plans  for  you,  from  the  ground  up,  or  we  will  take  your  own 
ideas  and  work  them  out  in  detail  for  your  builder.  In  either  case  the  services  will  be  rendered  free  or  at 
a  very  moderate  cost. 


University  Farm,  St.  Paul,  Minn..  Dec.  29,  1915. 
The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

St.  Paul.  Minn. 
Gentlemen:  ■   ,      i   •  ■  •      •  •  ..• 

Am  pleased  to  acknowledge  receipt  of  the  book  of  Barn  Plans.     You  are  certamly  domg  a  real  service  m  assisting 

farmers  to  construct  and  equip  for  true  economy. 

Yours  truly, 

R.  M.  Washburn, 
Asso.  Prof,  of  Dairy  Husbandry 


Page  two  hundred  eighteen 


[)li|ff^<;«)ii>^>^^^i>^MiliMjLij 


Our  Complete  Architectural  Service 

It  is  the  purpose  of  The  Louden  Architectural  Department  not  only  to  prepare  practical  barn  plans, 
but  to  assist  barn  owners  in  the  solution  of  any  problems  that  may  arise  in  regard  to  farm  buildings  or 
equipment. 

They  will  give  you  expert  advice  on  lighting,  ventilating,  heating,  concrete  work,  strength  of  materials, 
fire  protection,  drainage,  disposal  of  manure,  and  upon  all  problems  of  sanitation  or  hygiene. 

We  employ  a  landscape  architect  whose  work  is  principally  upon  large  estates,  so  arranging  the 
farm  buildings  that  they  will  harmonize  with  one  another  and  with  their  surroundings. 

Whether  your  farm  is  large  or  small,  the  buildings  should  be  arranged  with  due  regard  to  landscape 
architecture  and  a  general  pleasing  effect.  Your  farm  buildings  can  display  individuality  and  good  archi- 
tectural design,  and  at  the  same  time  be  practical,  modern  and  convenient,  separately  and  collectively. 

Do  not  hesitate  to  consult  us  on  any  question  of  Farm  Mechanics. 
What  is  the  capacity  of  my  silo? 
What  size  silo  will    I    need   for   my   herd? 
How  much  concrete  will  I  need  to  build  a  water  tank? 
What  size  post  will  be  necessary  to  support  an  overhead  grain  bin? 

What  size  pulley  will  be  required  to  run  a  cream-separator  or  a  churn  at  proper  speed? 
What  is  a  good  formula  for  whitewash? 

We  can  help  you  answer  many  such  puzzling  questions,  and  will  be  glad  to  do  so  without  charge  and 
without  obligating  you  in  any  way. 

Our  Charges 

The   Louden    Architectural    Department    is    in    reality    a    Service    Department   of   The    Louden 
Machinery  Company.     Consequently  a  large  part  of  the  valuable  service  it  renders  is  free. 
We  make  no  charge  for: 

Advisory  service  covering  farm  building  or  any  branch  of  Agricultural  Engineering. 

Preliminary  sketches  and  suggestions,  including  suggestive  floor  plans  and  complete  explanation  of 

each  feature. 
A  personal  visit  from  any  Louden  field  representative  who  may  be  within  your  territory. 
For  any  of  the  following  services  we  make  a  moderate  charge,  based  on  the  amount  of  time  and  effort 
involved. 
A  special  trip  by  one  of  our  architects  to  confer  with  you  on  building  problems  or  land-scape 

architecture. 
Complete  building  plans  and  specifications,  including  all  information  required  for  the  completion  of 

the  building. 
Bills  of  Material,  on  which  prices  are  quoted  separately. 


Albion,   Idaho.  Sept.  I,  1916. 

The  Louden  Machinery  Company, 

Fairfield,  la. 
Gentlemen : 

We  wish  to  thank  you  for  the  helpful  suggestions  and  plans  you  so  kindly  furnished  in  the  building  of  our  horse 
barn,  and  we  honestly  believe  we  have  one  of  the  best  barns  in  the  state  of  Idaho,  and  one  that  would  be  a  credit  to 
any  community  or  farm. 

Yours  very   truly. 

Ervine  Dewey  &  Sons. 

By   G.  M.  Dewey. 


Page  Two  hundred  nineteen 


rAIRriELD.  tOWA.'^^. 


"Louden  Barn  Plans" 


Louden  Barn  Plans  is  a  112-page  book  of  practical  barn  plans  and  building  information,  com- 
piled by  the  Louden  Architectural  Department.  It  contains  the  best  of  the  building  ideas  gathered  in 
fifty  years  of  specializing  along  this  line  by  William  Louden  and  his  able  assistants. 

It  shows  seventy-two  representative  designs  for  dairy  and  general  purpose  barns,  and  other  farm 
buildings,  with  full  description  and  estimated  cost  of  each.  It  treats  in  a  clear  understandable  way  the 
subjects  of  grading,  drainage,  concrete  work,  framing,  lighting,  ventilating,  strength  of  materials — every 
problem  in  fact  that  confronts  the  barn  builder. 

If  you  expect  to  build  or  remodel  a  barn,  now  or  later,  you  need  this  book.  We'll  gladly  mail  you  a 
copy  on  request. 

Don't  wait  till  you're  ready  to  build — get  it  now! 


Design   1840  —  For  Dairy  Barn 


Description 

This  barn  is  126  ft.  wide  by  140  ft.  long. 

The  foundation  wall  extends  18  inches  above  the 
ground  and  the  frame  sidewalls  are  16  ft.  high. 

The  lower  story  is  93^2  ft.  high,  the  hay  mow  is 
22  ft.  high  from  floor  to  hay  carrier-track,  the  vertical 
sidewalls  in  the  hay  mow  are  6  ft.  high,  and  the 
ridge  of  roof  is  36  ft.  above  the  ground. 

The  foundation  wall  is  of  concrete  construction, 
and  the  entire  floor  of  the  lower  story  is  of  concrete 
construction. 

Capacity  of  mow,  3 1  5  tons  loose  hay. 

The  barn  above  the  foundation  is  of  plank-frame 
construction  and  has  a  clear  hay  mow  without  posts. 

The  cost  is  estimated  to  be  $9800.00. 


Price  of  Complete  working 
plans  and  specifications 
for   Design   1840    $QC  00 


Page  Two  hundred  twenty 


Design  1808  —  For  6  Cows  and  4  Horses 


r 


ZG'-o' 


hORJSE. 


I^L.<S 


r^niD/rs/c-    A.LLEiy' 


nANGrKR 


cow 


57;  V- 


LvS 


r 


LITTER    /\LLE.^ 


^ 
fO 


Description 

This  barn  is  26  ft.  wide  by  32  ft.  long. 

The  foundation  wall  extends  12  inches  above  the 
ground,  and  the  frame  sidewalls  are  1 6  ft.  high. 

The  lower  story  is  10  ft.  high,  the  hay  mow  is 
19  ft.  high  from  floor  to  hay  carrier-track,  the  vertical 
sidewalls  in  the  hay  mow  are  6  ft.  high,  and  the  ridge 
of  roof  is  33  ft.  above  the  ground. 

The  foundation  wall  is  of  concrete  construction, 
and  the  entire  floor  of  the  lower  story  is  of  concrete 
construction. 

Mow  capacity,  1 4  tons  loose  hay. 

The  barn  above  the  foundation  is  of  plank-frame 
construction  and  has  a  clear  hay  mow  without  posts. 

The  cost  is  estimated  to  be  $1000.00. 


Price    of   Complete    work- 
ing   plans    and    specifica- 
tions  for    Design 
1808 


$5.00 


Page  Two  hundred  twenty-one 


,MikimniH*-i 


FAIRFIE L D.   I  O VVA 


INDEX 

Hay  Tools 


Page 

Bracket  Pulley  Holder 52 

Cable  and  Cable  Fittings 29 

Cable  Pulleys 50 

Check  Pulley 51 

Comb  Pulley 51 

Combination  Rack  Irons 55 

End  Stop  Block  (for  Double  Bead  Track) 8 

Floor  Hook 52 

Floor  Pulley 50 

Forks 

Balance  Grapple  (6  tine) 38 

Balance  Grapple  (4  tine) 39 

Balance  Grapple  (Elxtra  Large  6  tine) 39 

Harris  Double  Harpoon 40 

Nellis  Single  Harpoon 40 

Rocker-Bar 40 

Triple  Harpoon 40 

Fork  Clevis 45 

Fork  Pulleys 51 

Guide  Pulley  (for  Round  Barn) 27 

Handy  Hay  Sling  Holder 44 

Hang  Hook  (jointed)  for  Wood  Track 31 

Hang  Hook  (Straight)  for  Wood  Track 31 

Hay  Carriers  (Fork) 

Louden  Junior 8-9 

Louden  Senior 10-11 

Louden  Junior  for  Wood  Track 13 

Louden  Junior  for  Cable  Track 28 

Hay  Carriers  (Sling) 

Carry-All 14-17 

Iowa 18-19 

Reversible,  for  Wood  Track 21 

Cross  Draft  (for  Slings  or  Fork) 22-24 

Cross  Draft  for  Round  Barn 25-27 

Hay  Rack  Clamps 54 

Hoist  (Power) 33-35 

Hoisting  Singletree 53 

Ice  Tongs 55 


Page 

Lightning  Rope  Hitch 52 

Link  Track  Hangers 30 

Nails  (Barbed) 31 

Off-Set  Hinge 53.  67 

Power  Hoist 33-35 

Pulleys 49-51 

Pulleys  (Fork) 51 

Pulleys  (Guide)  for  Round  Barn 27 

Pulleys  (Parallel  Sling) 48 

Pulleys  (Self  Locking  Sling) 46 

Pulleys  (Sling  Binding) 45 

Pulley  Holders  (For  Steel  Track) 52 

Pulley  Hooks 52 

Rack  1  rons 55 

Rafter  Brackets 31 

Rafter  Hooks 52 

Registering  Heads 47 

Ridgepole  Brackets 31 

Rope  (Wire). 29 

Rope  Hitch  (Lightning) 52 

Rope  Hook  (Swivel) 52 

Rope  Hook  (Cross  Draft) 24 

Rope  Swivel  (Junior  Carrier) 9 

Round  Barn  Outfit 25-27 

Singletree  (Hoisting) 53 

Slings 

Carry-All 42 

Standard 43 

Three-Rope 43 

California 43 

Handy  .     •  44 

Sling  Couplings 44 

Sling  Holder  (Side  Trip) 44 

Sling  Pulleys  (Parallel) 48 

Sling  Pulleys  (Self-Locking) 46 

Sling  Binding  Pulleys 45 

Snatch  Pulley  Block 51 

Splice  Clamps  for  Steel  Track 30 

Spreader  Attachment  for  Singletrees 53 

Stake  Holders 55 

Track  (Steel) 30 

Track  (Cable) 29 

Track  Hangers 30-3 1 

Wire  Stretcher 56 


Door  Hangers  and  Specialties 


Page 

Bird  Proof  (Non-Adjustable)  Door  Hanger 60-62 

Bird  Proof   (Adjustable)   Door  Hanger 63 

Bird  Proof  (Covered) 64 

Door   Latch 67 

Door  Stop 67 

Double  Bracket  for  Bird  Proof  Track 63 


Page 

Double  Strap  Door  Hanger 66 

Double  Tread  Door  Hanger 65 

Garage  Door  Hanger 59 

Standard  Jointed  Door  Hanger 66-67 

Stay  Rollers 67 


Stalls,  Pens,  Etc. 


Page 

Alley  Gates 132 

Anchor  Bolts  (Helical) 1 39 

Building  Columns  (Reinforced) 135 

Bull  Pens 126-128 


Page 

Cow  Stalls  (See  Stalls) 

Calf  Pens '^°''m 

Cement  Tools '01 

Chain  (Stanchion  Side) 85 


Pago  Two  hundred  twenty-two 


^^^^^M 


Stalls,  Pens,  Et 


Page 

Chain  (Throat) 85 

Connections  (for  Posts  and  Columns) 1 38 

Cow  Pens 124-125 

Cupolas 141-142 

Curb  Gauge 101 

Cut-Out  Form 101 

Drills  (Star) 101 

Drinking  Bowls 115-119 

Elxpansion  Bolts 139 

Fittings  (Stall  and  Pen) 1 36 

Gates  (Alley) 132 

Gates  (For  Pen  Gates,  See  Pens) 

Gauge  (Curb) 101 

Grip  Clamps 1  36-1  39 

Gutter  Drains 148,  212 

Hog  Pens 129-131 

Holders  (Name  Plate) 94 

Holders  (Salt  Roll) 94,  210 

Hook  Bolts 139 

Manger  Divisions  (Spring  Balance) 102-104 

Manger  Drains 147-148 

Mangers  (Spring  Balance) 104-106 

Mangers  (Bull  Pen) 126-128 

Mangers  (Calf  Pen) 120-121 

Mangers  (Cow  Pen) 124-125 

Manger  Templets 101 

Name  Plate  Holders 94 

Paint 149 

Partitions  (Stall) 79 

Pens  (Bull) 126-128 


c. — Continued 

Page 

Pens  (Calf) 120-121 

Pens  (Cow) 124-125 

Pens  (Hog) 129-131 

Salt  Rolls 94.  210 

Salt  Roll  Holders 94.  210 

Spring  Balance  Mangers 104-106 

Spring  Balance  Manger  Divisions 102-104 

Stalls  (Cow) 

Cross  Braced  Double  Post 76-78 

Triple  Post 82-83 

Side  Post 84-85 

Single  Post 87 

Go-Right 88-90 

Simplicity 91 

Adjustable 92-93 

Stanchions 

Tubular  Steel 109-1 1 1 

Wood-Lined 112 

Quick  Adjustable 113 

5-ln-l 114 

For  Bull  Pen 127 

Stanchion  Anchor  (Adjustable) 96 

Stanchion  Holder  (Adjustable) 96 

Step  Back 97 

Throat  Chains 85 

Ventilators 142-143 

Water  Bowls 115-119 

Window  Ventilators 146 


Carriers 

Litter,  Feed,  Milk  Can,  Merchandise,  Etc. 


Page 

188 
182 
175 
175 
175 


Anchors  for  Wire  Track 

Automatic  Track  Opener 

Brackets  (Beam) 

Brackets  (Rafter) 

Brackets  (Ridge  Pole) 

Combination  Track  (For  Quick  Out  and  Self-Acting 

Carriers) 1 65- 1 66 

Curves  (For  Steel  Track) 183 

Curves  (For  Wire  Track) 189 

End  Stop  Block 175 

Feed  Carriers 

Double  End 167 

Standard 168 

Single  End  (Adjustable  Frame) 169 

Single  End  (Wire  Track) 169 

Side  Delivery 1  70 

Feed  Truck  (Floor) 171 

Harness  Carrier 171 

Litter  Carriers 

Emancipator 157-159 

Standard 161 

Quick  Out '. 162 

Self  Acting 163-164 


Merchandise  Carriers . 


Page 
172 


Milk  Can  Carriers 

Platform  Carrier  (Steel  Track) 173 

Platform  Carrier  (Wire  Track) 1  73 

Railroad  Carrier  (Steel  Track) 173 

Railroad  Carrier  (Wire  Track) 174 

Suspended  Carrier  (Wire  Track) 1  74 

Platform  Hay  Carrier 1  74 

Posts  For  Supporting  Track  in  Yard 1 79 

Removable  Section  For  Doors 183 

Screw  Eyes 175 

Swinging  Crane 1 85- 1 86 

Switches  (Steel  Track) 181 

Switches  (Wire  Track) 189 

Tension  Bolts 1 88 

Track  (Combination) 165-166 


Track  (Steel) 

Track  (Wire) 

Track  Brace 

Track  Hangers 

Track  Plans 

Track  Support  (Outside). 


191 


175 
187 
182 
175 
•193 
178 


Page  Two  hundred  twenty-three 


FAIRFIELD.   I  O Wa""^J|^ 


Horse  Stable  Equipment 


Page 

Cess  Pools 212 

Drinking  Fountains 207 

Feed  Boxes 204-206 

Harness  Carriers 171 

Harness  Hooks 210 

Hay  Racks 

Automatic  (Warren  Patent) 198-200 

Wrought  Iron  (Center  and  Corner) 201-203 

Cast  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack 203 


Oats  Cleaner  (Higbie  Patent). 
Partition  Cap  and  Base  Rails. 

Posts 

Post  Sockets 

Salt  Rolls  and  Holders 

Stall  Guards 

Window  Guards 


Page 

213 
211 
211 
211 
210 
208-210 
207 


The  Louden  Guarantee 
Page  149 


Page  Two  hundred  twenty-four 


Rand  McNaliv  &  Co. 


FORM    410   25M     1 


PRICE  LIST 

LOUDEN  PRODUCTS 


Effective  January  2,  1917 


(All  Prices  Subject  to  Change   Without  Notice) 


This  Price  List  Applies  to 
Catalog  No.  46  Only 

S^STON  OFFlQf 

'^'  12  SO.  MARKFt  St. 
H.  E.  WRIGHT  &  SONS 


The   Louden  Machinery  Company, 


1047-1053    Broadway, 
Albany,  N.  Y. 


Factory  and  General  Office 

Fairfield,  Iowa 

Branch  Houses 

1051-59  West  35th  St., 
Chicago,   IlL 


2288   University   Ave., 
St.  Paul,  Minn. 


PRICE  LIST 
Hay  Tools 

(Subject  to  Change  Without  Notice) 

Goods  marked  "*"  are  trade  goods  and  are  not  warranted  by  this  company. 

p             F'  Price 

T        430     Junior  Steel  Track  Fork  Carrier each  $  7.00 

8         1123     Trip  Block  for  Junior  Steel  Track  Fork  Carrier each  .50 

8  523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block .^ : each  .ji 

9  C430-A     Rope  Swivel  for  Junior  Steel  Track  Fork  Gamer...  each  .50 

9           830     Junior  Fork  Carrier  with  Oscillating  Engine  Trucks each  8.50 

10         1100     Louden   Senior  Hay  Fork  Carrier    ^--^r^ V f^'''^  ^■ 

1124     Louden  Senior  Hay  Fork  Carrier  for  Cable  Draft  Rope   (not 

illustrated)    each  9.00 

10         1123     Trip  Block  for  Senior  Hay  Fork  Carrier each  .bU 

10  523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block each  24 

13           441     Junior  Fork  Carrier  for  Wood  Track - each  I.WJ 

13  1127     Trip  Block  for  Junior  Fork  Carrier  for  Wood  Track each  .50 

14  1103     Carry-All  Hay  Sling  Carrier each  15.25 

11  1123     Trip  Block  for  Carry-All  Hay  Sling  Carrier each  .50 

14           523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block each  .24 

18           821     Iowa  Hay  Sling  Carrier each  13.00 

18         1123     Trip  Block  for  Iowa  Hay  Sling  Carrier each  .bU 

18         1128     Adjustable  Trip  for  Iowa  Hay  Sling  Carrier each  .&U 

18  523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block each  .24 

19  529     Louden   Weight   Return --^ , each  i.&u 

20  315     Reversible  Hay  Sling  Carrier  for  Wood  Track each  13.00 

20         1130     Trip  Block  for  Reversible  Hay  Slmg  Carrier each  1.00 

20           435     Comb  Pulley  TierlToz  320 

20  383     Rope  Hook -:,-: ;; .• - ,v ^^      fj^;  itno 

21  817     Cross  Draft  Hay  Fork  and  Hay  Sling  Carrier  (for  slmgs) each  13.00 

Cross  Draft  Hay  Fork  and  Hay  Sling     Carrier     (for    wood 

track)               each  13.00 

21         1131     Release  Block  for  Cross  Draft  Carrier each  1.00 

21           523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block each  .^4 

21           383     Rope  Hook  ^  -^- : Per  do^-  3.20 

24  819     Three-part  Rope  Hitch  for  Cross  Draft  Carrier each  .90 

25  1104     Round  Bam  Hay  Sling  Carrier - eacn  ib.(o 

25         1131     Release  Block  for  Round  Barn  Sling  Carrier each  l.OU 

25           523     Double  Bead  End  Stop  Block -"-If^,  S9rt 

25          383     Rope  Hook  ...^-.- P^r  doz^  ■^f 

27         1135     Guide  Pulley  for  Round  Barn.. each  b.uu 

27  430y2     Junior  Round  Barn  Fork  Carrier each  iu.uu 

28  621     Junior  Hay  Fork  Carrier  for  Cable  Track  each  7.00 

28           801     Trip  Block  for  Junior  Carrier  for  Cable  Track each  l.UU 

28  C430-A     Rope  Swivel  for  Junior  Carrier -• eacn 

29  417     Galvanized  Steel  Wire  Rope   %-inch  diameter    I 

29  Galvanized   Steel  Wire  Rope   1/2 -inch  diameter    Vi!^^: 

29           418     Galvanized   Steel   Strand    Vs-inch   diameter i^rice 

Flexible  Wire  Draft  Rope  A-inch  diameter •-•  J 

Wire  Cable  Loop  Clamp   Per  doz- 

29  337  ¥2     Wire  Cable  Stop  CJamp    Per  doz.  3.00 

30  571 

30  550     space  uiamp  xui  uuuliic  uc<»u  kj.,^v-»  ...^-^- 

30           498     Standard  Two-part  Track  Hanger per  doz.  l.bu 


29  337     Wire  Cable  Loop  Clamp   Pe>"  doz.       4.00 

29  3371/2     Wire  Cable  Stop  Clamp    Per  doz 

30  571     Double  Bead  Steel  Track per  100  leet 

30  550     Splice  Clamp  for  Double  Bead  Steel  Track each 

30  498     Standard  Two-part  Track  Hanger per  aoz. 

30  500     Light  Two-part  Track  Hanger per  doz.       1.4U 

30  832     5-inch  Link  Track  Hangers Per  doz.       1.60 

31  780     Straight  Wood  Track  Hang  Hook,  14-inch   per  doz.       1.20 

31  781     Straight  Wood  Track  Hang  Hook,  16-inch   per  doz.       l.dO 


31  372     Jointed  Wood  Track  Hang  Hook,  14-inch per  doz.       2.00 

■60 
31  465     Malleable "RidgeTole"  Bracket.. per  doz.       1.00 


31  424     Improved  Malleable  Rafter  Bracket per  doz. 

31  425     Common  Malleable  Rafter  Bracket f!!  j^f- 


FAIRFIELD,  IOWA  Page  3 


Hay  Tools — Continued 

Price 

Side  Rafter  Bracket per  doz.  $  1.20 

Side   Beam   Bracket per  doz.  1.50 

Barbed  Chisel  Point  Steel  Nail per  pound  .16 

Single  Drum  Power  Hoist    each  62.50 

Triple  Drum  Power  Hoist   each  122.50 

6-tine  Standard  Size  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Fork each  11.00 

4-tine  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Fork each  9.35 

6-tine  Extra  Large  Balance  Grapple  Hay  Fork each  15.00 

Louden  Rocker  Bar  Hay  Fork each  3.75 

Triple  Harpoon  Hay  Fork each  5.00 

Harris  Double  Harpoon  Hay  Fork each  1.60 

31-inch  Harris  Double  Harpoon  Hay  Fork each  2.00 

Alfalfa  Double  Harpoon  Hay  Fork each  3.70 

Nellis  Single  Harpoon  Hay  Fork each  3.00 

6-foot  Carry-All  Hay  Sling each  7.00 

4-foot  Standard   Hay   Sling   each  3.20 

5-foot  Standard  Hay  Sling   each  3.80 

Three-rope   Hay   Sling each  4.00 

California  Hay   Sling each  5.00 

Louden  Hay  Sling  Coupling each  1.00 

Handy   Hay  Sling,  3  ropes    each  2.00 

Handy  Hay  Sling,  2  ropes    each  1.50 

Handy  Hay  Sling  Holder each  2.00 

Side  Trip  Sling  Holder each  2.00 

Self  Locking  Sling  Pulleys  with  Handy  Hay  Sling  Holder  At- 
tachment    per  pair  3.00 

Fork  Clevis  each  .50 

Sling  Binding  Pulley each  3.00 

Self  Locking  (right  angle)  Hay  Sling  Pulleys per  pair  3.00 

All  Registering  Heads each  .50 

Parallel  Hay  Sling  Pulleys per  pair  2.00 

Senior  Parallel  Hay  Sling  Pulleys  for  Wire  Draft  Rope..per  pair  3.00 

High   Grade  Knot  Passing  Pulley,  Wood  Sheave    per  doz.  7.00 

High  Grade  Knot  Passing  Pulley,  Iron  Sheave    per  doz.  8.00 

High  Grade  Draft  Pulley,  Wood    Sheave per  doz.  5.60 

High  Grade  Draft  Pulley,  Iron       Sheave per  doz.  6.60 

Mammoth  Pulley per  doz.  10.00 

Cable  Pulley,  7-inch  Iron    Sheave per  doz.  18.00 

Cable  Pulley,  8-inch  Sheave    per  doz.  25.00 

Upright   Floor  Pulley per  doz.  10.00 

Standard  Fork  Pulley each  1.00 

Senior  Fork  Pulley each  1.50 

Return  Pulley  per  doz.  3.00 

Comb  Pulley  per  doz.  3.60 

Check  Pulley  per  doz.  1.80 

Snatch  Pulley   Block per  doz.  11.00 

Cast  Frame  Knot  Passing  Pulley  per  doz.  4.00 

Cast  Frame  Draft  Pulley  per  doz.  3.20 

Wood  Frame  Reed  Pulley  with  Hook   per  doz.  4.00 

Wood  Frame  Reed  Pulley  with  Eye      per  doz.  4.00 

Floor  Hook,   %x7   inches per  doz.  1.40 

Rafter  Hook,   %x6  inches per  doz.  1.20 

Small  Hook,  1/2x31/2  inches per  doz.  1.00 

Double  Bead  Pulley  Hook each  .30 

Bracket  Pulley  Holder each  .60 

Lightning   Rope    Hitch per  doz.  3.20 

Swivel  Rope  Hook per  doz.  3.20 

Hoisting  Single  Tree each  1.60 

Spreader  Attachment  each  1.00 

Offset  Hinge  per  pair  .80 

No.  1  Hay  Rack  Clamps,  %xl4 per  doz.  sets  18.00 

No.  2  Hay  Rack  Clamps,   %xl6 , per  doz.  sets  19.20 

No.  3  Hay  Rack  Clamps,   %xl8 per  doz.  sets  20.40 

Combination  Rack  Irons per  set  4.20 


Page 

Fig. 

31 

675 

31 

725 

31 

373 

34 

965 

35 

1132 

38 

351 

39 

648 

39 

686 

40 

1137 

40 

350 

40* 

353 

* 

674 

* 

676 

40* 

356 

42 

984 

43 

666 

43 

668 

43 

600 

43 

324 

44 

516 

44 

1106 

717 

1106A 

44 

328 

44 

1106 

45  652-653 

45 

332 

46  330-331 

47 

48 

649 

48 

650 

49 

467 

49 

494 

49 

468 

49 

495 

50 

519 

50 

651 

50 

579 

50 

364 

51 

366 

51 

1139 

51 

359 

51 

435 

51 

360 

51 

623 

51* 

729 

51* 

522 

51* 

641 

51* 

642 

52 

389 

52 

390 

52 

391 

52 

470 

52 

348 

52 

367 

52 

383 

53 

344 

53 

345 

53 

349 

54 

645 

54 

54 

55 

593 

Page  4 THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 

Hay  Tools — Continued 

Price 

Louden  Improved  Stake  Holder per  doz.  $  4.20 

Louden  Common     Stake  Holder per  doz.  2.50 

Box  Rack  Stake  Holder per  doz.  2.50 

Pressed  Steel  Stake  Holder per  doz.  1.50 

Self-Opening-  Ice   Tongs,   13-inch per  doz.  12.50 

Self-Opening   Ice   Tongs,    17-inch per  doz.  13.00 

Self-Opening  Ice  Tongs,   21-inch per  doz.  13.50 

Louden  Stretcher  Hoist per  doz.  14.00 

Special  Garage  Door  Hangers per  set    6-foot  door  5.00 

Special  Garage  Door  Hangers per  set    8-foot  door  5.30 

Special  Garage  Door  Hangers per  set  10— foot     door  5.60 

Special  Garage  Door  Hangers per  set  12-foot  door  5.90 

Bird  Proof  Barn  Door  Track. per  100  feet  20.00 

Bird  Proof  Door  Hangers per  doz.  sets  20.00 

Supporting  Hangers  and  Brackets  for  Bird  Proof  Track,  per  doz.  1.50 

Adjustable  Bird  Proof  Hangers per  doz.  sets  24.00 

Double  Brackets  for  Bird  Proof  Track per  doz.  sets  3.00 

Covered  Bird  Proof  Door  Track per  100  feet  30.00 

Lag  Screws  for  Covered  Bird  Proof  Track per  100  pieces  2.45 

Double  Tread  Barn  Door  Hangers    per  doz.  13.80 

Double  Tread  Barn  Door  Track    per  100  feet  10.00 

Covered  Double  Strap  Barn  Door  Hangers per  doz.  sets  12.00 

Rigid  Barn  Door  Track per  100  feet  7.30 

Covered  Jointed  Bam  Door  Hanger per  doz.  12.00 

Sliding  Barn  Door  Latch per  doz.  3.70 

Screw  Adjustable  Stay  Roller per  doz.  2.00 

Slide     Adjustable  Stay  Roller per  doz.  2.00 

Off  Set  Hinges per  pair  .80 

Steel  Door  Stop per  doz.  1.40 

Louden  Silent  Salesman: 

Pitted  -with  Louden  Junior  Fork  Carrier each  13.60 

Pitted  with  Louden   Senior  Fork  Carrier  each  15.40 

Fitted  with  Iowa   Sling  Carrier  each  19.40 

Fitted  with  Carry-All  Sling  Carrier  each  21.60 


'age 

Fig. 

55 

398 

55 

398% 

55 

624 

55 

627 

55 

426 

55 

695 

55 

696 

56 

1268 

59 

1273 

59 

59 

59 

60 

911 

60 

902 

61 

961 

63 

1052 

63 

64 

1200 

65 

458 

65 

452 

66 

566 

66 

487 

66 

567 

67 

455 

67 

456 

67 

457 

67 

349 

67 

1205 

68 

FAIRFIELD,  IOWA 


Page  5 


Stalls,  Stanchions,  Mangers,  Animal  Pens  and  Sundry 
Dairy  Barn  Fittings 

Page      Fig.  Price 
76-77-78  812  Louden  Cross  Braced  Double  Post  Cow  Stall: 

Standard  812  Stall  complete,  as  specified $  8.00 

Standard  812  End  Section,  as  specified 4.00 

79  994     Louden  Stall  Partitions: 

Standard  Partition,  either  style,  as  specified 1.30 

Standard  Partition  as  above,  including  one  Floor  Flange 1.60 

Standard  Partition  as  above,  including  1  Floor  and  1  Wall 

Flange  1.90 

82  810     Louden  Triple  Post  Cow  Stall: 

Standard  810  Stall  complete,  as  specified 8.00 

Standard  810  End  Section,  as  specified 3.00 

84  959     Louden  Side  Post  Stall: 

Standard  9.59  Stall  complete,  as  specified 6.65 

Standard  959   End  Section,  as  specified 3.00 

85  1149     Louden   Stanchion  Side  Chain 25 

85         1149     Throat  Chains  with  Holders 60 

87  796     Louden  Single  Post  Cow  Stall: 

Standard  796   Stall  complete,  as  specified 5.50 

Standard  796  End  Section,  as  specified 2.60 

999]  Louden  Go-Right  Stall,  without  Manger: 

88-89            \          Go-Right  Stall,  complete  as  specified 7.75 

1000  J          Go-Right  End  Section,  as  specified 2.60 

91  951     Louden  Simplicity  Cow  Stall: 

Fittings  for  Simplicity  Stall,  as  specified $  3.80 

Fittings  for  Simplicity  End  Section  1.60 

Fittings  for  Simplicity  Stall  to  set  on  Wood  Floor,  extra 50 

Fittings  for  Simplicity  End  Section  to  set  on  Wood  Floor, 

extra  .50 

)  Louden  Adjustable  Stall,  complete  with  Individual  Manger,  as 

specified   25.00 

End  section  for  Adjustable  Stall  complete,  as  specified. 4.00 

Name  Plate  Holders,  with  Steel  Plate  4x15  inches .36 

Name  Plate  Holders  without  Steel  Plate.. 32 

For  Larger  Sheet,  each  square  foot  or  fraction .16 

Name  Plate  Holder  with  isinglass  and  blank  card .72 

Salt  Roll  Holder 48 

Salt  Rolls,  sold  in  dozen  lots  only,  f.  o.  h.  St.  Clair,  Mich... .per  doz.  2.00 
Adjustable  or  Alignment  Stanchion  Holder: 

For  Top  Rail,  as  specified .60 

Adjustable   Stanchion  Anchor .30 

Louden  Step  Back  1.25 

Louden  Cut-out  Form  .15 

Louden  Curb  Guage  .05 

Louden  Manger  Templet,  any  size  specified .25 

Louden  Cement  Tools: 

No.    1 each  .60 

No.    2 each  .60 

No.    4 each  .32 

No.    5 each  1.00 

No.    6 each  1.20 

101         1192     Star  Drills: 

%x8   each  .50 

%x8   each  .60 

%x8 each  .70 

%x8    each  .75 

104  Plate  14     No.  2  Individual  Manger  Divisions,  no  springs 2.00 

104  Plate  14     No.  3  Division,  Spring  Balance,  as  specified 3.05 

104  Plate  14     No.  4  Division,  Spring  Balance,  as  specified 3.30 

105  990     Louden  Spring  Balance  Galvanized  Mangers: 

Standard  Size  Mangers,  as  specified each  6.50 


92  948-949 

94 

935 

94 
94 

1182 
1056 

96 

1298 

96 
97 
101 
101 
101 
101 

1299 
1151 
970 
1074 
1013 

For  Galvanized  Stalls  and  Parts  Add  30%  F.  O.  B.  Cars,  Fairfield,  Iowa 


Page  6 THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 

Stalls,  Stanchions,  Mangers,  Etc. — Continued 

Page       Fig.  Price 

105  Large  Size  Mangers,  as  specified each  $  7.30 

Extra  per  manger  for  fittings  galvanized .60 

111  861     Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchions,  naked each  1.85 

861A     Louden  Tubular  Steel  Stanchion,  with   Guide each  1.95 

8610     Louden  Stanchion  with  Holder  and  Anchor each  2.25 

861B     Louden  Tubular  Stanchion,  with  Guide,  Holder  and  Anchor 2.35 

Guide  or  Hold-Open  for  Tubular  Stanchion each  .10 

Upper  or  Lower  Stanchion  Holder each  .20 

112  937     Louden  Wood-lined  Stanchion,    naked each  1.85 

Louden  Wood-lined  Stanchion  with   Guide each  1.95 

Stanchion  with  Holder  and  Anchor.. ......each  2.25 

Louden  Wood-lined  Stanchion  with  Guide,  Holder  and  Anchor..each  2.35 

Guide  or  Hold-Open  for  Wood-lined   Stanchion each  .10 

113  1159     Louden  Quick  Adju.stable  Stanchion: 

Stanchion,  Naked each  4.50 

Stanchion  with  Holder  and  Anchor each  4.90 

114  1161     Louden  5-in-l  Stanchion: 

Stanchion,    Naked each  2:50 

Stanchion  with  Holder  and  Anchor each  2.90 

115  1275     Gravity  Water  Bowl  with  Cover  and  Stall  Post  Attachments. ..each  2.50 

Gravity  Water  Bowl  without  Cover,  with  Stall  Post  Attach- 
ments   each  2.00 

Governing  Tank  for  Gravity  Water  Bowl,  galvanized each  6.60 

116  1274     Automatic  Sanitary  Drinking  Bowls,  per  Double  Bowl  complete ....  $  6.00 

Automatic  Sanitary  Drinking  Bowls   (right  or  left) each  3.00 

Clamps  for  Attaching  Supply  Pipe  to  Horizontal  Top  Rail each  .16 

120  1021     Louden  Calf  Pens: 

121  1022     Plain  Panel  per  lineal  foot 1.80 

For  each  Calf  Stanchion  built  in  panel,  extra 50 

Fittings  for  Gate — Hinges,  Latches,  etc 4.00 

Pipe  and  Fittings  for  Arch  Over  Gate 2.25 

Mangers  for  Calf  Pens,  per  manger 5.85 

124-125     995-996     Louden  Maternity  Pens: 

Curb  Construction,  per  lineal  foot 1.80 

Panel  Construction,  per  lineal  foot 2.05 

Fittings  for  Gate — Hinges,  Latches,  etc 4.00 

Pipe  and  Fittings  for  Arch  Over  Gate 2.25 

Tilting  Manger  12.60 

Stanchions  for  Cow  Pen  Built  into  Panel 3.00 

126  1164     Louden  Tubular  Steel  Bull  Pens: 

Tubing  and  Fittings  for  sides  of  pen,  per  lineal  foot 2.25 

Fittings  for  Gate — Hinges,  Double  Latch,  etc 5.00 

Pipe  and  Fittings  for  Arch  Over  Gate 2.25 

127  1165     Tiibing  and  Fittings  for  Regular  Corner  Manger  with  Stan- 

chion and   Manger 21.50 

128  1301     Special  Corner  Manger  -with  Louden  Outside  Feed  Manger 20.00 

128  1300     Outside  Manger  for  Bull  Pen  without  Stanchion 4.50 

Tilting   Manger  19.80 

Stanchion  for  Side  of  Bull  Pen,  not  including  top  rail 3.00 

129  1167     Louden  Tubular  Steel  Hog  Pens,  Fillers  spaced  4  inches: 

Plain  Panel,  per  foot 2.10 

'                    Swinging  Panel,     6-foot  section 19.00 

Swinging  Panel,     8-foot  section 23.10 

Swinging  Panel,  10-foot  section 27.35 

Fittings  for  Gate — Latches,  Hinges,  etc 4.00 

Pipe  and  Fittings  for  Arch-Over  Gate 2.25 

Intermediate  length  of  swinging  panel  take  prices  for  next 
longest  sections. 

For  Galvanized  Stalls  and  Parts  Add  30%  F.  O.  B.  Cars,  Fairfield,  Iowa 


FAIRFIELD,  IOWA 


Page  7 


Page 

131 

132 


135 


Fig. 
1286 
1171 


1185 


Stalls,  Stanchions,  Mangers,  Etc.— Continued 

Price 
Guard  Rails  for  pens  add  30c  per  foot  to  above  price. 
Louden  Improved  Alley  Gate: 

3  feet  by  2  feet  11  inches $    5.50 

3  feet  by  3  feet    5  inches 6.10 

3  feet  by  3  feet  11  inches 6.70 

Louden  Reinforced  Building  Columns: 

Prices  given  in  table  are  f.  o.  b.  Chicago,  111.,     or     Cam- 
bridge, Mass. 


Diam.  of  Column 

Length  of  Columns  in  Feet,  Including  Caps  and  Bases 

7'       7'-6" 

8' 

8'-6" 

9' 

9'-6" 

10' 

3"                                

$  2.85$  3.10 
3.30      3.40 

$  3.50 

3.80 

5.60 

8.55 

12.85 

12.80 

$  3.65 

4.10 

6.00 

9.00 

13.65 

13.25 

$  4.00 

4.50 

6.45 

9.60 

14.65 

14.80 

$  4.35 

5.00 

7.00 

9.90 

15.60 

16.15 

$  4.55 

Sl/i."                        

5.40 

4"                         

4.75 

6.85 

11.00 

11.00 

5.15 

7.80 

12.10 

11.85 

7.55 

4%"                   

10.30 

5"                       

16.60 

6"    

17.60     - 

In  ordering  be  sure  to  give  outside  diameters. 


136  Plate  15 


Louden  Dairy  Bam  Fittings, 
meter. 


Plate 

No. 
N-1 


N-2 


N- 


N-4 
N-5 
N-6 


N-7 


N-8 


N-9 


N-10 


N-11 


N-1 2 


Price 

Single  Piece  Elbmv: 

1%    $  -48 

1%    60 

Interlocking  "T"  Coupling: 

1%    ?  .48 

1%    60 

Cross  Coupling: 

ItV   ?  -44 

1%   48 

1%   60 

Inverted  "Y"  Coupling: 
l%xl%  $  .48 

Angle  "T"  Coupling: 
l?8xl%  $  .48 

Right  Angle  Corner  Coupling: 


All  sizes  given  for  outside  dia- 


Plate 

No. 
N-13 


Price 


1% 

178 


.72 
.85 


72-Degree  Comer  Coupling: 

1%    $  .88 

1%    96 

120-Degree  Comer  Coupling: 

1%    $  .88 

1%    96 

straight  Side  Partition  Coupling: 

1%    $  .88 

1%    96 

Angle  Side  Partition  Coupling 


1  = 

1% 


.96 
1.15 


Three-piece  Center  Partition 
Coupling: 

1%    $  .96 

1%    1.15 

Four-piece  Center  Partition 
Coupling: 

1  %   $1.08 

1%   1.20 


Five-piece  Center  Partition 
Coupling: 

1  %   $1.45 

1%    1.85 

N-14     "T"  Coupling  for  Large  Posts: 

l%x2%  $  .60 

l%x2%    or   3 85 

I%x3y2  96 

l%x4  1.15 

I%x4y2  1.35 

l%x5  1.50 

l%x5%  or  5% 1.70 

l%x6  1.90 

l%x6%  2.05 

l%x2%  72 

178x2%  or  3 92 

178X31/2  1.10 

178x4  1.30 

178x4%  1.45 

178x5  1.65 

178x5%  or  5% 1.85 

178x6  2.05 

178x6%  2.20 

N-15     Cross  Couplings  for  Large  Posts: 

l%x2%  $  .60 

l%x278  or  3 80 

I%x3y2  96 

l%x4  1.15 

I%x4y2  1.35 

l%x5  1.50 

l%x5%  or  5% 1.65 

l%x6  1.90 

l%x6%  2.10 

178x2%  72 

178x278  or  3 92 

178x3y2  1.10 

178x4  1.30 


For  Galvanized  Stalls  and  Parts  Add  30%  F.  O.  B.  Cars,  Fairfield,  Iowa 


Page  8 


THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Stalls,  Stanchions,  Mangers,  Etc. — Continued 


Plate 

No. 


N-16 
N-17 
N-18 


N-20 

N-21 

N-22 


N-23 

N-24 


N-25 
N-26 

N-27 


N-28 


Price 

178x41/2   $1-45 

178x5 1.65 

I%x5y2  or  5% 1-85 

178X6  2.00 

l%x6%  2.20 

Large  Floor  Flange $  .60 

Wall  Flange 48 

Wall  or  Flat  Post  Flange: 

1^   $  -40 

1%    44 

Interlocking  Stanchion   Holder: 

Either  size  specified. $  .20 

Collar,  either  size  specified 20 

Double  Pivot  for  Manger  Hinges: 

1%    ?  .36 

1%    40 

Single  Pivot  for  Manger  Hinge: 


24 
.32 

.12 
.14 
.16 

Center  Brace  Rod  Clamp 48 

End  Brace  Rod  Clamp 44 

Right  Angle  Side  Partition  Coup- 
lings for  Large  Posts  or  Col- 
umns with  Built-on  Clamps. 
Sixteen  sizes  as  follows: 


1%    

178   

Pressed  Steel  Clip: 

lA    

1%   

1%   


Small 
End 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

178 

178 

178 

1% 

178 

178 

178 

178 


Center 
.278  or  3.. 

..3%  • 

.4  

..41/2   

..5 


$1.15 

1.35 

1.50 

1.65 

1.90 

.51/2  or  5% 2.05 


..6   2.20 

.6%   2.45 

..278  or  3 1.15 

..31/2   1.45 

..4  1.65 

..4%   1.85 

..5  2.00 

..51/2  or  5% 2.20 

..6   2.45 

..6%   2.60 

Right  Angle  Center  Partition 
Couplings  for  Large  Posts  or 
Columns  with  Built-on 
Clamps.  Sixteen  sizes  as  fol- 
lows: 


Small 
End 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 


Center 
..278  or  3.. 

..3y2   

.4  

..472   


..$1..55 
,.  1.70 
.  1.90 
..  2.05 


Plate 
No. 


N-29 


N-30 


Price 


Small 
End 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

178 

178 

178 

178 

178 

178 

178 

178 


Center 

.5    $2.20 

-.5%  or  5% 2.45 


.6 

..6%   

..278  or  3 

..3V2  

.4  

..41/2   

..5  

..B%  or  5%. 

.6  

..6%   


2.60 
2.80 
1.65 
1.85 
2.00 
2.20 
2.35 
2.55 
2.80 
2.95 


Acute  Angle  Cross  Couplings  for 
Large  Clamps,  set  at  acute  an- 
gles to  the  "T"  heads  and  to 
themselves. 


Small 
End 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1% 

1%. 


Center  Price 

..278  or  3 $1.55 

..31/2  1.70 

.4  1.90 

..472  2.05 

.5  2.20 

1% 51/2  or  5% 2.45 


1%-. 
1%.. 

178.. 
178.. 
178- 
178.. 
178. 
178.. 
178.. 
178.. 


.6 

.6%  

-278  or  3 

-372  

.4  

..472     

-5  

..5Vz  or  5%., 

-.6 

..6%  


2.60 
2.80 
1.65 
1.85 
2.00 
2.20 
2.45 
2.65 
2.90 
3.10 


Right  Angle  Corner  Coupling  for 

Large  Posts  or  Columns  with 

Built-on    Clamps  for    1%     or 

178  0.  D.  Tubing: 

Small 

End      Large  End  Ihice 


1%- 
1%- 
1%- 
1%- 
1%- 
1%.. 
1%- 
1%- 

178- 
178- 
178- 
178- 
178- 
178- 
178- 
178- 


..2% 
..372 
..4  .. 
..4% 
.5  .. 
..572 
.6  .. 
-6% 
..278 
-3% 
..4  .. 
..472 
..5  .. 
-5% 


.6% 


or  3 $1.15 

1.35 

1.55 

1.70 

1.90 

or  5% 2.05 

2.20 

2.45 

1.30 

1.45 

1.65 

1.85 

2.00 

or  5% 2.20 

2.30 

2.55 


or  3.. 


For  Galvanized  Stalls  and  Parts  Add  30%  F.  O.  B.  Cars,  Fairfield,  Iowa 


FAIRFIELD,  IOWA  Page  9 


Stalls,  Stanchions,  Mangers,  Etc. — Continued 

Page      Fig.  Price 

139         1150     Louden  Grip  Clamps  (Illustrated  also  on  page  136.) 

No.  1—1  %xl %  $      .36 

No.  2—1  %xl-^   36 

No.  3—1  %xl A  32 

No.  4— 1  %xl  %  32 

No.  5—1  %  xl  A   32 

No.  6—1  %  xl  A  28 

No.  7— lAxlA   28 

No.  8— It^txItV   24 

Hook  Bolt,  Ax7    12 

Hook  Bolt,  t'iixT  in  lots  of  one  dozen  or  more 1.12 

Expansion  Bolts,   %x2   16 

Expansion  Bolts,  ■^x2    16 

Helical  Anchor  Bolt,  %x2 16 

Louden  Parallel  Clamps,  four  sizes  as  specified. .16 

Louden  Cupola,  No.  4  size,  galvanized,  20"  throat each     38.00 

Louden  Cupola,  No.  3  size,  galvanized,  24"  throat each     43.00 

Louden  Cupola,  No.  2  size,  galvanized,  27"  throat each     46.50 

Louden  Cupola,  No.  1  size,  galvanized,  30"  throat each     51.00 

Louden  Cupola,  No.  100  size,  galvanized,  36"  throat each     60.00 

Louden  Cupola  Lightning  Rod  Attachment,  add  $1.65  net  to 
above  prices. 
Lettering  Louden  Cupola  Base  in  Zinc  Letters  25c  net  per 

letter. 
Stenciling  name  in  black  letters,  $1.00  net. 

142         1268     Louden  Ventilator,  throat  diameter  12  inches,  galvanized each     13.00 

Louden  Ventilator,  throat  diameter  18  inches,  galvanized each     20.00 

Louden  Ventilator,  throat  diameter  24  inches,  galvanized each     33.00 

Louden  Ventilator,  throat  diameter  30  inches,  galvanized each     46.00 

146  988     Louden  Window  Ventilators  each       1.75 

147  1272     Louden  Manger  Drain,  complete 2.00 

1271     Louden  Gutter  Drain,  complete  with  brass  cover 5.00 

Louden  Gutter  Drain,  complete,  less  brass  cover 3.80 


139 

727 

727 

139 

879 

879 

139 

1073 

139 

1190 

141 

1269 

For  Galvanized  Stalls  and  Parts  Add  30%  F.  0.  B.  Cars,  Fairfield,  Iowa 


Page  10 THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 

Litter  Carriers,  Feed  Carriers,  Mercliandise  Carriers, 
Steel  Cranes,  Tracks,  Track  Fittings,  Etc. 

Price 

Louden  Emancipator  Litter  Carrier each  $35.00 

Louden  Standard  Litter  Carrier each  32.00 

Louden  Quick-out  Litter  Carrier each  26.00 

Louden  Self-Acting  Litter  Carrier each  17.50 

Steel  Track  for  Combination  Litter  Carrier per  foot  .15 

Track  Hangers  for  Combination  Litter  Carrier  Track per  doz.  1.95 

Two-way  Switch  for  Combination  Track each  4.00 

Three-way  Switch  for  Combination  Track each  4.50 

Connecting  Brace  for  Combination  Steel  and  Rod  Track 3.00 

End  Stop  for  Combination  Carrier 24 

Louden  Double  End  Feed  Carrier  each  35.00 

Louden  Double  End  Feed  Carrier,    Standard    Hoisting    Gear 

(not  illustrated )  each  32.00 

Louden  Double  End  Feed  Carrier  with  Adjustable  Chain  (not 

illustrated)    each  29.50 

Louden  Standard   Feed    Carrier _. each  29.00 

Louden  Single  End  Feed  Carrier,  Emancipator  Hoisting 

Gear   (not  illustrated ) each  31.00 

Louden  Single  End  Feed  Carrier  with  Adjustable  Chain each  26.00 

Louden  Wire  Track  Feed  Carrier  each  25.00 

Louden  Side  Delivery  Feed  Carrier   each  33.50 

Louden  Side  Delivery  Feed  Carrier  with   Standard  Hoisting 

Gear    (not  illustrated) 32.00 

Louden  Side  Delivery  Feed  Carrier  with  Adjustable  Chain each  29.50 

Louden  Feed  Truck  (floor)   20  bushels   each  27.00 

Louden  Feed  Truck   (floor)   25  bushels    (not    illustrated) each  32.00 

Louden  12-hook  Harness  Carrier each  15.00 

Louden     4-hook  Harness  Carrier. each  5.00 

Louden  Merchandise   Carrier each  6.50 

Louden  Double  Truck  Merchandise  Carrier each  16.60 

Perfect  Hoist  No.  33  (no  rope) each  5.00 

Barrel   Grabs each  2.00 

Louden  Platform  Milk  Can  Carrier  (steel  track) each  9.80 

Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier  (steel  track)  emancipator  Hoisting 

Gear  each  26.50 

Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier  with  Standard  Hoisting  Gear  (not 

illustrated)   each  23.00 

Louden  Wire  Track  Milk  Can  Carrier each  9.80 

Louden  Suspended  Milk  Can  Carrier  (wire  track) each  8.50 

Railroad  Milk  Can  Carrier  (wire  track). each  17.00 

Louden  Platform  Hay   Carrier each  15.00 

Louden  Double  Bead   Steel  Track per  100  feet  18.67 

Regular     Adjustable 

Link  Track  Hangers,     5-inch per  doz.  $1.50  $1.90 

Link  Track  Hangers,     7-inch per  doz.     1.70  2.10 

Link  Track  Hangers,     9-inch per  doz.     1.90  2.30 

Link  Track  Hangers,  11-inch per  doz.     2.10  2.50 

Link  Track  Hangers,  13-inch per  doz.     2.30  2.70 

Link  Track  Hangers,  15-inch per  doz.     2.50  2.90 

Link  Track  Hangers,  17-inch per  doz.     2.70  3.10 

Link  Track  Hangers,  19-inch per  doz.     2.90  3.30 

Link  Track  Hangers,  21-inch per  doz.     3.10  3.50 

Link  Track  Hangers,  23-inch per  doz.     3.30  3.70 

Link  Track  Hangers,  25-inch per  doz.     3.50  3.90 

Link  Track  Hangers,  27-inch per  doz.     3.60  4.00 

Link  Track  Hangers,  29-inch per  doz.     3.70  4.10 

Link  Track  Hangers,  31-inch per  doz.     3.80  4.20 

Link  Track  Hangers,  33-inch per  doz.     3.90  4.30 

Link  Track  Hangers,  35-inch per  doz.     4.00  4.40 

Link  Track  Hangers,  37-inch per  doz.     4.10  4.50 

175  424     Louden  Rafter    Brackets per  doz.         .66 

175  465     Louden  Ridge  Pole  Bracket per  doz.         .94 


Page 

Fig. 

157 

828 

161 

720 

162 

882 

163 

721 

165 

1287 

165 

1288 

166 

1297 

166 

1296 

166 

1290 

166 

167 

845 

804 

903 

168 

763 

904 

169 

886 

169 

887 

170 

1042 

972 

170 

1044 

171 

973 

1099 

171 

1276 

171 

1048 

172 

888 

172 

890 

172 

172 

173 

802 

173 

1045 

173 

766 

174 

767 

174 

1046 

174 

809 

175 

571 

175 

832 

803 

833 

834 

835 

836 

837 

838 

839 

840 

841 

842 

FAIRFIELD,  IOWA Page  11 


Litter  Carriers,  Feed  Carriers,  Etc. — Continued 

Page       Fig-.  Price 

175           675     Louden  Side  Rafter  Bracket per  doz.  $  1.12 

175           725     Louden  Beam    Bracket per  doz.  1.40 

175           726     Louden  Screw  Eye per  doz.  1.12 

175           523     Louden  End  Stop  Block each  .24 

178  1277     Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  24  feet  long each  19.50 

Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  30  feet  long each  23.40 

Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  36  feet  long each  27.20 

Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  42  feet  long each  31.10 

Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  48  feet  long each  35.00 

Track  Support  at  End  of  Barn  54  feet  long each  38.90 

(For  intermediate  lengths,  deduct  25c  per  foot  from  the  next 
longest  length  upon  which  price  is  mentioned.) 

179  1279     Steel  Post  for  Supporting  Track  in  Yard,    8-foot  post each  15.90 

Steel  Post  for  Supporting  Track  in  Yard,  10-foot  post each  18.35 

Steel  Post  for  Supporting  Track  in  Yard,  12-foot  post each  20.80 

Steel  Post  for  Supporting  Track  in  Yard,  14-foot  post each  23.20 

Steel  Post  for  Supporting  Track  in  Yard,  16-foot  post each  25.65 

181           736     Louden  Two-Way   Switch each  4.45 

181           795     Louden  Three-Way  Switch  each  5.20 

181  849     Louden  Cross   Track   Switch each  5.20 

182  1209     Louden  Track  Brace  for  Link  Hangers each  .60 

182  859     Louden  Track  Opener    each  4.00 

183  639     Louden  Bent  Section  for  Curve each  1.80 

183           633     Louden  Removable  Section,  2  feet  long each  1.00 

Louden  Removable  Section,  4  feet  long .». each  1.40 

185           974     Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  with  Track,  12  feet each  18.50 

185           976     Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  with  Track,  22  feet each  25.00 

185           978     Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  with  Track,  30  feet each  37.50 

185  980     Louden  Swinging  Steel  Crane  with  Track,  40  feet each  45.00 

For  Swinging  Crane  less  the  vertebra  hinge,  deduct 5.00 

(Prices  on  Steel  Cranes  include  track  and  hangers.) 

186  791     Fittings  for  Swinging  Section  at  Driveway .each  6.00 

187  No.  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  cut  to  length per  100  feet  4.50 

187                     No.  0000  Basic  Steel  Wire  in  unbroken  coils per  100  feet  4.00 

(Coils  average  450  feet) 

187           746     Louden  Wire  Track  Suspender each  2.40 

187           747     Louden  Tackle  Block  Suspender,  including  pulley each  2.80 

187  750     Louden  Angle  Iron  for  Wire  Track each  1.25 

188  745     Louden  Wire  Track  Anchor   (20   feet   or   under) ea<;h  3.20    , 

910     Louden  Wire  Tratfk  Anchor   (over  20  feet) each  3.65 

188  1207     Tension  Bolts,  %x30 each  .70 

Tension  Bolts,  %xl5 each  .45 

Tension  Bolts,  %x  8 each  .30 

Tension  Bolts,  78x30  each         .85 

189  892-893     Louden  Wire  Track  Switches each  2.65 

189  749     Louden  Cross  Track  Holder each  .20 

190  797     Louden  Wire  Track  Reverse  Curve each  4.10 

190           753     Louden  Spring  End  Stop each  1.20 

190           755     Anchor  Loop   each  .65 

190           756     Anchor  Yoke  each  .75 

190           757     Louden  Clamp    Loop per  doz.  1.62 

Hoisting  Gear  for  Emancipator  Carrier  with  trucks,  wheels, 

and  7-foot  chains each  21.10 

For  each  added  foot  of  lift,  add  per  foot 1.10 

Hoisting  Gear  for  Standard  Litter  Carrier  with  trucks,  wheels 

and  hoisting  cables each  16.65 

Galvanized  Box  or  Tub  for  Emancipator  and  Standard  Litter 

Carriers    each  20.00 

Double  End  Feed  Box each  20.00 

Trolley  for  Feed  Carrier,  adjustable  chains each  9.45 

Gear  for  Quick  Out  Litter     Carrier,     including     trucks     and 

wheels   each  15.00 

Gear  for  Self-Acting  Litter  Carrier,  including     trucks     and 

wheels   each  8.90 


Page  12 THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 

Litter  Carriers,  Feed  Carriers,  Etc. — Continued 

Price 

Box  or  Tub  for  Quick-Out  Litter  Carrier each  $15.00 

Box  or  Tub  for  Self  Acting  Litter  Carrier each  13.30 

Anchor  Bolt,  % -inch  by  6  feet each  1.65 

Trip  for  Self-Acting    Carrier each  .40 

Trip  for  Quick  Out  Litter  Carrier each  .55 

Removable   Splice    Clamp each  .30 

Vertebra    Hinge each  5.00 

Hoisting  Cables  for  Standard  Litter  Carrier each  .45 

1  Single  Truck  only   (%   set)   for  Litter   Carrier each  3.05 

1  Single  Truck  only   (%   set)  for  Wire  Track  Litter  Carrier 

each  1.65 


FAIRFIELD,  IOWA 


Page  13 


Page 

>   Fig. 

198 

1210 

1211 

1212 

1213 

1214 

1215 

1216 

1217 

1218 

201 

1225A 

201 

1225B 

201 

1225C 

201 

1226 

202 

1227 

202 

1227-1/2 

202 

1228 

203 

1229A 

203 

1229B 

203 

1229C 

203 

1230 

203 

1231 

204 

1232A 

204 

1232B 

204 

1232C 

206 

1234 

206 

1235 

206 

1236 

206 

1237 

206 

207  1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 

207  1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 
1251 

207    1238 

209  1242A 
1242A 
1242A 
1242A 


Horse  Stable  Equipment 

All  Horse  Stable  Equipment  f.  o.  b.  Chicago. 
Automatic  Hay  Racks  (Warren  Patent) 
Full  Back- 


Height 


..36 
.36 
.36 
.42 
.30 
.36 


inches 
inches 
inches 
inches 
inches 
inches 


(Pony) 30  inches 

(Sheep  or  Calf) 24  inches 

(Cow   Pen) 36  inches 


Width 
42  inches 
48  inches 
36  inches 
36  inches 
54  inches 
72  inches 
30  inches 
54  inches 
36  inches 


Open  Back 

Fig. 

1210  y2     ? 

i2iiy2 

I2i2y2 

1213  Vz 

12141/2 

1215% 
I2I61/2 

12171/2 


Price 

$  8.40 

8.80 

8.00 

8.40 

8.40 

13.60 

7.20 

8.40 

(Open  front  only 

for  cow  pen) 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  24  inches  wide  by  30  inches 

high  by  16  inches  deep 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  30  inches  wide  by  30  inches 

high  by  16  inches  deep 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  42  inches  wide  by  30  inches 

high  by  16  inches  deep .' 

Wrought  Iron  Comer  Hay  Rack 

Extended  Hay  Rack  for  Hay  Chute,  5  feet  high  by  33  inches  wide 
Extended  Hay  Rack  for  Hay  Chute,  5  feet  6  inches  high  by  42 

inches  wide  

Extended  Comer  Hay  Rack  for  Hay  Chute,  5  feet  6  inches  wide.... 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  24x30x16  inches 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  30x30x16  inches 

Wrought  Iron  Center  Hay  Rack,  42x30x16  inches 

Wrought  Iron  Comer  Hay   Raclc  

Cast  Iron  Corner  Hay  Rack 

Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Box  (Warren  patent)  20x12x7  inches 

Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Box  (Warren  patent)  20x13x9  inches 

Sanitary  Steel  Feed  Box  (Warren  patent)  14x12x7  inches 

Patent  Slow  Feed  Comer  Manger,  Japaned 

Roll  Front  Comer  Manger,  Japaned 

Flange  Front  Corner  Manger,  16x16x9%  inches,  Japaned 

Flange  Front  Corner  Manger,  17x17x10     inches,  Japaned 

Wall   Manger,   18x12x8     inches,   Japaned 

Wall  Manger,  24x14x11   inches,  Japaned 

Detachable  Mounting  Attachment  for  Wall  Manger  (not  illus- 
trated)    

Wire  Window  Guards  will  be  furnished  any  size  tout  in  quoting 
prices  no  guard  will  be  considered  as  containing  less  than 
8  feet  square. 

%-inch  mesh.  No.  14  wire, 
1  -inch  mesh.  No.  13  wire 
114 -inch  mesh,  No.  13  wire, 
1 14 -inch  mesh.  No.  12  wire. 
Wire  Window  Guards,  li^-inch  mesh.  No.  11  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1  %-inch  mesh,  No.  13  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1  %-inch  mesh.  No.  12  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1  %-inch  mesh.  No.  11  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1%-ineh  mesh.  No.  10  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1  %-inch  mesh.  No.  11  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1%-inch  mesh,  No.  10  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  1%-inch  mesh,  No.  9  wire,  per  square  foot 
Wire  Window  Guards,  2  -inch  mesh.  No. 
Wire  Window  Guards,  2  -inch  mesh.  No. 
Wire  Window  Guards,  2     -Inch  naesh.  No. 

Iron  Drinking  Fountain 

Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  2  feet  high  by  6  feet  long 

Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  2  feet  high  by  5  feet  long 

Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  2  feet  high  by  7  feet  long 

Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  special  length  to  order,  per  lineal  foot 


Wire  Window  Guards, 
Wire  Window  Guards, 
Wire  Window  Guards, 
Wire  Window  Guards, 


per  square  foot 
per  square  foot 
per  square  foot 
per  square  foot 


10  wire,  per  square  foot 
9  wire,  f)er  square  foot 
8  wire,  per  square  foot 


Price 
P  7.60 
8.00 
7.20 
7.60 
7.60 

12.00 
6.40 
7.60 

7.60 

7.20 

7.70 

8.65 

5.80 

13.00 

16.80 
9.40 
5.80 
6.25 
7.20 
4.60 
7.90 
5.60 
6.00 
5.00 
2.65 
2.65 
2.20 
2.40 
2.90 
5.55 

1.20 


.38 

.30 

.28 

.30 

.34 

.24 

.26 

.30 

.34 

.26 

.30 

.34 

.26 

.30 

.34 

46.80 

6.60 

5.40 

7.80 

1.32 


Page  14 


THE  LOUDEN  MACHINERY  COMPANY 


Horse  Stable  Equipment — Continued 

Page      Fig.  Price 

1242B     Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  any  length  to  order,  per  lineal  foot....  $  1.32 

210     1212C     Wrought  Steel  Stall  Guards,  any  length  to  order,  per  lineal  foot.  1.20 

210         1061     Louden  Salt    Rolls per  doz.  2.00 

210         1061     Louden  Salt  Roll  Holders  for  attaching  to  horizontal  timber. ..each  .48 

210         1061     Louden  Salt  Roll  Holders  for  attaching  to  vertical  timbers. ...each  .48 

210         1061     Louden     Salt  Roll  Holders  for  attaching  to  tubular  steel each  .48 

210  1260     Heavy  Harness  Hook  (13-inch)  Japaned per  doz.  10.80 

211  1245     Stall  Partition  Top  or  Base  Rail  with  groove  to  hold  2-inch 

board,  per  lineal  foot 1.10 

211     1245     Stall  Partition  Top  or  Base  Rail  with  groove  in  top    for     Stall 

Guard,  per  lineal  foot 1.30 

211         1246     Stall  Posts  (No.  1)  5-inch  diameter  by  5  feet  4  inches  high 25.72 

Additional  height  per  inch .20 

With  6-inch  foundation  base,  extra 4.25 

211         1246     Stall  Posts   (as  above)   with  foundation  'base  longer  than  6 

inches,  add  per  inch 20 

211         1246     Stall  Posts  (No.  2)  6%-inch  diameter  by  5  feet  4  inches  high..: 32.86 

Price  per  inch  of  additional  length 26 

211         1246     Stall  Posts  as  above,  with  Foundation  Base  to  go  down  in  ce- 
ment 6  inches,  add 5.72 

211         1246     Stall  Posts  as  above,  with  Foundation  Base  to  go  down  in  ce- 
ment more  than  6  inches,  add  per  inch .26 

211         1247     Heavy  Post  Socket  for  6-inch  wood  post,  3 1/2  inches  high 2.86 

211         1247     Heavy  Post  Socket  for  6-ineh  wood  post,  5%  inches  high 3.25 

211         1247     Heavy  Post  Socket  for  6-inch  wood  post,  8       inches  high 3.60 

211  1248     Socket  Plate  for  6-inch  post 2.20 

212  1261     Heavy  Carriage  Wash  Cess  Pool,  extra  long  spigot  for  calking,  ea  7.00 

212     1261A     Heavy  Carriage  Wash  Cess  Pool,  with  short  spigot each  5.80 

212         1262     Heavy  Stable  Cess  Pool,  15%  inches  square,  with  4-inch  outlet,  ea.  5.30 
212         1262     Heavy  Stable  Cess  Pool,  15%  inches  square,  with  extra  long 

spigot  each  6.35 

212         1262     Heavy  Stable  Cess  Pool,  12  inches  square,  4-inch  outlet each  4.80 

212         1263     Basin  Cess  Pool,    4x  4 each  .75 

212         1263     Basin  Cess  Pool,    6x  6 each  1.00 

212         1263     Basin  Cess  Pool,    8x  8 each  1.50 

212         1263     Basin  Cess  Pool,    9x  9 each  2.40 

212  1263     Basin  Cess  Pool,  12x12 each  3.20 

213  1250     No.  A  Self- Acting  Oats  Cleaner  (Higbie  Patent),  with  V2  bu. 

capacity  per  minute 40.00 

213         1250     No.  B  Self-Acting  Oats  Cleaner  (Higbie  Patent),  with  1  bu. 

capacity  per  minute 40.00 

213        1250     No.  C  Self-Acting  Oats  Cleaner  (Higbie  Patent),  with  2  bu. 

capacity  per  minute 40.00 


Page 


Page 

210 
210 
210 
210 
210 
210 
211 

211 

211 


211 
211 

211 

21] 

21: 
21 
21 
21 

21 
21 
21 
21 

2: 

2 
2 
2 
2 

2 
S 


i«A^^. 


Rand  McNallv  &  Co. 


